Fujitsu XG Series P3NK 4452 01ENZD User Manual

User’s Guide

Introduction

P3NK-4452-01ENZ0

Series

User's Guide

XG Series User’s Guide

Contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................................2

Organization and Usage of This Manual ..........................................................................................................16

Target Readers and Required Knowledge ............................................................................................................... 16

Areas Covered .......................................................................................................................................................... 16

Trademark Notification in This Manual .................................................................................................................. 17

How the Manuals for This Device Are Organized .................................................................................................. 18

End User's License Agreement .........................................................................................................................19

Chapter 1 Features and Functions......................................................................... 22

1.1

Hardware Specifications ........................................................................................................................23

Switch Specifications ............................................................................................................................... 23

Option ....................................................................................................................................................... 25

10/100/1000BASE-T Port Specifications ................................................................................................ 28

USB Port Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 29

Console Port Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 29

1.2

Software Specifications .........................................................................................................................30

1.2.1

1.2.2

1.2.3

Software Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 30

Initial Values ............................................................................................................................................ 32

System Maximum Values ........................................................................................................................ 34

Chapter 2 Using the CLI .......................................................................................... 37

2.1

Overview of the CLI ..............................................................................................................................38

2.1.1

2.1.2

Operating Environment for the CLI ......................................................................................................... 38

Command Modes and Mode Switching ................................................................................................... 39

2.1.2.1 Command Operation Procedure ............................................................................................... 39

2.1.2.2 Executable commands .............................................................................................................. 42

2.2

Using the CLI .........................................................................................................................................43

2.2.1

Using the Shell Function .......................................................................................................................... 43

2.2.1.1 Command execution function .................................................................................................. 43

2.2.1.2 Entry editing function .............................................................................................................. 43

2.2.1.3 Command name autocomplete function .................................................................................. 44

2.2.1.4 Command argument autocomplete function ............................................................................ 46

2.2.1.5 Abbreviated command entry function ...................................................................................... 46

2.2.1.6 Command alias function .......................................................................................................... 46

2.2.1.7 Configuration hierarchy function ............................................................................................. 47

2.2.1.8 Time of command execution display function ......................................................................... 48

2.2.1.9 Command history function ....................................................................................................... 48

2.2.1.10 List of shell key bindings ......................................................................................................... 52

Error Messages Common to All Commands ........................................................................................... 53

Characters that can be entered ................................................................................................................. 54

2.2.2

2.2.3

Chapter 3 Installation .............................................................................................. 55

3.1

Workflow for Initial Setup of the Device ..............................................................................................56

3.1.1

3.1.2

3.1.3

Configure LAN Interface ......................................................................................................................... 57

Telnet Connection via the LAN Interface (Optional) .............................................................................. 57

SNMP Configuration (Optional) .............................................................................................................. 58

XG Series User’s Guide

Contents

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuratio n ........................................... 59

4.1

Basic Switch Functions ..........................................................................................................................61

Switching Mode (XG2600) ...................................................................................................................... 61

MAC Address Table Management .......................................................................................................... 62

Jumbo Frame Support .............................................................................................................................. 63

Flow Control ............................................................................................................................................ 63

Storm Control ........................................................................................................................................... 63

Egress Rate Control (XG2600 Only) ....................................................................................................... 64

4.2

4.3

4.4

Port Mirroring ........................................................................................................................................65

Link Down Relay ...................................................................................................................................66

Link Aggregation ...................................................................................................................................67

Configuring Link Aggregation ................................................................................................................. 68

Frame Distribution Methods in Link Aggregation .................................................................................. 69

The Number of Ports That Require Linkup ............................................................................................. 70

Notes on Link Aggregation ...................................................................................................................... 70

4.5

4.6

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) ...............................................................................................................71

4.5.1

4.5.2

4.5.3

Port Roles Based on Spanning Tree ......................................................................................................... 72

Spanning Tree Protocol Port States ......................................................................................................... 72

Configuring Spanning Tree ...................................................................................................................... 73

VLAN ....................................................................................................................................................74

4.6.1

4.6.2

Port-Based VLAN .................................................................................................................................... 74

Tag-Based (IEEE802.1Q) VLAN ............................................................................................................ 75

4.7

4.8

Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................................76

IGMP Snooping .....................................................................................................................................77

Registering Group Members .................................................................................................................... 78

Removing Group Members ...................................................................................................................... 79

Managing Group Members ...................................................................................................................... 80

IGMP Querier .......................................................................................................................................... 81

Configuring IGMP Snooping ................................................................................................................... 82

4.9

Network Management ............................................................................................................................83

4.9.1

4.9.2

4.9.3

Traffic Statistics ....................................................................................................................................... 83

SNMP Agent ............................................................................................................................................ 83

RMON ...................................................................................................................................................... 84

Chapter 5 Command Reference ............................................................................. 85

5.1

Port Information Settings .......................................................................................................................89

5.1.1

Ethernet Common Information ................................................................................................................ 90

5.1.1.1 forwardingmode ....................................................................................................................... 90

5.1.1.2 ether use ................................................................................................................................... 91

5.1.1.3 ether media ............................................................................................................................... 92

5.1.1.4 ether mode ................................................................................................................................ 93

5.1.1.5 ether duplex .............................................................................................................................. 94

5.1.1.6 ether mdi .................................................................................................................................. 95

5.1.1.7 ether flowctl ............................................................................................................................. 96

5.1.1.8 ether type .................................................................................................................................. 97

5.1.1.9 ether vlan tag .......................................................................................................................... 100

5.1.1.10 ether vlan untag ...................................................................................................................... 101

5.1.1.11 ether egress permission .......................................................................................................... 102

5.1.1.12 ether loopdetect use ................................................................................................................ 102

5.1.1.13 ether loopdetect frame ............................................................................................................ 103

5.1.1.14 ether startup ............................................................................................................................ 104

XG Series User’s Guide

Contents

5.1.1.15 ether recovery limit ................................................................................................................ 105

5.1.1.16 ether downrelay port .............................................................................................................. 106

5.1.1.17 ether downrelay recovery mode ............................................................................................. 107

5.1.1.18 ether downrelay recovery cause ............................................................................................. 108

5.1.1.19 ether description ..................................................................................................................... 109

5.1.1.20 linkaggregation algorithm ...................................................................................................... 110

5.1.1.21 linkaggregation mode ............................................................................................................. 111

5.1.1.22 linkaggregation type ............................................................................................................... 112

5.1.1.23 linkaggregation collecting minimum ..................................................................................... 113

5.1.1.24 linkaggregation icmpwatch address ....................................................................................... 114

5.1.1.25 linkaggregation icmpwatch interval ....................................................................................... 115

5.1.1.26 linkaggregation downrelay port ............................................................................................. 116

5.1.1.27 linkaggregation downrelay recovery mode ............................................................................ 117

5.1.1.28 linkaggregation downrelay recovery cause ............................................................................ 118

5.1.1.29 linkaggregation description .................................................................................................... 119

5.1.1.30 backup mode .......................................................................................................................... 120

5.1.1.31 backup standby ....................................................................................................................... 121

MAC Information .................................................................................................................................. 122

5.1.2.1 ether mac storm ...................................................................................................................... 122

STP Information ..................................................................................................................................... 124

5.1.3.1 ether stp use ............................................................................................................................ 124

5.1.3.2 ether stp domain cost .............................................................................................................. 125

5.1.3.3 ether stp domain priority ........................................................................................................ 126

5.1.3.4 ether stp force-version ............................................................................................................ 127

LLDP Information .................................................................................................................................. 128

5.1.4.1 ether lldp mode ....................................................................................................................... 128

5.1.4.2 ether lldp info ......................................................................................................................... 129

5.1.4.3 ether lldp vlan ......................................................................................................................... 131

5.1.4.4 ether lldp notification ............................................................................................................. 131

Filter Information ................................................................................................................................... 132

5.1.5.1 ether macfilter ........................................................................................................................ 132

5.1.5.2 ether macfilter move .............................................................................................................. 136

QoS Information .................................................................................................................................... 137

5.1.6.1 ether qos aclmap ..................................................................................................................... 137

5.1.6.2 ether qos aclmap move ........................................................................................................... 142

5.1.6.3 ether qos priority .................................................................................................................... 143

5.1.6.4 ether qos mode ....................................................................................................................... 144

5.1.6.5 ether qos prioritymap ............................................................................................................. 145

LACP Information ................................................................................................................................. 146

5.1.7.1 ether lacp port-priority ........................................................................................................... 146

ether L3 Monitor Information ................................................................................................................ 147

5.1.8.1 ether icmpwatch address ........................................................................................................ 147

5.1.8.2 ether icmpwatch interval ........................................................................................................ 148

ether SNMP Information ........................................................................................................................ 149

5.1.9.1 ether snmp trap linkdown ....................................................................................................... 149

5.1.9.2 ether snmp trap linkup ............................................................................................................ 150

5.1.10 ether output rate control information ..................................................................................................... 151

5.1.10.1 ether ratecontrol ..................................................................................................................... 151

LACP Information Settings .................................................................................................................152

5.2

5.2.1

LACP Information ................................................................................................................................. 152

5.2.1.1 lacp system-priority ................................................................................................................ 152

5.2.1.2 lacp bpdu ................................................................................................................................ 153

XG Series User’s Guide

Contents

5.3

VLAN Information Settings ................................................................................................................154

VLAN Common Information ................................................................................................................. 154

5.3.1.1 vlan name ............................................................................................................................... 154

5.3.1.2 vlan protocol .......................................................................................................................... 155

5.3.1.3 vlan forward ........................................................................................................................... 158

5.3.1.4 vlan description ...................................................................................................................... 159

IGMP Snooping Information ................................................................................................................. 160

5.3.2.1 vlan igmpsnoop router ........................................................................................................... 160

5.3.2.2 vlan igmpsnoop querier .......................................................................................................... 161

5.3.2.3 vlan igmpsnoop source ........................................................................................................... 162

5.3.2.4 vlan igmpsnoop proxy ............................................................................................................ 163

Filter Information ................................................................................................................................... 164

5.3.3.1 vlan macfilter ......................................................................................................................... 164

5.3.3.2 vlan macfilter move ............................................................................................................... 169

5.3.3.3 vlan ip6filter ........................................................................................................................... 170

5.3.3.4 vlan ip6filter move ................................................................................................................. 172

QoS Information .................................................................................................................................... 173

5.3.4.1 vlan qos aclmap ...................................................................................................................... 173

5.3.4.2 vlan ip6qos aclmap ................................................................................................................. 178

5.3.4.3 vlan ip6qos aclmap move ....................................................................................................... 180

5.4

5.5

MAC Information ................................................................................................................................181

5.4.1

MAC Information .................................................................................................................................. 181

5.4.1.1 mac learning ........................................................................................................................... 181

5.4.1.2 mac age .................................................................................................................................. 182

LAN Information Settings ...................................................................................................................183

5.5.1

5.5.1.1 lan description ........................................................................................................................ 183

5.5.1.2 lan ip address .......................................................................................................................... 184

5.5.1.3 lan ip route ............................................................................................................................. 185

5.5.1.4 lan ip filter .............................................................................................................................. 186

5.5.1.5 lan ip filter move .................................................................................................................... 191

5.5.1.6 lan ip dscp .............................................................................................................................. 192

5.5.1.7 lan ip dscp move .................................................................................................................... 196

5.5.1.8 lan ip arp static ....................................................................................................................... 197

5.5.2.1 lan ip6 use .............................................................................................................................. 198

5.5.2.2 lan ip6 ifid .............................................................................................................................. 198

5.5.2.3 lan ip6 address ........................................................................................................................ 199

5.5.2.4 lan ip6 ra mode ....................................................................................................................... 199

5.5.2.5 lan ip6 route ........................................................................................................................... 200

5.5.2.6 lan ip6 filter ............................................................................................................................ 201

5.5.2.7 lan ip6 filter move .................................................................................................................. 203

5.5.2.8 lan ip6 dscp ............................................................................................................................ 204

5.5.2.9 lan ip6 dscp move .................................................................................................................. 206

5.5.3.1 lan vlan ................................................................................................................................... 207

5.5.4.1 lan llmnr use ........................................................................................................................... 208

Management LAN port IPv4 Related Information ................................................................................ 209

5.5.5.1 oob ip address ......................................................................................................................... 209

5.5.5.2 oob ip route ............................................................................................................................ 210

XG Series User’s Guide

Contents

5.5.6

Management LAN port IPv6 Related Information ................................................................................ 211

5.5.6.1 oob ip6 use ............................................................................................................................. 211

5.5.6.2 oob ip6 ifid ............................................................................................................................. 211

5.5.6.3 oob ip6 address ....................................................................................................................... 212

5.5.6.4 oob ip6 ra mode ...................................................................................................................... 212

5.5.6.5 oob ip6 route .......................................................................................................................... 213

Management LAN port LLMNR Related Information .......................................................................... 214

5.5.7.1 oob llmnr use .......................................................................................................................... 214

5.6.1.1 ip arp age ................................................................................................................................ 215

QoS Information Settings ....................................................................................................................216

5.7.1

QoS Information .................................................................................................................................... 216

5.7.1.1 qos cosmap ............................................................................................................................. 216

STP Information ..................................................................................................................................217

5.8.1

STP Information ..................................................................................................................................... 217

5.8.1.1 stp mode ................................................................................................................................. 217

5.8.1.2 stp age .................................................................................................................................... 218

5.8.1.3 stp delay ................................................................................................................................. 219

5.8.1.4 stp hello .................................................................................................................................. 220

5.8.1.5 stp bpdu .................................................................................................................................. 221

5.8.1.6 stp domain priority ................................................................................................................. 222

5.8.1.7 stp config_id ........................................................................................................................... 223

5.8.1.8 stp domain vlan ...................................................................................................................... 223

5.8.1.9 stp max-hops .......................................................................................................................... 224

5.9

LLDP Information Settings .................................................................................................................225

5.9.1

LLDP Information .................................................................................................................................. 225

5.9.1.1 lldp send interval .................................................................................................................... 225

5.9.1.2 lldp send hold ......................................................................................................................... 226

5.9.1.3 lldp reinit delay ...................................................................................................................... 226

5.9.1.4 lldp notification interval ......................................................................................................... 227

5.10 IGMP Snooping Information Settings .................................................................................................228

5.10.1 IGMP Snooping Information ................................................................................................................. 228

5.10.1.1 igmpsnoop use ........................................................................................................................ 228

5.10.1.2 igmpsnoop localgroup ............................................................................................................ 228

5.10.1.3 igmpsnoop unknown flooding ............................................................................................... 229

5.11 Loop Detection Information Settings ..................................................................................................230

5.11.1 Loop Detection Information ................................................................................................................... 230

5.11.1.1 loopdetect use ......................................................................................................................... 230

5.11.1.2 loopdetect portdisable ............................................................................................................ 231

5.11.1.3 loopdetect portblock ............................................................................................................... 231

5.11.1.4 loopdetect interval .................................................................................................................. 232

5.11.1.5 loopdetect recovery ................................................................................................................ 232

5.12 ACL Information Settings ...................................................................................................................233

5.12.1 ACL Information .................................................................................................................................... 233

5.12.1.1 acl mac ................................................................................................................................... 233

5.12.1.2 acl vlan ................................................................................................................................... 234

5.12.1.3 acl ip ....................................................................................................................................... 235

5.12.1.4 acl ip6 ..................................................................................................................................... 237

5.12.1.5 acl tcp ..................................................................................................................................... 238

5.12.1.6 acl udp .................................................................................................................................... 239

5.12.1.7 acl icmp .................................................................................................................................. 240

5.12.1.8 acl description ........................................................................................................................ 241

XG Series User’s Guide

Contents

5.13 AAA Information Settings ...................................................................................................................242

5.13.1 Group ID Information ............................................................................................................................ 243

5.13.1.1 aaa name ................................................................................................................................. 243

5.13.2 AAA User Information .......................................................................................................................... 244

5.13.2.1 aaa user id ............................................................................................................................... 244

5.13.2.2 aaa user password ................................................................................................................... 245

5.13.2.3 aaa user user-role ................................................................................................................... 246

5.13.3 RADIUS Information Settings ............................................................................................................... 247

5.13.3.1 aaa radius service ................................................................................................................... 247

5.13.3.2 aaa radius auth source ............................................................................................................ 248

5.13.3.3 aaa radius auth message-authenticator ................................................................................... 249

5.13.3.4 aaa radius client server-info auth secret ................................................................................. 250

5.13.3.5 aaa radius client server-info auth address .............................................................................. 251

5.13.3.6 aaa radius client server-info auth port .................................................................................... 252

5.13.3.7 aaa radius client server-info auth deadtime ............................................................................ 253

5.13.3.8 aaa radius client server-info auth priority .............................................................................. 254

5.13.3.9 aaa radius client server-info auth source ................................................................................ 255

5.13.3.10 aaa radius client retry ............................................................................................................. 256

5.13.3.11 aaa radius client security ........................................................................................................ 256

5.14 Password Information ..........................................................................................................................257

5.14.1 password format ..................................................................................................................................... 257

5.14.2 password admin set ................................................................................................................................ 258

5.14.3 password user set ................................................................................................................................... 260

5.14.4 password aaa .......................................................................................................................................... 261

5.14.5 password authtype .................................................................................................................................. 261

5.15 Device Information Settings ................................................................................................................262

5.15.1 SNMP Information ................................................................................................................................. 262

5.15.1.1 snmp service ........................................................................................................................... 262

5.15.1.2 snmp agent contact ................................................................................................................. 262

5.15.1.3 snmp agent sysname ............................................................................................................... 263

5.15.1.4 snmp agent location ............................................................................................................... 263

5.15.1.5 snmp agent address ................................................................................................................ 264

5.15.1.6 snmp agent engineid ............................................................................................................... 264

5.15.1.7 snmp manager ........................................................................................................................ 265

5.15.1.8 snmp trap coldstart ................................................................................................................. 266

5.15.1.9 snmp trap linkdown ................................................................................................................ 266

5.15.1.10 snmp trap linkup ..................................................................................................................... 267

5.15.1.11 snmp trap authfail ................................................................................................................... 267

5.15.1.12 snmp trap newroot .................................................................................................................. 268

5.15.1.13 snmp trap topologychange ..................................................................................................... 268

5.15.1.14 snmp trap noserror ................................................................................................................. 269

5.15.1.15 snmp trap lldpremtableschange .............................................................................................. 269

5.15.1.16 snmp rmon .............................................................................................................................. 270

5.15.1.17 snmp user name ...................................................................................................................... 270

5.15.1.18 snmp user address .................................................................................................................. 271

5.15.1.19 snmp user notification ............................................................................................................ 272

5.15.1.20 snmp user auth ....................................................................................................................... 273

5.15.1.21 snmp user priv ........................................................................................................................ 274

5.15.1.22 snmp user write ...................................................................................................................... 275

5.15.1.23 snmp user read ....................................................................................................................... 276

5.15.1.24 snmp user notify ..................................................................................................................... 277

5.15.1.25 snmp view subtree .................................................................................................................. 278

XG Series User’s Guide

Contents

5.15.2 System Log Information ........................................................................................................................ 280

5.15.2.1 syslog server address .............................................................................................................. 280

5.15.2.2 syslog server pri ..................................................................................................................... 281

5.15.2.3 syslog pri ................................................................................................................................ 282

5.15.2.4 syslog facility ......................................................................................................................... 282

5.15.2.5 syslog security ........................................................................................................................ 283

5.15.2.6 syslog dupcut .......................................................................................................................... 283

5.15.2.7 syslog command-logging ....................................................................................................... 284

5.15.2.8 syslog header .......................................................................................................................... 284

5.15.2.9 syslog source address ............................................................................................................. 285

5.15.3

Automatic Time Setting Information .................................................................................................... 286

5.15.3.1 time auto server ...................................................................................................................... 286

5.15.3.2 time auto interval ................................................................................................................... 287

5.15.3.3 time zone ................................................................................................................................ 287

5.15.3.4 time summer-time .................................................................................................................. 288

5.15.4 ProxyDNS Information .......................................................................................................................... 290

5.15.4.1 proxydns domain .................................................................................................................... 290

5.15.4.2 proxydns domain move .......................................................................................................... 292

5.15.4.3 proxydns address .................................................................................................................... 293

5.15.4.4 proxydns address move .......................................................................................................... 294

5.15.4.5 proxydns unicode ................................................................................................................... 294

5.15.5 Host Database Information .................................................................................................................... 295

5.15.5.1 host name ............................................................................................................................... 295

5.15.5.2 host ip address ........................................................................................................................ 295

5.15.5.3 host ip6 address ...................................................................................................................... 296

5.15.6 Schedule Information ............................................................................................................................. 297

5.15.6.1 schedule at .............................................................................................................................. 297

5.15.6.2 schedule syslog ...................................................................................................................... 298

5.15.7 Filter/QoS Resource Information ........................................................................................................... 299

5.15.7.1 resource filter distribution ...................................................................................................... 299

5.15.8 Other ....................................................................................................................................................... 300

5.15.8.1 addact ..................................................................................................................................... 300

5.15.8.2 watchdog service .................................................................................................................... 301

5.15.8.3 consoleinfo ............................................................................................................................. 301

5.15.8.4 telnetinfo ................................................................................................................................ 302

5.15.8.5 mflag ...................................................................................................................................... 302

5.15.8.6 dumpswitch ............................................................................................................................ 303

5.15.8.7 sysname .................................................................................................................................. 303

5.15.8.8 serverinfo ftp .......................................................................................................................... 304

5.15.8.9 serverinfo ftp ip6 .................................................................................................................... 304

5.15.8.10 serverinfo ftp filter ................................................................................................................. 305

5.15.8.11 serverinfo ftp filter move ....................................................................................................... 306

5.15.8.12 serverinfo ftp filter default ..................................................................................................... 306

5.15.8.13 serverinfo sftp ........................................................................................................................ 307

5.15.8.14 serverinfo sftp ip6 .................................................................................................................. 308

5.15.8.15 serverinfo telnet ...................................................................................................................... 308

5.15.8.16 serverinfo telnet ip6 ............................................................................................................... 309

5.15.8.17 serverinfo telnet filter ............................................................................................................. 309

5.15.8.18 serverinfo telnet filter move ................................................................................................... 310

5.15.8.19 serverinfo telnet filter default ................................................................................................. 310

5.15.8.20 serverinfo ssh ......................................................................................................................... 311

5.15.8.21 serverinfo ssh ip6 ................................................................................................................... 312

5.15.8.22 serverinfo ssh filter ................................................................................................................. 313

5.15.8.23 serverinfo ssh filter move ....................................................................................................... 314

XG Series User’s Guide

Contents

5.15.8.24 serverinfo ssh filter default .................................................................................................... 314

5.15.8.25 serverinfo http ........................................................................................................................ 315

5.15.8.26 serverinfo http ip6 .................................................................................................................. 315

5.15.8.27 serverinfo http filter ............................................................................................................... 316

5.15.8.28 serverinfo http filter move ...................................................................................................... 317

5.15.8.29 serverinfo http filter default ................................................................................................... 317

5.15.8.30 serverinfo dns ......................................................................................................................... 318

5.15.8.31 serverinfo dns ip6 ................................................................................................................... 318

5.15.8.32 serverinfo dns filter ................................................................................................................ 319

5.15.8.33 serverinfo dns filter move ...................................................................................................... 320

5.15.8.34 serverinfo dns filter default .................................................................................................... 320

5.15.8.35 serverinfo sntp ........................................................................................................................ 321

5.15.8.36 serverinfo sntp ip6 .................................................................................................................. 321

5.15.8.37 serverinfo sntp filter ............................................................................................................... 322

5.15.8.38 serverinfo sntp filter move ..................................................................................................... 323

5.15.8.39 serverinfo sntp filter default ................................................................................................... 323

5.15.8.40 serverinfo time ip tcp ............................................................................................................. 324

5.15.8.41 serverinfo time ip6 tcp ........................................................................................................... 324

5.15.8.42 serverinfo time ip udp ............................................................................................................ 325

5.15.8.43 serverinfo time ip6 udp .......................................................................................................... 325

5.15.8.44 serverinfo time filter ............................................................................................................... 326

5.15.8.45 serverinfo time filter move ..................................................................................................... 326

5.15.8.46 serverinfo time filter default .................................................................................................. 327

5.16 Login banner Settings ..........................................................................................................................328

5.16.1 Login banner Information ...................................................................................................................... 328

5.16.1.1 login banner telnet .................................................................................................................. 328

5.16.1.2 login banner ftp ...................................................................................................................... 328

5.16.1.3 login banner ssh ..................................................................................................................... 329

5.16.1.4 login banner description ......................................................................................................... 329

5.17 Mode and Terminal Operation Commands .........................................................................................330

5.17.1 Mode Operation Commands .................................................................................................................. 330

5.17.1.1 admin ...................................................................................................................................... 330

5.17.1.2 su ............................................................................................................................................ 331

5.17.1.3 exit .......................................................................................................................................... 332

5.17.1.4 configure ................................................................................................................................ 333

5.17.1.5 end .......................................................................................................................................... 334

5.17.1.6 quit ......................................................................................................................................... 334

5.17.1.7 top ........................................................................................................................................... 335

5.17.1.8 up ............................................................................................................................................ 335

5.17.1.9 ! .............................................................................................................................................. 336

5.17.2 Terminal Operation Commands ............................................................................................................. 337

5.17.2.1 terminal pager ........................................................................................................................ 337

5.17.2.2 terminal window .................................................................................................................... 340

5.17.2.3 terminal charset ...................................................................................................................... 340

5.17.2.4 terminal prompt ...................................................................................................................... 341

5.17.2.5 terminal timestamp ................................................................................................................. 342

5.17.2.6 terminal bell ........................................................................................................................... 343

5.17.2.7 terminal logging ..................................................................................................................... 344

5.17.2.8 show terminal ......................................................................................................................... 345

5.17.3 Command Execution History ................................................................................................................. 346

5.17.3.1 show logging command ......................................................................................................... 346

5.17.3.2 clear logging command .......................................................................................................... 348

XG Series User’s Guide

Contents

5.17.4 Command Alias ...................................................................................................................................... 349

5.17.4.1 alias ........................................................................................................................................ 349

5.17.4.2 show alias ............................................................................................................................... 350

5.17.4.3 clear alias ................................................................................................................................ 350

5.17.5 Command Output ................................................................................................................................... 351

5.17.5.1 more ....................................................................................................................................... 351

5.17.5.2 tail ........................................................................................................................................... 352

5.18 System Operations and Display Commands ........................................................................................353

5.18.1 System Operations and Display Commands .......................................................................................... 353

5.18.1.1 show system information ....................................................................................................... 353

5.18.1.2 show system status ................................................................................................................. 354

5.18.1.3 show tech-support .................................................................................................................. 361

5.18.1.4 show logging error ................................................................................................................. 361

5.18.1.5 clear logging error .................................................................................................................. 365

5.18.1.6 show logging syslog ............................................................................................................... 365

5.18.1.7 clear logging syslog ............................................................................................................... 366

5.18.1.8 clear statistics ......................................................................................................................... 366

5.18.1.9 show date ................................................................................................................................ 367

5.18.1.10 date ......................................................................................................................................... 367

5.18.1.11 rdate ........................................................................................................................................ 368

5.18.1.12 reset ........................................................................................................................................ 368

5.19 Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands ..................................................................369

5.19.1 Configuration Display Commands ......................................................................................................... 369

5.19.1.1 show candidate-config ........................................................................................................... 369

5.19.1.2 show running-config .............................................................................................................. 370

5.19.1.3 show startup-config ................................................................................................................ 370

5.19.1.4 diff .......................................................................................................................................... 371

5.19.2 Configuration Delete Commands ........................................................................................................... 372

5.19.2.1 delete ...................................................................................................................................... 372

5.19.3 Configuration Operation Commands ..................................................................................................... 373

5.19.3.1 load ......................................................................................................................................... 373

5.19.3.2 save ......................................................................................................................................... 374

5.19.3.3 commit ................................................................................................................................... 375

5.19.3.4 commit try time ...................................................................................................................... 376

5.19.3.5 commit try cancel ................................................................................................................... 377

5.19.3.6 discard .................................................................................................................................... 378

5.19.4 File Operation Commands ..................................................................................................................... 379

5.19.4.1 dir ........................................................................................................................................... 379

5.19.4.2 copy ........................................................................................................................................ 380

5.19.4.3 remove .................................................................................................................................... 381

5.19.4.4 rename .................................................................................................................................... 381

5.19.4.5 format ..................................................................................................................................... 382

5.20 Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands ....................383

5.20.1 Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ........................................................ 383

5.20.1.1 show ether .............................................................................................................................. 383

5.20.1.2 show ether brief ...................................................................................................................... 387

5.20.1.3 show ether statistics ............................................................................................................... 389

5.20.1.4 show ether media-info ............................................................................................................ 408

5.20.1.5 show ether utilization ............................................................................................................. 410

5.20.1.6 show ether queue .................................................................................................................... 412

5.20.2 Ethernet Counter, Log, and Statistics Clear Commands ........................................................................ 414

5.20.2.1 clear ether statistics ................................................................................................................ 414

XG Series User’s Guide

Contents

5.21 USB connection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands ........415

5.21.1 USB connection Counter, Log, and Statistics Clear Commands ........................................................... 415

5.21.1.1 show usb hcd status ................................................................................................................ 415

5.21.1.2 show usb storage status .......................................................................................................... 416

5.22 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands ........................419

5.22.1 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ........................................................... 419

5.22.1.1 show lacp ................................................................................................................................ 419

5.22.1.2 show lacp statistics ................................................................................................................. 421

5.22.2 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands ............................................................... 422

5.22.2.1 clear lacp statistics ................................................................................................................. 422

5.23 M1 port Status Display command .......................................................................................................423

5.23.1 M1 port Status Display command .......................................................................................................... 423

5.23.1.1 show oob ................................................................................................................................ 423

5.24 Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands .....................................................424

5.24.1 Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ....................................................... 424

5.24.1.1 show interface ........................................................................................................................ 424

5.24.1.2 show interface brief ................................................................................................................ 426

5.24.1.3 show interface summary ........................................................................................................ 427

5.25 ARP Entry Display and Clear Operation Commands ..........................................................................428

5.25.1 ARP Entry Display Commands ............................................................................................................. 428

5.25.1.1 show arp ................................................................................................................................. 428

5.25.2 ARP Entry Clear Commands ................................................................................................................. 430

5.25.2.1 clear arp .................................................................................................................................. 430

5.26 Routing Table Entry Display Commands ............................................................................................431

5.26.1 IPv4 Routing Table Entry Display Commands ...................................................................................... 431

5.26.1.1 show ip route .......................................................................................................................... 431

5.26.1.2 show ip route summary .......................................................................................................... 433

5.26.1.3 show ip route kernel ............................................................................................................... 434

5.26.2 IPv6 Routing Table Entry Display Commands ...................................................................................... 436

5.26.2.1 show ipv6 route ...................................................................................................................... 436

5.26.2.2 show ipv6 route summary ...................................................................................................... 438

5.26.2.3 show ipv6 route kernel ........................................................................................................... 439

5.26.2.4 show ipv6 ra default-router-list .............................................................................................. 441

5.26.2.5 show ipv6 ra prefix-list .......................................................................................................... 442

5.27 Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands .................................................................443

5.27.1 IPv4 Packet Statistics Display Commands ............................................................................................ 443

5.27.1.1 show ip traffic ........................................................................................................................ 443

5.27.2 IPv4 Packet Statistics Clear Commands ................................................................................................ 446

5.27.2.1 clear ip traffic ......................................................................................................................... 446

5.27.3 IPv6 Packet Statistics Display Commands ............................................................................................ 447

5.27.3.1 show ipv6 traffic .................................................................................................................... 447

5.27.4 IPv6 Packet Statistics Clear Commands ................................................................................................ 450

5.27.4.1 clear ipv6 traffic ..................................................................................................................... 450

5.28 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands .......................451

5.28.1 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ........................................................... 451

5.28.1.1 show bridge ............................................................................................................................ 451

5.28.2 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands ............................................................... 453

5.28.2.1 clear bridge ............................................................................................................................. 453

5.28.3 Spanning Tree Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands .............................................. 454

5.28.3.1 show spanning-tree ................................................................................................................ 454

5.28.3.2 show spanning-tree instance .................................................................................................. 467

5.28.4 Spanning Tree Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands .................................................. 479

5.28.4.1 clear spanning-tree statistics .................................................................................................. 479

XG Series User’s Guide

Contents

5.29 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands ........................480

5.29.1 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ............................................................ 480

5.29.1.1 show lldp ................................................................................................................................ 480

5.29.1.2 show lldp summary ................................................................................................................ 486

5.29.1.3 show lldp neighbors ............................................................................................................... 486

5.29.1.4 show lldp statistics ................................................................................................................. 489

5.29.2 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands ............................................................... 491

5.29.2.1 clear lldp neighbors ................................................................................................................ 491

5.29.2.2 clear lldp statistics .................................................................................................................. 491

5.30 VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ........................................................492

5.30.1 VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ........................................................... 492

5.30.1.1 show vlan ............................................................................................................................... 492

5.30.1.2 show vlan brief ....................................................................................................................... 494

5.31 QoS Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ............................................................495

5.31.1 COS Queue Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands .................................................. 495

5.31.1.1 show qos cosmap ................................................................................................................... 495

5.31.1.2 show qos prioritymap ............................................................................................................. 496

5.32 SSH Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ............................................................497

5.32.1 SSH Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands .............................................................. 497

5.32.1.1 show ssh server key ................................................................................................................ 497

5.33 IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands ........499

5.33.1 IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ........................................... 499

5.33.1.1 show igmpsnoop brief ............................................................................................................ 499

5.33.1.2 show igmpsnoop mrouter ....................................................................................................... 500

5.33.1.3 show igmpsnoop reporter ....................................................................................................... 501

5.33.1.4 show igmpsnoop statistics ...................................................................................................... 502

5.33.2 IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands ............................................... 504

5.33.2.1 clear igmpsnoop statistics ...................................................................................................... 504

5.33.2.2 clear igmpsnoop group ........................................................................................................... 505

5.34 Loopdetection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands ...........506

5.34.1 Loopdetection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ............................................... 506

5.34.1.1 show loopdetect ...................................................................................................................... 506

5.35 AAA Status Display and Clear Operation Commands ........................................................................508

5.35.1 AAA Status Display Commands ............................................................................................................ 508

5.35.1.1 show aaa radius client server-info .......................................................................................... 508

5.36 NETTIME (time/sntp) Server and Client Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands ...........509

5.36.1 NETTIME (time/sntp) Statistics Display Commands ........................................................................... 509

5.36.1.1 show nettime status ................................................................................................................ 509

5.36.1.2 show nettime statistics ........................................................................................................... 510

5.36.2 NETTIME (time/sntp) Statistics Clear Commands ............................................................................... 513

5.36.2.1 clear nettime statistics ............................................................................................................ 513

5.37 ProxyDNS Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands ..........................................................514

5.37.1 ProxyDNS Statistics Display Commands .............................................................................................. 514

5.37.1.1 show proxydns statistics ......................................................................................................... 514

5.37.2 ProxyDNS Statistics Clear Commands .................................................................................................. 516

5.37.2.1 clear proxydns statistics ......................................................................................................... 516

5.38 SNMP Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands .................................................................517

5.38.1 SNMP Statistics Display Commands ..................................................................................................... 517

5.38.1.1 show snmp statistics ............................................................................................................... 517

5.38.2 SNMP Statistics Clear Commands ........................................................................................................ 519

5.38.2.1 clear snmp statistics ............................................................................................................... 519

XG Series User’s Guide

Contents

5.39 Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics,

and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands ...........................................................................520

5.39.1 Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands ..................... 520

5.39.1.1 show icmpwatch ..................................................................................................................... 520

5.39.1.2 show icmpwatch statistics ...................................................................................................... 521

5.39.2 Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands ......................... 522

5.39.2.1 clear icmpwatch statistics ....................................................................................................... 522

5.40 Login Information Operations and Display Commands ......................................................................523

5.40.1 Login Information Display Commands ................................................................................................. 523

5.40.1.1 show users .............................................................................................................................. 523

5.40.2 Login Information Operation Commands .............................................................................................. 525

5.40.2.1 clear line ................................................................................................................................. 525

5.41 Socket Status Display Commands .......................................................................................................526

5.41.1 Socket Status Display Commands ......................................................................................................... 526

5.41.1.1 show socket ............................................................................................................................ 526

5.42 Trace Show and Clear Operation Commands ......................................................................................529

5.42.1 Trace Show Commands ......................................................................................................................... 529

5.42.1.1 show trace ssh ........................................................................................................................ 529

5.42.2 Trace Clear Commands .......................................................................................................................... 531

5.42.2.1 clear trace ssh ......................................................................................................................... 531

5.43 Ethernet Port Control Commands ........................................................................................................532

5.43.1 Ethernet Port Control Commands .......................................................................................................... 532

5.43.1.1 offline ..................................................................................................................................... 532

5.43.1.2 online ...................................................................................................................................... 533

5.44 RADIUS Control Commands ..............................................................................................................534

5.44.1 RADIUS Control Commands ................................................................................................................ 534

5.44.1.1 radius recovery ....................................................................................................................... 534

5.45 USB Port Control Commands ..............................................................................................................535

5.45.1 USB Port Control Commands ................................................................................................................ 535

5.45.1.1 usbctl ...................................................................................................................................... 535

5.46 I’m here Commands .............................................................................................................................536

5.46.1 I’m here Commands ............................................................................................................................... 536

5.46.1.1 iamhere ................................................................................................................................... 536

5.47 Other Commands .................................................................................................................................537

5.47.1 Other Commands ................................................................................................................................... 537

5.47.1.1 ping ......................................................................................................................................... 537

5.47.1.2 traceroute ................................................................................................................................ 539

5.47.1.3 telnet ....................................................................................................................................... 541

5.48 Effect by "commit" Command Execution ...........................................................................................543

Chapter 6 Managing the Device............................................................................ 547

6.1

Verifying the Device Operations .........................................................................................................548

6.1.1

6.1.2

6.1.3

Verifying Hardware Status ..................................................................................................................... 548

Verifying System Status ......................................................................................................................... 556

Reviewing Log Messages ...................................................................................................................... 557

6.1.3.1 Format of System Log Message ............................................................................................. 557

6.1.3.2 Reviewing Error Logs ............................................................................................................ 558

6.2

Saving/Restoring Configuration Information ......................................................................................561

6.2.1

6.2.2

6.2.3

Saving/restoring configuration information using FTP ......................................................................... 561

Saving/restoring configuration information using a Compact Flash Card ............................................ 564

Saving/restoring configuration information using USB memory .......................................................... 565

XG Series User’s Guide

Contents

6.3

Updating Firmware ..............................................................................................................................568

6.3.1

6.3.2

6.3.3

Updating Firmware Using FTP .............................................................................................................. 568

Updating Firmware Using CompactFlash card ...................................................................................... 570

Updating Firmware Using USB memory ............................................................................................... 572

6.4

6.5

Actions When Firmware Update Failes (Backup Firm Function) .......................................................574

6.4.1

6.4.2

Preparing the Device .............................................................................................................................. 574

Updating the Firmware .......................................................................................................................... 576

Extracting of Maintenance Information ...............................................................................................577

6.5.1

Procedure for Extracting Maintenance Information when a System/Subsystem Failure Occurred ...... 577

Chapter 7 Troubleshootin g ................................................................................... 578

7.1

To Return to the Initial Shipment Settings (Initializing Switch Configuration) ..................................579

Appendix A SNMP Trap s ...................................................................................... 581

A.1

Trap List ................................................................................................................................................................. 581

Appendix B List of MIB s ....................................................................................... 582

B.1

B.2

B.3

Standard MIB Definitions ...................................................................................................................................... 582

Fujitsu Extension MIB ........................................................................................................................................... 599

IEEE802.1MIB ...................................................................................................................................................... 601

Index........................................................................................................................... 608

XG Series User's Guide

Organization and Usage of This Manual

This section describes target readers, contents, notations, etc. of this guide.

Target Readers and Required Knowledge

This guide was written for administrators, who are in charge of network construction, maintenance, and management.

To use this guide, the following knowledge is required.

•

Basic knowledge of networks, the Internet, and intranets

Basic knowledge of system security

This guide omits explanations of network protocol terms.

Areas Covered

This guide to the XGseries is composed of the following chapters.

Chapter Titles

Chapter 1 Features and Functions

Chapter 2 Using the CLI

Chapter 3 Installation

Contents

Describes the features and functions.

Describes operating environment of CLI and how to operate CLI.

Describes the necessary installation procedures.

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Describes how to use the console screen.

Configuration

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Chapter 6 Managing the Device

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

Appendix A SNMP Traps

Describes how to use the commands.

Describes the management of the device.

Describes how to solve problems in the device.

Describes message format of SNMP traps.

Describes the list of MIBs supported by the SNMP agent

Appendix B List of MIBs

About the Symbols

The symbols used in this guide have the following meanings.

Indicates useful information for using this device.

Hint

Indicates precautions that must be taken when using this device.

Precautions

Indicates additional information to complement operating instructions.

Indicates related matters such as operation procedures, etc.

Note

Reference

Indicates the available model name when using functions of this device.

Available Model

Indicates warning matters related to the Product Liability (P.L.) Law. Please follow them

when using this device.

Warning

Caution

Indicates cautionary notes related to the Product Liability (P.L.) Law. Please follow them

when using this device.

XG Series User's Guide

Trademark Notification in This Manual

Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of the

Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries.

Adobe and Reader are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the USA and other coun-

tries.

Netscape is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation in the USA.

UNIX is a registered trademark of Open Group in the USA and other countries.

Other company names and product names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective com-

panies.

Abbreviated Product Names

The product names used in this manual are abbreviated as follows.

Product name

Description in this manual

Windows^®XP

Microsoft^®Windows^®XP Professional operating system

Microsoft^®Windows^®XP Home Edition operating system

Microsoft^®Windows^®Millennium Edition operating system

Microsoft^®Windows^®98 operating system

Windows^®Me

Windows^®98

Windows^®95

Windows^®2000

Microsoft^®Windows^®95 operating system

Microsoft^®Windows^®2000 Server Network operating system

Microsoft^®Windows^®2000 Professional operating system

Microsoft^®Windows NT^®Server network operating system Version 4.0

Microsoft^®Windows NT^®Workstation operating system Version 4.0

Microsoft^®Windows Server^®2003, Standard Edition

Microsoft^®Windows Server^®2003 R2, Standard Edition

Microsoft^®Windows Server^®2003, Enterprise Edition

Microsoft^®Windows Server^®2003 R2, Enterprise Edition

Microsoft^®Windows Server^®2003, Datacenter Edition

Microsoft^®Windows Server^®2003 R2, Datacenter Edition

Microsoft^®Windows Server^®2003, Web Edition

Windows NT^®4.0

Windows Server^®2003

Microsoft^®Windows Server^®2003, Standard x64 Edition

Microsoft^®Windows Server^®2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition

Microsoft^®Windows Server^®2003, Enterprise x64 Edition

Microsoft^®Windows Server^®2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition

Microsoft^®Windows Server^®2003, Enterprise Edition for Itanium-based systems

Microsoft^®Windows Server^®2003, Datacenter x64 Edition

Microsoft^®Windows Server^®2003 R2, Datacenter x64 Edition

Microsoft^®Windows Vista^®Ultimate operating system

Microsoft^®Windows Vista^®Business operating system

Microsoft^®Windows Vista^®Home Premium operating system

Microsoft^®Windows Vista^®Home Basic operating system

Microsoft^®Windows Vista^®Enterprise operating system

Windows Vista^®

XG Series User's Guide

How the Manuals for This Device Are Organized

The following are XG series related manuals. Use these manuals as necessary.

Manual Name

Safety and Installation Guide

Hardware Guide

Description

This manual describes the safety and installation.

Describes the hardware of the XG.

User’s Guide (This manual)

This manual describes a variety of operations and procedures, including the

installation and maintenance of the XG Series.

XG Series User's Guide

End User's License Agreement

@(#)COPYRIGHT 8.2 (Berkeley) 3/21/94

All of the documentation and software included in the 4.4BSD and 4.4BSD-Lite Releases is copyrighted by The Regents of the

University of California.

reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in

the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product

includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from

this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR

CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY

THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR

OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers and the American National Standards Committee X3, on Information

Processing Systems have given us permission to reprint portions of their documentation.

In the following statement, the phrase "this text" refers to portions of the system documentation.

Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form in the second BSD Networking Software Release, from IEEE

Std 1003.1-1988, IEEE Standard Portable Operating System Interface for Computer Environments (POSIX), copyright C 1988 by

the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. In the event of any discrepancy between these versions and the original

IEEE Standard, the original IEEE Standard is the referee document.

In the following statement, the phrase "This material" refers to portions of the system documentation.

This material is reproduced with permission from American National Standards Committee X3, on Information Processing

Systems. Computer and Business Equipment Manufacturers Association (CBEMA), 311 First St., NW, Suite 500, Washington, DC

20001-2178. The developmental work of Programming Language C was completed by the X3J11 Technical Committee.

XG Series User's Guide

The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the authors and should not be interpreted as

representing official policies, either expressed or implied, of the Regents of the University of California.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are

duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution and

use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not

be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,

WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE.

License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest

Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function.

License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data

Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.

RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this

software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty of any kind.

These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]).

The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following

conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL

documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson

([email protected]).

Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.If this package is used in a

product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.This can be in the form of a textual

message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in

the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

XG Series User's Guide

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:"This

product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if

the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related:-).

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include

an acknowledgement:"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE

FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN

ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in

the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product

includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project

for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.OpenSSL.org/)"

4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this

software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior

written permission of the OpenSSL Project.

6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed

by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.OpenSSL.org/)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS

CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY

THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR

OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Chapter 1

Features and

Functions

This chapter describes the features and functions of the device.

1.1 Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

1.1.1 Switch Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

1.1.2 Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

1.1.3 10/100/1000BASE-T Port Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

1.1.4 USB Port Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

1.1.5 Console Port Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

1.2 Software Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

1.2.1 Software Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

1.2.2 Initial Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

1.2.3 System Maximum Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 1 Features and Functions

1.1 Hardware Specifications

This section explains the Hardware specifications for the device.

1.1.1 Switch Specifications

: supported, –: Not supported

item

specification

XG0448

model name

XG0224

XG2600

Interface

Console Port

specifications

RS232C

number of ports

Baud rate (bps)

connector

9600

RJ45 8-pin Modular

ETHER port

specifications

IEEE802.3

–

10BASE-T interface

100BASE-T interface

1000BASE-T interface

number of ports

10/100BASE-TX

10/100/1000BASE-T

–

1 (Management Port)

–

Port 45 to 48 are 10/100/

1000Base-T and SFP combo

ports. (*1)

Port 21 to 24 are 10/100/

1000Base-T and SFP combo

ports.

Baud rate (bps)

10M

–

100M

RJ45 8-pin Modular

100

1000M

connector

cable length (maximum) (

SFP port

specifications

IEEE802.3

–

number of ports

Port 21 to 24 are 10/100/

Port 45 to 48 are 10/100/

1000Base-T and SFP combo

ports. (*1, *2)

1000Base-T and SFP combo

ports. (*2)

connector

20-pin SFP

–

SFP+ Slot (*3)

specifications

number of ports

connector

–

IEEE802.3

20-pin SFP+

–

CompactFlash Slot

USB port

–

specifications

number of ports

connector

–

USB2.0 Compliance

4-pin USB

Expansion Slot

2 (*1)

–

Hardware Specifications

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 1 Features and Functions

item

specification

XG0448

model name

Power Voltage/Frequencys

Power code

XG0224

XG2600

AC100V-240V (50/60Hz)

for 3-pin socket (grounded) (125V13A)

AC:for 3-pin socket

(grounded) (125V13A)

Power cable length (m)

3.0

Maximum power consumption (W)

Dimensions (mm) (W×D×H)

Maximum weight (kg)

441×388×44

5.5

133.1

441×430×44

7.0

111

430×600×43.5

Ambient noise (dB)

45 or less

55 or less

Temperature/Humidity (°C/%RH)

Temperature condition: operating:0 to 40, storage:0 to 50

Humidity condition:operating:15 to 85, storage:8 to 90

*1)

*2)

*3)

When the network traffic between port1 to 24, 51, 52 and port25 to 50 exceeds 24Gbps, transfer speeds underrun

Wire speed.

100BASE-FX, 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-ZX, 1000BASE-BX-D, 1000BASE-BX-U SFP SFP

modules are available.

10GBASE-SR, 10GBASE-LR SFP+ modules are available.

Hardware Specifications

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 1 Features and Functions

1.1.2 Option

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

SFP Module

XG0224 / XG0448

Available Model

100BASE-FX

1000BASE-SX

1000BASE-LX

1000BASE-ZX

1000BASE-BX-D

1000BASE-BX-U

item

Vendor PN

specification

FTLF8519P2BNL

HFBR-5710L

AGILENT

HFCT-5710L

SCP6P44-F7-BMH

Vendor Name

AGILENT

FINISAR

SUMITOMO ELECTRIC

TECHNOLOGIES

Interface

specifications

IEEE802.3z

(1000BASE-SX Interface)

IEEE802.3z

(1000BASE-LX Interface)

Baud rate (bps)

connector

1000M

LC connector

stressed receiver

sensitivity

-17dBm or more

-20dBm or more

-19.5dBm or more

cable length

(maximum)

500m (MMF:50µm),

300m (MMF:62.5µm)

550m (MMF:50µm,

62.5µm),

550m (MMF:50µm,

62.5µm),

5km (SMF:10µm)

10km (SMF:10µm)

(*3)

CLASS 1 LASER

PRODUCT

EN60825-1:1994+A11,

EN60825-2:1994+A1

EN60825-

1:1994+A11+A2,

EN60825-2:2004

EN60825-

1:1994+A1+A2

IEC60825-1:2001

specifications

item

Vendor PN

specification

SCP6P94-F7-BMH

SBP6F54-F1-BN-49

SBP6F54-F1-BT-31

HFBR-57E0P

Vendor Name

ABAGO

TECHNOLOGIES

SUMITOMO ELECTRIC

SUMITOMO ELECTRI

Interface

specifications

–

IEEE802.3ah

(1000BASE-BX-D

Interface)

IEEE802.3ah

(1000BASE-BX-U

Interface)

IEEE802.3u

(100BASE-FX

Interface)

(1000BASE-ZX

Interface)

Baud rate (bps)

connector

1000M

100M

LC connector

stressed receiver

sensitivity

-24dBm or more

-21dBm or more

-31dBm or more

cable length

(maximum)

(*3)

70km (SMF:10µm)

20km (SMF:10µm)

2km (MMF:50µm)

CLASS 1 LASER

PRODUCT

IEC60825-1:2001

EN60825-

1:1994+A1+A2

specifications

*1)

Please make sure to use 1000BASE-BX-D SFP module and 1000BASE-BX-U SFP module in pairs.

Hardware Specifications

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 1 Features and Functions

*2)

*3)

Applicable to XG0224 only.

Cable length (maximum) is under the condition that the stressed receiver sensitivity satisfy the permissible level.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

SFP+ Module

XG0448 / XG2600

Available Model

10GBASE-SR / LR

item

Vendor PN

specification

FTLX8571D3BCL

FTLX1471D3BCL

FINISAR

Vendor Name

Interface

FINISAR

specifications

Baud rate (bps)

connector

IEEE802.3ae (10GBASE-SR)

IEEE802.3ae (10GBASE-LR)

10G

LC connector

stressed receiver

sensitivity

-7.5dBm or more

-10.3dBm or more

cable length (maximum)

(*)

300m (MMF:50µm)

10km (SMF:10µm)

CLASS 1 LASER

EN60825-1:1994+A1+A2, EN60825-2:2004

PRODUCT specifications

*) Cable length (maximum) is under the condition that the stressed receiver sensitivity satisfy the permissible level.

Precautions

Cable length is as follows depending on the specifications of optical fiber cables.

Type

Core / Clad diameter

Minimum transmission band

160MHz/km

cable length (maximum) (m)

MMF

62.5/125µm

200MHz/km

50/125µm

400MHz/km

500MHz/km

2000MHz/km

300

Please use the most appropriate cable according to the environment of the installed place.

Hardware Specifications

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 1 Features and Functions

SFP+ Expansion Card

XG0224 / XG0448

Available Model

item

Type name

specification

SJ10GSFPZ

Interface (ETHER)

specifications

number of ports

Baud rate (bps)

connector

IEEE802.3ae (10GBASE-R Interface)

10G

SFP connector

CX4 Expansion Card

XG0224 / XG0448

Available Model

item

Type name

specification

SJ10GCX4Z

Interface (ETHER)

specifications

number of ports

Baud rate (bps)

connector

IEEE802.3ak (10GBASE-CX4 Interface)

10G

16pin, CX4connector

cable length (maximum) 15

(m)

Compact Flash Card

XG0224

Available Model

item

specification

Capacity (MBytes)

256

Power Cable (100V)

All models

Available Model

item

specification

cable length (m)

Hardware Specifications

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 1 Features and Functions

1.1.3 10/100/1000BASE-T Port Specifications

All models

Available Model

connector is RJ45 8 pin

•

XG0224 / XG0448

–: Not supported

Signal name

(XG0224: 1 to 24 port)

(XG0448: 1 to 48 port)

Pin numbering

10/100BASE-TX

1000BASE-T

MDI

TD+

TD-

RD+

–

MDI-X

RD+

RD-

TD+

–

MDI-X

TP1+

TP1-

TP0+

TP3+

TP3-

TP0-

TP2+

TP2-

TP0+

TP0-

TP1+

TP2+

TP2-

TP1-

TP3+

TP3-

–

RD-

–

TD-

–

•

XG2600

–: Not supported

Signal name

Pin numbering

10/100BASE-TX

MDI

TD+

TD-

RD+

–

RD-

–

Hardware Specifications

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 1 Features and Functions

1.1.4 USB Port Specifications

XG0448 / XG2600

Available Model

Pin numbering

Signal name

VBUS

D-

D+

GND

1.1.5 Console Port Specifications

All models

Available Model

connector is RJ45 8 pin

A straight cable is used.

–: Not supported

Pin numbering

Signal name

in / out

Content

–

GND

–

out

–

data terminal ready

send data

ground

–

ground

–

receive data

–

Hardware Specifications

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 1 Features and Functions

1.2 Software Specifications

This section explains the software specifications for the device.

1.2.1 Software Specifications

❍: Supported, –: Not supported

Features

Item

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

Store and

Forward

Store and

Forward

Forwarding Mode

Selectable

VLAN

Port VLAN

❍

Tag VLAN

Protocol VLAN

Link Down Relay

Link aggregation

Static

❍

LACP

Back up port

STP

❍

MSTP

RSTP

LLDP

LLMNR

QoS

QoS sending algorithm

strict

❍

–

❍

–

❍

–

DRR

WRR

❍

Assign the priority to the queue

CoS

❍

IPv4 TOS (ip precedence)

IPv6 TC

(with the use of

ACL)

(with the use of

ACL)

(with the use of

ACL (*1))

❍

(with the use of

ACL)

(with the use of

ACL)

–

❍

IPv4 DSCP

(with the use of

ACL)

(with the use of

ACL)

(with the use of

ACL (*1))

❍

IPv6 DSCP

(with the use of

ACL)

(with the use of

ACL)

–

Software Specifications

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 1 Features and Functions

Features

Item

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

Rewrite the priority

❍

COS (user priority)

(with the use of

ACL)

(with the use of

ACL)

–

❍

IPv4 TOS (ip precedence)

IPv4 DSCP

(with the use of

ACL)

(with the use of

ACL)

(with the use of

ACL (*1))

❍

(with the use of

ACL)

(with the use of

ACL)

(with the use of

ACL (*1))

❍

IPv6 DSCP

(with the use of

ACL)

(with the use of

ACL)

–

Security

IP/MAC filtering

❍

❍ (*1)

❍

Application filtering (per application server)

❍

IPv4 filter

(with the use of

ACL)

(with the use of

ACL)

(with the use of

ACL)

❍

IPv6 filter

(with the use of

ACL)

(with the use of

ACL)

–

RADIUS client

❍

–

❍

–

❍

–

Loop detection

Broadcast/multicast storm control

MAC table flash

Port mirroring

ether L3 watch

Output rate control

Routing

❍

IPv4

Static

❍

Multicast

IGMP snoop (v1, v2)

ProxyDNS

DNS server

❍

DNS relaying

URL filtering

SNMP Agent (v1, v2c, v3)

Means of configuration

telnet

❍

ssh

Serial (CLI)

WWW browser (Web UI)

Software Specifications

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 1 Features and Functions

Features

Item

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

Logging

System logging

❍

–

❍

–

❍

–

Error logging

Automated time adjustment

Scheduling

Compact flash

USB memory

❍

*1) For the packets which applied MAC/IP filter, QoS function with the use of ACL become void.

1.2.2 Initial Values

–: Not supported

Features

Item

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

Port information

ETHER port

Manage

1-20

–

21-24

25-26

–

1-44

–

45-48

49-52

–

1-26

ment port

Copper/Fiber

10/

Auto-

detect

Auto-

detect

10Gbps 100Mbps

(Fixed)

(Auto-

detect)

Full/half duplex

Full-

duplex

(Fixed)

Auto-

Auto-detect

–

Auto-detect

–

detect

MDI/MDI-X

Flow control

MDI

Auto-detect

–

(Fixed)

tx: OFF

(Fixed)

rx: ON

(Fixed)

tx: OFF, rx: ON

VLAN

VID 1 (no tag)

–

Protocol VLAN

Predefined protocol

Link aggregation

Load balancing algorithm

Back up port

IPv4, IPv6, FNA

tx MAC address XOR rx MAC address

Master ports preferred

Port selection scheme

STP information

STP operating mode

LLDP

STP used

Disabled

Used

LLMNR

Enabled (lan 0,vlan1)

Disabled

Disabled Enabled

Loop detection

Broadcast/Multicast storm control

Egress Rate Control

IGMP snoop

Disabled

–

Disabled

Software Specifications

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 1 Features and Functions

Features

XG0448

Item

XG0224

XG2600

IP interface

oob Interface

(Management

port):enable IPv6,

enable LLMNR

lan0 Interface:enable IPv6, enable LLMNR

Disabled

RADIUS client

Password information

User name

admin

None

Password

ACL information

None

ProxyDNS information

SNMP

None

Disabled

5 min.

telnet/SSH auto logoff

Console auto logoff

Web browser auto logoff

System log information

Sending to the Server

Facility

8 hour

10min (Fixed)

Disabled

23 (local7)

Priority

error, warn, info

Security

proxydns

Automatically current time Set

Schedule information

Host database information

Compact flash dump

USB memory dump

Disabled

None

Disabled

–

Disabled

–

Software Specifications

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 1 Features and Functions

1.2.3 System Maximum Values

–: Not supported

Features

Item

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

Bridge information

# of blocks registered (*1)

# of static blocks registered

VLAN definition

16000

32000

400

16000

# of VLANs (*2)

4094

# of Protocol VLAN

User defined Protocol VLAN

Link aggregation

unlimited

16 VLAN

# of member ports

# of groups

Back up ports

# of groups

STP information

# of MSTP instances

# of neighbor LLDP device information (*3)

MAC filters

26+364

52+728

26+364

128 (per device)

(*4)

64 (per device)

(*8)

IPv4

IPv6

128 (per device)

(*5)

–

Rewrite the priority

IPv4

COS (user priority)

128 (per device)

(*6)

–

IPv4 TOS (ip precedence)

IPv4 DSCP

128 (per device)

(*6)

64 (per device)

(*8)

128 (per device)

(*6)

64 (per device)

(*8)

Assign the priority to the queue

128 (per device)

(*6)

64 (per device)

(*8)

IPv6

IPv6 DSCP

128 (per device)

(*7)

–

Assign the priority to the queue

128 (per device)

(*7)

MAC table Flushing

# of address group

–

# of VLAN for every address group

IGMP snoop

# of multicast group addresses registered

Port mirroring

200

2000

Target port

tx: 1, rx: 1 (*9)

Software Specifications

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 1 Features and Functions

Features

Item

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

# of ARPs registered

8000

static

200

100

–

# of IPv4 interfaces

# of IPv6 interfaces

RA information (IPv6)

# of interface receiving RA

100 (*10)

# of Default Router for every interface

# of IPv6 prefix for every interface

# of Neighbor Cache entry

Routing table (IPv4)

8000

# of routes registered

200

# of static routes registered

Routing table (IPv6)

# of routes registered

200

# of RA routes registered

# of static routes registered

IP filtering information

200

IPv4

128 (per device)

(*4)

64 (per device)

(*8)

IPv6

128 (per device)

(*5)

–

DSCP rewrite information

IPv4

128 (per device)

(*6)

64 (per device)

(*8)

IPv6

128 (per device)

(*7)

–

# of ACL definitions

800

300

# of host database definitions

AAA information

100

# of groups

1000

# of defined authenticated users

# of defined RADIUS servers

ProxyDNS

SNMP information

# of max. SNMP managers registered

# of simultaneously connected telnet/ssh/WWW browser clients (*11)

System logging

# of displayed system log records

Max. # of system log servers registered

Automated time adjustment

Max. # of SNTP servers registered

# of schedules defined

1024 or more

Application filtering information (per application server)

*1) Includes own entries of the device and static entries.

*2) Includes system use of VLANs (number of ether ports + 1).

Software Specifications

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 1 Features and Functions

*3) First, the maximum number of neighbor LLDP device information is 15 times of the number of total ports including

1G and 10G. (XG0224: 390, XG0448: 780, XG2600: 390)

Second, each port including 1G and 10G must have at least one LLDP information. (XG0224: 26, XG0448: 52,

XG2600: 26)

The remaining number of neighbor LLDP device information can be distributed to any ports. (XG0224: 364,

XG0448: 728, XG2600: 364)

*4) Total number of MAC filter (IPv4) and IPv4 filter definitions.

*5) Total number of MAC filter (IPv6) and IPv6 filter definitions.

*6) Total number of Rewrite the priority (IPv4) and IPv4 DSCP rewrite definitions.

*7) Total number of Rewrite the priority (IPv6) and IPv6 DSCP rewrite definitions.

*8) The total number of MAC filter, IPv4 filter, MAC QoS and IPv4 DSCP rewrite definitions may be reduced as the

number of ACL rules increase.

*9) Same port can't be used as a target port for tx and for rx.

*10) Includes Management Port Interface (oob).

*11) 4 sessions for Telnet, 1session fot WWW (http), 1session for console, 1session for ftp, 1session for ssh (sftp).

Software Specifications

Chapter 2

Using the CLI

This chapter describes how to use the command line interface (CLI) to operate the device.

2.1 Overview of the CLI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

2.1.1 Operating Environment for the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

2.1.2 Command Modes and Mode Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

2.2 Using the CL I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3

2.2.1 Using the Shell Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

2.2.2 Error Messages Common to All Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

2.2.3 Characters that can be entered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 2 Using the CLI

2.1 Overview of the CLI

This section describes how to use the command line interface (CLI) for the XG Series.

2.1.1 Operating Environment for the CLI

There are two ways to access the device to run commands.

•

Serial connection

Connect to the serial port of the device using RS232C cable via RJ45conversion cable.

The available terminal emulation type is VT100.

When initially connecting a terminal to the device, configure the serial port on the client side as shown below.

Item

Setting value

Baud rate

9600 bps

8 bit

Character size

Parity

None

1 bit

Stop bits

Flow control

Emulation

None

VT100

ASCII

Character set

Line feed code

Transmission: CR (carriage return) only

Reception: LF is added

•

Remote connection via LAN port

Connect a terminal or host computer using a telnet client to the management LAN port of the device TCP port of 23

Is used for the default telnet connection

The following tables list the factory defaults.

Management-LAN [XG2600] and LAN Interface initial settings

Item

Setting value

IP address

None (must be set before using the LAN interface)

Subnet address

Telnet server initial settings

Item

Use telnet

Setting value

Enable

Port number

Emulation

23 (TCP)

VT100/VT200/xterm

Delete

BackSpace key

Character set

ASCII

To use the remote connection via the management-LAN port, use the "oob ip" command to configure the management-

LAN port for the device as below. [XG2600]

XG2600(config)# oob ip 192.168.1.1/24 3

XG2600(config)# commit

XG2600(config)# save

To use the remote connection via the LAN port 1, use the "lan ip" command to configure the management-LAN port

Overview of the CLI

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 2 Using the CLI

for the device as below.

XG2600(config)# ether 1 vlan untag 1

XG2600(config)# lan 0 vlan 1

XG2600(config)# lan 0 ip 192.168.1.1/24 3

XG2600(config)# commit

XG2600(config)# save

A VT100, VT200, or xterm can be used as a terminal.

2.1.2 Command Modes and Mode Switching

The following table shows a hierarchy of command modes and mode switching.

2.1.2.1 Command Operation Procedure

The flow of system operation via command execution is as follows:

1) Login to the device.

2) Run an operation command to manage system operations.

3) Run a configure command to move to configuration mode.

4) Run a configuration command to set candidate configuration (candidate-config).

5) Run a commit command to apply the candidate configuration as a running configuration (running-config).

6) Run a save command to save the candidate configuration as a startup configuration (startup-config).

7) Run an exit or similar command to return to operation mode.

8) Repeat steps 2) through 7)

9) Run an exit command to log out.

" Login to the device" (pg.40), "2.1.2.2 Executable commands" (pg.42)

Reference

user name

Operation mode

Configuration mode

configure

user

admin / su

exit / !

User

class

Admin

class

Admin

class

exit

exit / ! / end / quit

admin

Operation command

Configuration command

commit

load

Running configuration

(running-config)

Candidate configuration

(candidate-config)

save

load

Startup configuration

(startup-config)

reset / Reconnect power

Overview of the CLI

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 2 Using the CLI

When you connect to the device via a console port, telnet, or ssh connection (*1), a login prompt like the following one

appears:

Password:

Enter user name (*1)

Enter password.

<WARNING> weak admin’s password:set the password (*2)

Commands can be run. (*3)

By entering the user name and password, you can run commands.

Only the administrator can log into the system for the first time. For the first time, enter "admin" for the user name, and

press ENTER for the password.

*1) For ssh connections, "Login:" does not appear. Specify the user name at the ssh client.

*2) This message warns you that system security is weak because the password is not set. This message will not appear

after you set a password with 8 or more alphanumeric characters and symbols.

*3) The model name is also shown in the prompt by default. When a prompt character string is configured, the configured

prompt is displayed.

User name and password

The user name and password are different for the administrator and general users.

•

User name

The username for the administrator is "admin" and the user name for the general user is "user" (fixed user names).

By using a password aaa command and specifying use of AAA user information (aaa user id command) or RADIUS

server user information as the login user information, you can add user names as an administrator or general user.

•

Password

No password is configured by default. Be sure to configure the password when you log into the system for the first

time. Use the password admin set command to configure the administrator password and the password user set

command to configure the general user password. When configuring password aaa command settings, set the

administrator and user passwords in the AAA user information stored in the system (aaa user password command) or in

the user information for the RADIUS server.

"5.14 Password Information" (pg.257)

Reference

Overview of the CLI

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 2 Using the CLI

Privilege classes (admin class and user class)

Two privilege classes are available; admin class (login as admin) and user class (login as user).

•

admin class

All commands can be run.

However, admin commands and su commands cannot be run because it is not necessary to run them in admin class.

•

user class

Only a portion of operation commands can be run. Configuration commands cannot be run. You can run an admin

command to transfer to admin class.

If a password aaa command has been used to specify use of the AAA user information (aaa user id command) or RADIUS

server user information as the login user information, the user name privilege class is determined as follows:

•

When using RADIUS server

Determined according to the Filter-ID attribute information configured in the RADIUS server.

RADIUS attribute (number)

Filter-ID (11)

Setting

: ”administrator”

: ”user”

For admin class

For user class

•

When using user information on the device

Determined according to aaa user user-role command settings.

Use modes (operation mode and configuration mode)

Two use modes are available; operation mode and configuration mode.

•

Operation mode

Only operation commands can be run.

•

Configuration mode

Both configuration commands and operation commands can be run.

The use mode immediately after logging into the system is operation mode.

The table below displays user names and corresponding passwords, as well as privilege class and use mode after login.

name

Default password

information

Password configuration

command

class

admin

None

password admin set

admin class

Operation mode

(blank) (Hit ENTER)

user

Not set

password user set

user class

Operation mode

(login not possible [*])

*) To log into the system as user, configure password information for the user.

Overview of the CLI

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 2 Using the CLI

2.1.2.2 Executable commands

Command execution is restricted according to the following conditions:

•

Command type

Privilege class

Use mode

" Privilege classes (admin class and user class)" (pg.41),

" Use modes (operation mode and configuration mode)" (pg.41)

Reference

Command type (operation commands and configuration commands)

Two command types are available; operation commands and configuration commands.

Since the use mode after logging into the system is operation mode, you can only run operation commands.

By running a configure command, the use mode changes to configuration mode and you will be able to run configuration

commands as well as operation commands.

However, since you cannot run a configure command in user class, run an admin command to change to admin class before

running the configure command.

The following table lists command types and functions.

Command type

Command function

Operation command

Display and manipulate device status, operation status, and

network status, display or delete stored information, etc.

Configuration command

Operating information settings and network configuration,

etc.

The following table lists commands and operations.

Command

Operation

Configuration command

commit command

Sets to candidate configuration (candidate-config).

These are basically not reflected in running operations; however, as in password

information configuration, there are commands to reflect settings immediately.

The candidate configuration is reflected in the running configuration (running-

config) and active operations change.

Reference

"5.48 Effect by "commit" Command Execution" (pg.543)

Reference

save command

Saves candidate configuration to startup configuration (startup-config).

Applies candidate configuration to the running configuration.

Run reset command or reconnect

power

show candidate-config command

show running-config command

show startup-config command

delete command

Displays candidate configuration settings.

Displays active configuration settings.

Displays startup configuration settings.

Deletes configuration settings.

Precautions

If you run a reset command or reconnect power without first running a save command, the running configuration and

candidate configuration will return to the state they were in before running a configuration command.

Overview of the CLI

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 2 Using the CLI

2.2 Using the CLI

2.2.1 Using the Shell Function

The shell function supports the following features in order to assist command entry:

•

Command execution function

Entry editing function

Command name autocomplete function

Command argument autocomplete function

Abbreviated command entry function

Command alias function

Configuration hierarchy function

Time of command execution display function

Command history function

The following describes each function.

2.2.1.1 Command execution function

The command execution function allows you to enter a command string and hit ENTER or RETURN to run the command.

You can enter ASCII characters, EUC kanji, or Shift JIS kanji characters for the command string.

To enter a kanji character, specify its code using a terminal charset command.

The maximum length of a command string is 1,022 characters (including the prompt string) for ASCII characters. A single

kanji character is equivalent to two ASCII characters.

2.2.1.2 Entry editing function

The entry editing function allows you to move the cursor, insert or delete characters, and delete, cut, and paste words

within an entered command string.

Refer to "2.2.1.10 List of shell key bindings" (pg.52) for keys used with the entry editing function.

The entry editing function uses the VT100 terminal escape sequence to move the cursor and perform other functions.

When cursor movement or other functions do not work correctly, check that the terminal software being used supports

VT100 terminal emulation. In addition, if the screen display is not set to 24 lines and 80 columns, use the terminal window

command to configure the screen correctly.

"2.2.1.10 List of shell key bindings" (pg.52)

Reference

Using the CLI

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 2 Using the CLI

2.2.1.3 Command name autocomplete function

The command name autocomplete function allows you to display a list of command names without entering anything by

pressing the TAB key or CTRL + I. In addition, if you press the TAB key or CTRL + I after entering part of a command,

the command string will be automatically completed. Automatically completed character strings differ depending on

conditions.

The following table details autocomplete operations for entered characters.

Command name beginning with entered characters

When nothing is entered

Operation

A list of all command names is displayed.

When a single command applies

The applicable command name is automatically completed

along with a single blank character.

When multiple commands apply, with the same string

following the entered characters

The identical character string portion is completed.

A list of possible commands is displayed.

Nothing is displayed.

When multiple commands apply, with different strings

following the entered characters

When no command applies

When you use autocomplete without entering anything, a list of commands with the command-type lines shown below is

displayed.

•

--Exec commands-

Operation commands and alias commands

-- Exec commands (config mode)--

Operation commands and aliases for configuration mode

--Config commands--

Configuration commands

--Config commands (current directory)--

Configuration command arguments (when the configuration hierarchy function is enabled and you are not in the top

hierarchy)

The command name autocomplete function works differently according to the number of times you hit the TAB key or

CTRL + I.

The table below lists the autocomplete operation for each number of times the TAB key or CTRL + I are hit.

Note that descriptions are displayed in Japanese (kanji characters). If they are not displayed correctly, use a terminal

charset command to specify a kanji character code which is displayed correctly.

Number of times the TAB

Operation

key or CTRL + I are hit

One time

A list of command names is displayed or the entered command string is automatically

completed.

Two times

Command and argument names corresponding to the use mode and their descriptions are

displayed.

In operation mode, the operation command names and descriptions, and the names of

commands registered using an alias command as well as their registration content are

displayed.

In configuration mode when the configuration hierarchy function is disabled, the

configuration command names and their descriptions are displayed.

In configuration mode, when the configuration hierarchy function is enabled and you are at

the top hierarchy level, the configuration command names and descriptions are displayed.

In configuration mode, when the configuration hierarchy function is enabled and you are not

at the top hierarchy level, the command argument names available for the current hierarchy

level and their descriptions are displayed.

Using the CLI

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 2 Using the CLI

Number of times the TAB

key or CTRL + I are hit

Operation

Three times

Command forms are displayed.

In operation mode, simplified command forms are displayed.

In configuration mode, when the configuration hierarchy function is disabled, simplified

command forms are displayed.

In configuration mode, when the configuration hierarchy function is enabled and you are at

the top hierarchy level, simplified command forms are displayed.

In configuration mode, when the configuration hierarchy function is enabled and you are not

at the top hierarchy, command forms for the current hierarchy level and simplified command

forms are displayed.

Four times

Returns to the operation for hitting the TAB key or CTRL + I one time.

Using the CLI

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 2 Using the CLI

2.2.1.4 Command argument autocomplete function

While entering configuration command arguments, the command argument autocomplete function allows you to display a

list of arguments and candidate arguments without entering anything by pressing the TAB key or CTRL + I. In addition, if

you press the TAB key or CTRL + I after entering part of an argument, the remaining character string will be automatically

completed.

The argument autocomplete function works differently according to the number of times you hit the TAB key or CTRL + I.

The table below lists the autocomplete operation for each number of times the TAB key or CTRL + I are hit.

Note that descriptions are displayed in Japanese (kanji characters). If they are not displayed correctly, use a terminal

charset command to specify a kanji character code which is displayed correctly.

Number of times the TAB

Operation

key or CTRL + I are hit

One time

A list of arguments and argument candidates is displayed or the entered argument

string is autocompleted.

This works in the same way as command name autocomplete.

Descriptions of arguments and argument candidates are displayed.

The command syntax following the current argument is displayed.

Returns to the operation for hitting the TAB key or CTRL + I one time.

Two times

Three times

Four times

For some command arguments, you can specify multiple arguments separated by a comma (,), or specify a range of values

delimited by a hyphen (-). The argument autocomplete function assumes that all arguments allow specifying multiple arguments

and value range, and if you autocomplete an argument after entering "," or "-", all the argument candidates will be given.

Note

2.2.1.5 Abbreviated command entry function

The abbreviated command entry function allows you to run a command with its name and argument entered only partway.

For each command name and command argument entered, the command name autocomplete and command argument

autocomplete are performed and the command is executed. When there are multiple candidates, enter characters until

candidates are narrowed to one, and then execute the command. If you execute the command while there are still multiple

candidates, the command is not autocompleted and an error occurs.

2.2.1.6 Command alias function

The command alias function allows you to register a command name and its argument(s) as a single command.

Use the alias command to register, delete, and display command aliases.

Note that commands registered with a command alias cannot be autocompleted by the abbreviated command entry

function, and you must enter the complete command name and arguments when registering them.When a command alias is

registered correctly, it will be included for command name and argument autocomplete.

Using the CLI

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 2 Using the CLI

2.2.1.7 Configuration hierarchy function

The configuration hierarchy function interprets common portions of executed configuration command names and

arguments as a hierarchy level, and allows you to move between hierarchy levels.

When you execute a configuration command and the command completes successfully, in general the portion from the

command name to the argument two arguments before an argument specifying a variable value becomes a hierarchy level.

This may differ depending on the command.

Ex.)

(argument with variable value)

(configure)# lan 0 ip address 192.168.0.1/24 3

(Move hierarchy level to the argument two before the variable value argument)

(configure-lan-0-ip)#

Even in cases where an error occurs because the number of arguments is less than required, the configuration hierarchy

function assumes the entered command name and arguments to be a hierarchy level. Depending on the command, even if

arguments are incorrect the configuration hierarchy function may judge that there are not enough arguments and interpret

the entry as a hierarchy level. The portion assumed to be a hierarchy level is displayed at the command prompt. However,

if you have used a terminal prompt command to change the entry prompt string to exclude the configuration hierarchy, it is

not displayed.

After moving to a hierarchy level, you can only enter command arguments following the current level to execute the

command. When the number of arguments is still not enough, a further hierarchy level is displayed. When you have

omitted an optional argument, without moving to another hierarchy level the command is executed correctly, following

which you will move to a higher hierarchy level. Be sure to enter optional arguments as a group. To execute a command

other than at the hierarchy level you have moved to, enter it beginning with the command name.

However, in a hierarchy level for an argument which allows for arbitrary character strings, any strings other than the

commands below will be entered as configuration command arguments. To enter one of the following commands as an

argument for a configuration command, move to a higher level, and then enter so that strings matching these commands

are the second argument or following.

exit, !, end, quit, up, top, delete, show, clear, commit, discard, save, load, reset,

Comment line beginning with #

Ex.)

(configure)# acl 0 ip

(configure-acl-0-ip)# any

(Moves to another level because there are not enough arguments.)

(configure-acl-0-ip-any)# any (Moves to higher level because command can complete successfully

without specifying an optional argument.)

(configure-acl-0)#

If you run the show command with no arguments after moving hierarchy levels, a list of configuration commands for that

level and following is displayed.

You can move to a higher hierarchy level or to the top level using an up command or top command respectively.

The configuration hierarchy function is disabled by default. Even when it has been enabled, this function is disabled after

you log out of the system. In this case, no message is displayed to indicate that the function has been disabled.

The following explains how to enable and disable the configuration hierarchy function.

•

To enable the configuration hierarchy function: Press CTRL + O in configuration mode.

The following message is displayed and the configuration hierarchy function is enabled. Information which has been

partially entered will not be discarded.

<NOTICE> The configuration directory mode is enabled. To disable, type Ctrl+G.

Using the CLI

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 2 Using the CLI

•

To disable the configuration hierarchy function: Press CTRL + G.

The following message is displayed and the configuration hierarchy function is disabled. Information which has been

partially entered will be discarded.

<NOTICE> The configuration directory mode is disabled.

A command execution example is shown below.

z Command

# configure

(config)# lan 0 ip address 192.168.1.1/24 3

(config-lan-0-ip)#

(config-lan-0-ip)# show

address 192.168.1.1/24 3

service server

(Change to configuration mode.)

(Run configuration command.)

(Hierarchy level is displayed at the command prompt.)

(Display configuration following the current level.)

info address 192.168.1.100/24 32

(config-lan-0-ip)# save

(config-lan-0-ip)# top

(config)#

(Enter the command name and run the command.)

(Move to the top level.)

2.2.1.8 Time of command execution display function

The time of command execution display function allows you to display the time when the execution of a command starts.

This function is useful when a command execution log is being recorded during operations.

To enable the time of command execution display function, use the terminal timestamp command.

Although you can check command execution time with the show logging command, execution time is only displayed for

commands recorded in the command execution history. You can also use the terminal prompt command to display the date

and time in the prompt string However, this is not the time when a command was executed but the time when the prompt

was displayed.

2.2.1.9 Command history function

The command history function allows you to record command execution history and re-execute commands using this

history. You can also redisplay commands and replace commands in the history.

You can set the number of lines in the command history using a terminal logging command.

You can also press CTRL + P and CTRL + N to sequentially display the command history items, and re-execute or re-edit and

execute a displayed command.

Note

"2.2.1.10 List of shell key bindings" (pg.52)

Reference

The following explains how to re-execute and redisplay commands.

You can use the history specifier and display specifier together with command character string replacement.

Using the CLI

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 2 Using the CLI

Re-executing commands

You can enter a history specifier at the beginning of the command string to re-execute the command. The command will be

executed after the command string for re-execution is displayed. In addition, command history and history numbers can be

viewed with the history command. Note that you can enter the history specifier only once at the beginning of the command

line. Any history specifiers entered thereafter will be treated as normal characters.

History specifier

! history number

Operation

Re-execute the last command run.

Re-execute the command with the specified history number.

!-number in history Re-execute the command run the specified number of commands before in the history.

Ex.) !-3 (The third command from the newest in the history is re-executed.)

! string

The last run command beginning with the specified string is re-executed.

Ex.) !net (The last run command beginning with "net" is re-executed.)

When you enter a string following the history specifier, it will be added to end of the command string invoked from the

history.

The following shows an example.

z Command

# show ip route

(The execution results of show ip route are displayed.)

# !! all

show ip route all

(Add "all" to the last command and execute it.)

(Display the command string to re-execute.)

(The execution results of show ip route all are displayed.)

Redisplaying commands

You can redisplay a previously run command by entering a display specifier (:p) following a history specifier. Note that the

displayed command is not re-executed yet.

Since the displayed command string is recorded as a new command history item, you can re-execute it by entering !! after

checking the command string.

Display specifier

Operation

Redisplays a command.

Ex.) !net:p (The last run command beginning with "net" is redisplayed.)

When you enter a string following the display specifier, it will be added to end of the command string invoked from the

history.

A command execution example is shown below.

z Command

# show ip route

(The execution results of show ip route are displayed.)

# !!:p all

show ip route al

(Add "all" to the last command executed and display it.)

(Display the command string.)

# !!

(Re-execute the previous command.)

show ip route all

(Display the command string to re-execute.)

(The execution results of show ip route all are displayed.)

Using the CLI

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 2 Using the CLI

Replacing the last command string

By entering a replacement specifier (^), replacement target string, and replacement string at the beginning of a command

string, you can re-execute the last command with the specified string replaced with a new string.

If no replacement string is specified, the target string will be deleted.

The table below lists specifiers and operations. (A: replacement target string, B: replacement string, C: additional string)

Command

^A^B^

Operation

Replace A with B and execute the command string.

^A^B^:p

^A^B^C

^A^B^:pC

^A^^

Replace A with B and display the command string.

Replace A with B, add C to the command string, and execute it.

Replace A with B, add C to the command string, and display it.

Delete A and execute the command string.

^A^^:p

Delete A and display the command string.

^A^^C

Delete A, add C to the command string, and execute it.

Delete A, add C to the command string, and display it.

^A^^:pC

A command execution example is shown below.

z Command

# show running-config lan 0 ip address

(Display the IP address for lan 0.)

# ^addr^rout^:p

(Replace addr with rout and display the command string.)

show running-config lan 0 ip routess

# ^ess^e^

show running-config lan 0 ip route

(replace ess with e and execute the command string.)

(Display the command and execute it.)

(Display the static route information for lan 0.)

Using the CLI

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 2 Using the CLI

Replacing command strings

By entering a single-replacement specifier (:s) or all-replacement specifier (:gs) following a history specifier and

replacement specifier, you can replace the target string and re-execute the command string.

A single-replacement specifier replaces the first matching string only, while an all-replacement specifier replaces all

matching strings.

The replacement target string and replacement string are specified as with string replacement for the preceding command;

however, arbitrary characters (@, #, %, &, ~, =, _, etc.) may be used as delimiters. You can successively enter a single-

replacement specifier, all-replacement specifier, and display specifier.

The table below lists specifiers and operations. This example uses "/" as a delimiter.

(A: replacement target string, B: replacement string, C: additional string)

Command

:s/A/B/

Operation

Replace only the first instance of A with B and execute the command string.

Replace only the first instance of A with B and display the command string.

Replace only the first instance of A with B, add C to the command string, and execute it.

Replace only the first instance of A with B, add C to the command string, and display it.

Replace all instances of A with B and execute the command string.

Replace all instances of A with B and display the command string.

Replace all instances of A with B, add C to the command string, and execute it.

Replace all instances of A with B, add C to the command string, and display it.

Delete only the first instance of A and execute the command string.

Delete only the first instance of A and display the command string.

Delete only the first instance of A, add C to the command string, and execute it.

Delete only the first instance of A, add C to the command string, and display it.

Delete all instances of A and execute the command string.

:ps/A/B/

:s/A/B/C

:ps/A/B/C

:gs/A/B/

:pgs/A/B/

:gs/A/B/C

:pgs/A/B/C

:s/A//

:ps/A//

:s/A//C

:ps/A//C

:gs/A//

:pgs/A//

Delete all instances of A and display the command string.

:gs/A//C

Delete all instances of A, add C to the command string, and execute it.

Delete all instances of A, add C to the command string, and display it.

:pgs/A//C

:s/A1/B1/:gs/A2/B2/:p

Replace only the first instance of A1 with B1, replace all instances of A2 with B2, and display the

command string.

A command execution example is shown below.

z Command

# lan 0 ip address 192.168.0.1/24 3

# !!:gs/0/1/:p

(Replace all instances of 0 with 1 and display the command string.)

lan 1 ip address 192.168.1.1/24 3

# !!

(Re-execute the last command to run.)

lan 1 ip address 192.168.1.1/24 3

When entering a command with the command history function, you can omit the last delimiter (/, ^, etc.) at the end of the

command line. However, when the last delimiter is omitted, you cannot specify a display specifier (:p), additional history

specifier, or additional string.

Note

Using the CLI

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 2 Using the CLI

2.2.1.10 List of shell key bindings

The following table shows the key bindings for using the shell.

Key combination

(note)

Single

key

Operation

Ctrl+A

Moves the cursor to the top.

Ctrl+B

Ctrl+C

Ctrl+D

← (Note)

Moves the cursor to the left by one character.

Interrupts input.

Deletes one character if any are input.

Logs off if there are no characters entered.

Ctrl+E

Ctrl+F

Ctrl+G

Ctrl+H

Moves the cursor to the end.

→ (Note)

Moves the cursor to the right by one character.

Disables the configuration hierarchy function.

BACKSPACE

Moves the cursor one character to the left deleting one character.

Ctrl+I

Tab

Autocomplete/displays autocomplete candidate list/displays argument descriptions/

displays argument syntax

Ctrl+J

Return

Input complete

Ctrl+K

Cuts from the cursor position to the end.

Updates the screen.

Ctrl+L

Ctrl+M

Ctrl+N

Ctrl+O

Ctrl+P

Input complete

↓ (Note)

Shows the next history item.

Enables the configuration hierarchy function.

Shows the previous history item.

Redisplays input.

↑ (Note)

Ctrl+R

Ctrl+T

Converts one character.

Ctrl+U

Ctrl+W

Ctrl+X

Cuts from the cursor position to the top.

Cuts from the cursor position one word to the left.

Cuts from the cursor position to the top.

Paste

Ctrl+Y

ESC Ctrl+H

ESC Ctrl+I

ESC Ctrl+K

ESC b

ESC f

ESC BS

Cuts from the cursor position one word to the left.

ESC TAB Displays argument description.

Cuts from the cursor position one word to the right.

Moves the cursor to the left by one word.

Moves the cursor to the right by one word.

ESC n

ESC p

ESC <

ESC >

Shows the next history item beginning with the string prior to the cursor position.

Shows the previous history item beginning with the string prior to the cursor position.

Shows the oldest history item.

Shows the newest history item.

Notes)

•

"Ctrl+α" indicates pressing CTRL and α at the same time.

"ESC α" indicates pressing ESC followed by α.

The arrow keys (↑,↓,← ,→ ) do not work properly on the hyper terminal. Use key combinations instead.

When using with terminal software or telnet commands, some key combinations with CTRL may not work. Refer to

the terminal software or telnet command manual to configure the device so that so that key combinations with CTRL

work properly.

Using the CLI

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 2 Using the CLI

2.2.2 Error Messages Common to All Commands

The table below lists error messages common to all commands and displayed when autocompleting or executing

commands.

Note that the argument position shown in these error messages indicates the place of the erroneous argument, counted from

the command name as "1."

Common error message

Meaning

<ERROR> Command name: Unknown command

An unknown command.

Cannot be executed in the current use mode.

Cannot be executed with the current privilege class.

<ERROR> Command name: Operation not permitted Execution of this command is not permitted.

<ERROR>: 0: missing argument

The argument specification is insufficient.

The argument specification is excessive.

<ERROR>: 0: too many argument(s)

<ERROR>: Argument position: format error

The argument syntax is not correct.

Unknown command for configuration hierarchy.

<ERROR>: Argument position: value out of range

The argument value is out of the valid range (too small, too large,

too long, etc.).

<ERROR>: Argument position: lack of table

<ERROR>: Argument position: no such table

<ERROR>: Argument position: duplicate value

<ERROR>: Argument position: fail to request

<ERROR>: Argument position: unique password

The number of arguments has reached the defined upper limit.

Specified definition cannot be found.

Already defined.

Could not execute the command.

Not a unique password.

Cannot be changed from the unique format.

<ERROR>: detected HARD ERROR, cannot execute Cannot execute the command due to a hardware error.

Using the CLI

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 2 Using the CLI

2.2.3 Characters that can be entered

•

Any letter (A-Z, a-z) and digit (0-9)

Space (ASCII code: 0x20)

Symbols: !, #, $, %, `, ', (, ), _, -, ~, ^, \, {, }, :, +, ,, ., @, =, [, ], &, *, ;, /, ?, |, >

Command and option separators are recognized as one or more space characters (ASCII code: 0x20).

Don't enclose a parameter in quotes (") but for instructions to use quotes (") to contain a blank space.

The commands are case-sensitive.

Using the CLI

Chapter 3

Installation

This chapter describes the installation procedures for the device.

Refer to "chapter 2 Using the CLI" (pg.37) for details on using the CLI.

Reference

Refer to "chapter 5 Command Reference" (pg.85) for details on commands.

3.1 Workflow for Initial Setup of the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

3.1.1 Configure LAN Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

3.1.2 Telnet Connection via the LAN Interface (Optional ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 7

3.1.3 SNMP Configuration (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 3 Installation

3.1 Workflow for Initial Setup of the Device

This section describes the procedures to setup the device.

1) Prepare a terminal

Prepare a terminal for the initial configuration.

2) "Besic Setting Up"

Connect the device and terminal with an RS232C cable. The band rate setting is 9,600 bps.

To configure the Device basically, carry out the following procedure.

Command

Task

Password:

"admin". The default password is not set.

XG2600# configure

Switch to Configuration mode.

Set the device name (HOST-NAME).

Set time zone.

XG2600(config)# sysname HOST-NAME

XG2600(config)# time zone -0500

XG2600(config)# date YYYY/MM/DD.hh:mm:ss

Set date and time.

XG2600(config)# password admin set

Password:

Set the password for user "admin".

Type password.

Retype password:

Retype password.

XG2600(config)# save

XG2600(config)# reset

Save the configuration.

Reset the device.

3) Turn on the device to start the system.

Turn on the terminal and the device to start the system.

4) "Configure LAN Interface"

The initial setting of the LAN interface is for only IPv6 link-local address.

To use the following functions, set up the LAN interface:

Telnet connection

SNMP manager connection

System log transmission

Time synchronization using an NTP/SNTP server

Configuration file upload/download

Firmware update

Collection of maintenance information

5) "Telnet Connection via the LAN Interface (Optional)"

The initial setting of the Telnet connection via the management LAN interface is disabled.

Enable telnet connection if necessary.

6) "SNMP Configuration (Optional)"

Initially, the SNMP agent configuration is not set.

Set the SNMP configuration as needed.

7) This is the end of the preparation procedure

Proceed with configuring the switch.

Workflow for Initial Setup of the Device

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 3 Installation

3.1.1 Configure LAN Interface

The initial setting of the LAN interface is for only IPv6 link-local address.

To use the following functions, configure the LAN interface.

•

Telnet connection

SNMP manager connection

System log transmission

Time synchronization using an NTP/SNTP server

Configuration file upload/download

Firmware update

Collection of maintenance information

To configure the LAN interface, carry out the following procedure.

Command

Task

Password:

"admin". Type the password for uset "admin".

XG2600# configure

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600(config)# oob ip address A.B.C.D/M 3

Set the IP address, subnet, and default gateway of the LAN interface

for management port. (XG2600 only)

XG2600(config)# lan 0 ip address A.B.C.D/M 3

XG2600(config)# lan 0 vlan 1

Set the IP address, subnet, and default gateway of the LAN interface

for VLAN ID 1.

XG2600(config)# proxydns domain 0 any * any

static A.B.C.D

(Optional)

Set up DNS servers.

XG2600(config)# commit

XG2600(config)# save

XG2600(config)# exit

Apply the configuration.

Save the configuration.

Switch to Operation mode.

3.1.2 Telnet Connection via the LAN Interface (Optional)

The "Telnet server function" is initially enabled.

The telnet session timeout period is initially 5 minutes.

To change the telnet session timeout period, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

XG2600# configure

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600(config)# telnetinfo autologout 30m

Set the Telnet session timeout period (30 minutes).

If the Telnet session timeout period expires the telne connection is

terminated.

XG2600(config)# commit

XG2600(config)# save

XG2600(config)# exit

Apply the configuration.

Save the configuration.

Switch to Operation mode.

Workflow for Initial Setup of the Device

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 3 Installation

3.1.3 SNMP Configuration (Optional)

To operate in conjunction with an SNMP manager, the SNMP agent must be configured.

To configure the SNMP agent, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

XG2600# configure

Switch to Configuration mode.

Enable SNMP function.

XG2600(config)# snmp service on

XG2600(config)# snmp agent contact SYSTEM-

CONTAC

Set the swith's contact (SYSTEM-CONTACT).

XG2600(config)# snmp agent location SYSTEM-

LOCATION

Set the swith's location (SYSTEM-LOCATION).

XG2600(config)# snmp agent address A.B.C.D

Set the SNMP agent address. This setting is also used for the local

address at trap transmission.

Make sure to set it when using the SNMP agent function

XG2600(config)# snmp manager 0 A.B.C.D

COMMUNIT-YNAME v2c disable

Set the IP address (host name) of the SNMP manager, the commu-

nity name, sending SNMPv2 traps, and disabling writing. if the SNMP

trap notification is enabled.

XG2600(config)# commit

XG2600(config)# save

XG2600(config)# exit

Apply the configuration.

Save the configuration.

Switch to Operation mode.

Switch to Configuration mode.

Enable SNMP function.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# snmp service on

Workflow for Initial Setup of the Device

Chapter 4

Switch

Functions and

their Configuration

This chapter describes the functions of the device and how to configure them.

Refer to "2.1.1 Operating Environment for the CLI" (pg.38) for details on using the CLI.

Reference

Refer to "chapter 5 Command Reference" (pg.85) for details on commands.

4.1 Basic Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

4.1.1 Switching Mode (XG2600 ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1

4.1.2 MAC Address Table Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

4.1.3 Jumbo Frame Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

4.1.4 Flow Contro l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3

4.1.5 Storm Contro l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3

4.1.6 Egress Rate Control (XG2600 Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

4.2 Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

4.3 Link Down Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

4.4 Link Aggregation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.4.1 Configuring Link Aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

4.4.2 Frame Distribution Methods in Link Aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

4.4.3 The Number of Ports That Require Linkup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

4.4.4 Notes on Link Aggregatio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 0

4.5 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

4.5.1 Port Roles Based on Spanning Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

4.5.2 Spanning Tree Protocol Port State s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2

4.5.3 Configuring Spanning Tre e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3

4.6 VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

4.6.1 Port-Based VLA N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 4

4.6.2 Tag-Based (IEEE802.1Q) VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

4.7 Quality of Service (QoS ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 6

4.8 IGMP Snoopin g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7

4.8.1 Registering Group Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

4.8.2 Removing Group Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

4.8.3 Managing Group Member s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 0

4.8.4 IGMP Querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

4.8.5 Configuring IGMP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

4.9 Network Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

4.9.1 Traffic Statistic s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3

4.9.2 SNMP Agen t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3

4.9.3 RMON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.1 Basic Switch Functions

This section describes the basic switch functions.

4.1.1 Switching Mode (XG2600)

XG2600 provides the following two switching modes.

XG0224 and XG0448 provide store-and-forward switching modes only.

•

Store-and-forward switching mode

After the device finishes receiving a frame, it checks the FCS (Frame Check Sequence) and performs a validity check

(on packet size, etc.) before forwarding the frame. If the switch receives a frame with an error frame, it discards it.

Cut-through switching mode

The device transmits the frame to the destination as soon as the first 64 bytes of the frame are received with no errors.

Since the device starts transmitting the frame before it receives the entire frame, this mode allows forwarding at low

latency.

To change the switching modes, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# forwardingmode cut-through

XG2600(config)# forwardingmode store-and-forward

XG2600(config)# commit

Select the (cut-through) for the switching mode.

Select the (store-and-forward) for the switching mode.

Apply the configuration.

XG2600(config)# save

Save the configuration.

XG2600(config)# exit

Switch to Operation mode.

Basic Switch Functions

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.1.2 MAC Address Table Management

The MAC address table is a database used for managing the association between address information and destination ports.

XG0224 and XG2600 can learn up to 16000 entries of MAC addresses.

XG0448 can learn up to 32000 entries of MAC addresses.

•

Dynamic MAC address learning

The device dynamically learns MAC addresses from received frames. If MAC addresses are not refreshed before the

aging time expires, they will be removed frame MAC address table.

To disable the dynamic learning, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# mac learning off

XG2600(config)# commit

XG2600(config)# save

Disable the dynamic MAC address learning.

Apply the configuration.

Save the configuration.

XG2600(config)# exit

Switch to Operation mode.

To change aging time period of MAC address learning table, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation

mode..

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# mac age 1000

XG2600(config)# commit

XG2600(config)# save

Change aging time period of MAC address learning table.

Apply the configuration.

Save the configuration.

XG2600(config)# exit

Switch to Operation mode.

•

Static unicast address

By registering a unicast MAC address with the MAC address table, unicast frames are forwarded to a specified port.

Static unicast addresses are not subject to MAC address removal controlled by the aging function.

To register, change or delete a static unicast address, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# vlan <vid> forward <count>

<dst_addr> <port>

the MAC address table (or remove them from it).

XG2600(config)# delete vlan <vid> forward

XG2600(config)# commit

Apply the configuration.

Save the configuration.

Switch to Operation mode.

XG2600(config)# save

XG2600(config)# exit

Basic Switch Functions

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.1.3 Jumbo Frame Support

The device can transmit jumbo frames of up to 9KB (9216 bytes). (XG0224,XG0448)

The device can transmit jumbo frames of up to 16KB (16128 bytes). (XG2600)

4.1.4 Flow Control

Flow control is a function that prevents frame loss when the receive buffer in the switch overflows due to temporary traffic

overload by using a PAUSE frame.

When the device receives a PAUSE frame, it temporarily stops sending frames at the receive port. If the receive buffer

overflows, it is possible to restrict frame transmission from the connected device by sending a PAUSE frame.

For each port, it is possible to select whether or not to send a PAUSE frame. Select the mode depending on whether the

destination responds to a PAUSE frame or not.

To change the flow control mode, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# ether 1-3 flowctl off on

Set the flow control mode disable send flow control packets and

enable receive flow control packets.

XG2600(config)# commit

XG2600(config)# save

XG2600(config)# exit

Apply the configuration.

Save the configuration.

Switch to Operation mode.

4.1.5 Storm Control

The device discards broadcast/multicast frames when the number of received broadcast frames are over a given threshold

to prevent unnecessary waste of bandwidth due to retained broadcast frames on the network. This function is called "Storm

Control".

For each port, it is possible to configure storm control.

When broadcast/multicast frames are discarded by storm control, system logs are output.

To configure storm control, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.

•

XG2600

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# ether 1-5 mac storm 7000000k

8000000k discard

Enable storm control, set broadcast threshold 7000000k bps,

multicast threshold 8000000k bps, and set "discard" when

broadcast and multicast traffic exceeds the threshold.

XG2600(config)# commit

XG2600(config)# save

XG2600(config)# exit

Apply the configuration.

Save the configuration.

Switch to Operation mode.

Basic Switch Functions

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

•

XG0224/XG0448

Command

Task

XG0224# configure

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG0224(config)# ether 1-5 mac storm 20000000

discard close

Enable storm control, set threshold 20000000 pps, set "discard"

when broadcast traffic exceeds the threshold, set "close" when

multicast traffic exceeds the threshold.

XG0224(config)# commit

XG0224(config)# save

XG0224(config)# exit

Apply the configuration.

Save the configuration.

Switch to Operation mode.

4.1.6 Egress Rate Control (XG2600 Only)

It is possible to set an egress rate-limiting value for each port in approximately 40Mbps increments.

To set an egress rate-limiting value, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# ether 1-5 ratecontrol 8000m

Specify an egress rate limiting value by 8000M bps for port 1-5.

Basic Switch Functions

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.2 Port Mirroring

It is possible to monitor the traffic by mirroring the frames sent or received by a port to another port.

Multiple ports may not be mirrored to one port. However, multiple ports may be mirrored.

To configure port mirroring, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.

•

XG2600

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# ether 10 type mirror 0 1 rx

Configure the port 10 to be destination port and the receive

frames of the source port (port 1) are mirrored.

XG2600(config)# ether 11 type mirror 0 2 tx

Configure the port 11 to be destination port and the send frames

of the source port (port 2) are mirrored.

XG2600(config)# commit

XG2600(config)# save

XG2600(config)# exit

Apply the configuration.

Save the configuration.

Switch to Operation mode.

•

XG0224/XG0448

Command

XG0224# configure

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG0224(config)# ether 10 type mirror 0 1 both

Configure the port 10 to be destination port and the receive/send

frames of the source port (port 1) are mirrored.

XG0224(config)# ether 10 type mirror 10 2 tx

Configure the port 10 to be destination port and the send frames

of the source port (port 2) are mirrored.

XG0224(config)# commit

XG0224(config)# save

XG0224(config)# exit

Apply the configuration.

Save the configuration.

Switch to Operation mode.

Port Mirroring

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.3 Link Down Relay

Link Down Relay is a function that monitors the status of a specified port link, if a link down detected the device notifies

the device force to link down the relay port.

(1)When Link Down Relay is not used

(1)

(3)

(2)

(4)

Link Up

Link Down

(2)When Link Down Relay is used

(1)

(3)

(2)

(4)

The other end becomes

link down when a link fault

Link Down Relay

Link Down

link down when a link fault

is detected.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

The other end becomes

link down when a link

Link Down Relay

link down when a link

fault is detected.

Link Down Relay

To configure Link Down Relay, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# ether 10 downrelay port 11,12

Set port 11,12 go linkdown when the port 10 linkdown.

Set port 11,12 go linkup when the port 10 linkup.

XG2600(config)# ether 10 downrelay recovery mode

auto

XG2600(config)# commit

XG2600(config)# save

XG2600(config)# exit

Apply the configuration.

Save the configuration.

Switch to Operation mode.

Link Down Relay

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.4 Link Aggregation

Link aggregation is a function that combines multiple ports into a single logical link. A set of ports that comprise a logical

link are called an aggregation group.

Link aggregation provides:

•

Increased bandwidth

By grouping multiple physical ports into a single logical link (an aggregation group), network traffic (data sent and

received) will be balanced across the physical ports, thereby providing increased bandwidth.

Redundancy

Multiplexing ports allows uninterrupted network operations should one of the multiple links fail. Since the link status

of the logical aggregation groups remains unchanged, there are no fluctuations in network traffic, the effect of a fault

having been minimized.

Up to 10 ports can be used to create a single link aggregation group using link aggregation. Up to 10 aggregation groups

can be created.

Aggregation Group

Physical Port

The communication

can be continued

even though one

physical port is

down.

Bandwidth is

expanded by

bundling the

physical port.

Physical

Physical Port

Port

is down.

Link Aggregation

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.4.1 Configuring Link Aggregation

Either static or dynamic (also known as LACP) configuration can be selected for Link Aggregation.

•

Static configuration

Configures aggregation groups statically.

LACP

Configures link aggregation using Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). The LACP is a switch-to-switch

control protocol that enables dynamic configuration of aggregation groups and is standardized by the IEEE802.3ad.

The LACP facilitates load balancing across the individual links aggregated between the devices connected.

Either "active" or "passive" LACP mode can be selected.

active

The device starts LACP negotiation. Since the active mode allows the reception of LACP control frames, it is

possible to direct the device in "active" mode.

passive

The device responds to LACP control frames but does not start LACP negotiation.

To configure static link aggregation, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 type linkaggregation 1

XG2600(config)# linkaggregation 1 mode static

XG2600(config)# commit

Set port 1-8 to be linkaggregation group 1.

Set linkaggregation group 1 to be static.

Apply the configuration.

XG2600(config)# save

Save the configuration.

XG2600(config)# exit

Switch to Operation mode.

To configure LACP link aggregation, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 type linkaggregation 1

XG2600(config)# ether 11-18 type linkaggregation 2

XG2600(config)# linkaggregation 1 mode active

XG2600(config)# linkaggregation 2 mode passive

XG2600(config)# commit

Set port 1-8 to be linkaggregation group 1.

Set port 11-18 to be linkaggregation group 2.

Set linkaggregation group 1 to be active.

Set linkaggregation group 2 to be passive.

Apply the configuration.

XG2600(config)# save

Save the configuration.

XG2600(config)# exit

Switch to Operation mode.

Link Aggregation

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.4.2 Frame Distribution Methods in Link Aggregation

How frames are distributed across physical ports that make up an aggregation group are determined by the contents of a

frame (source and destination MAC addresses).

There are 6 ways to specify how frames are distributed:

•

Frame distribution based on destination MAC address (da-mac)

The destination port is determined based on the destination MAC address of the frames.

Frame distribution based on source MAC address (sa-mac)

The destination port is determined based on the source MAC address of the frames.

Frame distribution based on destination and source MAC addresses (both-mac)

The destination port is determined based on the destination and source MAC addresses of the frames.

Frame distribution based on destination IP address (da-ip)

The destination port is determined based on the destination IP address of the frames.

Frame distribution based on source IP address (sa-ip)

The destination port is determined based on the source IP address of the frames.

Frame distribution based on destination and source IP addresses (both-ip)

The destination port is determined based on the destination and source IP addresses of the frames.

To set a distribution method, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

Set port 1-8 to be linkaggregation group 1.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 type linkaggregation 1

XG2600(config)# linkaggregation 1 algorithm both-mac Set linkaggregation group 1 uses frame distribution based on

destination and source IP address.

XG2600(config)# commit

XG2600(config)# save

XG2600(config)# exit

Apply the configuration.

Save the configuration.

Switch to Operation mode.

Link Aggregation

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.4.3 The Number of Ports That Require Linkup

It is possible to specify the number of ports that enable a linkup state for an aggregation group. If the number of active

ports that make up an aggregation group in a linkup state is less than the specified number of ports, the aggregation group

changes to a linkdown state.

•

For static link aggregation

If the number of ports that make up an aggregation group in a linkup state no longer satisfies the specified number of

ports, the aggregation group changes to a linkdown state.

•

For LACP link aggregation

If the number of ports that make up an established LACP aggregation group changes, the aggregation group reverts to

a linkdown state.

To set the number of ports in the aggregation group, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

Set port 1-8 to be linkaggregation group 1.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 type linkaggregation 1

XG2600(config)# linkaggregation 1 collecting minimum 3 Set the minimum number of member ports for aggregation group

1 to 3.

XG2600(config)# commit

XG2600(config)# save

XG2600(config)# exit

Apply the configuration.

Save the configuration.

Switch to Operation mode.

4.4.4 Notes on Link Aggregation

•

No link aggregation can be used if the half-duplex link mode has been set by the "ether duplex" command.

All ports in the link aggregation group must be set with the same link speed.

All ports in the link aggregation group must be set to belong to the same VLAN.

Specify the link aggregation group in sequential ports.

No link aggregation can be used for the non-sequentially numbered port configuration.

The member ports of a link aggregation group must be specified to have the sequentially numbered ports.

•

If the Ethernet port type has been set as a link aggregation port and if the definition conflict as described above has

occurred, the relevant port is not linked up and it cannot be used. Change the settings by referring to the log messages.

Link Aggregation

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.5 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is a function that prevents loops from occurring on a network. It is also possible to

provide network redundancy by intentionally creating a loop.

STP exclusively uses only one active path between network devices, and shuts out other paths, to avoid network loops. An

active path is selected by comparing path costs defined on each path. After the comparison, the lowest cost path will be

selected. If the selected path becomes disabled, STP will activate the lowest cost path amongst the paths remaining.

The device supports IEEE802.1w RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol). The RSTP is upward compatible with

IEEE802.1D STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) and serves as a STP if the destination device only supports STP.

Route Switch

Switch A

Switch B

Switch Priority = 20

Switch Priority = 10

Path Cost = 10

Designated port

Route port

t = 15

Blocking port

Forwarding pass

Blocking pass

Pass Cos

Path Cost = 10

Switch Priority = 40

Switch Priority = 30

Switch D

Switch C

Physical Topology

Switch A

Route Switch

= 10

Path Cost

Switch C

Switch B

Route

Path Cost = 10

Path Cost = 20

Switch D

Route

Path Cost = 25

Logical Topology by STP

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.5.1 Port Roles Based on Spanning Tree

RSTP assigns one of these port roles to individual ports:

•

Root port

Provides the best path (lowest cost) when the switch forwards packets to the root switch.

Designated port

Connects to the designated switch toward the leaves of the spanning tree. The port specified connecting to the

designated port serves as a root port.

•

Alternate Port

The alternative port with the second lowest path cost. In the event that the root port goes to a linkdown state, the

alternate port serves as the root port. It does not always send or receive frames while in the blocking state.

Backup Port

Provides an alternative path to that specified. In the event that the specified port goes into a linkdown state, the backup

port serves as the new designated port. It does not always send or receive frames while it is in the blocking state.

Disabled Port

Disabled port, it does not send or receive any frames.

4.5.2 Spanning Tree Protocol Port States

The port states defined by the STP are:

•

Discard

The port is in a "discarding state. BPDUs are only received.

Learn

The port is in a "learning" state. A port in the learning state learns the destination MAC address of the received frames

but does not participate in frame forwarding.

•

Forward

The port is ready to transmit data traffic.

The STP states "blocking" and "listening" have been merged into a unique RSTP "discarding" state. The correspondence

between STP port states and RSTP port states are shown below.

Display Format

Discard

STP (IEEE802.1D)

Blocking

RSTP (IEEE802.1w)

Discarding

Discard

Learn

Listening

Learning

Discarding

Learning

Forward

Forwarding

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.5.3 Configuring Spanning Tree

To configure the spanning tree protocol, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# stp mode stp

Enable Spanning Tree Protocol.

XG2600(config)# stp domain 0 priority (0-61440)

XG2600(config)# stp hello (1s-10s)

XG2600(config)# stp age (6s-40s)

Configure Spanning Tree Protocol parameters on the device.

•

Switch priority

Hello time

XG2600(config)# stp delay (4s-30s)

Maximum aging time (max-age)

Forward delay time (forward-time)

XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 stp use on

XG2600(config)# ether 9-20 stp use off

Enable Spanning Tree Protocol on port 1-8.

Disable Spanning Tree Protocol on port 9-20.

XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 stp domain 0 priority (0-240) Configure the following parameters related to the spanning tree

topology:

XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 stp domain 0 cost

(1-200000000)

•

Port priority

Path cost

XG2600(config)# commit

XG2600(config)# save

XG2600(config)# exit

Apply the configuration.

Save the configuration.

Switch to Operation mode.

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.6 VLAN

VLAN (Virtual LAN) is a technology that divides a single network into virtually separated networks.

VLANs are separate logical networks within one physical network. A VLAN capable switch can change and define new

LAN network configurations without changing physical cable connections. This creates a flexible and extensible network

system.

The device provides for port-based or Tag-based (IEEE802.1Q) VLANs.

4.6.1 Port-Based VLAN

Port-based VLAN is a method for configuring VLAN membership on a port basis. Forwarding is based on the destination

MAC addresses and related port.

Segment 3 (VLAN30)

Segment 1 (VLAN10)

VLAN10 consists

of Port 1, 2, 3

VLAN20 consists

of Port 5, 6, 7

VLAN30 consists

of port 4, 8

Segment 2 (VLAN20)

Port Base VLAN

To configure a port-based VLAN, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# ether 1-3 vlan untag 10

XG2600(config)# ether 5-7 vlan untag 20

XG2600(config)# ether 4,8 vlan untag 30

XG2600(config)# commit

Set the default port VLAN ID 10 for port 1-3.

Set the default port VLAN ID 20 for port 5-7.

Set the default port VLAN ID 30 for port 4,8.

Apply the configuration.

XG2600(config)# save

Save the configuration.

XG2600(config)# exit

Switch to Operation mode.

VLAN

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.6.2 Tag-Based (IEEE802.1Q) VLAN

Tag-based VLAN is a method of configuring VLANs so that the frame forwarding decision is based on a tag in the MAC

header identifying the VLAN membership. 4 bytes of additional data in the header, called a VLAN tag, identifies the

VLAN frame ownership. Using a VLAN tag enables configuring a single physical link that shares multiple VLANs.

The device’s tag-based VLAN function is based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

The following figure shows an Ethernet frame format including a VLAN tag as specified by the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

TYPE

LENGTH

TYPE

LENGTH

(6)

Protocol data (IP Packet, etc.)/

LLC,SNAP

VLAN tag

(4)

(2)

LLC,SNAP

2 bytes

TPID

0x8100

2 bytes

TCI

User

CFI

VLAN ID

12 bit

Priority

3 bit

1 bit

TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) (0x8100)

TCI (Tag Control Information)

User Priority(3bit): Priority of Frames (Higher priority to larger number from 0 to 7)

CFI (Canonical Format Indicator)(1bit): ”1” when RIF field exists. Normally “0”.

VLAN ID(12bit):VLAN identifier (0 to 4095. 0 and 4095 are reserved ID)

Tag VLAN Frame Format

To configure a tag-based VLAN, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 vlan tag 100-300

XG2600(config)# commit

Set the tag-based VLAN ID 100-300 for port 1-8.

Apply the configuration.

XG2600(config)# save

Save the configuration.

XG2600(config)# exit

Switch to Operation mode.

VLAN

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.7 Quality of Service (QoS)

The device provides Quality of Service (QoS) that is based on the IEEE802.1p standard.

The device QoS determines the priority of frames at the ingress side using VLAN tag (including priority tag) or a port's

default priority. Their priorities are mapped to 8 output queues.

The queues are processed in the order of the QoS priority precedence.

The device priorities available are:

•

Default priority

Set a default priority of 0 to 7 for each port.

For frames whose priority was not set (VLAN-untagged frames), the default priority is assigned according to the value

of the frame.

•

Mapping to output queues

The device is equipped with 8 output queues with different levels (0 to 7). Frames are transmitted in order of output

queue priority.

Each priority is mapped to a specified output queue.

To set the default priority and output queue mapping, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.

•

XG2600

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 qos priority (0-7)

Set a default priority for frames whose priority was not set

(VLANuntagged frame) when received.

XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 qos prioritymap (0-7) (0-7)

Set the level of output queue to map to each frame that has a

priority value.

XG2600(config)# save

XG2600(config)# reset

Save the configuration.

Reset the device.

•

XG0224/XG0448

Command

XG0224# configure

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG0224(config)# ether 1-8 qos priority (0-7)

Set a default priority for frames whose priority was not set

(VLANuntagged frame) when received.

XG0224(config)# qos cosmap (0-7) (0-7)

Set the level of output queue to map to each frame that has a

priority value.

XG0224(config)# save

XG2600(config)# reset

Save the configuration.

Reset the device.

Quality of Service (QoS)

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.8 IGMP Snooping

IP multicast is often used to distribute multimedia data, including video and voice, over a network.

A layer 2 switch floods multicast frames, absorbing unnecessary network bandwidth. A layer 3 switch that supports

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) manages multicast groups using IGMP packets. The device controls how IP

multicast packets are forwarded to required ports by monitoring IGMP packets generated by layer 3 switches, thereby

preventing unnecessary flooding. This function is called "IGMP Snooping".

The device supports IGMP snooping for IGMP v1/v2.

Multicast Server

Multicast Router

Multicast Server

Multicast Router

Transfer only to

Flooding to all

the required

ports

Layer 2

Switch

Layer 2

Switch

Terminal

IGMP Snooping

IGMP No Snooping

IGMP Snooping

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.8.1 Registering Group Members

On receiving an IGMP Report message, the device registers a multicast MAC address to the IGMP snooping control table

for the port that received the IGMP Report message and the connecting multicast router port.

Multicast Router

VLAN 10

Port 8

MIGAMCPAsdndoroepsisngTaCbolentrol Table

VLAN

Port

IGMP Report

MAC

Destination IP : 239.1.2.3

: 0100.5E01.0203

VLAN(RouterPort)

0100.0501.0203 G1ro, u8p IP

(MAC address)

Port

Reporter

(01:00:05:01:02:03)

239.1.2.3

10 (8)

192.168.10.20

Destination IP 239 .2.3

Source IP

Group IP

: 192.168.10.20

: 239.1.2.3

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Terminal 1

Terminal 3

Terminal 2

Registering Group Members

• The device can register multicast groups up to a maximum value (Reference "1.2.3 System Maximum V a lues" (pg.34)).

Multicast packets that cannot be registered are those flooding all ports belonging to the same VLAN.

Note

• If "igmpsnoop unknown flooding off" command is set, Multicast packets that cannot be registered are those not flooding all

ports belonging to the same VLAN (XG0224, XG0448).

The following figure shows the relationship between the registered IP multicast address and the multicast MAC address.

MAC addresses that are registered with IGMP snooping are between 0100.5E00.0000 and 0100.5E7F.FFFF. An IP

multicast address is 32 bits. The first 4 bits are always 1110 followed by 28 bits that represent the IP multicast address

information. Of these 28 bits, the lower order 23 bits are mapped to a MAC address and the data in the higher order 5 bits

is not used.

Therefore 32 IP multicast addresses are mapped to the same single MAC address.

IP Multicast Address

239.

1. 2.

1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1

Class D

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

5 Bit Loss

Lower 23 Bit Mapping

Reserved for IPv4 Multicast

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0 . 5 E

0 1 0 0 . 5 E 0 1 . 0 2 0 3

Multicast MAC Address

Multicast Address

IGMP Snooping

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.8.2 Removing Group Members

The group members registered by IGMP snooping are removed under the following status.

•

If after receiving an IGMP Report message for group registration, the group member interval expires before the device

receives another IGMP Report message, the switch removes the host from the group member. The setting for the group

member interval is 260 seconds.

•

If an IGMP Leave message is sent from a host, the multicast router sends out an IGMP Specific Query (GSQ) message

to determine whether that the host has left the group.

If after receiving the IGMP Leave message, the last member interval expires before the device receives another IGMP

Report message, the switch removes the host from the group member. The setting for the last member interval is 2

seconds.

Multicast Router

VLAN 10

Port 8

IGMP Leave

MIGAMCPAsdndoroepsisngTaCbolentrol Table

MAC

Destination IP : 224.0.0.2

: 0100.5E00.0002

VLAN

Port

Destination IP : 224.0.0.2

VLAN(RouterPort)

0100.0501.0203 G1ro, u8p IP

(MAC address)

Port

Reporter

Source IP

: 192.168.10.20

: 239.1.2.3

(01:00:05:01:02:03)

Group IP

239.1.2.3

10 (8)

192.168.10.20

Port 1

Port 3

Port 2

Terminal 1

Terminal 2

Terminal 3

Removing Group Members (1)

IGMP Specific Query

Multicast Router

MAC

: 0100.5E01.0203

VLAN 10

Port 8

Destination IP : 239.1.2.3

Group IP

: 239.1.2.3

MIGAMCPAsdndoroepsisngTaCbolentrol Table

VLAN

Port

VLAN(RouterPort)

0100.0501.0203 G1ro, u8p IP

(MAC address)

Port

Reporter

(01:00:05:01:02:03)

239.1.2.3

10 (8)

192.168.10.20

Port 1

Port 3

Port 2

Terminal 3

Terminal 1

Terminal 2

Removing Group Members (2)

The registered Multicast Group IP is not detete form the IGMP snooping Control Table automatically.

Please use "clear igmpsnoop group" command to delete it.

Note

IGMP Snooping

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.8.3 Managing Group Members

When network congestion causes Leave message loss or there is a host that uses IGMPv1, the multicast router does not

receive Leave messages. The multicast router sends out an IGMP General Query message to all hosts (IP address:

224.0.0.1) at intervals (query interval) to determine membership information.

Upon reception of an IGMP General Query message, the host, a member of the group, returns an IGMP Report message to

maintain membership in the group.

IGMP General Query

Multicast Router

MAC

: 0100.5E01.0001

Destination IP : 224.0.0.1

VLAN 10

Port 8

Group IP : 0.0.0.0

MIGAMCPAsdndoroepsisngTaCbolentrol Table

VLAN

Port

VLAN(RouterPort)

0100.0501.0203 G1ro, u8p IP

(MAC address)

Port

Reporter

(01:00:05:01:02:03)

239.1.2.3

10 (8)

192.168.10.20

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Terminal 3

Terminal 1

Terminal 2

Managing Group Members

In consideration of General Query or Report message loss caused by network congestion, since RFC 2236 defines the

default query interval for multicast routers as 125 seconds, this device uses 126 seconds for the group member interval

when it works as a Querier.

IGMP Snooping

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.8.4 IGMP Querier

In a typical network configuration, the multicast router periodically sends out an IGMP General Query message to

determine if any of the hosts on the network are members of any multicast groups. Receiving a response from a host

ascertains its membership in a multicast group.

IGMP Querier is a function that acts as a proxy for a multicast router when one is not available in a network segment to

send an IGMP General Query message to all hosts.

The Query interval is 126 seconds.

Multicast Server

IGMP Querier

IGMP General Query

MAC

: 0100.5E01.0001

Destination IP : 224.0.0.1

Group IP : 0.0.0.0

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Terminal 1

Terminal 2

Terminal 3

IGMP Querier

Upon reception of an IGMP Leave message, the device sends an IGMP Specific Query (GSQ) message to determine that

the host is interested in leaving the group.

If an IGMP Specific Query message is sent 2 times and the host does not respond with an IGMP Report message, that host

is removed.

•

Generally, IGMP Querier uses "0.0.0.0" for the source IP address when sending a Query message.

Since some client software does not return a response for a Query message with the source IP address being set

to "0.0.0.0", it is recommended that an address other than "0.0.0.0" be used.

Note

If a multicast router exists on the network segment, the device does not send Query message even if IGMP

Querier is valid.

IGMP Snooping

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.8.5 Configuring IGMP Snooping

To configure IGMP snooping, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# igmpsnoop use on

XG2600(config)# vlan 10 igmpsnoop router yes 15,16

XG2600(config)# commit

Enable global IGMP snooping on the device.

Specify the multicast router port statically with VLAN.

Apply the configuration.

XG2600(config)# save

Save the configuration.

XG2600(config)# exit

Switch to Operation mode.

To enable IGMP query, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)# igmpsnoop use on

XG2600(config)# vlan 20 igmpsnoop querier on

XG2600(config)# commit

Enable global IGMP snooping on the device.

Specify the Querier operation mode if no multicast router exists.

Apply the configuration.

XG2600(config)# save

Save the configuration.

XG2600(config)# exit

Switch to Operation mode.

IGMP Snooping

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

4.9 Network Management

4.9.1 Traffic Statistics

The device can display traffic statistics to analyze network operations such as traffic bytes, errors, etc.

The following are the Traffic Statistics the device provides.

•

Displays traffic information on outgoing and incoming frames for each port.

Displays traffic information on incoming frames by frame size range for each port.

Displays traffic information on incoming frames for each VLAN.

Displays incoming traffic information by QoS priority for each port.

Displays information related to data flow for each port.

Displays information about errors that occur during transmission/reception for each port.

To display traffic statistics, monitor and show commands are provided.

•

"show ether utilization" command

Display the usage ratio (or utilization) information of Ethernet physical ports.

•

"show ether statistics" (show ether statistics detail) command

Display the statistics of Ethernet physical ports.

4.9.2 SNMP Agent

SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is a protocol that monitors and manages devices on a network.

The device supports the SNMP (v1/v2c/v3) function to collect management information blocks (MIBs) from a remote

network manager (SNMP manager).

For the MIBs supported, refer to Appendix B. The device can be configured for up to 16 SNMP managers and up to 16

SNMP trap destinations (8 for v1/v2c, 8 for v3).

To configure the SNMP agent, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

XG2600# configure

Switch to Configuration mode.

Enable SNMP function.

XG2600(config)#snmp service on

XG2600(config)#snmp agent contact

SYSTEM-CONTAC

Set the swith's contact (SYSTEM-CONTACT).

XG2600(config)#snmp agent location

SYSTEM-LOCATION

Set the swith's location (SYSTEM-LOCATION).

XG2600(config)#snmp agent address A.B.C.D

Set the SNMP agent address. This setting is also used for the

local address at trap transmission.

Make sure to set it when using the SNMP agent function.

XG2600(config)# snmp manager 0 A.B.C.D

COMMUNIT-YNAME v2c disable

Set the IP address (host name) of the SNMP manager, the

community name, sending SNMPv2 traps, and disabling writing.

if the SNMP trap notification is enabled.

XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 name USERNAME

XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 address 0 A.B.C.D

Set a SNMP v3 user name.

Set a SNMP v3 host address.

XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 notification 0 A.B.C.D

Set a SNMP v3 trap notification host address.

XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 auth md5

auth_password

Set the authentication protocol and password for SNMP v3.

XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 priv des priv_password

Set the encryption protocol and password for SNMP v3.

Network Management

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration

Command

Task

XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 read view 0

XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 notify view 0

XG2600(config)# commit

Set MIB read permission view for SNMP v3.

Set trap notification permission view for SNMP v3.

Apply the configuration.

XG2600(config)# save

Save the configuration.

XG2600(config)# exit

Switch to Operation mode.

4.9.3 RMON

Remote Monitoring (RMON) is a function provided to monitor communications over a network, such as traffic and errors.

RMON, used in conjunction with the SNMP agent, allows the remote monitoring of traffic on a LAN segment.

The device supports 2 RMON groups (Statistics, History).

•

Statistics group

Collects traffic statistics for each port.

•

History group

Records traffic statistics for each port at specified time intervals.

To configure RMON, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.

Command

Task

Switch to Configuration mode.

XG2600# configure

XG2600(config)#snmp rmon <on|off>

XG2600(config)# commit

XG2600(config)# save

Specify whether to enable or disable the RMON function.

Apply the configuration.

Save the configuration.

XG2600(config)# exit

Switch to Operation mode.

Network Management

Chapter 5

Command

Reference

This chapter explains about Command Reference.

5.1 Port Information Setting s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 9

5.1.1 Ethernet Common Informatio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 0

5.1.2 MAC Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

5.1.3 STP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

5.1.4 LLDP Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

5.1.5 Filter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

5.1.6 QoS Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

5.1.7 LACP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

5.1.8 ether L3 Monitor Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

5.1.9 ether SNMP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

5.1.10 ether output rate control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

5.2 LACP Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

5.2.1 LACP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

5.3 VLAN Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

5.3.1 VLAN Common Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

5.3.2 IGMP Snooping Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

5.3.3 Filter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

5.3.4 QoS Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

5.4 MAC Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

5.4.1 MAC Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

5.5 LAN Information Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

5.5.5 Management LAN port IPv4 Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

5.5.6 Management LAN port IPv6 Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

5.5.7 Management LAN port LLMNR Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

5.7 QoS Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

5.7.1 QoS Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

5.8 STP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

5.8.1 STP Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

5.9 LLDP Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

5.9.1 LLDP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

5.10 IGMP Snooping Information Setting s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 28

5.10.1 IGMP Snooping Informatio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 28

5.11 Loop Detection Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

5.11.1 Loop Detection Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

5.12 ACL Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

5.12.1 ACL Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

5.13 AAA Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

5.13.1 Group ID Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

5.13.2 AAA User Informatio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 44

5.13.3 RADIUS Information Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

5.14 Password Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

5.14.1 password format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

5.14.2 password admin set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

5.14.3 password user se t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 60

5.14.4 password aaa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

5.14.5 password authtype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

5.15 Device Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

5.15.1 SNMP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

5.15.2 System Log Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

5.15.3 Automatic Time Setting Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

5.15.4 ProxyDNS Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

5.15.5 Host Database Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

5.15.6 Schedule Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

5.15.7 Filter/QoS Resource Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

5.15.8 Othe r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 00

5.16 Login banner Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

5.16.1 Login banner Informatio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 28

5.17 Mode and Terminal Operation Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

5.17.1 Mode Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

5.17.2 Terminal Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

5.17.3 Command Execution History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

5.17.4 Command Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

5.17.5 Command Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

5.18 System Operations and Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

5.18.1 System Operations and Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

5.19 Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

5.19.1 Configuration Display Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

5.19.2 Configuration Delete Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

5.19.3 Configuration Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

5.19.4 File Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

5.20 Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands . . . . . . . 383

5.20.1 Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

5.20.2 Ethernet Counter, Log, and Statistics Clear Command s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 14

5.21 USB connection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Command s . 4 15

5.21.1 USB connection Counter, Log, and Statistics Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

5.22 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Command s . . . . . . . . . . 4 19

5.22.1 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Command s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 19

5.22.2 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Command s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 22

5.23 M1 port Status Display comman d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 23

5.23.1 M1 port Status Display command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

5.24 Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Command s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 24

5.24.1 Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

5.25 ARP Entry Display and Clear Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

5.25.1 ARP Entry Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

5.25.2 ARP Entry Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

5.26 Routing Table Entry Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

5.26.1 IPv4 Routing Table Entry Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

5.26.2 IPv6 Routing Table Entry Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

5.27 Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

5.27.1 IPv4 Packet Statistics Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

5.27.2 IPv4 Packet Statistics Clear Command s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 46

5.27.3 IPv6 Packet Statistics Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

5.27.4 IPv6 Packet Statistics Clear Command s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 50

5.28 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . 451

5.28.1 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

5.28.2 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

5.28.3 Spanning Tree Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

5.28.4 Spanning Tree Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

5.29 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . 480

5.29.1 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

5.29.2 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

5.30 VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

5.30.1 VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Command s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 92

5.31 QoS Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

5.31.1 COS Queue Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Command s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 95

5.32 SSH Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

5.32.1 SSH Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

5.33 IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands . 499

5.33.1 IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

5.33.2 IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

5.34 Loopdetection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands . . 506

5.34.1 Loopdetection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506

5.35 AAA Status Display and Clear Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

5.35.1 AAA Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

5.36 NETTIME (time/sntp) Server and Client Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands . . . . 509

5.36.1 NETTIME (time/sntp) Statistics Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

5.36.2 NETTIME (time/sntp) Statistics Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

5.37 ProxyDNS Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

5.37.1 ProxyDNS Statistics Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

5.37.2 ProxyDNS Statistics Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

5.38 SNMP Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

5.38.1 SNMP Statistics Display Command s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 17

5.38.2 SNMP Statistics Clear Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

5.39 Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

5.39.1 Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands. 520

5.39.2 Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands . . 522

5.40 Login Information Operations and Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

5.40.1 Login Information Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

5.40.2 Login Information Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

5.41 Socket Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

5.41.1 Socket Status Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

5.42 Trace Show and Clear Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

5.42.1 Trace Show Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

5.42.2 Trace Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

5.43 Ethernet Port Control Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

5.43.1 Ethernet Port Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

5.44 RADIUS Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

5.44.1 RADIUS Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

5.45 USB Port Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

5.45.1 USB Port Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

5.46 I’m here Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

5.46.1 I’m here Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

5.47 Other Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

5.47.1 Other Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

5.48 Effect by "commit" Command Execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1 Port Information Settings

This section explains about port information settings.

Allowed range of port definition numbers

The Ethernet definition serial number (decimal value), which is to be specified in <number> ("ether" port definition

number) of the [Option] described in each command of this section, shall be within the range of each model as shown

below.

Range

Model

XG0224

1 to 26

1 to 52

1 to 26

XG0448

XG02600

Configuration of port types for each model

The following provides the configuration of port types according to the "ether" port definition number.

1000BASE-X/SerDes 10/100/1000BASE-T 1000BASE-X/SerDes

Model

(downlink)

ether 1 to 20

ether 1 to 44

(uplink)

ether 21 to 24

ether 45 to 48

(interlink)

ether 25 to 26

ether 49 to 52

ether 1 to 26

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

Specifying the range of port numbers

A range of multiple ports can be specified in <number> ("ether" port definition number) shown in the [Options] of each

command in this section.

•

Examples of multiple ports range specification for XG2600/XG0224/XG0448.

= port1

1-20

21-24

-4

= port1 to port20

= port21 to port24

= port1 to port4

Port Information Settings

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1

Ethernet Common Information

This section explains about the commands related to ethernet common information.

5.1.1.1 forwardingmode

Function

forwardingmode <mode>

Available Model XG2600

Syntax

forwardingmode <mode>

Options

<mode>

• store-and-forward

store and forward mode is used

• cut-through

cut through mode (default) is used

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the switching mode of 10GbE ports.

• In cut-through mode, 65 byte and over error frames and 16129 byte and over frames

are forwarded. 64 byte and below frames are not forwarded.

It is forwarded as FCS error frame at the frame relay of 16129 or more.

• In store and forward mode, Error frames and 16129 byte and over frames are not

forwarded.

• Statistics for 10GbE ports is cleared when you change the switching mode.

Default

It is assumed that cut through mode is used.

forwardingmode cut-through

Port Information Settings

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.2 ether use

Function

Set the port use.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> use <mode>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<mode>

Specify a port operation mode.

• on

Use the Ethernet port.

• off

Do not use the Ethernet port.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set to use the Ethernet port.

It is assumed that the Ethernet port is used.

ether <number> use on

Port Information Settings

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.3 ether media

Function

Sets media type for Ethernet ports.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448

Syntax

ether <number> media <type>

Options

• Ethernet port number(s)

Configure Ethernet port number(s) to be used as base 10 value(s).

If configuring multiple port numbers, separate them with a comma.

Use hyphens to specify a range of port numbers. (ex: "1-8")

Refer to the beginning of this chapter for details on how to specify port numbers.

Range

Model

21 to 24

45 to 48

XG0224

XG0448

<type>

Media type.

• metal

Use 10/100/1000BASE-T ports (RJ45)

• fiber

Use SFP Ports.

*The 100BASE-FX module can be used by XG0224 / XG0448.

• auto

Automatically selects media type.

*However, if both Ethernet and SFP ports are connected the SFP ports are used.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Sets the type of media to be used by the Ethernet port.

• If auto is selected and cables are connected to 10/100/1000BASE-T ports as well as to

SFP ports, the SFP ports will be selected.

• Similarly, with the auto setting, if 10/100/1000BASE-T port(s) are in a link up state and

SFP slot(s) are put into a link up state by connecting a cable to them, operation

changes to the SFP slot(s) and the 10/100/1000BASE-T port(s) change to a link down

state.

• Use the fiber setting if using the 100BASE-FX module.

(The 100BASE-FX module cannot be used with the auto setting.)

Default

If unset, automatic selection of media type will be the default.

ether <number> media auto

Port Information Settings

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.4 ether mode

Function

Set the link speed.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448

Syntax

ether <number> mode <speed>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value. When setting multiple port numbers,

separate them with commas (,). When setting sequential numbers, separate them with

hyphens (-). (Example: "11-16")

Range

Model

1 to 24

1 to 48

XG0224

XG0448

<speed>

Link speed

• auto

Determine the link speed through auto negotiation.

• 1000

Set the 1Gbps fixed link speed.

• 100

Set the 100Mbps fixed link speed.

• 10

Set the 10Mbps fixed link speed.

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the link speed at the Ethernet port.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Use the 100Mbps fixed link speed setting if using the 100BASE-FX module.

It is assumed that Auto Negotiation mode has been specified.

Default

ether <number> mode auto

Port Information Settings

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.5 ether duplex

Function

Set the full-duplex or half-duplex link mode.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448

Syntax

ether <number> duplex <duplex>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value. When setting multiple port numbers,

separate them with commas (,). When setting sequential numbers, separate them with

hyphens (-). (Example: "11-16")

Range

Model

1 to 24

1 to 48

XG0224

XG0448

Full-duplex or half-duplex link mode.

• full

Operates in full-duplex fixed link mode.

• half

Operates in half-duplex fixed link mode.

This option can be specified only when a fixed link speed has been specified by the

"ether mode" command. (This option setting is made invalid if the link speed has been

set to "auto".)

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the full-duplex or half-duplex link mode on the Ethernet port.

• If "1000" is specified in the "ether mode" command, this command setting is disabled

and the system operates in full-duplex link mode.

• If "auto" is specified in the "ether mode" command, this command setting is disabled

and the system operates depending on the result autonegotiated with the connected

device.

Default

It is assumed that full-duplex link mode has been specified.

ether <number> duplex full

Port Information Settings

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.6 ether mdi

Function

Set the MDI.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448

Syntax

ether <number> mdi <mode>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value. When setting multiple port numbers,

separate them with commas (,). When setting sequential numbers, separate them with

hyphens (-). (Example: "11-16")

Range

Model

1 to 24

1 to 48

XG0224

XG0448

<mode>

Specify the MDI mode.

• auto

Set the MDI or MDI-X auto detection mode.

• mdi

Set the fixed MDI mode.

• mdix

Set the fixed MDI-X mode.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the MDI mode for the Ethernet port.

• The auto mode is enabled only when "auto" or "1000M fixed" is specified in the "ether

mode" command.

If anything other than "auto" is specified in the "ether mode" command, the port operates

as MDI-X port.

• If "1000M" is set in the "ether mode" command, the MDI-X fixed mode or the Auto

Detect mode setting is disabled. The port operates as MDI port.

• If "auto" is set in the "ether mode" command for the 10/100/1000BASE-T port, the MDI-

X fixed mode setting is disabled. The port always operates as MDI port.

Default

It is assumed that MDI/MDI-X Auto Detect mode has been specified.

ether <number> mdi auto

Port Information Settings

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.7 ether flowctl

Function

Set the flow control function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> flowctl <send> <receive>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<send>

• on

Send flow control packets.

• off

Do not send flow control packets.

• on

Controls the flow when flow control packets are received.

• off

Do not control the flow even when flow control packets are received.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the operation of flow control function on the Ethernet port using the transmission and

reception functions. The backpressure function is enabled in half-duplex link mode.

The flow control function is enabled independently of the link speed being set by the

"ether mode" command.

Default

It is assumed to have been specified to take the flow control only when a flow control

packet is received.

ether <number> flowctl off on

Port Information Settings

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.8 ether type

Function

Set a port type.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> type normal

ether <number> type mirror <count> <source> <mode>

ether <number> type linkaggregation <group>

ether <number> type backup <group> <priority>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value. When setting multiple port numbers,

separate them with commas (,). When setting sequential numbers, separate them with

hyphens (-). (Example: "11-16")

normal

mirror

: Normal port

: Target mirroring port

linkaggregation : Link aggregation port

backup

: Backup port

<count>

• Definition number

Specify the source port number with a decimal number.

Range

Model

0 to 25

0 to 51

0 to 25

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

• Source port number

Set the source port number with a decimal number if mirroring has been specified.

Range

Model

1 to 26

0 to 52

0 to 26

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

<mode>

• Mirroring mode

Set one of the following operation modes if mirroring has been specified.

rx : The receive frames of the source port are mirrored.

tx : The send frames of the source port are mirrored.

both : Both the send and receive frames of the source port are mirrored. [XG0224/XG0448]

Port Information Settings

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

<group>

• Group number

Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.

Range

Model

1 to 13

1 to 26

1 to 10

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

Set a backup group number with a decimal number.

Range

Model

1 to 13

1 to 26

1 to 13

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

• Priority of port

Set the master port or backup port if "type backup" has been specified.

master: Master port

backup: Backup port

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set an Ethernet port type.

Select the normal port, the mirror port, the link aggregation port, or the backup port.

Caution

Cautions on linkaggregation settings

• All ports in the link aggregation group must be set to belong to the same VLAN.

• No link aggregation can be used for the non-sequentially numbered port configuration.

The member ports of a link aggregation group must be specified to have the

sequentially numbered ports.

• No link aggregation can be used if the half-duplex link mode has been set by the "ether

duplex" command.

Cautions on mirror setting

[XG2600]

• Only one target port can be configured for tx and rx respectively.

• Target ports for tx and rx can not be configured to a same port.

• Target port is the dedicated port for the mirror of source port.

• When target ports are used for tx and rx, the specified source ports are applied to both

target ports.

e.c.

#ether 1 type mirror 0 10 tx

#ether 2 type mirror 0 11 rx

In above configuration, Tx frames of source port ether10 and ether11 are mirrored to

target port ether1.

Rx frames of source port ether10 and ether11 are mirrored to the target port ether2.

• The port which has been configured to target port can not be configured to source port.

• The packet to exceed the band of the target port when there are two or more source

ports of the mirror for the target port is abandoned.

• The storm control to the port set as a mirror target port becomes invalid.

Port Information Settings

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

• The mirror traffic is as follows according to the state of STP/RSTP/MSTP of the source

port.

When the mirror of two or more sources is possible, traffic corresponding to each state

is mirror.

STP, RSTP, state of MSTP, and mirror frame

Source port

Frame kind

Excluding

Target port forwarding

(in object VLAN in case of MSTP)

disable

It is not forwarded

BPDU

It is not forwarded

Blocking and listening

Excluding

BPDU

(Discarding in RSTP/MSTP )

BPDU

It is forwarded

It is not forwarded

It is forwarded

Learning

Excluding

BPDU

Forwarding

Excluding

BPDU

• The presence of the VLAN tag of the packet output to the target port: about the

mirroring of the transmission frame.

It agrees to the tagging setting of the address source port of the packet. The VLAN tag

attaches to the packet output to the target port only when there is the one of the setting

with the VLAN tag in the address source port when there are two or more addresses of

the packet like the multicast, the broadcast, and the flooding, etc., and the packet is

output from two or more source ports. The content of tag becomes tag that should be

applied to the destination.

• As for the mirroring of the reception frame, presence and the content of the VLAN tag

of the packet output to the target port are corresponding to the packet when inputting it.

• When the reception frame mirroring is done rewriting DSCP and ip precedence, the

frame not the reception frame but after it changes is mirror.

• When STP and LLDP are defined in the target port of the mirror, the port cannot be

used.

• The storm control to the same port where the mirror target port was set becomes

invalid.

[XG0224/XG0448]

• Only a single port can be set as the mirrored target port on the device.

• The port which is set to be target port, can be used for forwarding.

• The destination MAC address, the source MAC address, and the presence or absence

of VLAN tag together with its contents sent to the target port may differ from those of

the packet actually sent from or received at the source port.

Cautions on backup setting

• If multiple ports defined as master or backup exist in the same backup group, the port with a

smaller number is enabled, and the port with a larger number is not linked up and it cannot be

used.

• If the master or backup port is undefined in the same backup group, the relevant port is not

linked up and it cannot be used.

Default

It is assumed that the normal port has been specified.

ether <number> type normal

Port Information Settings

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.9 ether vlan tag

Function

Set the tagged VLAN.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> vlan tag <tagged_vidlist>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<tagged_vidlist>

• Tagged VLAN ID list

Set a tagged VLAN ID.

When setting multiple IDs, separate them with commas (,).

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set a tagged VLAN ID.

To add a VLAN, specify the VLAN ID list including already registered VLANs.

The M1 port internally uses maximum VLAN ID in unused.

Therefore, the communication of the M1 port is temporarily interrupted when VLAN ID

allocated in the M1 port is specified by the vlan tag command, and the TCP session is

cut. (Only XG2600)

Default

N/A

Port Information Settings

100

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.10 ether vlan untag

Function

Set the untagged VLAN.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> vlan untag <untagged_vidlist>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<untagged_vidlist>

• Untagged VLAN ID list

Set an untagged VLAN ID.

When setting multiple IDs, separate them with commas (,).

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set an untagged VLAN ID.

• To add a VLAN, specify the VLAN ID list including already registered VLANs.

• Although multiple vid numbers can be specified in the "untagged_vidlist", the following

conditions must be satisfied.

- Only a single port can be defined as a port VLAN.

If multiple VLANs with no protocol VLAN settings have been specified, only the VLAN

with the smallest number will be enabled.

- The protocol VLANs of up to 11 protocols (system definition protocol (ipv4/ipv6/fna)

or user definition (up to 8 definitions)) can be defined.

The M1 port internally uses maximum VLAN ID in unused.

Therefore, the communication of the M1 port is temporarily interrupted when VLAN ID

allocated in the M1 port is specified by the vlan untag command, and the TCP session is

cut. (Only XG2600)

Default

On occasions when "ether vlan tag" command is not defined:

It is assumed that 1 has been specified as the default VLAN ID.

ether <number> vlan untag 1

On occasions when "ether vlan tag" command is defined:

It is assumed that "ether vlan untag" command has not been specified.

Port Information Settings

101

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.11 ether egress permission

Function

Set the forwarding permission port list information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> egress permission <portlist>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

• Forwarding permitted port list

Specify a list of the Ethernet ports that are permitted to forward data.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set a port list to allow forwarding via the ports.

If a link aggregation port or a backup port is specified on the port list, forwarding is

allowed via all ports of the link aggregation or backup group.

Default

It is assumed that forwarding has been permitted for all ports.

5.1.1.12 ether loopdetect use

Function

Set to use the Loop Detection function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> loopdetect use <mode>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<mode>

• on

Enable the Loop Detection function.

• off

Disable the Loop Detection function.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set whether or not to enable the loop detection function.

Disable if the system is stopped by the "loopdetect use" definition even if this mode is set

to be effective.

Default

It is assumed that the loop detection function is enabled.

ether <number> loopdetect use on

Port Information Settings

102

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.13 ether loopdetect frame

Function

Enable the Loop Detection Frame sender.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> loopdetect frame <target>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

Set the sender of loopdetect-frame.

• own

A Loop is detected when receiving a Loop Detection frame from this device.

• any

A Loop is detected when receiving a Loop Detection frame from any device.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify the sender of Loop Detection frames used to detect a loop.

The following is the port which is blocked/offlined when a loop is detected.

Sender of Loop Detection frame

This device

The port which is blocked/offlined

own

The port reporting the Loop Detection

frame

any

This device

The port reportinging the Loop Detection

frame

Other device

The port receiving the Loop Detection

frame

Default

It is assumed that set the sender as own.

ether <number> loopdetect frame own

Port Information Settings

103

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.14 ether startup

Function

Set the offline status when it is started up.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> startup <mode>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<mode>

• online

The port starts operation in the online state during device startup or during dynamic

definition reflection.

• offline

The port starts operation in the offline state during device startup or during dynamic

definition reflection. Also, wait for an offline release instruction from operator.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the port in offline state during device startup or during reflection of dynamic

definitions.

During device startup or during change of dynamic definitions, the relationship between

the Ethernet port state and the port offline state is as follows.

Ether port state during device startup or dynamic definitions change

<mode>

Linkup possible

Linkup impossible

Port offline

online

Linkup or Communication Linkdown or

Communication

possible

Communication

impossible

staying in offline state

offline

Communication

impossible

Communication

impossible

Communication

impossible

entering offline state

staying in offline state

Caution

Default

If ports are offline, release them with the "online" command with port releasing.

It is assumed that forcible offline processing to the port is not performed during device

startup or during reflection of dynamic definitions.

ether startup online

Port Information Settings

104

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.15 ether recovery limit

Function

Set the upper limit number of linkdown times.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> recovery limit <limit>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<limit>

• Number of linkdown times

Set the upper limit number of linkdown times, for the ports to go offline, with a decimal

value from 1 to 10.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the number of times for linkdown as the upper limit for the relevant ports to go offline.

When the upper limit has been exceeded, the log is output to the SYSLOG and the ports

are offline.

Caution

Default

• If ports are offline, release them with the "online" command with port releasing.

• When offline ports are released by with "online" command, the number of times for

linkdown is reset to zero again.

The ports are not offline during linkdown, assuming that there is no upper limit.

Port Information Settings

105

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.16 ether downrelay port

Function

Set the linked port list information about the Linkdown Relay function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> downrelay port <portlist>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

• Relay port list

Set a list of the Ethernet ports that go offline (linkdown) together with the linked

Ethernet port that has been set by this definition when the linkdown of the linked

Ethernet port occurs.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set a list of the Ethernet ports that go offline (linkdown) together with the linked Ethernet

port that has been set by this definition when the linkdown of the Ethernet port occurs.

If the linkdown relay operation occurs, the linked port goes offline, and the log is output to

the SYSLOG.

Caution

• If ports are offline, release them by the "online" command with port releasing.

• The definition is applied normally even if the set port is included on the relay operation

port list. However, if the set only port is included on the list, no relay operation occurs

but only the set port goes offline.

• When the Ethernet port type is a linkaggregation port, and linked port list information

for the Linkdown Relay function of the linkaggregation is set, the Linkdown Relay

function of the linkaggregation becomes enable and this definition is ignored.

• The linked port does not go offline at the Linkdown operation during the dynamic

definition change on the Ethernet port where this command is set.

Default

The linkdown relay function is not executed, assuming that port list information has not

been set.

Port Information Settings

106

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.17 ether downrelay recovery mode

Function

Set offline state release operation on the Linkdown Relay function of the Ethernet port.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> downrelay recovery mode <mode>

Options

• The Ethernet port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<mode>

Set offline state release operation on the linked port list.

• manual

Specify offline state release with command.

• auto

Specify offline state release with linkup.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set offline state release operation from the offline port set on the linked port list

information of the Linkdown Relay function.

Setting "manual" for the releasing operation enables the releasing operation of the linked

port by "online" command or dynamic definition change.

If the release setting is "auto", the linked ports offline release is possible with the linkdown

relay function setting port's linkup as well as the "online" command and a dynamic

definition change.

When the releasing offline operation by linkup is executed when "auto" is set, the system

log is output.

Caution

• When the Ethernet port where the Linkdown Relay function is set is in an offline state,

release the offline state with the "online" command, setting "auto" does not change the

state to be linked up.

• Even if the linked port is in an offline state due to something other than the Linkdown

Relay, set the parameters with "linkaggregation downrelay recovery cause" command

when releasing the offline state.

• When the Ethernet port type is a linkaggregation port, and the linked port list

information for the Linkdown Relay function of the linkaggregation is set, the Linkdown

Relay function of the linkaggregation becomes enable and this definition is ignored.

• Even if "auto" is set for release operation, offline state release operation will not be

executed to the ether ports still in a linkup state since some ports are already shifting to

online or offline state.

• Linkdown Relay function operates by ether port or by linkaggregation, but not by

backup port.

For this reason, when the same link operation port is set on an ether or linkaggregation

port in the same backup group, and "auto" is set for offline state release operation, the

release operation may not be executed because the operation is performed by one port

at a time.

Default

It is assumed that "manual" was specified for the linked port list offline state release

operation.

ether <number> downrelay recovery mode manual

Port Information Settings

107

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.18 ether downrelay recovery cause

Function

Set the target parameters for releasing the offline state on the Linkdown Relay function of

the Ethernet port.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> downrelay recovery cause <cause>

Options

• The Ethernet port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<cause>

Specify the offline parameters targeted for releasing the offline state of linked port from

the following.

• downrelay

Specify when offline parameters with the Linkdown Relay function are targeted for

release.

• all

Release all the parameters offline states.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the offline parameters targeted to releasing offline state lead by linkup when "auto"

was specified on "ether downrelay recovery" command.

Set the parameters assigned for releasing of offline state during the releasing operation.

Caution

Default

• This command is enabled only when "auto" is specified in "ether downrelay recovery

mode" command. The definition is ignored when "manual" is specified.

• The offline state is released without depending on this command definition when the

"online" command in the linked port is executed, or during dynamic definition change

accompanied by releasing of the offline state.

It is assumed that "downrelay" was specified for the target parameters of offline state

release of the linked port list.

ether <number> downrelay recovery cause downrelay

Port Information Settings

108

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.19 ether description

Function

Define the text description for a ether port

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> description <description>

Options

• The Ethernet port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

• Description

Define the description for a ether port with up to 50 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e

of ASCII code.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Defines the description text for each ether port.

This description is used also for the SNMP agent function.

The SNMP agent function sets this description to ifAlias MIB (OID:1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.18).

Default

No ether port descriptions are defined.

Port Information Settings

109

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.20 linkaggregation algorithm

Function

Set the load distribution algorithm of link aggregation.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

linkaggregation <group> algorithm <type>

Options

<group>

• Link aggregation group number

Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.

Range

Model

1 to 13

1 to 26

1 to 10

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

<type>

Specify the load distribution algorithm.

• sa-mac

Distribute frames based on the source MAC address.

• da-mac

Distribute frames based on the destination MAC address.

• both-mac

Distribute frames based on the exclusively ORed (XORed) source and destination

MAC addresses.

• sa-ip

Distribute frames based on the source IP address.

• da-ip

Distribute frames based on the destination IP address.

• both-ip

Distribute frames based on the exclusively ORed (XORed) source and destination IP

addresses.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set an algorithm for each link aggregation group.

It is assumed that "both-mac" has been set for the load distribution algorithm of the link

aggregation.

linkaggregation <group> algorithm both-mac

Port Information Settings

110

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.21 linkaggregation mode

Function

Set the link aggregation operation mode.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

linkaggregation <group> mode <la_mode>

Options

<group>

• Link aggregation group number

Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.

Range

Model

1 to 13

1 to 26

1 to 10

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

<la_mode>

• Link aggregation operation mode

Set the following operation mode.

static

: Static operation

: Dynamic operation with LACP enabled by "active".

active

passive : Dynamic operation with LACP enabled by "passive".

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set an operation mode of the link aggregation.

If static is specified, the static link aggregation without LACP is configured.

If active or passive is specified, the dynamic link aggregation that uses the LACP is set.

If the active mode is specified, the LACPDU's cyclic transmission is automatically sent to

the remote LACP device.

If the passive mode is specified, the LACPDU's cyclic transmission starts only when an

LACPDU is received from the remote LACP. In other words, no link aggregation is

configured if both devices are in the passive mode.

Default

It is assumed that the static operation mode has been set for the link aggregation.

linkaggregation <group> mode static

Port Information Settings

111

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.22 linkaggregation type

Function

Set a link aggregation type.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

linkaggregation <group> type normal

linkaggregation <group> type backup <backup_group> <priority>

Options

<group>

• Link aggregation group number

Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.

Range

Model

1 to 13

1 to 26

1 to 10

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

normal : Normal link aggregation

Multiplexed multiple ports are used as a normal ports.

backup : Backup link aggregation.

Multiplexed multiple ports are used as a backup ports.

<backup_group>

• Backup group number

Set a backup group number with a decimal number.

Range

Model

1 to 13

1 to 26

1 to 13

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

• Priority of backup port

It is a priority of the link aggregation used as a backup port.

Set the master port or backup port if "type backup" has been specified.

master: Master port

backup: Backup port

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set a link aggregation type.

Select the normal link aggregation or the backup link aggregation.

The backup link aggregation can also be used for backup of broadband ports.

Caution

Cautions on "type backup" setting

• If a link aggregation, that has the same priority as the port defined as "master" or

"backup", exists in the same backup group, the port will be enabled as a backup port

but the link aggregation will be disabled.

• If more than one master or backup link aggregation exists in the same backup group,

the link aggregation with a smaller link aggregation group number will be enabled. The

backup link aggregation with a larger link aggregation group number will be disabled.

• If the master or backup link aggregation is undefined in the same backup group, its

settings are disabled.

Port Information Settings

112

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

• If definition conditions such as described above are contradictory, the relevant ports

are not linked up for use.

Change the settings referring to the system log message.

Default

It is assumed that the normal link aggregation has been specified.

linkaggregation <group> type normal

5.1.1.23 linkaggregation collecting minimum

Function

Set the minimum number of member ports for link aggregation.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

linkaggregation <group> collecting minimum <count>

Options

<group>

• Link aggregation group number

Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.

Range

Model

1 to 13

1 to 26

1 to 10

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

<count>

• Minimum number of member ports

Set the minimum number of member ports with a decimal number from 1 to 8, where

communication with link aggregation is allowed. However, the communication of link

aggregation is disabled if the number of ports connected to the link aggregation is less

than the minimum number of member ports.

Also, the communication of link aggregation is disabled if the number of connected

ports decreases below the minimum number of member ports due to failure or other

reasons.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the minimum number of member ports to allow communication of the link

aggregation.

This command is used to stop communication until the link aggregation is assigned the

specific bandwidth in redundant configuration or other. If it is under the specific

bandwidth, the link aggregation communication is disabled.

Caution

Default

If a number larger than the number of member ports effective for the setting is specified

as the minimum number of member ports, the communication of this link aggregation is

disabled.

It is assumed that 1 has been specified as the minimum number of member ports for the

link aggregation.

linkaggregation <group> collecting minimum 1

Port Information Settings

113

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.24 linkaggregation icmpwatch address

Function

Set the destination address for "ether" L3 monitoring of link aggregation.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

linkaggregation <group> icmpwatch address <dst_addr>

Options

<group>

• Link aggregation group number

Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.

Range

Model

1 to 13

1 to 26

1 to 10

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

<dst_addr>

• Destination IP address to be monitored

Specify the destination IP address to be monitored.

The allowable range is as follows:

1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254

128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254

192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the operation information for destination monitoring.

This command sends an ICMP ECHO packet from the specified link aggregation group to

the destination IP address, specified by <dst_addr>, and checks the presence of the

destination by receiving a response.

Caution

Default

Do not set the IP address of the local device in <dst_addr>. Also, make sure that the

specified IP address is included in the same subnet.

If any of the above three addresses is specified, the Ethernet L3 monitoring function will

not operate normally.

It is assumed that the Ethernet L3 monitoring function is not used for the link aggregation.

Port Information Settings

114

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.25 linkaggregation icmpwatch interval

Function

Set various types of "ether" L3 monitoring intervals for link aggregation.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

linkaggregation <group> icmpwatch interval <interval> <timeout> [<retry>]

Options

<group>

• Link aggregation group number

Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.

Range

Model

1 to 13

1 to 26

1 to 10

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

• Transmission interval of normal ICMP ECHO packets

Specify the transmission interval of normal ICMP ECHO packets to be within the range

of 1 to 60 seconds (or 1 minute).

The unit shall be m (minute) or s (second).

• Monitoring timeout

Specify the monitoring timeout period as between 5 to 180 seconds (or 3 minutes). If

the time exceeds, this monitoring is considered as failed.

The unit should be in m (minute) or s (second).

<retry>

• Retransmission interval of ICMP ECHO packets

Specify the retransmission interval of ICMP ECHO packets between 1 to <timeout>-1

seconds if the normal ICMP ECHO packet transmission is not acknowledged.

The unit should be in m (minute) or s (second).

The default is 1s.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the operation information for destination monitoring.

The destination is monitored in the interval specified by <interval> while the response to

ICMP ECHO packet is being received normally. If the response to ICMP ECHO packet is

not received, the packet transmission is repeated at the intervals specified in <retry>. If

no response is returned within the time period specified by <timeout>, a communication

failure is assumed and an abnormal detection is reported. Accordingly, all the member

ports specified in <group> are offline.

Caution

Default

If ports are offline, release them by the "online" command.

It is assumed that the 10-second transmission interval during normal communication, the

5-second timeout for monitoring, and the 1-second retransmission interval have been

specified.

linkaggregation <group> icmpwatch interval 10s 5s 1s

Port Information Settings

115

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.26 linkaggregation downrelay port

Function

Set the linked port list information about the linkaggregation Linkdown Relay function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

linkaggregation <group> downrelay port <portlist>

Options

<group>

• Link aggregation group number

Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.

Range

Model

1 to 13

1 to 26

1 to 10

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

• Relay port list

Set a list of the Ethernet ports that places the linked port offline (linkdown) by linkdown

where this definition has been set.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

If a linkdown occurs in the linkaggregation set with this definition, set a list of the Ethernet

ports that will also linkdown (port linkdown).

If a linkdown relay operation occurs, its linked port goes to an offline state, and a system

log is output.

Caution

• If ports are offline, release them with the "online" command in port releasing.

• The definition is applied normally even if a port set with linkaggregation is included on

the relay operation port list.

• When the Ethernet port type is a linkaggregation port, and this definition is set in the

linkaggregation settings, this definition becomes enabled and the Linkdown Relay

function is ignored.

• The linked port does not change to offline status during the dynamic definition change

Linkdown operation on the Ethernet port where this command is set.

Default

The Linkdown Relay function is not executed, assuming that port list information has not

been set.

Port Information Settings

116

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.27 linkaggregation downrelay recovery mode

Function

Set offline state release operation on the Linkdown Relay function of linkaggregation.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

linkaggregation <group> downrelay recovery mode <mode>

Options

<group>

• Link aggregation group number

Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.

Range

Model

1 to 13

1 to 26

1 to 10

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

<mode>

Set the releasing offline state operation on the linked port list.

• manual

Specify offline state release with command.

• auto

Specify offline state release with linkup.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set offline state release operation from the offline port set in the linked port list

information of the Linkdown Relay function.

Setting "manual" for the release operation enables the release operation of the linked

port with the "online" command or dynamic definition change.

If the release setting is "auto", the linked ports offline release is possible with the linkdown

relay function setting port's linkup as well as the "online" command and a dynamic

definition change.

If the offline release operation with linkup is executed when "auto" is set, the system log

is output.

Caution

• When the linkaggregation port where the Linkdown Relay function is set is in its offline

state, release the offline state with the "online" command because setting "auto" does

not change the linked state.

• Even if the linked port is in its offline state due to something other than the Linkdown

Relay, set the parameters with the "linkaggregation downrelay recovery cause"

command when releasing the offline state.

• Even if "auto" is set for release operation, offline state release operation will not be

executed to the ether ports still in a linkup state since some ports are already shifting to

online or offline state.

• Linkdown Relay function operates by ether port or by linkaggregation, but not by

backup port.

For this reason, when the same link operation port is set on an ether or linkaggregation

port in the same backup group, and "auto" is set for offline state release operation, the

release operation may not be executed because the operation is performed by one port

at a time.

Port Information Settings

117

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Default

It is assumed that "manual" was specified for releasing the offline state operation of the

linked port list.

linkaggregation <group> downrelay recovery mode manual

5.1.1.28 linkaggregation downrelay recovery cause

Function

Set the target parameters for offline state release in the Linkdown Relay function of the

linkaggregation.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

linkaggregation <group> downrelay recovery cause <cause>

Options

<group>

• Link aggregation group number

Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.

Range

Model

1 to 13

1 to 26

1 to 10

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

<cause>

Specify the offline parameters targeted to offline state release of the linked port from the

following.

• downrelay

Specify when offline parameters by the Linkdown Relay function are targeted for

release.

• all

Release offline state of all parameters.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the offline parameters lead by linkup assigned for releasing the offline state when

"auto" is specified in the "ether downrelay recovery" command.

Caution

• This command is enabled only when "auto" is set for offline state release operation

("ether downrelay recovery mode" command) lead by linkup.

The definition is ignored when "manual" is specified.

• The offline state is released independent of this command definition when the "online"

command in the linked port is executed, or during dynamic definition change

accompanied by releasing the offline state.

Default

It is assumed that "downrelay" was specified as the target parameters for offline state

release of the linked port list.

linkaggregation <group> downrelay recovery cause downrelay

Port Information Settings

118

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.29 linkaggregation description

Function

Define the text description for a link aggregation group.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

linkaggregation <group> description <description>

Options

<group>

• Link aggregation group number

Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.

Range

Model

1 to 13

1 to 26

1 to 10

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

• Description

Define the description for a link aggregation group with up to 50 characters from 0x21,

0x23 to 0x7e of ASCII code.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Defines the description text for each link aggregation group.

This description is used also for the SNMP agent function.

The SNMP agent function sets this description to ifAlias MIB (OID:1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.18).

Default

No link aggregation group descriptions are defined.

Port Information Settings

119

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.30 backup mode

Function

Set the backup port selection method.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

backup <group> mode <mode>

Options

<group>

• Backup group number

Set a backup group number with a decimal number.

Range

Model

1 to 13

1 to 26

1 to 13

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

<mode>

Set a port selection mode if both master and backup ports can be used.

• master

Use the master port first.

• earlier

Use the port that has been linked up first and enabled for use.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set how to select a method of port selection for each backup group.

It is assumed that the master port is set to be used first as backup switching mode.

backup <group> mode master

Port Information Settings

120

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.1.31 backup standby

Function

Set the standby status of backup ports.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

backup <group> standby <mode>

Options

<group>

• Backup group number

Set a backup group number with a decimal number.

Range

Model

1 to 13

1 to 26

1 to 13

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

<mode>

Set the standby status of backup ports.

• online

The backup port in standby status does not go offline.

• offline

The backup port in standby status goes offline.

Configuration mode (admin class)

Use Mode

Explanation

Set the standby status of backup ports.

If the standby state is specified to offline, the backup port in standby status goes offline.

The offline port is in the same state as when the "offline" command for the Ethernet port

control is executed.

If the currently operating backup port goes down, the offline port is released.

The released port is switched unless it is still offline due to another function or has an

error.

Caution

• When the backup port selection method is set as a "master", backup priority port is not

offline even it is set to be offline in standby status.

If the backup priority port must be offline, set the backup port selection method as

"earlier".

• When backup port is set to be offline in standby status, offline port cannot be released

automatically by any function other than backup port function. The same is true for the

offline port set by "offline" command.

Default

It is assumed that "online" has been specified as the standby status of backup ports.

backup <group> standby online

Port Information Settings

121

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.2

MAC Information

This section explains about the commands related to MAC information.

5.1.2.1 ether mac storm

Function

Set the broadcast and multicast storm control information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

XG2600

ether <number> mac storm <threshold_broadcast> <threshold_multicast> <action>

XG0224/XG0448

ether <number> mac storm <threshold> <broadcast> <multicast>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<threshold_broadcast>

• Threshold of broadcast traffic

Set the threshold value for broadcast storm traffic with Kbit/s, Mbit/s or Gbit/s

8k - 8000000k

1m - 8000m

1g - 8g

(Storm monitoring does not start if the threshold is set to 0.)

<threshold_multicast>

• Threshold of multicast traffic

Set the threshold value for multicast storm traffic with Kbit/s, Mbit/s or Gbit/s

8k - 8000000k

1m - 8000m

1g - 8g

(Storm monitoring does not start if the threshold is set to 0.)

Set the action which occurs if the traffic exceeds the threshold.

• discard

Discard the packets which exceed the threshold

• close

Close the port (offline)

• Threshold

Set the traffic threshold value for the broadcast or multicast storm.

Set the number of packets per second in the following range.

(Storm monitoring does not start if the threshold is set to 0.)

Range

Model

0 to 30,000,000

XG0224 / XG0448

Port Information Settings

122

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Set the operation that occurs if the traffic exceeds the threshold.

• off

The guard function is disabled.

• discard

Discard the packets that exceed the threshold.

• close

Close the port (offline).

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

XG0224 / XG0448

Set the broadcast or multicast storm control information.

If "discard" or "close" is specified, the systemlog is output when the threshold value is

exceeded or the device is restored.

XG2600

Set the broadcast or multicast storm control information.

If "discard" or "close" is specified, the systemlog is output when the threshold value is

exceeded or the device is restored.

Storm monitoring doesn’t start If the threshold of both broadcast and multicast is set to 0.

Caution

Default

XG0224 / XG0448

It might be considered that broadcast/multicast roughhouse control information is set,

and "clear statistics" is restored from the state of the roughhouse once when it retreats

and the statistical information of correspondence port is cleared with the reception rate

exceeds the threshold.

N/A

Port Information Settings

123

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.3

STP Information

This section explains about the commands related to STP information.

5.1.3.1 ether stp use

Function

Set the STP availability.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> stp use <mode>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<mode>

• on

Specify it when STP is used.

• off

Specify it when STP is not used.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether or not to enable the STP.

If the STP operation mode of the device is OFF (stp mode disabled), the "stp use on"

setting is ignored and disabled.

If the STP operation mode of the bridge is case except OFF (stp mode disabled), the

communication on the port may temporarily fail by the change of topology.

Set "stp use off" for the port where the STP is not used.

Default

It is assumed that the STP is used in the ether port.

ether <number> stp use on

Port Information Settings

124

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.3.2 ether stp domain cost

Function

Set the path cost.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> stp domain <instance-id> cost {auto|<path_cost>}

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<instance-id>

• STP instance ID number

Specify a decimal value from 0 to 15.

For non-MSTP operation mode, entering a value from 1 to 15 makes it invalid, although

the allowable range is set with a value from 0 to 15.

auto

Determine the cost automatically.

<path_cost>

• Path cost

Set the path cost with a decimal value from 1 to 200000000.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set a path cost of the STP port.

The cost specified by the instance ID 1 to 15 is valid only when the device is in the MSTP

operation mode (stp mode mstp), but the set value is ignored when the device is in the

non-MSTP operation mode.

Default

It is assumed that automatic setting is used for the ether port path cost.

ether <number> stp domain 0 cost auto

Port Information Settings

125

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.3.3 ether stp domain priority

Function

Set the priority.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> stp domain <instance-id> priority <priority>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<instance-id>

• Instance ID number

Specify a decimal value from 0 to 15.

For non-MSTP operation mode, entering a value from 1 to 15 makes it invalid, although

the allowable range is set with a value from 0 to 15.

• Priority

Set the port priority with a decimal value from 0 to 240.

A smaller value has a higher priority.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the port priority.

Specify an integer (valid value) that can be divided by 16 in <priority>.

Valid values: 0, 16, 32, 48, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 176, 192, 208, 224, 240

If an integer other than the valid values is specified, this setting is disabled.

The priority specified by the instance ID 1 to 15 is valid only when the device is in the

MSTP operation mode (stp mode mstp), but the set value is ignored when the device is in

the non-MSTP operation mode.

Default

It is assumed that 128 is used for the STP port priority.

ether <number> stp domain 0 priority 128

Port Information Settings

126

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.3.4 ether stp force-version

Function

Set the STP Force Protocol Version.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> stp force-version <version>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

• STP Force protocol version

Set it with a decimal value from 0 to 3.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the STP Force protocol version.

STP Force protocol version (0: STP, 1: Unsupported, 2: RSTP, 3: MSTP)

Caution

If the device is in the MSTP operation mode (stp mode mstp), the STP Force protocol

version can be set within the range of 0 to 3 and the STP, RSTP or MSTP is operable.

If the device is in the RSTP operation mode (stp mode rstp), the STP Force protocol

version can be set within the range of 0 to 2 and the STP or RSTP is operable.

If the device is in the STP operation mode (stp mode stp), the STP Force protocol version

can be set to 0 only.

If a version outside of the valid range is set, this setting will be disabled.

Default

The Ethernet port operates based on the device's operation mode (stp mode).

Port Information Settings

127

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.4

LLDP Information

This section explains about the commands related to LLDP Information.

5.1.4.1 ether lldp mode

Function

Set LLDP function

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> lldp mode <mode>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<mode>

• LLDP function mode

disable : Not work LLDP function.

enable : Send and receive LLDP information

send

: Send LLDP information

receive : receive LLDP information

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set LLDP mode of the specified ether port.

It is assumed that the LLDP function is disabled.

ether lldp mode disable

Port Information Settings

128

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.4.2 ether lldp info

Function

Set LLDP information which is sent

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> lldp info port-description <mode>

ether <number> lldp info system-name <mode>

ether <number> lldp info system-description <mode>

ether <number> lldp info system-capabilities <mode>

ether <number> lldp info management-address <mode>

ether <number> lldp info port-vlan-id <mode>

ether <number> lldp info port-and-protocol-vlan-id <mode>

ether <number> lldp info vlan-name <mode>

ether <number> lldp info protocol-identity <mode>

ether <number> lldp info mac-phy-configuration-status <mode>

ether <number> lldp info power-via-mdi <mode>

ether <number> lldp info link-aggregation <mode>

ether <number> lldp info maximum-frame-size <mode>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

port-description

system-name

system-description

system-capabilities

management-address

port-vlan-id

port-and-protocol-vlan-id

vlan-name

protocol-identity

mac-phy-configuration-status

power-via-mdi

link-aggregation

maximum-frame-size

Port Information Settings

129

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

• LLDP Information Name

Specify LLDP Information Name (TLV of 802.1AB)

port-description

: Port Description Information (Port Description TLV)

: System Name Information (System Name TLV)

system-name

system-description

system-capabilities

management-address

: Sysrem description Information (System Description TLV)

: System Capabilities Information (System Capabilities TLV)

: Management Address Information

(Management Address TLV)

port-vlan-id

: Port VLAN ID Information (IEEE802.1 Port VLAN ID TLV)

port-and-protocol-vlan-id : Prootocol VLAN ID Information

(IEEE802.1 Port And Protocol VLAN ID TLV)

vlan-name

: VLAN Name Information (IEEE802.1 VLAN Name TLV)

: Protocol VLAN Identitiy Information

protocol-identity

(IEEE802.1 Protocol Identity TLV)

mac-phy-configuration-status

: MAC/PHY Configuration /Status Infomation

(IEEE802.3 MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV)

: MDI Power Information (IEEE802.3 Power Via MDI TLV)

: Link Aggregation Information

power-via-mdi

link-aggregation

(IEEE802.3 Link Aggregation TLV)

maximum-frame-size

: Maximum Frame Size Information

(IEEE802.3 Maximum Frame Size TLV)

<mode>

• Send mode

Set whether LLDP information is sent or not

enable: send LLDP information

disable: not send LLDP information

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether LLDP information is sent or not

It is assumed that Send mode of all LLDP Information is "enable".

ether <number> lldp info port-description enable

ether <number> lldp info system-name enable

ether <number> lldp info system-description enable

ether <number> lldp info system-capabilities enable

ether <number> lldp info management-address enable

ether <number> lldp info port-vlan-id enable

ether <number> lldp info port-and-protocol-vlan-id enable

ether <number> lldp info vlan-name enable

ether <number> lldp info protocol-identity enable

ether <number> lldp info mac-phy-configuration-status enable

ether <number> lldp info power-via-mdi enable

ether <number> lldp info link-aggregation enable

ether <number> lldp info maximum-frame-size enable

Port Information Settings

130

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.4.3 ether lldp vlan

Function

Set VLAN for sending LLDP information

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> ldp vlan <vlanidlist>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

vlan <vlanidlist>

Set VLAN ID for port-and-protocol-vlan-id, vlan-name,protocol-identity transmission.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set VLAN ID for ort-and-protocol-vlan-id, vlan-name, protocol-identitytransmission.

All VLAN information is sent.

5.1.4.4 ether lldp notification

Function

Set SNMP Notification Trap transmission information

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> lldp notification <mode>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<mode>

• SNMP Notification Trap Transmission Mode

Set whether SNMP Notification Trap is sent or not when LLDP information of the

specified physical port is changed.

enable: Send SNMP Notification Trap

disable: Not send SNMP Notification Trap

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set whether SNMP Notification Trap is sent or not when LLDP information of the

specified physical port is changed.

Caution

Default

When snmp service command is disabled or snmp traplldpremtableschange coomad is

disabled, SNMP Notification Trap (lldpRemTablesChange Trap) is not sent.

lldp notification disable.

ether <number> lldp notification disable

Port Information Settings

131

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.5

Filter Information

This section explains about the commands related to filter information.

5.1.5.1 ether macfilter

Function

Set the MAC filter.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> macfilter <count> <action> <acl>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<count>

• Priority

Set the filtering priority to be set with a decimal value.

A smaller value has a higher priority.

The specified value is sorted and renumbered in sequence. If a filtering definition with

the same value already exists, the existing one will be changed.

Range

Model

0 to 511

0 to 63

XG0224 / XG0448

XG2600

• pass

Transmit the packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp"

or "acl udp" definition of access control list.

• reject

Discard the packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or

"acl udp" definition of access control list.

<acl>

• ACL definition number

Specify the ACL definition number of the access control list where the packet pattern to

be filtered has been defined.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the MAC filtering for each Ethernet port.

For the ingress packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp",

or "acl udp" definitions of the access control list which has been specified by <acl>, the

filter processing is executed in the way as specified by <action>.

Caution

Note 1.

If none of "acl mac", "acl vlan" and "acl ip" definitions exist on the access control list

which has been specified by <acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not

exist, the packets are not filtered.

Note 2.

The packet filtering default value is "pass".

No packets are filtered if only "pass" is set in <action>.

Port Information Settings

132

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

[XG2600]

Note 3.

"acl mac llc" definitions can not filter llc frames with the VLAN tag.

Note 4.

This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.

The allowable upper limits are as follows.

• Upper limit based on "commands"

64 commands for the entire device.

Up to 64 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter",

"vlan macfilter", "lan ip filter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan qos aclmap", "lan ip dscp"

commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "ether macfilter" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

2) "vlan macfilter" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

3) "lan ip filter" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

4) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

5) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

6) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

• Upper limit based on "masks"

64 masks for the entire device.

Up to 64 masks can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter", "vlan

macfilter", "lan ip filter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan qos aclmap", "lan ip dscp", "vlan

protocol" commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "vlan protocol" commands

2) "ether macfilter" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

3) "vlan macfilter" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

4) "lan ip filter" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

5) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

6) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

7) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

Port Information Settings

133

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

The number of masks that each command use depends on applied ACL.

When Multiple ACL are applied, the number of masks amount to sum total, and

depends on ACLs the number of masks amount to less than sum total.

The following is the number of masks for ACL.

ACL

number of masks

"acl mac"

define LSAP of llc

not define LSAP of llc

"acl vlan"

not define src IP address

not define tos/dscp value

define src IP address

not define dst IP address

define dst IP address

use same netmask for src and dst IP address

not define tos/dscp value

use different netmask for src and dst IP address

The following is the number of masks for "vlan protocol" command.

"vlan protocol" definition

define vlan protocol ipv4

number of masks

define vlan protocol ipv6

define vlan protocol <count> ether

define vlan protocol <count> llc

• Upper limit based on "actions"

16 actions for the entire device.

Up to16 actions can be set for the entire device, including the "ether qos aclmap", "vlan

qos aclmap", "lan ip dscp", "vlan protocol" commands.

The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.

1) "vlan protocol" commands

2) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

3) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

4) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.

- vlan <vid> protocol ipv4

- vlan <vid> protocol ipv6

Port Information Settings

134

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

The following commands spend 1 action for each.

If same <tos_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

If same <dscp_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

If same <queue_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>

- ether <number >qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>

- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>

- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>

- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>

- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>

- lan <number> ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <dscp_value>

The following commands spend 1 action for each.

If same <vid> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

- vlan <vid> protocol <count> ether

- vlan <vid> protocol <count> llc

Note 5.

When the port type of the Ethernet port is a link aggregation, the same setting is needed

in all the member ports where the link aggregation is composed.

[XG0224/XG0448]

Note 3.

This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.

The allowable upper limits are as follows.

• Upper limit based on "commands"

128 commands for the entire device.

Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter",

"vlan macfilter" and "lan ip filter" commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "ether macfilter" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

2) "vlan macfilter" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

3) "lan ip filter" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

If up to 128 of "ether macfilter" commands have been defined for port ether1, the

subsequent "vlan macfilter" and "lan ip filter" command will be no longer applied.

• Upper limit based on rule

128 rules for the entire device.

For the "ether macfilter", "vlan macfilter" and "lan ip filter" commands, the number of

rules to be used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.

The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.

- For ACL to set TCP or UDP

Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of

destination ports for TCP or UDP

- For ACL to set ICMP

Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of

ICMP CODEs for ICMP

- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP

Port Information Settings

135

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and

change resource distribution.

Note 4.

Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which

It is assumed that this option has not been set.refer to ACL such as "ether macfilter",

"ether qos aclmap", "vlan macfilter", "vlan ip6filter", "vlan qos aclmap", "vlan ip6qos

aclmap", "lan ip filter", "lan ip dscp", "lan ip6 filter", "lan ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter"

commands.

Note 5.

When the port type of the Ethernet port is a link aggregation, set it only to the anchor port

where the link aggregation is composed.

Default

It is assumed that this option has not been set.

5.1.5.2 ether macfilter move

Function

Change the priority of MAC filter.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> macfilter move <count> <new_count>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<count>

• Source priority

Set the source priority with a decimal value.

<new_count>

• Destination priority

Set the destination priority with a decimal value.

Range

Model

0 to 511

0 to 63

XG0224 / XG0448

XG2600

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Change the priority of MAC filtering for each Ethernet port.

If the current priority is set as <count>, change the priority of this definition to

<new_count>.

When the definition is changed, the priority is renumbered.

Default

N/A due to an edit command.

Port Information Settings

136

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.6

QoS Information

This section explains about the commands related to QoS information.

5.1.6.1 ether qos aclmap

Function

Set the Quality of Service (QoS) conversion.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> qos aclmap <count> <action> <value> <acl>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<count>

• Priority

Set the QoS conversion priority with a decimal value.

A smaller value has a higher priority.

If multiple <action> are executed for the same packet and if they conflict with each

other, the <action> with a higher priority is executed.

The specified value is sorted and renumbered in sequence. If a filtering definition with

the same value already exists, the existing one will be changed.

Range

Model

0 to 511

0 to 63

XG0224 / XG0448

XG2600

• cos [XG0224/XG0448]

Rewrite the "cos" value (the "user priority" value in the Tag Control Information (TCI)

field of the Tagged VLAN) of packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl

icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition of access control list.

• dscp

Rewrite the "dscp" value (the high-order 6 bits in the TOS field of IP header), if packets

that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition

of access control list are IP packets.

• tos

Rewrite the "ip precedence" value (the high-order 3 bits in the TOS field of IP header),

if packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp"

definition of access control list are IP packets.

• queue

Change the queue at the output port that is used to output the input packets that match

the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition of access

control list.

Port Information Settings

137

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

<value>

• Replacing value

If "cos" is selected in <action>:

- <cos_value>

Set the replaced "cos" value with a decimal value from 0 to 7.

- tos

Replace the "cos" value with the "ip precedence" value in the packet.

If "dscp" is selected in <action>:

- <dscp_value>

Set the replaced "dscp" value with a decimal value from 0 to 63.

If "tos" is selected in <action>:

- <tos_value>

Set the replaced "ip precedence" value with a decimal value from 0 to 7.

- cos

Replace the "ip precedence" value with the "cos" value.

If "queue" is selected in <action>:

- <queue_value>

Specify a queue number of the output port to be used.

A larger value indicates a queue with a higher output priority.

Range

Model

0 to 7

XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

<acl>

• ACL definition number

Specify the ACL definition number of the access control list where the packet pattern to

configure QoS conversion has been defined.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the QoS (quality of service) of each Ethernet port.

For the ingress packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp",

or "acl udp" definitions of the access control list which has been specified by <acl>, the

QoS processing is executed in the way as specified by <action>.

Caution

Note 1.

If none of "acl mac", "acl vlan" and "acl ip" definitions exist on the access control list

which has been specified by <acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not

exist, the packets are not filtered.

[XG2600]

Note 2.

If a queue is selected by <action> and if this queue has not been associated with the cos

value by the "ether qos prioritymap" command, the QoS processing is not executed.

Note 3.

"acl mac llc" definitions can not filter llc frames with the VLAN tag.

Port Information Settings

138

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Note 4.

This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.

The allowable upper limits are as follows.

• Upper limit based on "commands"

64 commands for the entire device.

Up to 64 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter",

"vlan macfilter", "lan ip filter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan qos aclmap", "lan ip dscp"

commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "ether macfilter" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

2) "vlan macfilter" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

3) "lan ip filter" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

4) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

5) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

6) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

• Upper limit based on "masks"

64 masks for the entire device.

Up to 64 masks can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter", "vlan

macfilter", "lan ip filter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan qos aclmap", "lan ip dscp", "vlan

protocol" commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "vlan protocol" commands

2) "ether macfilter" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.A

smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

3) "vlan macfilter" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

4) "lan ip filter" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

5) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

6) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

7) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

The number of masks that each command use depends on applied ACL.

When Multiple ACL are applied, the number of masks amount to sum total, and

depends on ACLs the number of masks amount to less than sum total.

Port Information Settings

139

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

The following is the number of masks for ACL..

ACL

number of masks

"acl mac"

define LSAP of llc

not define LSAP of llc

"acl vlan"

not define src IP address

not define tos/dscp value

define src IP address

not define dst IP address

define dst IP address

use same netmask for src and dst IP address

not define tos/dscp value

use different netmask for src and dst IP address

The following is the number of masks for "vlan protocol" command.

"vlan protocol" definition

define vlan protocol ipv4

number of masks

define vlan protocol ipv6

define vlan protocol <count> ether

define vlan protocol <count> llc

• Upper limit based on "actions"

16 actions for the entire device.

Up to16 actions can be set for the entire device, including the"ether qos aclmap", "vlan

qos aclmap", "lan ip dscp", "vlan protocol" commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "vlan protocol" commands

2) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

3) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

4) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.

- vlan <vid> protocol ipv4

- vlan <vid> protocol ipv6

Port Information Settings

140

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

The following commands spend 1 action for each.

If same <tos_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

If same <dscp_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

If same <queue_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>

- ether <number >qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>

- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>

- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>

- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>

- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>

- lan <number> ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <dscp_value>

The following commands spend 1 action for each.

If same <vid> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

- vlan <vid> protocol <count> ether

- vlan <vid> protocol <count> llc

Note 5.

When the port type of the Ethernet port is a link aggregation, the same setting is needed

in all the member ports where the link aggregation is composed.

[XG0224/XG0448]

Note 2.

If a queue is selected by <action> and if this queue has not been associated with the cos

value by the "qos cosmap" command, the QoS processing is not executed.

Note 3.

This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.

The allowable upper limits are as follows.

• Upper limit based on "commands"

128 commands for the entire device.

Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether qos aclmap",

"vlan qos aclmap" and "lan ip dscp" commands.

1) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port value has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

2) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

3) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

If up to 128 of "ether qos aclmap" commands have been defined for port ether1, the

subsequent "vlan qos aclmap" and "lan ip dscp" command will be no longer applied.

• Upper limit based on rule

128 rules for the entire device.

For the "ether qos aclmap", "vlan qos aclmap" and "lan ip dscp" commands, the

number of rules to be used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as

shown below.

The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.

- For ACL to set TCP or UDP

Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of

destination ports for TCP or UDP

- For ACL to set ICMP

Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of

ICMP CODEs for ICMP

Port Information Settings

141

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP

You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and change

resource distribution.

Note 4.

Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer

to ACL such as "ether macfilter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan macfilter", "vlan ip6filter",

"vlan qos aclmap", "vlan ip6qos aclmap", "lan ip filter", "lan ip dscp", "lan ip6 filter", "lan

ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.

Note 5.

When the port type of the Ethernet port is a link aggregation, set it only to the anchor port

where the link aggregation is composed.

Default

It is assumed that this option has not been set.

5.1.6.2 ether qos aclmap move

Function

Change the QoS conversion priority of the Ethernet port.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> qos aclmap move <count> <new_count>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<count>

• Source priority

Set the source priority with a decimal value.

<new_count>

• Destination priority

Set the destination priority with a decimal value.

Range

Model

0 to 511

0 to 63

XG0224 / XG0448

XG2600

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Change the priority of QoS definition for each Ethernet port.

If the current priority is set as <count>, change the priority of this definition to

<new_count>.

When the definition is changed, the priority is renumbered.

Default

N/A due to an edit command.

Port Information Settings

142

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.6.3 ether qos priority

Function

Set the priority.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> qos priority <queue_priority>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<queue_priority>

• Queue priority

Set the default queue priority with a decimal value from 0 to 7.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set a tag priority value to be assigned to the untagged receive packet.

It is assumed that 0 has been specified as the queue priority.

ether <number> qos priority 0

Port Information Settings

143

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.6.4 ether qos mode

Function

Set the QoS sending algorithm.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> qos mode <mode> [ <q0> <q1> <q2> <q3> <q4> <q5> <q6> <q7>]

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<mode>

• mode

strict

: Use the strict priority scheduling.

drr [XG2600]

: Use the deficit round robin scheduling.

wrr [XG0224/XG0448] : Use the weighted round robin scheduling.

• Bandwidth of queues [XG2600]

Set bandwidth of 8 queues as the guaranteed minimum bandwidth if "drr" is specified in

<mode>.

Set each of them from 800m to 4000m or 1g to 4g (bps).

• Weight of queues [XG0224/XG0448]

Set the weight of 8 queues as the number of packets to send if "wrr" is specified in

<mode>.

Set each of them with a decimal number from 0 to 15.

If 0 is specified, this COS queue will be Strict Priority operation.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the QoS sending algorithm.

[XG2600]

• Sum total of bandwidth in drr mode should be maximum band of port (10Gbps).

• "ether qos mode drr" command and "ether ratecontrol" command can not use at the

same time and same port.

[XG0224/XG0448]

If a queue is specified to be weighted to 0 in the wrr mode, it operates in the same way as

the strict mode, and the operation precedes the wrr operation.

Default

It is assumed that the strict mode has been specified in the QoS sending algorithm.

ether <number> qos mode strict

Port Information Settings

144

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.6.5 ether qos prioritymap

Function

Assign the priority to the queue

Available Model XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> qos prioritymap <priority> <queue>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

Specify the priority of packets with a decimal value from 0 to 7.

<queue>

Specify the queue for the priority specified in <priority> with a decimal value from 0 to 7.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

assign packets of priority specified with <priority> to queue specified with <queue>

ether <number> qos prioritymap 0 2

ether <number> qos prioritymap 1 0

ether <number> qos prioritymap 2 1

ether <number> qos prioritymap 3 3

ether <number> qos prioritymap 4 4

ether <number> qos prioritymap 5 5

ether <number> qos prioritymap 6 6

ether <number> qos prioritymap 7 7

Port Information Settings

145

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.7

LACP Information

This section explains about the commands related to LACP information.

5.1.7.1 ether lacp port-priority

Function

Set the LACP port priority.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> lacp port-priority <priority>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

• Priority of LACP port

Set the port priority with a decimal value from 1 to 65535.

A smaller value has a higher priority.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the priority of LACP port. The LACP port priority is used as the priority for the

connection port to be selected by the link aggregation group. A smaller value has a

higher priority. If the priority is the same, the port with a smaller number has the higher

priority in port selection.

It indicates the priority of port selection in the local device. The final port selection for the

final connection depends on the LACP system priority.

However, this definition is no use if the active or passive is not specified for the

linkaggregation operation mode of "the linkaggregation mode".

Default

It is assumed that 32768 has been specified as the LACP port priority.

ether <number> lacp port-priority 32768

Port Information Settings

146

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.8

ether L3 Monitor Information

This section explains about the commands related to ether L3 monitor information.

5.1.8.1 ether icmpwatch address

Function

Set the destination address for Ethernet L3 monitoring.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> icmpwatch address <dst_addr>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<dst_addr>

• Destination IP address of ICMP ECHO packets

Specify the destination IP address to be monitored.

The allowable range is as follows:

1.0.0.1to 126.255.255.254

128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254

192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the operation information for destination monitoring.

The ICMP ECHO packet is sent from the specified Ethernet port to the destination IP

address specified by <dst_addr>, and its presence is checked by receiving a response.

Caution

Do not set the IP address of the local device in <dst_addr>. Also, make sure that the

specified IP address is included in the same subnet.

If any of the above three addresses are specified, the Ethernet L3 monitoring function will

not operate normally.

If the ether type is linkaggregation

The Ethernet L3 monitoring definition that has been set for the Ethernet port is disabled.

Set the Ethernet L3 monitoring definition for the "linkaggregation icmpwatch".

When using both the backup port function and the Ethernet L3 monitoring

function

The active port is monitored.

When a port is first linked up, it is used as the operation port in the earlier mode.

Therefore, set the port monitoring for both the master and backup ports.

Default

It is assumed that the Ethernet L3 monitoring function is not used.

Port Information Settings

147

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.8.2 ether icmpwatch interval

Function

Set various types of "ether" L3 monitoring intervals.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> icmpwatch interval <interval> <timeout> [<retry>]

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

• Transmission interval of normal ICMP ECHO packets

Specify the transmission interval of normal ICMP ECHO packets to be within the range

of 1 to 60 seconds (or 1 minute).

The unit shall be m (minute) or s (second).

• Monitoring timeout

Specify the monitoring timeout period as between 5 to 180 seconds (or 3 minutes). If

the time exceeds, the monitoring is considered as failed.

The unit should be in m (minute) or s (second).

<retry>

• Retransmission interval of ICMP ECHO packets

Specify the retransmission interval of ICMP ECHO packets between 1 to <timeout>-1

seconds if the normal ICMP ECHO packet transmission is not acknowledged.

The unit should be in m (minute) or s (second).

The default is 1s.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the operation information for destination monitoring.

The destination is monitored in <interval> when the response of ICMP ECHO packet is

normally received.

If the response to ICMP ECHO packet is not received, the packet is resent by the <retry>.

If no response is returned within the time period specified in the <timeout>, an error is

detected assuming that any fault occurs and the Ethernet port specified in the <number>

goes offline.

Caution

Default

If ports go offline, release them with the "online" command.

It is assumed that the 10-second transmission interval during normal communication, the

5-second timeout for monitoring, and the 1-second retransmission interval have been

specified.

ether <number> icmpwatch interval 10s 5s 1s

Port Information Settings

148

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.9

ether SNMP Information

This section explains about the commands related to ether SNMP Information.

5.1.9.1 ether snmp trap linkdown

Function

Enable/disable a linkdown trap for a specified ether port.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> snmp trap linkdown <mode>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<mode>

Enable or disable linkdown trapping for the specified port(s).

• enable

Enable trapping.

• disable

Disable trapping.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Enable or disable the linkdown trap for the specified ether port(s).

The "snmp trap linkdown" command has a priority over this command.

It is assumed that the linkdown trap is enabled for all ports.

Default

ether <number> snmp trap linkdown enable

Port Information Settings

149

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.9.2 ether snmp trap linkup

Function

Enable/disable a linkup trap for a specified ether port.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> snmp trap linkup <mode>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<mode>

Enable or disable linkup trapping for the specified port(s).

• enable

Enable trapping.

• disable

Disable trapping.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Enable or disable the linkup trap for the specified ether port(s).

The "snmp trap linkup" command has a priority over this command.

It is assumed that the linkup trap is enabled.

Default

ether <number> snmp trap linkup enable

Port Information Settings

150

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.1.10 ether output rate control information

This section explains about the commands related to ether output rate control information.

5.1.10.1 ether ratecontrol

Function

Set output rate limit of ether port

Available Model XG2600

Syntax

ether <number> ratecontrol <rate>

Options

• ether port number

Set a port number to use with a decimal value.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

<rate>

• Output rate

Specify output rate which is limited in the ether port with Mbps or Gbps

40m to 10000m

1g to 10g

If "10000m" or "10g" is set, packets are not limited.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set output rate control.

"ether qos mode drr" command and "ether ratecontrol" command can not use at the

same time and same port.

Default

It is assumed that the output rate limit function is not used.

Port Information Settings

151

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.2 LACP Information Settings

This section explains about LACP information settings.

5.2.1

LACP Information

This section explains about the commands related to LACP information.

5.2.1.1 lacp system-priority

Function

Set the LACP system priority.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lacp system-priority <priority>

Options

• Priority of LACP system

Set the device priority with a decimal value from 1 to 65535.

A smaller value has a higher priority.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the priority of LACP system. The LACP system priority is used to determine which

has a higher priority for the information exchange between a link aggregation group and

another remote link aggregation group. If the priority is same, the system ID (the

designated MAC address +1) with a smaller number has the higher priority.

However, this definition is meaningless if the active or passive is not set for the

linkaggregation operation mode of the "linkaggregation mode".

Default

It is assumed that 32768 has been specified as the LACP system priority.

lacp system-priority 32768

LACP Information Settings

152

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.2.1.2 lacp bpdu

Function

Set the BPDU forwarding mode of the LACP.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lacp bpdu <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Specify the BPDU forwarding mode.

• off

Specify the BPDU discarding mode.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the BPDU forwarding mode of the LACP.

Set whether or not to forward a BPDU frame when the LACP function has been disabled.

However, the BPDU frame forwarding is disabled if the link aggregation is not set for the

device.

Caution

Default

The BPDU frame, which is not provided with the VLAN tag, is forwarded based on the

receive port setting without the VLAN tag if the BPDU forwarding mode is specified.

It is assumed that discarding mode is specified as BPDU forwarding mode of LACP.

lacp bpdu off

LACP Information Settings

153

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.3 VLAN Information Settings

This section explains about VLAN information settings.

VLAN ID allowed range

The VLAN ID, which is to be specified in <vid> of [Options] described in each command of this section, shall be within

the range specified as shown below.

Range

1 to 4094

Model

XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

5.3.1

VLAN Common Information

This section explains about the commands related to VLAN common information.

5.3.1.1 vlan name

Function

Set the VLAN name.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

vlan <vid> name <name>

Options

<vid>

• VLAN ID

Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.

VLAN1 has been defined as the default port VLAN during device startup, and it has

been registered as the "default" VLAN name.

<name>

• VLAN name

Specify the VLAN name using up to 32 characters from the 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e ASCII

set.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set a VLAN name.

If this command is omitted, VLAN1 is set to the "default".

If a VLAN other than VLAN1 is created, it is set in the 'v'+<vid> format.

(Example: If vid=5, "v5" is set.)

Caution

Default

If "delete vlan <vid> name" is specified, the VLAN name is initialized but the VLAN itself

is not deleted. (The VLAN can be deleted by the "ether vlan" command.)

When VLAN ID is 1

vlan 1 name default

When VLAN ID is other than 1

vlan <vid> name 'v'+<vid>

VLAN Information Settings

154

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.3.1.2 vlan protocol

Function

Set the protocol VLAN.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

vlan <vid> protocol <protocol-type>

vlan <vid> protocol <count> <frame-type> <ether-type>

Options

<vid>

• VLAN ID

Specify a decimal VLAN ID from 2 to 4094.

<protocol-type>

Select a system-defined protocol type.

• ipv4 : EthernetII Ethertype=0800,0806,8035

• ipv6 : EthernetII Ethertype=86dd

• fna

: 802.3LLC LSAP=8080,0000,0001

[XG2600] The fna protocol can be assigned only untagged frames.

<count>

• Protocol definition number

Specify a decimal protocol definition value from 0 to 7 if the protocol is defined by the

user.

[XG2600]

<frame-type>

Specify it if the protocol is defined by the user.

• ethertype

Ethernet II or IEEE 802.3s with SNAP format frames

• llc

IEEE 802.3 with LLC format frames

<ether-type>

Specify the Ethertype or LLC value if the protocol is defined by the user.

• Specify the Ethertype value for Ethernet II format or IEEE 802.3 SNAP format frames,

or specify an LLC value (DSAP or SSAP) for IEEE 802.3 LLC format frames, using a 4-

digit hexadecimal value (from 0000 to ffff).

Setting example)

ipx

: ethertype=8137,8138

appletalk : ethertype=809b,80f3

• This device can't appreciate Ethernet II format from IEEE 802.3 SNAP format.

If you use appletalk (SNAP format) protocol, please check on there is no Ethernet II

format frame using same ether-type of appletalk.

[XG0224/XG0448]

<frame-type>

Specify it if the protocol is defined by the user.

• ethertype

Ethernet II format frames

• snap

IEEE 802.3s with SNAP format frames

• llc

IEEE 802.3 with LLC format frames

VLAN Information Settings

155

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

<ether-type>

Specify the Ethertype or LLC value if the protocol is defined by the user.

• Specify the Ethertype value for Ethernet II format or IEEE 802.3 SNAP format frames,

or specify an LLC value (DSAP or SSAP) for IEEE 802.3 LLC format frames, using a 4-

digit hexadecimal value (from 0000 to ffff).

Setting example)

ipx

: ethertype=8137,8138

appletalk : ethertype=809b,80f3

• If EthernetII format was specified, the EtherType value = 0000 to 05ff setting is

disabled.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the protocol VLAN conditions using this command.

The protocol can be set by one of the following two methods.

• Selecting a system-defined protocol (ipv4/ipv6/fna).

• Directly specifying a protocol type in the user definition.

Caution

• No protocol VLANs can be set for the default VLAN (VLAN ID=1).

• Up to 8 definitions can be given to set the user-defined protocol conditions for the

entire device.

• Both the system-defined <protocol-type> definition and the user definition cannot be

specified in the same VLAN all together.

• The same protocol definition as the system-defined <protocol-type> definition can be

used as the user definition.

However, if these definitions compete against each other on the same port, only the

VLAN with a smaller identification number will be enabled. For example, the following

can be set:

ether 1 vlan untag 10

ether 2 vlan untag 20

vlan 10 protocol ipv4

vlan 20 protocol 0 ethertype 0800

However, if "ether 1 vlan untag 10,20" is set for the Ethernet port, the ether1 port is

included in VLAN10 but not included in VLAN20.

• The same protocol definition can be used for multiple different VLANs.

However, if those VLANs compete against each other on the same port, only the VLAN

with a smaller identification number will be enabled. For example, the following can be

set:

ether 1 vlan untag 10

ether 2 vlan untag 20

vlan 10 protocol ipv4

vlan 20 protocol ipv4

However, if "ether 1 vlan untag 10,20" is set for the Ethernet port, the ether1 port is

included in VLAN10 but not included in VLAN20.

• If the protocol type differs, multiple protocol VLANs can be set on the same port. For

example, the following can be set:

ether 1 vlan untag 10,20

vlan 10 protocol ipv4

vlan 20 protocol ipv6

• If "delete vlan <vid> protocol" is set, all VLAN protocol conditions are deleted, but the

VLAN itself is not deleted. (The VLAN can be deleted by the "ether vlan" command.)

VLAN Information Settings

156

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

[XG2600]

• The Max definition number of "vlan protocol" definitions is 16.

• If there are "vlan protocol" definitions over 16, the definition, the VLAN and the ports

belong to the VLAN are invalid.

• The "vlan protocol" definition uses the ACL resources,please refer "ether macfilter",

"ether qos aclmap", "vlan macfilter", "vlan qos aclmap", "lan ip filter", "lan ip dscp".

• The fna protocol can be assigned only untagged frames.

Default

N/A

VLAN Information Settings

157

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.3.1.3 vlan forward

Function

Set static forwarding rules setting.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

vlan <vid> forward <count> <dst_addr> <port>

Options

<vid>

• VLAN ID

Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.

<count>

• Definition number

Specify it with a decimal value from 0 to 399.

<dst_addr>

• Destination MAC address

Specify the MAC address to be added statically to the learning table.

(It must be in the xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format, where "xx" is a 2-digit hexadecimal value.)

<port>

• ether port number

Specify the Ethernet port number using a decimal value.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set static forwarding rules.

• Address 00:00:00:00:00:00, the broadcast address, or multicast address, option

cannot be specified in <dst_addr>.

• This setting is disabled if VLAN specified in <vid> is not registered.

• This setting is disabled if the port specified by <port> is not set in the VLAN specified

by <vid>.

• If the port specified by <port> is a member of link aggregation ports, set it to forward

packets to the link aggregation ports.

• If the port specified by <port> is a backup port, set it to forward packets to the port used

for the backup port.

Default

N/A

VLAN Information Settings

158

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.3.1.4 vlan description

Function

Set description for VLAN

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

vlan <vid> description <description>

Options

<vid>

• VLAN ID

Specify VLAN ID with a decimal value from 0 to 4094

• Description

Specify the VLAN description using up to 32 characters from the 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e

ASCII set.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set description for VLAN

N/A

VLAN Information Settings

159

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.3.2

IGMP Snooping Information

This section explains about the commands related to IGMP snooping information.

5.3.2.1 vlan igmpsnoop router

Function

Set the multicast router port.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

vlan <vid> igmpsnoop router <mode> [<portlist>]

Options

<vid>

• VLAN ID

Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.

<mode>

Specify how to determine the multicast router port.

• auto

Determine the multicast router port dynamically.

• yes

Specify the multicast router port statically.

Only the ports specified by <portlist> are set as the router ports.

The <portlist> option must be specified if this mode is selected.

Specify a list of multicast router ports. This option can be specified only if the static mode

has been selected.

When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,). Also, when

specifying a range of values, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example:"1-3")

The available description format is as follows:

• To specify 1, 2, 3, 5 and 7 as the portlist:

Example: 1-3,5,7

• To specify 1, 3 and 5 as the portlist:

Example: 1,3,5

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify the multicast router connection port.

• This setting is enabled only when IGMP snooping is set to use.

This setting is ignored if IGMP snooping is not used.

• If multicast routers are connected to two or more ports of the same VLAN, set it

statically without fail. If "auto" is defined, the communication may fail.

• When connecting multiple devices to each other when IGMP snooping is enabled for

the devices, set the port as the multicast router port.

Default

It is assumed that the multicast router port is determined dynamically.

vlan <vid> igmpsnoop router auto

VLAN Information Settings

160

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.3.2.2 vlan igmpsnoop querier

Function

Set the Querier operations.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

vlan <vid> igmpsnoop querier <mode>

Options

<vid>

• VLAN ID

Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.

<mode>

• on

Specify the Querier operation mode if no multicast router exists.

• off

Do not operate as the Querier regardless of whether the multicast router exists or not.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify the querier operation mode.

• If the querier operation is disabled and the multicast router does not exist, multicast

forwarding is stopped.

• This setting is enabled only when IGMP snooping is used.

This setting is ignored if IGMP snooping is not used.

Default

It is operated as Querier if no multicast router exists.

vlan <vid> igmpsnoop querier on

VLAN Information Settings

161

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.3.2.3 vlan igmpsnoop source

Function

Set the IP address to be used for IGMP snooping.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

vlan <vid> igmpsnoop source <address>

Options

<vid>

• VLAN ID

Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.

Specify the source IP address to be used for IGMP snooping.

This IP address is used as the source address for all IGMP packets.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify the source address of IGMP packets sent by IGMP snooping.

• This setting is enabled only when IGMP snooping is set to use.

This setting is ignored if IGMP snooping is not used.

• When IGMP snooping is used, set the Querier IP address.

• To make the querier operation enabled, set an address whose value is greater than the

multicast router address.

• When connecting multiple IGMP snooping devices, do not set the addresses of two or

more devices within the same VLAN.

Default

IGMP packets are sent with the source address 0.0.0.0.

vlan <vid> igmpsnoop source 0.0.0.0

VLAN Information Settings

162

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.3.2.4 vlan igmpsnoop proxy

Function

Set the IGMP proxy mode.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

vlan <vid> igmpsnoop proxy <mode>

Options

<vid>

• VLAN ID

Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.

<mode>

Specify the proxy response mode.

• off

Do not respond any IGMP packet.

• on

Proxy responds to a querier.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify the IGMP proxy's response transmission mode. If a device that uses IGMP v1

exists, specify "off".

Caution

Default

This setting is enabled only when IGMP snooping is set to use.

This setting is ignored if IGMP snooping is not used.

The proxy response "off" mode is applied.

vlan <vid> igmpsnoop proxy off

VLAN Information Settings

163

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.3.3

Filter Information

This section explains about the commands related to filter information.

5.3.3.1 vlan macfilter

Function

Set the MAC filter for VLAN.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

vlan <vid> macfilter <count> <action> <acl>

Options

<vid>

• VLAN ID

Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.

<count>

• Priority

Set the filtering priority to be specified with a decimal value.

A smaller value has a higher priority.

The specified value is sorted and renumbered in sequence. If a filtering definition with

the same value already exists, the existing one will be changed.

Range

Model

0 to 511

0 to 63

XG0224 / XG0448

XG2600

• pass

Transmit the packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp"

or "acl udp" definition of access control list.

• reject

Discard the packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or

"acl udp" definition of access control list.

<acl>

• ACL definition number

Specify the ACL definition number of the access control list where the packet pattern to

be filtered has been defined.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set MAC filtering for each VLAN.

For the input packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or

"acl udp" definitions of the access control list which has been specified by <acl>, the filter

processing is executed in the way as specified by <action>.

VLAN Information Settings

164

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Caution

Note 1.

If none of "acl mac", "acl vlan" and "acl ip" definitions exist on the access control list

which has been specified by <acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not

exist, the packets are not filtered.

Note 2.

The packet filtering default value is "pass".

No packets are filtered if only "pass" is set in <action>.

[XG2600]

Note 3.

"acl mac llc" definitions can not filter llc frames with the VLAN tag.

Note 4.

This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.

The allowable upper limits are as follows.

• Upper limit based on "commands"

64 commands for the entire device.

Up to 64 commands can be set for the entire device, including the"ether macfilter"",

"vlan macfilter", "lan ip filter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan qos aclmap", "lan ip dscp"

commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "ether macfilter" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

2) "vlan macfilter" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

3) "lan ip filter" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

4) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

5) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

6) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

• Upper limit based on "masks"

64 masks for the entire device.

Up to 64 masks can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter", "vlan

macfilter", "lan ip filter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan qos aclmap", "lan ip dscp", "vlan

protocol" commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "vlan protocol" commands

2) "ether macfilter" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

3) "vlan macfilter" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

4) "lan ip filter" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

VLAN Information Settings

165

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

6) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

7) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

The number of masks that each command use depends on applied ACL.

When Multiple ACL are applied, the number of masks amount to sum total, and

depends on ACLs the number of masks amount to less than sum total.

The following is the number of masks for ACL.

ACL

number of masks

"acl mac"

define LSAP of llc

not define LSAP of llc

"acl vlan"

not define src IP address

not define tos/dscp value

define src IP address

not define dst IP address

define dst IP address

use same netmask for src and dst IP address

not define tos/dscp value

use different netmask for src and dst IP address

The following is the number of masks for "vlan protocol" command.

"vlan protocol" definition

define vlan protocol ipv4

number of masks

define vlan protocol ipv6

define vlan protocol <count> ether

define vlan protocol <count> llc

• Upper limit based on "actions"

16 actions for the entire device.

Up to16 actions can be set for the entire device, including the "ether qos aclmap", "vlan

qos aclmap", "lan ip dscp", "vlan protocol" commands.

The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.

1) "vlan protocol" commands

2) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

3) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

VLAN Information Settings

166

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

4) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.

- vlan <vid> protocol ipv4

- vlan <vid> protocol ipv6

The following commands spend 1 action for each.

If same <tos_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

If same <dscp_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

If same <queue_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>

- ether <number >qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>

- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>

- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>

- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>

- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>

- lan <number> ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <dscp_value>

The following commands spend 1 action for each.

If same <vid> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

- vlan <vid> protocol <count> ether

- vlan <vid> protocol <count> llc

[XG0224/XG0448]

Note 3.

This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.

The allowable upper limits are as follows.

• Upper limit based on "commands"

128 commands for the entire device.

Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter",

"vlan macfilter" and "lan ip filter" commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "ether macfilter" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

2) "vlan macfilter" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

3) "lan ip filter" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

If up to 128 of "ether macfilter" commands have been defined for port ether1, the

subsequent "vlan macfilter" and "lan ip filter" command will be no longer applied.

• Upper limit based on rule

128 rules for the entire device.

For the "ether macfilter", "vlan macfilter" and "lan ip filter" commands, the number of

rules to be used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.

The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.

- For ACL to set TCP or UDP

Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of

destination ports for TCP or UDP

VLAN Information Settings

167

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

- For ACL to set ICMP

Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of

ICMP CODEs for ICMP

- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP

You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and

change resource distribution.

Note 4.

Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which

It is assumed that this option has not been set.refer to ACL such as "ether macfilter",

"ether qos aclmap", "vlan macfilter", "vlan ip6filter", "vlan qos aclmap", "vlan ip6qos

aclmap", "lan ip filter", "lan ip dscp", "lan ip6 filter", "lan ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter"

commands.

Default

It is assumed that this option has not been set.

VLAN Information Settings

168

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.3.3.2 vlan macfilter move

Function

Change the priority of VLAN MAC filter.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

vlan <vid> macfilter move <count> <new_count>

Options

<vid>

• VLAN ID

Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.

<count>

• Source priority

Set the source priority with a decimal value.

<new_count>

• Destination priority

Set the destination priority with a decimal value.

Range

Model

0 to 511

XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Change the priority of MAC filtering for each VLAN.

If the current priority is set as <count>, change the priority of this definition to

<new_count>.

When the definition is changed, the priority is renumbered.

Default

N/A due to an edit command.

VLAN Information Settings

169

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.3.3.3 vlan ip6filter

Function

Set VLAN IPv6 filter

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448

Syntax

vlan <vid> ip6filter <count> <action> <acl>

Options

<vid>

• VLAN ID

Specify the VLAN ID with a decimal value from 1 to 4094.

<count>

• Priority

Set the filtering priority with a decimal value

A smaller value has a higher priority.

Range

0 to 511

Model

XG0224 / XG0448

• pass

Pass the packets which match "acl ip6", "acl icmp", "acl tcp" and "acl udp"

• reject

Discard the packets which match "acl ip6", "acl icmp", "acl tcp" and "acl udp"

<acl>

• ACL definition number

Specify the ACL definition number which is used for the filter

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set IPv6 filtering per VLAN

Action specified in <action> works packets which match access control list which is

defined in "acl ip6", "acl icmp", "acl tcp" and "acl udp"

Caution

Note 1.

If none of "acl ip6" definition exist on the access control list which has been specified by

<acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not exist, the packets are not

filtered.

Note 2.

The packet filtering default value is "pass".

No packets are filtered if only "pass" is set in <action>.

Note 3.

This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.

The allowable upper limits are as follows.

• Upper limit based on "commands"

128 commands for the entire device.

Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "vlan ip6filter" and

"lan ip6 filter" commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

VLAN Information Settings

170

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

1) "vlan ip6filter" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

2) "lan ip6 filter" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

If up to 128 of "vlan ip6filter" commands have been defined, the subsequent "lan ip6

filter" command will be no longer applied.

• Upper limit based on rule

128 rules for the entire device.

For the "vlan ip6filter" and "lan ip6 filter" commands, the number of rules to be used

varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.

The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.

- For ACL to set TCP or UDP

Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of

destination ports for TCP or UDP

- For ACL to set ICMP

Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of

ICMP CODEs for ICMP

- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP

You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and change

resource distribution.

Note 4.

Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer

to ACL such as "ether macfilter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan macfilter", "vlan ip6filter",

"vlan qos aclmap", "vlan ip6qos aclmap", "lan ip filter", "lan ip dscp", "lan ip6 filter", "lan

ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.

Default

N/A

VLAN Information Settings

171

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.3.3.4 vlan ip6filter move

Function

Change the priority of VLAN IPv6 filter

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448

Syntax

vlan <vid> ip6filter move <count> <new_count>

Options

<vid>

• VLAN ID

Specify VLAN ID with a decimal value from 1 to 4094

<count>

• Priority

Specify the priority with a decimal value

<new_count>

• New Priority

Specify the new priority with a decimal value

Range

0 to 511

Model

XG0224 / XG0448

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Change the priority of IPv6 filter per VLAN

N/A

VLAN Information Settings

172

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.3.4

QoS Information

This section explains about the commands related to QoS information.

5.3.4.1 vlan qos aclmap

Function

Set the QoS conversion of the VLAN.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> <action> <value> <acl>

Options

<vid>

• VLAN ID

Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.

<count>

• Priority

Set the QoS conversion priority with a decimal value.

A smaller value has a higher priority.

If multiple <action> are executed for the same packet and if they conflict with each

other, the <action> with a higher priority is executed.

The specified value is sorted and renumbered in sequence. If a filtering definition with

the same value already exists, the existing one will be changed.

Range

Model

0 to 511

0 to 63

XG0224 / XG0448

XG2600

• cos [XG0224/XG0448]

Rewrite the "cos" value (the "user priority" value in the Tag Control Information (TCI)

field of the Tagged VLAN) of packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl

icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition of access control list.

• dscp

Rewrite the "dscp" value (the high-order 6 bits in the TOS field of IP header), if packets

that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition

of access control list are IP packets.

• tos

Rewrite the "ip precedence" value (the high-order 3 bits in the TOS field of IP header),

if packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp"

definition of access control list are IP packets.

• queue

Change the queue at the output port that is used to output the input packets that match

the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition of access

control list.

<value>

• Replacing value

If "cos" is selected in <action>:

- <cos_value>

Set the replaced "cos" value with a decimal value from 0 to 7.

- tos

Replace the "cos" value with the "ip precedence" value in the packet.

VLAN Information Settings

173

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

If "dscp" is selected in <action>:

- <dscp_value>

Set the replaced "dscp" value with a decimal value from 0 to 63.

If "tos" is selected in <action>:

- <tos_value>

Set the replaced "ip precedence" value with a decimal value from 0 to 7.

- cos

Replace the "ip precedence" value with the "cos" value.

If "queue" is selected in <action>:

- <queue_value>

Specify a queue number of the output port to be used.

A larger value indicates a queue with a higher output priority.

Range

Model

0 to 7

XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

<acl>

• ACL definition number

Specify the ACL definition number of the access control list where the packet pattern to

configure QoS conversion has been defined.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the QoS (quality of service) of each Ethernet port.

For the ingress packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp",

or "acl udp" definitions of the access control list which has been specified by <acl>, the

QoS processing is executed in the way as specified by <action>.

Caution

Note 1.

If none of "acl mac", "acl vlan" and "acl ip" definitions exist on the access control list

which has been specified by <acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not

exist, the packets are not filtered.

[XG2600]

Note 2.

If a queue is selected by <action> and if this queue has not been associated with the cos

value by the "ether qos prioritymap" command, the QoS processing is not executed.

Note 3.

"acl mac llc" definitions can not filter llc frames with the VLAN tag.

Note 4.

This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.

The allowable upper limits are as follows.

• Upper limit based on "commands"

64 commands for the entire device.

Up to 64 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter",

"vlan macfilter", "lan ip filter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan qos aclmap", "lan ip dscp"

commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

VLAN Information Settings

174

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

1) "ether macfilter" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

2) "vlan macfilter" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

3) "lan ip filter" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

4) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

5) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

6) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

• Upper limit based on "masks"

64 masks for the entire device.

Up to 64 masks can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter", "vlan

macfilter", "lan ip filter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan qos aclmap", "lan ip dscp", "vlan

protocol" commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "vlan protocol" commands

2) "ether macfilter" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.A

smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

3) "vlan macfilter" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

4) "lan ip filter" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

5) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

6) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

7) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

VLAN Information Settings

175

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

The number of masks that each command use depends on applied ACL.

When Multiple ACL are applied, the number of masks amount to sum total, and

depends on ACLs the number of masks amount to less than sum total.

The following is the number of masks for ACL..

ACL

number of masks

"acl mac"

define LSAP of llc

not define LSAP of llc

"acl vlan"

not define src IP address

not define tos/dscp value

define src IP address

not define dst IP address

define dst IP address

use same netmask for src and dst IP address

not define tos/dscp value

use different netmask for src and dst IP address

The following is the number of masks for "vlan protocol" command.

"vlan protocol" definition

define vlan protocol ipv4

number of masks

define vlan protocol ipv6

define vlan protocol <count> ether

define vlan protocol <count> llc

• Upper limit based on "actions"

16 actions for the entire device.

Up to16 actions can be set for the entire device, including the "ether qos aclmap", "vlan

qos aclmap", "lan ip dscp", "vlan protocol" commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "vlan protocol" commands

2) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

3) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

4) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.

- vlan <vid> protocol ipv4

- vlan <vid> protocol ipv6

VLAN Information Settings

176

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

The following commands spend 1 action for each.

If same <tos_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

If same <dscp_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

If same <queue_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>

- ether <number >qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>

- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>

- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>

- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>

- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>

- lan <number> ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <dscp_value>

The following commands spend 1 action for each.

If same <vid> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

- vlan <vid> protocol <count> ether

- vlan <vid> protocol <count> llc

[XG0224/XG0448]

Note 2.

If a queue is selected by <action> and if this queue has not been associated with the cos

value by the "qos cosmap" command, the QoS processing is not executed.

Note 3.

This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.

The allowable upper limits are as follows.

• Upper limit based on "commands"

128 commands for the entire device.

Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether qos aclmap",

"vlan qos aclmap" and "lan ip dscp" commands.

1) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port value has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

2) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

3) "lan ip dscp"command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

If up to 128 of "ether qos aclmap" commands have been defined for port ether1, the

subsequent "vlan qos aclmap" and "lan ip dscp" command will be no longer applied.

• Upper limit based on rule

128 rules for the entire device.

For the "ether qos aclmap", "vlan qos aclmap" and "lan ip dscp" commands, the

number of rules to be used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as

shown below.

The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.

- For ACL to set TCP or UDP

Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of

destination ports for TCP or UDP

- For ACL to set ICMP

Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of

ICMP CODEs for ICMP

- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP

VLAN Information Settings

177

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and change

resource distribution.

Note 4.

Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer

to ACL such as "ether macfilter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan macfilter", "vlan ip6filter",

"vlan qos aclmap", "vlan ip6qos aclmap", "lan ip filter", "lan ip dscp", "lan ip6 filter", "lan

ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.

Default

It is assumed that this option has not been set.

5.3.4.2 vlan ip6qos aclmap

Function

Set IPv6 QoS of VLAN

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448

Syntax

vlan <vid> ip6qos aclmap <count> <action> <value> <acl>

Options

<vid>

• VLAN ID

Specify the VLAN ID with a decimal value from 1 to 4094

<count>

• Prioruty

Specify the priority of the QoS definition with a decimal value

A smaller value is a higher priority

If multiple <action> are executed for the same packet and if they conflict with each

other, the <action> with a higher priority is executed.

The specified value is sorted and renumbered in sequence. If a filtering definition with

the same value already exists, the existing one will be changed.

Range

0 to 511

Model

XG0224 / XG0448

• dscp

Rewrite the "dscp" value (the high-order 6 bits in the Traffic class field of IPv6 header),

if packets thatmatch the "acl ip6", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition of access

control list are IP packets.

• queue

Change the queue at the output port that is used to output the input packets that match

the"acl ip6", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition of access control list.

<value>

• Rewrite Value

If dscp is selected in <action>:

• <dscp_value>

Set the rewrite "dscp" value with a decimal value from 0 to 63

If queue is selected in <action>:

• <queue_value>

Specify a queue number of the output port to be used. A larger value indicates a queue

with a higher output priority.

Range

Model

0 to 7

XG0224 / XG0448

VLAN Information Settings

178

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

<acl>

• ACL definition number

Specify the ACL definition number of the access control list where the packet pattern to

configure QoS conversion has been defined.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set IPv6 QoS per VLAN

For the input packets that match the "acl ipv6", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp"

definitions of the access control list which has been specified by <acl>, the QoS

processing is executed in the way as specified by <action>.

Caution

Note1.

If none of "acl ip6" definition exist on the access control list which has been specified by

<acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not exist, the QoS processing is

not applied to those packets.

Note2.

If a queue is selected in <action> and if this queue has not been associated with the

priority by the "qos cosmap" command, the QoS processing is not executed.

Note 3.

This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.

The allowable upper limits are as follows.

• Upper limit based on "commands"

128 commands for the entire device.

Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "vlan ip6qos

aclmap" and "lan ip6 dscp" commands.

1) "vlan ip6qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

2) "lan ip6 dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

If up to 128 of "vlan ip6qos aclmap" commands have been defined, the subsequent "lan

ip6 dscp"command will be no longer applied.

• Upper limit based on rule

128 rules for the entire device.

For the "vlan ip6qos aclmap" and "lan ip6 dscp" commands, the number of rules to be

used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.

The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.

- For ACL to set TCP or UDP

Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of

destination ports for TCP or UDP

- For ACL to set ICMP

Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of

ICMP CODEs for ICMP

- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP

You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and change

resource distribution.

VLAN Information Settings

179

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Note 4.

Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer

to ACL such as "ether macfilter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan macfilter", "vlan ip6filter",

"vlan qos aclmap", "vlan ip6qos aclmap", "lan ip filter", "lan ip dscp", "lan ip6 filter", "lan

ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.

Default

N/A

5.3.4.3 vlan ip6qos aclmap move

Function

Change the priority of IPv6 QoS for VLAN

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448

Options

<vid>

• VLAN ID

Specify the VLAN ID with a decimal value from 1 to 4094

<count>

• Priority

Specify the priority with a decimal value

<new_count>

• New Priority

Specify the new priority with a decimal value

Range

Model

0 to 511

XG0224 / XG0448

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Change the priority of IPv6 QoS definition per VLAN

If the current priority is set as <count>, change the priority of this definition to

<new_count>. When the definition is changed, the priority is renumbered.

Default

N/A

VLAN Information Settings

180

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.4 MAC Information

This section explains about MAC information.

5.4.1

MAC Information

This section explains about the commands related to MAC information.

5.4.1.1 mac learning

Function

Set the MAC address learning.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

mac learning <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable automatic learning of the MAC address.

• off

Disable automatic learning of the MAC address.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set to enable or disable the automatic MAC address learning.

It is assumed that MAC address learning is specified as enable.

mac learning on

MAC Information

181

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.4.1.2 mac age

Function

Set the aging-out time of MAC address learning table.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

mac age <time>

Options

<time>

• Aging-out time

Set the aging-out time of MAC address learning table in seconds.

Range

10 to 1,000,000

10 to 3,500

Model

XG0224 / XG0448

XG2600

• Values can be set within the range of 10 to 1,000,000 seconds. (Default value is set to

300 seconds.)

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the aging-out time of MAC address learning table.

It is assumed that the aging-out time of MAC address learning table is set to 300sec.

mac age 300

MAC Information

182

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5 LAN Information Settings

This section explains about LAN information settings.

Allowed range of lan definition numbers

The lan definition serial number (decimal value), which is to be specified in <number> ("lan" definition number) of

[Options] described in each command of this section, shall be within the range for each model as shown below.

Range

Model

0 to 99

XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

5.5.1

IPv4 Related Information

This section explains about the commands related to IPv4 related information.

5.5.1.1 lan description

Function

Define the text description for a lan interface.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lan <number> description <description>

Options

• lan definition number

Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.

The default is 0.

• Description

Define the description text for a lan with up to 50 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e of

ASCII code.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Defines the description for a lan interface.

This description is used also for the SNMP agent function.

The SNMP agent function sets this description to ifAlias MIB (OID:1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.18).

Default

No lan interface description is defined.

LAN Information Settings

183

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.1.2 lan ip address

Function

Set the IP address.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lan [<number>] ip address <address>/<mask> <broadcast>

Options

• lan definition number

Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.

The default is 0.

• IP address/number of mask bits (or mask value)

Specify a combination of the IP address and the number of mask bits to be assigned to

the LAN interface. For the mask value, specify successive 1s following the most

significant bit (MSB).

The allowable range of IP addresses is as follows:

0.0.0.0

1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254

128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254

192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

For the number of mask bits, specify a decimal value from 2 to 30.

For the mask value, specify a number 192.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.252.

The available description format is as follows:

• IP address/number of mask bits (Example: 192.168.1.1/24)

• IP address/mask value (Example: 192.168.1.1/255.255.255.0)

Specify a broadcast address.

• 0

Specify it for 0.0.0.0.

• 1

Specify it for 255.255.255.255.

• 2

Specify it when "network address + all 1s" is obtained from "<address>/<mask>".

• 3

Specify it when "network address + all 1s" is obtained from "<address>/<mask>".

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the IP address, number of mask bits (or mask value), and broadcast address for the

LAN interface on this device.

Default

It is assumed that the IP address is not specified.

lan <number> ip address 0.0.0.0/0 0

LAN Information Settings

184

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.1.3 lan ip route

Function

Set the IPv4 static route information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lan [<number>] ip route <count> <address>/<mask> <next_hop> [<distance>]

Options

• lan definition number

Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.

The default is 0.

<count>

• Static route information definition number

Specify a static route information definition number with a decimal value.

Range

0 to 199

Model

XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

• IPv4 address/number of mask bits (or mask value)

Specify a destination network with a combination of the IPv4 address and the number

of mask bits.

For the mask value, specify successive 1s following the most significant bit (MSB).

The available description format is as follows:

- IPv4 address/number of mask bits (Example: 192.168.1.0/24)

- IPv4 address/mask value (Example: 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0)

• default

Specify it when the default route is set as a destination network.

Specifying 0.0.0.0/0(0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0) has the same meaning.

<next_hop>

• IPv4 address of next_hop router

Specify the IPv4 address of the next_hop router to send packets to the destination

network.

• Priority

Specify the static route information priority with a decimal value from 1 to 254.

A smaller value has a higher priority.

The default is 1.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the IPv4 static route information.

Up to 4 IPv4 static route information can be defined for the product as a whole.

Max definition number

Model

200

XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Caution

Default

Default routes can not be set with same priority.

It is assumed that the IPv4 static route information is not used.

LAN Information Settings

185

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.1.4 lan ip filter

Function

Set the IP filter.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lan [<number>] ip filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>

Options

• lan definition number

Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.

The default is 0.

<count>

• Filtering definition number

Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value.

The specified value is sorted and renumbered in sequence. If a filtering definition with

the same value already exists, the existing one will be changed.

Range

Model

0 to 511

0 to 63

XG0224 / XG0448

XG2600

Set whether or not to transmit the packet to be filtered.

• pass

Transmit the relevant packet.

• reject

Block the relevant packet.

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.

If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not defined, the filtering definition will be disabled

and ignored.

Use the following ACL definition for IP filter.

- ip

If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.

- tcp

Available only when "6" is set in <protocol> of ip.

Otherwise, the set value is ignored.

If the tcp value is not set while "6" is set in <protocol> of ip, each value of tcp will be

assumed to be "any".

- udp

Available only when "17" is set in <protocol> of ip.

Otherwise, the set value is ignored.

If the udp value is not set while "17" is set in <protocol> of ip, each value of udp is

assumed to be "any".

- icmp

Available only when "1" is set in <protocol> of ip.

Otherwise, the set value is ignored.

If the icmp value is not set while "1" is set in <protocol> of ip, each value of icmp will

be assumed to be "any".

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

LAN Information Settings

186

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Explanation

Set the IP filter for the LAN interface.

The IP filter is used to transmit or reject packets that have matched the address, protocol,

TOS or DSCP value, port number, ICMP TYPE, and ICMP CODE specified in ACL.

Checking whether the conditions are satisfied or not according to the set priority, if a

packet that has satisfied those conditions is found, it is filtered, and the subsequent

setting will be ignored.

A packet that has not satisfied any conditions will be transmitted.

Caution

Note 1.

If none of "acl ip" definition exist on the access control list which has been specified by

<acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not exist, the packets are not

filtered.

Note 2.

The packet filtering default value is "pass".

No packets are filtered if only "pass" is set in <action>.

[XG2600]

Note 3.

This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.

The allowable upper limits are as follows.

• Upper limit based on "commands"

64 commands for the entire device.

Up to 64 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter",

"vlan macfilter", "lan ip filter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan qos aclmap", "lan ip dscp"

commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "ether macfilter" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

2) "vlan macfilter" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

3) "lan ip filter" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

4) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

5) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

6) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

• Upper limit based on "masks"

64 masks for the entire device.

Up to 64 masks can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter", "vlan

macfilter", "lan ip filter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan qos aclmap", "lan ip dscp", "vlan

protocol" commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "vlan protocol" commands

LAN Information Settings

187

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

2) "ether macfilter" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

3) "vlan macfilter" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

4) "lan ip filter" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

5) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

6) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

7) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

The number of masks that each command use depends on applied ACL.

When Multiple ACL are applied, the number of masks amount to sum total, and

depends on ACLs the number of masks amount to less than sum total.

The following is the number of masks for ACL.

ACL

number of masks

"acl mac"

define LSAP of llc

not define LSAP of llc

"acl vlan"

not define src IP address

not define tos/dscp value

define src IP address

not define dst IP address

define dst IP address

use same netmask for src and dst IP address

not define tos/dscp value

use different netmask for src and dst IP address

The following is the number of masks for "vlan protocol" command.

"vlan protocol" definition

define vlan protocol ipv4

number of masks

define vlan protocol ipv6

define vlan protocol <count> ether

define vlan protocol <count> llc

LAN Information Settings

188

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

• Upper limit based on "actions"

16 actions for the entire device.

Up to16 actions can be set for the entire device, including the "ether qos aclmap", "vlan

qos aclmap", "lan ip dscp", "vlan protocol"commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "vlan protocol" commands

2) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

3) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

4) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.

- vlan <vid> protocol ipv4

- vlan <vid> protocol ipv6

The following commands spend 1 action for each.

If same <tos_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

If same <dscp_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

If same <queue_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>

- ether <number >qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>

- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>

- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>

- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>

- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>

- lan <number> ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <dscp_value>

The following commands spend 1 action for each.

If same <vid> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

- vlan <vid> protocol <count> ether

- vlan <vid> protocol <count> llc

[XG0224/XG0448]

Note 3.

This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.

The allowable upper limits are as follows.

• Upper limit based on "commands"

128 commands for the entire device.

Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter",

"vlan macfilter" and "lan ip filter" commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "ether macfilter" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

2) "vlan macfilter" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

3) "lan ip filter" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

LAN Information Settings

189

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

If up to 128 of "ether macfilter" commands have been defined for port ether1, the

subsequent "vlan macfilter" and "lan ip filter" command will be no longer applied.

• Upper limit based on rule

128 rules for the entire device.

For the "ether macfilter", "vlan macfilter" and "lan ip filter" commands, the number of

rules to be used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.

The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.

- For ACL to set TCP or UDP

Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of

destination ports for TCP or UDP

- For ACL to set ICMP

Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of

ICMP CODEs for ICMP

- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP

You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and change

resource distribution.

Note 4.

Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer

to ACL such as "ether macfilter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan macfilter", "vlan ip6filter",

"vlan qos aclmap", "vlan ip6qos aclmap", "lan ip filter", "lan ip dscp", "lan ip6 filter", "lan

ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.

Default

Transmit all packets, assuming that the IP filter is not set.

LAN Information Settings

190

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.1.5 lan ip filter move

Function

Change the IP filter priority.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lan [<number>] ip filter move <count> <new_count>

Options

• lan definition number

Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.

The default is 0.

<count>

• Target filtering definition number

Specify a filtering definition number to change the priority.

<new_count>

• Destination filtering definition number

Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value.

If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the

existing one.

Range

Model

0 to 511

0 to 63

XG0224 / XG0448

XG2600

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Change the IP filter priority.

Explanation

LAN Information Settings

191

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.1.6 lan ip dscp

Function

Set the DSCP value rewriting conditions.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lan [<number>] ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <new_dscp>

Options

• lan definition number

Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.

The default is 0.

<count>

• DSCP value rewriting definition number

Specify a definition number, which indicates the priority of DSCP value rewriting

conditions, with a decimal value.

The specified value is sorted and renumbered forward when setting was completed.

If any DSCP value rewriting definition with the same definition number exists, the value

of the existing definition will be changed.

Range

Model

0 to 511

0 to 63

XG0224 / XG0448

XG2600

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.

If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not defined, the DSCP value rewriting definition

will be disabled and ignored.

Use the following ACL definition for DSCP value rewriting.

- ip

If the ip value is not set, the DSCP value rewriting definition will be disabled and

ignored.

- tcp

Available only when "6" is set in <protocol> of ip.

Otherwise, the set value is ignored.

If the tcp value is not set while "6" is set in <protocol> of ip, each value of tcp will be

assumed to be "any".

- udp

Available only when "17" is set in <protocol> of ip.

Otherwise, the set value is ignored.

If the udp value is not set while "17" is set in <protocol> of ip, each value of udp is

assumed to be "any".

- icmp

Available only when "1" is set in <protocol> of ip.

Otherwise, the set value is ignored.

If the icmp value is not set while "1" is set in <protocol> of ip, each value of icmp will

be assumed to be "any".

<new_dscp>

• DSCP value

Specify the DSCP value to be rewritten with a decimal value from 0 to 63.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

LAN Information Settings

192

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Explanation

Set DSCP value rewriting conditions.

Rewrite the DSCP value of a packet, which has satisfied conditions, to the specified

DSCP value.

Caution

Note 1.

If none of "acl ip" definition exist on the access control list which has been specified by

<acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not exist, the packets are not

filtered.

[XG2600]

Note 2.

This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.

The allowable upper limits are as follows.

• Upper limit based on "commands"

64 commands for the entire device.

Up to 64 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter",

"vlan macfilter", "lan ip filter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan qos aclmap", "lan ip dscp"

commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "ether macfilter" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

2) "vlan macfilter" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

3) "lan ip filter" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

4) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

5) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

6) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

• Upper limit based on "masks"

64 masks for the entire device.

Up to 64 masks can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter", "vlan

macfilter", "lan ip filter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan qos aclmap", "lan ip dscp", "vlan

protocol" commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "vlan protocol" commands

2) "ether macfilter" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

3) "vlan macfilter" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

4) "lan ip filter" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

LAN Information Settings

193

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

6) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

7) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

The number of masks that each command use depends on applied ACL.

When Multiple ACL are applied, the number of masks amount to sum total, and

depends on ACLs the number of masks amount to less than sum total.

The following is the number of masks for ACL.

ACL

number of masks

"acl mac"

define LSAP of llc

not define LSAP of llc

"acl vlan"

not define src IP address

not define tos/dscp value

define src IP address

not define dst IP address

define dst IP address

use same netmask for src and dst IP address

not define tos/dscp value

use different netmask for src and dst IP address

The following is the number of masks for "vlan protocol" command.

"vlan protocol" definition

define vlan protocol ipv4

number of masks

define vlan protocol ipv6

define vlan protocol <count> ether

define vlan protocol <count> llc

• Upper limit based on "actions"

16 actions for the entire device.

Up to16 actions can be set for the entire device, including the "ether qos aclmap", "vlan

qos aclmap", "lan ip dscp", "vlan protocol" commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "vlan protocol" commands

2) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

3) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

LAN Information Settings

194

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

4) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.

- vlan <vid> protocol ipv4

- vlan <vid> protocol ipv6

The following commands spend 1 action for each.

If same <tos_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

If same <dscp_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

If same <queue_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>

- ether <number >qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>

- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>

- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>

- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>

- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>

- lan <number> ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <dscp_value>

The following commands spend 1 action for each.

If same <vid> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.

- vlan <vid> protocol <count> ether

- vlan <vid> protocol <count> llc

[XG0224/XG0448]

Note 2.

This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.

The allowable upper limits are as follows.

• Upper limit based on "commands"

128 commands for the entire device.

Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether qos aclmap",

"vlan qos aclmap" and "lan ip dscp" commands.

1) "ether qos aclmap" command

A smaller Ethernet port value has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.

2) "vlan qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

3) "lan ip dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

If up to 128 of "ether qos aclmap" commands have been defined for port ether1, the

subsequent "vlan qos aclmap" and "lan ip dscp"command will be no longer applied.

• Upper limit based on rule

128 rules for the entire device.

For the "ether qos aclmap", "vlan qos aclmap" and "lan ip dscp" commands, the

number of rules to be used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as

shown below.

The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.

- For ACL to set TCP or UDP

Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of

destination ports for TCP or UDP

LAN Information Settings

195

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

- For ACL to set ICMP

Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of

ICMP CODEs for ICMP

- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP

You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and change

resource distribution.

Note 4.

Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer

to ACL such as "ether macfilter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan macfilter", "vlan ip6filter",

"vlan qos aclmap", "vlan ip6qos aclmap", "lan ip filter", "lan ip dscp", "lan ip6 filter", "lan

ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.

Default

It is assumed that DSCP value rewriting is not performed.

5.5.1.7 lan ip dscp move

Function

Change the priority of DSCP value rewriting conditions.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lan [<number>] ip dscp move <count> <new_count>

Options

• lan definition number

Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.

The default is 0.

<count>

• Target DSCP value rewriting definition number

Specify a DSCP value rewriting definition number before the priority was changed.

<new_count>

• Destination DSCP value rewriting definition number

Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value.

If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the

existing one.

Range

Model

0 to 511

0 to 63

XG0224 / XG0448

XG2600

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Change the priority of DSCP value rewriting conditions.

LAN Information Settings

196

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.1.8 lan ip arp static

Function

Sets static ARP.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448

Syntax

lan [<number>] ip arp static <count> <dst> <mac>

Options

• Defined LAN number

The sequential number of a LAN definition expressed in base 10.

Default is 0.

<count>

• Static ARP table entry number

The static ARP table entry number, expressed as a base 10 number from 0-199.

If an entry already exists in the table at the entry number specified, the command will

modify the existing entry.

<dst>

• Destination IP address

Specifies the destination IP address to be registered in the static ARP table.

Below are the ranges of IP addresses that may be specified.

<mac>

• MAC address

Specifies the MAC address to use when sending packets to the destination IP address.

Specify in the format xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx (where xx is a two-digit, base 16 value).

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Sets static ARP entries in the ARP table.

Multiple ARP entries may not be made for the same destination IP address.

The static ARP function will not operate for interfaces in which the IP address is not set.

MAC addresses cannot be set to broadcast or multicast.

Default

If unset, the static ARP function will not be used.

LAN Information Settings

197

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.2

IPv6 Related Information

This section explains about the commands related to IPv6 Related Information.

5.5.2.1 lan ip6 use

Function

Set IPv6 function

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lan [<number>] ip6 use <mode>

Options

• lan definition number

Specify lan definition number with a decimal value

<mode>

Specify whether to send and receive IPv6 packets

• on

Enable IPv6

• off

Disable Ipv6

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set IPv6 function

It is assumed that the IPv6 server function is not used.

lan <number> ip6 use off

5.5.2.2 lan ip6 ifid

Function

Set IPv6 interface ID

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lan [<number>] ip6 ifid <interfaceID>

Options

• lan definition number

Specify lan definition number with a decimal value

Specify ID for this interface

• auto

ID with EUI-64 format is created from MAC address

• interface ID

Specify ID for this interface with a hexadecimal number

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set IPv6 interface ID

It is assumed that "auto" has been set.

lan <number> ip6 ifid auto

LAN Information Settings

198

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.2.3 lan ip6 address

Function

Set IPv6 address

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lan [<number>] ip6 address [<count>] <address>/<prefixlen>

Options

• lan definition number

Specify lan definition number with a decimal value

<count>

• IPv6 address definition number

Specify IPv6 address definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 3

• IPv6 address/prefix length

Specify IPv6 address and prefix length. Link local address can not be specified.

Specify 64 for prefix length.

• auto

Address is automatically set with prefix of received RA (Router Advertisement)

message.

"lan ip6 ra mode recv" need to be set

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set IPv6 address for this interface

It is assumed that IPv6 function use only IPv6 link-local addresses.

5.5.2.4 lan ip6 ra mode

Function

Set RA (Router Advertisement) message mode

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lan [<number>] ip6 ra mode <mode>

Options

• lan definition number

Specify lan definition number with a decimal value

<mode>

• off

Disable RA message send/receive function

• recv

Enable RA message receive function

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set RA message function mode

Explanation

• RA message receive function

When it is enabled, ND (Neighbor Discovery) parameter, default route, global address

are configured automatically based on RA message

Default

It is assumed that RA message send/receive function is disabled.

lan <number> ip6 ra mode off

LAN Information Settings

199

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.2.5 lan ip6 route

Function

Set IPv6 static route information

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lan [<number>] ip6 route <count> <address>/<prefixlen> <next_hop> [<distance>]

Options

• lan definition number

Specify lan definition number with a decimal value

<count>

• Static route information definition number

Specify static route information definition number with a decimal value

Range

0 to 199

Model

XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

• IPv6 address/prefix length

Specify the destination network with IPv6 address and prefix length.

Link local address can not be specified.

• default

Specify this when default route is set as the destination network

<next_hop>

• Next hop router IPv6 address

Set IPv6 address of next hop router

• Priority

Set priority of this static route information with a decimal value from 1 to 254

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set IPv6 static route information.

It is assumed that the IPv6 static route information is not used.

LAN Information Settings

200

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.2.6 lan ip6 filter

Function

Set IPv6 filter

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448

Syntax

lan [<number>] ip6 filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>

Options

• lan definition number

Specify lan definition number with a decimal number

<count>

• filtering definition number

Set the filtering priority with a decimal value

A smaller value has a higher priority.

Range

0 to 511

Model

XG0224 / XG0448

• pass

Pass the packets which match

• reject

Discard the packets which match

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Specify ACL definition number with a decimal value.

- ip

If ip value is not configured, that filter definition is ignored

- tcp

This is enabled when ip6 <protocol> value is 6

- udp

This is enabled when ip6 <protocol> value is 17

- icmp

This is enabled when ip6 <protocol> value is 58

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set IPv6 filter for LAN interface

Note 1.

If none of "acl ip6" definition exist on the access control list which has been specified by

<acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not exist, the packets are not

filtered.

Note 2.

The packet filtering default value is "pass".

No packets are filtered if only "pass" is set in <action>.

LAN Information Settings

201

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Note 3.

This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.

The allowable upper limits are as follows.

• Upper limit based on "commands"

128 commands for the entire device.

Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "vlan ip6filter" and

"lan ip6 filter"commands.

The priority for each command is as follows.

1) "vlan ip6filter" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

2) "lan ip6 filter" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

If up to 128 of "vlan ip6filter" commands have been defined, the subsequent "lan ip6

filter" command will be no longer applied.

• Upper limit based on rule

128 rules for the entire device.

For the "vlan ip6filter" and "lan ip6 filter" commands, the number of rules to be used

varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.

The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.

- For ACL to set TCP or UDP

Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of

destination ports for TCP or UDP

- For ACL to set ICMP

Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of

ICMP CODEs for ICMP

- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP

You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and change

resource distribution.

Note 4.

Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer

to ACL such as "ether macfilter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan macfilter", "vlan ip6filter",

"vlan qos aclmap", "vlan ip6qos aclmap", "lan ip filter", "lan ip dscp", "lan ip6 filter", "lan

ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.

Default

It is assumed that the IPv6 filter is not set.

LAN Information Settings

202

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.2.7 lan ip6 filter move

Function

Change priority of IPv6 filter

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448

Syntax

lan [<number>] ip6 filter move <count> <new_count>

Options

• lan definition number

Specify lan definition number with a decimal value

<count>

• Filterling definition number

Specify filtering definition number

<new_count>

• New filtering definition number

Specify with a decimal value

Range

Model

0 to 511

XG0224 / XG0448

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Change priority of IPv6 filter

N/A

LAN Information Settings

203

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.2.8 lan ip6 dscp

Function

Set DSCP value rewrite condition

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448

Syntax

lan [<number>] ip6 dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <new_dscp>

Options

• lan definition number

Specify lan definition number with a decimal value

<count>

• DSCP rewrite definition number

Specify priority of DSCP rewrite condition with a decimal value.

Range

0 to 511

Model

XG0224 / XG0448

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Specify ACL definition number with a decimal value

- ip6

If ip6 value is not configured, that filter definition is ignored

- tcp

This is enabled when ip6 <protocol> value is 6

- udp

This is enabled when ip6 <protocol> value is 17

- icmp

This is enabled when ip6 <protocol> value is 58

<new_dscp>

• DSCP value

Specify Rewrite DSCP value with a decimal value from 0 to 63

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set DSCP value rewrite condition

Note1.

If none of "acl ip6" definition exist on the access control list which has been specified by

<acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not exist, the QoS processing is

not applied to those packets.

Note2.

If a queue is selected in <action> and if this queue has not been associated with the

priority by the "qos cosmap" command, the QoS processing is not executed.

Note 3.

This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.

The allowable upper limits are as follows.

• Upper limit based on "commands"

128 commands for the entire device.

Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "vlan ip6qos

aclmap" and "lan ip6 dscp" commands.

LAN Information Settings

204

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

1) "vlan ip6qos aclmap" command

A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.

2) "lan ip6 dscp" command

A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.

If up to 128 of "vlan ip6qos aclmap" commands have been defined, the subsequent

"lan ip6 dscp"command will be no longer applied.

• Upper limit based on rule

128 rules for the entire device.

For the "vlan ip6qos aclmap" and "lan ip6 dscp" commands, the number of rules to be

used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.

The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.

- For ACL to set TCP or UDP

Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of

destination ports for TCP or UDP

- For ACL to set ICMP

Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of

ICMP CODEs for ICMP

- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP

You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and change

resource distribution.

Note 4.

Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer

to ACL such as "ether macfilter", "ether qos aclmap", "vlan macfilter", "vlan ip6filter",

"vlan qos aclmap", "vlan ip6qos aclmap", "lan ip filter", "lan ip dscp", "lan ip6 filter", "lan

ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.

Default

It is assumed that DSCP value rewriting is not performed.

LAN Information Settings

205

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.2.9 lan ip6 dscp move

Function

Change priority of DSCP value rewrite condition

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448

Syntax

lan [<number>] ip6 dscp move <count> <new_count>

Options

• lan definition number

Specify lan definition number with a decimal value

<count>

• DSCP value rewrite definition number

Specify DSCP value rewrite definition number

<new_count>

• New DSCP value rewrite definition number

Specify new DSCP value rewrite definition number

Range

Model

0 to 511

XG0224 / XG0448

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Change priority of DSCP value rewrite condition

N/A

LAN Information Settings

206

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.3

VLAN Related Information

This section explains about the commands related to VLAN related information.

5.5.3.1 lan vlan

Function

Set a VLAN ID.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lan [<number>] vlan <vid>

Options

• lan definition number

Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.

The default is 0.

<vid>

Set a decimal VLAN ID from 1 to 4094.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Associate a VLAN ID with a lan definition number.

• This setting is disabled if VLAN specified in <vid> is not registered.

• If VLAN specified in <vid> is set at multiple lan interfaces, only the lowest lan definition

will be enabled.

Default

N/A

LAN Information Settings

207

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.4

LLMNR Related Information

This section explains about the commands related to LLMNR Related Information.

5.5.4.1 lan llmnr use

Function

Set to use the LLMNR function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lan [<number>] llmnr use <mode>

Options

• lan definition number

Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.

The default is 0.

<mode>

• on

Enable LLMNR function.

• off

Disable LLMNR function.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set whether or not to enable the LLMNR function on this interface.

If enabled, this device answers LLMNR Query for hostname of this device.

Sender The LLMNR function to

The hostname of this device is set by "sysname" command, and the default hostname is

Model name (e.c. XG0224).

Caution

Default

• "lan llmnr use" (lan llmnr use on) and "oob llmnr use" (oob llmnr use on) definitions can

be set only 2 definitions for the entire device.

• Up to 2 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "lan llmnr use" (lan

llmnr use on) and "oob llmnr use" (oob llmnr use on) commands.

• If none of "lan ip address" and "lan ip6 use on" definition exist on the lan interface

LLMNR function dosn't work.

It is assumed that the LLMNR function is not used on the lan interface.

LAN Information Settings

208

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.5

Management LAN port IPv4 Related Information

This section explains about the commands related to Management LAN port IPv4 Related Information.

5.5.5.1 oob ip address

Function

Set IP address of oob port

Available Model XG2600

Syntax

oob ip address <address>/<mask> <broadcast>

Options

• IP address/number of mask bits (or mask value)

Sepcify a combination of the IP address and mask to be assigned to Out of Band port

The allowable range of IPaddress is as follows.

0.0.0.0

1.0.0.1 - 126.255.255.254

128.0.0.1 - 191.255.255.254

192.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254

The available description format is as follows.

• IP address/number of mask bits (Example: 192.168.1.1/24)

• IP address/mask value (Example: 192.168.1.1/255.255.255.0)

Specify a broadcast address

• 0

Specify it for 0.0.0.0

• 1

Specify it for 255.255.255.255

• 2

Specify it when "network address + all 0" is obtained from <address>/<mask>

• 3

Specify it when "network address + all 1" is obtained from <address>/<mask>

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the IP address.

It is assumed that the IP address is not specified.

oob ip address 0.0.0.0/0 0

LAN Information Settings

209

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.5.2 oob ip route

Function

Set the IPv4static route information

Available Model XG2600

Syntax

oob ip route <count> <address>/<mask> <next_hop> [<distance>]

Options

<count>

• Static route information definition number

Specify a static route information definition number with a decimal value.

Range

0 to 199

Model

XG2600

• IPv4 address/number of mask bits (or mask value)

Specify a destination network with a combination of the IPv4 address and the number

of mask bits. For the mask value, specify successive 1s following the most significant

bit (MSB). The available description format is as follows:

- IPv4 address/number of mask bits (Example: 192.168.1.0/24)

- IPv4 address/mask value (Example: 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0)

• default

Specify default when the default route is set as a destination network.

It’s same as specifying 0.0.0.0/0(0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0)

<next_hop>

• IPv4 address of next hop router

Specify the IPv4 address of the next hop router

• Priority

Specify the static route information priority with a decimal value from 1 to 254.

A smallr value has a higher priority.

The default is 1.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the IPv4 static route information

Explanation

Max definition number

Model

200

XG2600

Caution

Default

When the same destination as static route is set, be careful about the following.

• Multiple default routes can not be cofigured with the same priority.

N/A

LAN Information Settings

210

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.6

Management LAN port IPv6 Related Information

This section explains about the commands related to Management LAN port IPv6 Related Information.

5.5.6.1 oob ip6 use

Function

Set IPv6 function of oob port

Available Model XG2600

Syntax

oob ip6 use <mode>

Options

<mode>

Specify wheter or not to receive and send IPv6 packets

• on

Enable IPc6 function

• off

Disable IPv6 function

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify wheter or not to receive and send IPv6 packets

It is assumed that the IPv6 server function is not used.

oob ip6 use off

5.5.6.2 oob ip6 ifid

Function

Set IPv6 interface ID

Available Model XG2600

Syntax

oob ip6 ifid <interfaceID>

Options

Specify ID for this interafce

• auto

Automatically generated ID (EUI-64 format) from MAC address is used

• Interface ID

Specify ID for this interface with a hexadecimal value. Separate 4 degits with " "(colon)

Normally specify "auto".

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set IPv6 interface ID

It is assumed that "auto" has been set.

oob ip6 ifid auto

LAN Information Settings

211

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.6.3 oob ip6 address

Function

Set IPv6 address

Available Model XG2600

Syntax

oob ip6 address [<count>] <address>/<prefixlen>

Options

<count>

• IPv6 address definition number

Specify IPv6 address definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 3.

• IPv6 address/prefix length

Specify IPv6 address and prefix length. Link local address can not be specified.

Specify 64 for prefix length.

• auto

Address is automatically set with prefix of received RA (Router Advertisement)

message.

"lan ip6 ra mode recv" need to be set

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set IPv6 address for this interface

It is assumed that IPv6 function use only IPv6 link-local addresses.

5.5.6.4 oob ip6 ra mode

Function

Set RA (Router Advertisement) message mode

Available Model XG2600

Syntax

oob ip6 ra mode <mode>

Options

<mode>

• off

Disable RA message send/receive function

• recv

Enable RA message receive function

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set RA message function mode

Explanation

• RA message receive function

When it is enabled, ND (Neighbor Discovery) parameter, default route, global address

are configured automatically based on RA message

Default

It is assumed that RA message send/receive function is disabled.

lan <number> ip6 ra mode off

LAN Information Settings

212

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.6.5 oob ip6 route

Function

Set IPv6 static route information

Available Model XG2600

Syntax

oob ip6 route <count> <address>/<prefixlen> <next_hop> [<distance>]

Options

<count>

• Static route information definition number

Specify static route information definition number with a decimal value

Range

0 to 199

Model

XG2600

• IPv6 address/prefix length

Specify the destination network with IPv6 address and prefix length.

Link local address can not be specified.

• default

Specify this when default route is set as the destination network

<next_hop>

• Next hop router IPv6 address

Set IPv6 address of next hop router

• Priority

Set priority of this static route information with a decimal value from 1 to 254

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set IPv6 static route information.

It is assumed that the IPv6 static route information is not used.

LAN Information Settings

213

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.5.7

Management LAN port LLMNR Related Information

This section explains about the commands related to Management LAN port LLMNR Related Information.

5.5.7.1 oob llmnr use

Function

Set to use the LLMNR function of oob interace.

Available Model XG2600

Syntax

oob llmnr use <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable LLMNR function.

• off

Disable LLMNR function.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set whether or not to enable the LLMNR function on the oob interface.

If enabled, this device answers LLMNR Query for hostname of this device.

Sender The LLMNR function to

The hostname of this device is set by "sysname" command, and the default hostname is

Model name (e.c. XG0224).

Caution

Default

• "lan llmnr use" (lan llmnr use on) and "oob llmnr use" (oob llmnr use on) definitions can

be set only 2 definitions for the entire device/

• Up to 2 commands can be set for the entire device, including the ""lan llmnr use" (lan

llmnr use on) and "oob llmnr use" (oob llmnr use on) commands.

• If none of "lan ip address" and "lan ip6 use on" definition exist on the lan interface

LLMNR function dosn't work.

It is assumed that the LLMNR function is not used on the oob interface.

LAN Information Settings

214

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.6 IPv4 Related Information

This section explains about IPv4 related information.

5.6.1

IPv4 Related Information

This section explains about the commands related to IP related information.

5.6.1.1 ip arp age

Function

Set a valid time of ARP entry.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

ip arp age <time>

Options

<time>

Set a valid time (minutes) of ARP entry with a decimal value from 1 to 240.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set a valid time of ARP entry.

It is assumed that 20 minutes has been set.

ip arp age 20

IPv4 Related Information

215

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.7 QoS Information Settings

This section explains about QoS information settings.

5.7.1

QoS Information

This section explains about the commands related to QoS information.

5.7.1.1 qos cosmap

Function

Set the correspondence between the COS value and storage queue for a specific packet.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448

Syntax

qos cosmap <cos> <queue>

Options

<cos>

• cos value

Set a cos value (user priority value in the Tag Control Information (TCI) field of Tagged

VLAN) of the packet where the specified queue is to be stored, with a decimal value

from 0 to 7.

<queue>

• Queue number

Set the number of a queue to store the packet, which has the cos value specified in

<cos>, with a decimal value.

A larger value has a higher priority.

Range

Model

0 to 7

XG0224 / XG0448

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

This product has 8 keys.

Explanation

Packets are queued in multiple queues of an output port (including a port for the local

device). Which queues are to be selected is determined by the COS value of an output

packet.

Store the packet, which has the cos value specified in <cos>, in the queue specified in

<queue>.

A larger queue number has a higher output priority.

A queue with no cos value is unavailable.

Default

qos cosmap 0 2

qos cosmap 1 0

qos cosmap 2 1

qos cosmap 3 3

qos cosmap 4 4

qos cosmap 5 5

qos cosmap 6 6

qos cosmap 7 7

QoS Information Settings

216

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.8 STP Information

This section explains about STP information.

5.8.1

STP Information

This section explains about the commands related to STP information.

5.8.1.1 stp mode

Function

Set the STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) operation mode.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

stp mode {disable | stp | rstp | mstp }

Options

disable

• Specify when STP is not used.

stp

• Specify when STP (dot1d) is used.

rstp

• Specify when RSTP (dot1w) is used.

mstp

• Specify when MSTP (dot1s) is used.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) operation mode.

It is assumed that the STP is set for STP operation mode.

stp mode stp

STP Information

217

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.8.1.2 stp age

Function

Set a maximum valid time of bridge configuration.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

stp age <max_age>

Options

<max_age>

• Maximum valid time

Specify a valid time of the BPDU information sent from the root bridge within the range

of 6 to 40 seconds.

The unit will be s (second).

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set a valid time for the BPDU that the root bridge sends.

Receiving no BPDU frame from the root bridge within the max age time will lead this

device to begin sending BPDU as a root bridge.

Caution

<max_age> checks the relationship between the definition values of stp delay

<delay_time> and stp hello <time>.

• Check with forward delay time

max age time <= 2 × (forward delay time - 1.0 seconds)

• Check with hello time

max age time >= 2 × (hello time + 1.0 seconds)

If one or both of the above definition value is invalid, the set values of <max_age>,

<delay_time>, and <time> will be disabled.

The following shows definition conditions that are available for checking the relationship

between <max age>, <delay_time>, and <time>.

2 × (forward delay time - 1.0 second) >= max age time >= 2 × (hello time + 1.0 second)

Default

It is assumed that 20 seconds are set for the valid time of the BPDU sent by the root

bridge.

stp age 20s

STP Information

218

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.8.1.3 stp delay

Function

Set a maximum forward delay time.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

stp delay <delay_time>

Options

<delay_time>

• Maximum forward delay time

Specify a maximum forward delay time within the range of 4 to 30 seconds.

The unit will be s (second).

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set a maximum forwarding delay time.

This setting is disabled when this device does not function as a root bridge even if it uses

an STP.

Specify the time period required to change from the listening state to the learning state or

from the leaning state to the forwarding state via an STP.

Caution

<delay_time> checks the relationship with the definition value of stp age <max_age>.

• Check with max age time

max age time <= 2 × (forward delay time - 1.0 second)

If the definition value is invalid, the set values of <max_age>, <delay_time>, and <time>

will be disabled.

The following shows definition conditions that are available for checking the relationship

between <max age>, <delay_time>, and <time>.

2 × (forward delay time - 1.0 second) >= max age time >= 2 × (hello time + 1.0 second)

Default

It is assumed that 15 seconds are set for a maximum forwarding delay time.

stp delay 15s

STP Information

219

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.8.1.4 stp hello

Function

Set a Hello message transmission interval.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

stp hello <time>

Options

<time>

• Transmission interval

Specify a transmission interval of configuration BPDU to be sent periodically after this

device becomes a root bridge, within the range of 1 to 10 seconds. The unit will be s

(second).

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify a transmission interval of configuration BPDU to be sent when this device

functions as a root bridge.

This setting is disabled when this device does not function as a root bridge even if it uses

an STP.

Caution

<time> checks the relationship with the definition value of stp age <max_age>.

• Check with max age time

max age time > = 2 × (hello time + 1.0 second)

If the definition value is invalid, the set values of <max_age>, <delay_time>, and <time>

will be disabled.

The following shows definition conditions that are available for checking the relationship

between <max age>, <delay_time>, and <time>.

2 × (forward delay time - 1.0 second) >= max age time >= 2 × (hello time + 1.0 second)

Default

It is assumed that 2 seconds are set for a transmission interval of configuration BPDU.

stp hello 2s

STP Information

220

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.8.1.5 stp bpdu

Function

Set the BPDU forwarding mode.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

stp bpdu <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Specify the BPDU flooding mode.

• off

Specify the BPDU unflooding mode.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the BPDU flooding mode.

Explanation

Set whether or not to forward a BPDU frame when the STP function has been disabled.

Caution

Default

The BPDU frame, which is not provided with the VLAN tag, is forwarded based on the

receive port setting without the VLAN tag if the BPDU flooding mode is specified.

It is assumed that discarding mode is specified as the BPDU forwarding mode.

stp bpdu off

STP Information

221

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.8.1.6 stp domain priority

Function

Set the bridge priority.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

stp domain <instance-id> priority <priority>

Options

<instance-id>

• STP instance ID number

Specify a decimal value from 0 to 15.

For non-MSTP operation mode, entering a value from 1 to 15 makes it invalid, although

the allowable range is set with a value from 0 to 15.

• Priority

Specify the priority of this device in the bridge network with a decimal value from 0 to

61440. A smaller value has a higher priority.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify the priority of the bridge used for the algorithm for determining the root bridge.

Specify the minimum value for a bridge to be used as a root bridge.

Caution

<priority> must be an integer (valid value) that is divisible by 4096.

• Valid values

0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056,

49152, 53248, 57344, 61440

If an integer other than the valid values is specified, this setting is disabled.

Default

It is assumed that 32768 is set for the entire instance priority.

stp domain 0 priority 32768

STP Information

222

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.8.1.7 stp config_id

Function

Set the MST configuration.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

stp config_id <region_name> <revision_level>

Options

<region_name>

• Region name (Configuration name)

Specify a configuration name using up to 32 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e ASCII

set.

<revision_level>

• Revision level

Specify a decimal value from 0 to 255.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set MST configuration (MST region name and revision level).

This command is enabled only in the MSTP operation mode.

Default

It is assumed that MST for MST configuration information, "region1" for region name, and

"0" for revision level are set.

stp config_id region1 0

5.8.1.8 stp domain vlan

Function

Set the VLAN assignment to the MSTP instance.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

stp domain <instance-id> vlan <vidlist>

Options

<instance-id>

• Instance ID number

Specify a decimal value from 1 to 15.

• VLAN ID

Specify a decimal VLAN ID from 1 to 4094.

When setting multiple VLAN IDs, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-

10,100,200")

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set VLAN assignment to an MSTP instance.

This command is enabled only in the MSTP operation mode.

The definition is disabled when vlan assigned to an instance is not set to the Ethernet

port.

Default

N/A

STP Information

223

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.8.1.9 stp max-hops

Function

Set a maximum hop count of bridge configuration.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

stp max-hops <hop_count>

Options

<hop_count>

• Maximum hop count

Specify a decimal value from 1 to 40.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

This command is used instead of the Message Age and Max Age parameters in the MST

region.

It indicates the valid hop count for the BPDU that the root bridge sends.

When the hop count of the received BPDU is 0, this device begins to send BPDU with the

maximum hop count as a root bridge.

Caution

Default

This command is enabled only in the MSTP operation mode.

The hop count is reduced each time BPDU is forwarded via a neighboring device. If this

device functions as a root bridge with the hop count set to 1, a spanning tree will be

created only between this device and a neighboring device.

It is assumed that 20 is set for hop count.

stp max-hops 20

STP Information

224

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.9 LLDP Information Settings

This section explains about Loop Detection information settings.

5.9.1

LLDP Information

This section explains about the commands related to LLDP Information.

5.9.1.1 lldp send interval

Function

Set LLDP send interval

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lldp send interval <interval> <delay>

Options

• LLDP send interval

Specify LLDP send interval with a decimal value with h (hours), m (minutes), s (seconds)

It can be specified from 5 seconds to 32768 seconds.

This setting corresponds to msgTxInterval in 802.1AB

<delay>

• LLDP send miimal interval

Specify LLDP send minimal interval with a decimal value with h (hours), m (minutes), s

(seconds) It can be specified from 1 second to 0.25 x <interval>seconds (Max is 8192 sec).

This setting corresponds to TxDelay in 802.1AB

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify LLDP send interval which this device sends LLDP information periodically with

and LLDP send minimal interval which this device sends LLDP information when LLDP

information is changed

Default

It is assumed that 30sec is set for LLDP send interval and 2sec is set for LLDP send

miimal interval.

lldp send interval 30s 2s

LLDP Information Settings

225

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.9.1.2 lldp send hold

Function

Set LLDP hold times

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lldp send hold <count>

Options

<count>

• LLDP hold times

Specify LLDP hold time which neighbor device holds LLDP information of this device.

Specify LLDP hold times with a decimal value from 2 times to 10 times.

This setting corresponds to msgTxInterval in 802.1AB

This setting corresponds to msgTxHold in 802.1AB

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify LLDP hold time which neighbor device holds LLDP information of this device.

It is assumed that 4 is set for LLDP hold times.

lldp send hold 4

5.9.1.3 lldp reinit delay

Function

Set LLDP reinit delay time

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lldp reinit delay <delay>

Options

<delay>

• LLDP reinit delay time

When LLDP send function is disabled, this device sends LLDP information with TTL=0

and after <delay> time, this device reinitializes the internal status.

This setting corresponds to reinitDelay in 802.1AB

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

When LLDP send function is disabled, this device sends LLDP information with TTL=0

and after <delay> time, this device reinitializes the internal status.

Default

It is assumed that 2sec is set for LLDP reinit delay time.

lldp reinit delay 2s

LLDP Information Settings

226

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.9.1.4 lldp notification interval

Function

Set minimal interval of SNMP Notification Trap

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

lldp notification interval <interval>

Options

• Trap minimal interval

Specify minimal interval of SNMP Notification Trap with a decimal value with h (hours),

m (minutes), s (seconds) from 5 seconds to 3600 seconds.

This setting corresponds to NotificationInterval in 802.1AB

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify minimal interval between SNMP Notification Traps

When snmp service command is disabled or snmp trap lldpremtableschange is disabled

SNMP Notification Trap (lldpRemTablesChange Trap) is not sent

Default

It is assumed that 5sec is set for Trap minimal interval.

lldp notification interval 5s

LLDP Information Settings

227

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.10 IGMP Snooping Information Settings

This section explains about IGMP snooping information settings.

5.10.1 IGMP Snooping Information

This section explains about the commands related to IGMP snooping information.

5.10.1.1 igmpsnoop use

Function

Set the IGMP snooping function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

igmpsnoop use <mode>

Options

<mode>

Specify the IGMP snooping mode.

• on

Enable IGMP snooping.

• off

Disable IGMP snooping.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify the IGMP snooping mode.

It is assumed that the IGMP snooping function is not used.

igmpsnoop use off

5.10.1.2 igmpsnoop localgroup

Function

Set the local group of IGMP snooping function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

igmpsnoop localgroup <mode>

Options

<mode>

Specify the local group of IGMP snooping function.

• join

The packets are forwarded when membership report is recived for local group.

• auto

The packets are forwarded when multicast packets to local group are received.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify local group behavior of IGMP snooping.

It is assumed that the packets are forwarded when multicast packets to local group are

received.

igmpsnoop localgroup auto

IGMP Snooping Information Settings

228

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.10.1.3 igmpsnoop unknown flooding

Function

Set the unknown multicast packets handling in IGMP snooping function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448

Syntax

igmpsnoop unknown flooding <mode>

Options

<mode>

Specify flooding mode for unknown multicast packets.

• off

Discard unknown multicast packets.

• on

Flooding to the same VLAN.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the unknown multicast packets handling in IGMP snooping function.

This command is valid when IGMP snooping function is enabled.

If IGMP snooping function is disabled, unknown multicast packets are flooded not

depending on this definition.

Default

It is assumed that "Discard unknown multicast packets".

igmpsnoop unknown flooding off

IGMP Snooping Information Settings

229

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.11 Loop Detection Information Settings

This section explains about Loop Detection information settings.

5.11.1 Loop Detection Information

This section explains about the commands related to Loop Detection information.

5.11.1.1 loopdetect use

Function

Set the Loop Detection function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

loopdetect use <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable the Loop Detection function.

• off

Disable the Loop Detection function.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether or not to enable the loop detection function.

It is assumed that the loop detection function is disabled.

loopdetect use off

Loop Detection Information Settings

230

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.11.1.2 loopdetect portdisable

Function

Set the port offline mode.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

loopdetect portdisable <mode>

Options

<mode>

• yes

Place the port offline automatically.

• no

Do not place the port offline.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether or not to place the relevant port offline when a loop is detected.

If ports are placed offline, release them by the "online" command with port releasing.

It is assumed that the ports are not placed offline.

Default

loopdetect portdisable no

5.11.1.3 loopdetect portblock

Function

Set the port blocking behavior after the Loop detected.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

loopdetect portblock <mode>

Options

<mode>

• yes

If the Loop detected, the ether port is blocking (without linkdown).

• no

After the Loop detected, the ether port is non-blocking.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify the port blocking behavior after the Loop detected.

The blocking port will be non-blocking, if no Loop is detected while recovery monitoring

works on.

The recovery monitoring counter specified by "loopdetect recovery"command and the

monitoring interval is specified by "loopdetect interval"command.

Caution

Default

• When the "loopdetect portdisable" (loopdetect portdisable yes) command is set, this

port blocking function is not work.

• When the STP function is enabled, this port blocking function is not work.

It is assumed that port blocking function is disabled.

loopdetect portblock no

Loop Detection Information Settings

231

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.11.1.4 loopdetect interval

Function

Set a transmission interval of the Loop Detection frame.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

loopdetect interval <time>

Options

<time>

• Transmission interval

Specify a transmission interval of the loop detection frame with a value from 1 to 32767

seconds.

The unit shall be h (hour), m (minute), or s (second).

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify a transmission interval of the Loop Detection frame.

It is assumed that 10 seconds have been specified.

loopdetect interval 10s

5.11.1.5 loopdetect recovery

Function

Set the upper limit of monitoring counter for blocking port recovery.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

loopdetect recovery <count>

Options

<count>

• Upper limit of monitoring counter for blocking port recovery, with a decimal value from 1

to 65535.

If the counter is expired without detecting the Loop, the blocking port is set non-

blocking again.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the upper limit of monitoring counter for blocking port recovery.

If the counter is expired without detecting the Loop, the blocking port is set non-blocking

again.

If the the Loop is detected, the counter is set 0 agein.

The monitoring interval is specified by "loopdetect interval"command.

Default

It is assumed 60 has been specified as the upper limit of monitoring counter.

loopdetect recovery 60

Loop Detection Information Settings

232

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.12 ACL Information Settings

This section explains about ACL information settings.

5.12.1 ACL Information

This section explains about the commands related to ACL information.

Specifying range for ACL definition number

Model

ACL definition number

XG0224/XG0448

Specify a range between 0 to 799 for ACL definition number (in a decimal number) to specify

"acl_count" written in the [Option] in command in this section.

XG2600

Specify a range between 0 to 299 for ACL definition number (in a decimal number) to specify

"acl_count" written in the [Option] in command in this section.

5.12.1.1 acl mac

Function

Set the definition of the ACL MAC.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

acl <acl_count> mac <src_mac> <dst_mac> llc <value>

acl <acl_count> mac <src_mac> <dst_mac> ether <value>

acl <acl_count> mac <src_mac> <dst_mac> any

Options

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.

<src_mac>

Specify the source MAC address for ACL.

• any

Specify it when targeting all MAC addresses.

• bcast

Specify it when targeting a broadcast MAC address.

• mcast

Specify it when targeting a multicast MAC address.

• Other than those above

Specify the target MAC address. Specify the source MAC address for ACL in the

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format, where "xx" is a 2-digit hexadecimal value.

<dst_mac>

Specify the destination MAC address for ACL.

• any

Specify it when targeting all MAC addresses.

• bcast

Specify it when targeting a broadcast MAC address.

• mcast

Specify it when targeting a multicast MAC address.

ACL Information Settings

233

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

• Messages other than those above

Specify the target MAC address. Specify the source MAC address for ACL in the

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format, where "xx" is a 2-digit hexadecimal value.

• llc

Specify it when targeting the LLC-format frame in which the value of <value> matches

LSAP. In <value>, specify a hexadecimal value from 0 to ffff.

To target all LLC-format frames, specify "any" in <value>.

• ether

Specify it when targeting the Ethernet-format frame in which the value of <value>

matches the type. In <value>, specify a hexadecimal value from 5dd to ffff.

To target all Ethernet-format frames, specify "any" in <value>.

• any

Specify it when targeting all frames. <value> is not necessary.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify the etherframe pattern in the ACL definition.

Any etherframe pattern can be specified in the ACL definition.

5.12.1.2 acl vlan

Function

Set the definition of the ACL VLAN.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

acl <acl_count> vlan <vid> <cos>

Options

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.

<vid>

Specify the source VID address for ACL.

• any

Specify when targeting all VID addresses.

• Other than those above

Specify the target VID. The allowable range of VID addresses for ACL is 1 to 4094.

<cos>

Specify COS for ACL.

• any

Specify it when targeting all COS.

• Other than those above

Specify the target COS. The allowable range of COS for ACL is 0 to 7.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify VLAN in the ACL definition.

Any VLAN ID can be specified in the ACL definition.

ACL Information Settings

234

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.12.1.3 acl ip

Function

Set the definition of the ACL IPv4.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

acl <acl_count> ip <src_addr>/<mask> <dst_addr>/<mask> [<protocol> [any]]

acl <acl_count> ip <src_addr>/<mask> <dst_addr>/<mask> [<protocol> [tos <value>]]

acl <acl_count> ip <src_addr>/<mask> <dst_addr>/<mask> [<protocol> [dscp <value>]]

Options

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.

<src_addr>/<mask>

Specify the source IP address for ACL and the number of mask bits.

• IP address/number of mask bits (or mask value)

Specify a combination of the source IP address for ACL and the number of mask bits.

For the mask value, specify successive 1s following the most significant bit (MSB).

The available description format is as follows:

- IP address/number of mask bits (Example: 192.168.1.1/24)

• any

Specify it when all source IP addresses are subject to ACL.

The default is 0.0.0.0/0.

<dst_addr>/<mask>

Specify the destination IP address for ACL and the number of mask bits.

• IP address/number of mask bits (or mask value)

Specify a combination of the destination IP address for ACL and the number of mask

bits.

The description format is identical to for <src_addr>/<mask>.

• any

Specify it when all destination IP addresses are subject to ACL.

The default is 0.0.0.0/0.

Specify a protocol number for ACL.

• Protocol number

Specify the protocol number for ACL with a decimal value from 1 to 255. (Example:

ICMP:1, TCP:6, UDP:17, etc.)

• any

Specify it when all protocol numbers are subject to ACL.

The default is "any".

<type>

Specify how to identify QoS for ACL.

• tos

Specify it when identifying the ACL target with the TOS value.

• dscp

Specify it when identifying the ACL target with the DSCP value.

• any

Specify it when identifying the ACL target with all TOS and DSCP values.

<value>

Specify the TOS or DSCP value used to identify the ACL target.

ACL Information Settings

235

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

• TOS value

Specify the TOS value used to identify the ACL target with a hexadecimal value from 0

to ff.

• DSCP value

Specify the DSCP value used to identify the ACL target with a decimal value from 0 to

63.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify the IPv4 packet pattern in the ACL definition.

Make sure to define the acl ip when using L3 protocols such as TCP, UDP, or ICMP.

Default

Any IP packet pattern can be specified in the ACL definition.

(The ACL definition is disabled if "all any" is specified or undefined.)

ACL Information Settings

236

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.12.1.4 acl ip6

Function

Set ACL IPv6 definition

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

acl <acl_count> ip6 <src_addr>/<prefixlen> <dst_addr>/<prefixlen> [<protocol> [any]]

acl <acl_count> ip6 <src_addr>/<prefixlen> <dst_addr>/<prefixlen> [<protocol> [tc <value>]]

acl <acl_count> ip6 <src_addr>/<prefixlen> <dst_addr>/<prefixlen>

[<protocol> [dscp <value>]]

Options

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Specify ACL definition number with a decimal number

<src_addr>/<prefixlen>

Specify source IPv6 and prefix length

• IPv6 address/prefix length

Specify IPv6 address and prefix length

• any

Any source IPv6 address

<dst_addr>/<prefixlen>

Specify destination IPv6 and prefix length

• IPv6 address/prefix length

Specify destination IPv6 and prefix length

• any

Any destination IPv6 address

Specify protocol number

• protocol number

Specify protocol number

• any

Any protocol number

<type>

• tc

Specify Traffic Class value value

• dscp

Specify DSCP value

• any

Specify TOS value, DSCP value

<value>

• Traffic Class value

Specify traffic class value

• DSCP value

Specify DSCP value with a decimal number from 0 to 63

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set ACL IPv6 definition

N/A

ACL Information Settings

237

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.12.1.5 acl tcp

Function

Set the definition of the ACL TCP.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

acl <acl_count> tcp <src_port> <dst_port>

Options

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.

<src_port>

Specify a source port number for ACL.

• Port number

Specify the source port number for ACL with a decimal value from 1 to 65535.

When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

Using a comma (,) enables you to specify up to 10 port numbers, including <src_port>

and <dst_port>.

The available description format is as follows:

- Decimal number from 1 to 65535 (Example: 65535 = Port 65535)

- Port number, port number, ... (Example: 10,20,30 = Ports 10, 20, and 30)

• any

Specify it when all source port numbers are subject to ACL.

<dst_port>

Specify a destination port number for ACL.

• Port number

Specify the destination port number for ACL with a decimal value from 1 to 65535.

The same is true with the description format in <src_port>.

• any

Specify it when all destination port numbers are subject to ACL.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify the TCP packet pattern in the ACL definition.

When using this command, be sure to specify protocol (tcp 6) in the "acl ip" or "acl ip6"

command.

Default

Any TCP packet pattern can be specified in the ACL definition.

ACL Information Settings

238

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.12.1.6 acl udp

Function

Set the definition of the ACL UDP.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

acl <acl_count> udp <src_port> <dst_port>

Options

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.

<src_port>

Specify a source port number for ACL.

• Port number

Specify the source port number for ACL with a decimal value from 1 to 65535.

When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

Using a comma (,) enables you to specify up to 10 port numbers, including <src_port>

and <dst_port>.

The available description format is as follows:

- Decimal number from 1 to 65535 (Example: 65535 = Port 65535)

- Port number, port number, ... (Example: 10,20,30 = Ports 10, 20, and 30)

• any

Specify it when all source port numbers are subject to ACL.

<dst_port>

Specify a destination port number for ACL.

• Port number

Specify the destination port number for ACL with a decimal value from 1 to 65535.

The same is true with the description format in <src_port>.

• any

Specify it when all destination port numbers are subject to ACL.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify the UDP packet pattern in the ACL definition.

When using this command, be sure to specify protocol (udp 17) in the "acl ip" or "acl ip6"

command.

Default

Any UDP packet pattern can be specified in the ACL definition.

ACL Information Settings

239

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.12.1.7 acl icmp

Function

Set the definition of the ACL ICMP.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

acl <acl_count> icmp <icmptype> <icmpcode>

Options

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.

Specify ICMP TYPE for ACL.

• ICMP TYPE

Specify the source ICMP TYPE for ACL with a decimal value from 0 to 255.

When specifying multiple ICMP TYPEs, separate them with commas (,).

Using a comma (,) enables you to specify up to 10 ICMP TYPEs.

The available description format is as follows:

- Decimal number from 0 to 255 (Example: 8 = ICMP TYPE 8)

- ICMP TYPE, ICMP TYPE, ... (Example: 0, 8, 30 = ICMP TYPEs 0, 8, and 30)

• any

Specify it when all ICMP TYPEs are subject to ACL.

Specify ICMP CODE for ACL.

• ICMP CODE

Specify the source ICMP CODE for ACL with a decimal value from 0 to 255.

When specifying multiple ICMP CODEs, separate them with commas (,).

Using a comma (,) enables you to specify up to 10 ICMP CODEs.

The available description format is as follows:

- Decimal number from 0 to 255 (Example: 8 = ICMP CODE 8)

- ICMP CODE, ICMP CODE, ... (Example: 0, 8, 30 = ICMP CODEs 0, 8, and 30)

• any

Specify it when all ICMP CODEs are subject to ACL.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify the ICMP packet pattern in the ACL definition.

When using this command, be sure to specify <protocol> (icmp 1) using the "acl ip" or

(icmpv6 58) using the "acl ip6" command.

Default

Any ICMP packet pattern can be specified in the ACL definition.

ACL Information Settings

240

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.12.1.8 acl description

Function

Set the definition of the ACL description.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

acl <acl_count> description <description>

Options

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.

• Description of setting

Describe settings with this ACL definition number, using up to 50 characters from 0x21,

0x23 to 0x7e ASCII set.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Describe settings with this ACL definition number.

It is assumed that no setting is described.

ACL Information Settings

241

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.13 AAA Information Settings

This section explains about AAA Information Settings.

Allowed range of group IDs

The group serial number (decimal value), which is to be specified in [<group_id>] (group ID) described in [Options] of

each command, shall be within the range as shown below.

Range

Model

0 to 9

XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Allowed range of AAA user information definition number

The group serial number (decimal value), which is to be specified in [<number>] (AAA user information definition

number) described in [Options] of each command, shall be within the range as shown below.

Range

0 to 999

Model

XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Allowed range of RADIUS server definition number

The group serial number (decimal value), which is to be specified in [<number>] (RADIUS server definition number)

described in [Options] of each command, shall be within the range as shown below.

Range

Model

0 to 3

XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

AAA Information Settings

242

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.13.1 Group ID Information

This section explains about the commands related to group ID information.

5.13.1.1 aaa name

Function

Set a group name.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

aaa [<group_id>] name <group_name>

Options

<group_id>

• Group ID

Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.

The default is 0.

<group_name>

• Group name

Specify a group name using up to 32 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e ASCII set.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set a group name.

This command will fail if the same group name is already registered.

It is assumed that no group name is set.

Default

AAA Information Settings

243

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.13.2 AAA User Information

This section explains about the commands related to AAA user information.

5.13.2.1 aaa user id

Function

Set the authentication information (user ID).

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

aaa [<group_id>] user [<number>] id <id>

Options

<group_id>

• Group ID

Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.

The default is 0.

• AAA user information definition number

Specify a group serial number with a decimal value

The default is 0.

<id>

• User ID

Specify a user ID using up to 128 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e ASCII set.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the authentication information (user ID) for authentication protocol.

It is assumed that no authentication information (user ID) is set.

AAA Information Settings

244

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.13.2.2 aaa user password

Function

Set the authentication information (password).

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

aaa [<group_id>] user [<number>] password <password> [encrypted]

Options

<group_id>

• Group ID

Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.

The default is 0.

• AAA user information definition number

Specify a group serial number with a decimal value.

The default is 0.

• Authentication password

Specify the authentication password using up to 128 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to

0x7e ASCII set.

Specify the encrypted authentication password together with "encrypted" to be

displayed with the "show" command.

Correctly specify the character string displayed in the "show" command.

encrypted

• Specify the encrypted authentication password

Specify it when setting the encrypted authentication password in <password>.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the authentication information (authentication password) for authentication protocol.

With the "show" command, the encrypted authentication password is displayed together

with "encrypted".

Default

It is assumed that no authentication information (password) is specified.

AAA Information Settings

245

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.13.2.3 aaa user user-role

Function

Sets user privilege class.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

aaa [<group_id>] user [<number>] user-role <class>

Options

<group_id>

• Group ID

Set group IDs using a base 10 sequential serial number.

Default is 0.

• AAA User ID

Serial number within the group, expressed as a base 10 value.

Default is 0.

<class>

Sets privilege class.

• administrator

Sets privilege class to administrator class.

• user

Sets privilege class to user class.

• none

No privilege class specified.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

When used for login user information, sets user privilege class.

If unset, privilege class is unspecified.

AAA Information Settings

246

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.13.3 RADIUS Information Settings

This section explains about the commands related to RADIUS information.

5.13.3.1 aaa radius service

Function

Set the RADIUS service.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

aaa [<group_id>] radius service <service> [<type>]

Options

<group_id>

• Group ID

Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.

The default is 0.

• client

Use it as the RADIUS client function.

• off

Do not use the RADIUS function.

<type>

This parameter is available when "client" is specified in<service>.

• auth

Enable the RADIUS authentication function.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the RADIUS function used for the local device.

It is assumed that the RADIUS authentication function is not used.

aaa [<group_id>] radius service off

AAA Information Settings

247

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.13.3.2 aaa radius auth source

Function

Set the local IP address of the RADIUS authentication device.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

aaa [<group_id>] radius auth source <address>

Options

<group_id>

• Group ID

Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.

• Local IP address

Specify the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the remote RADIUS authentication device.

The allowable range is as follows:

- IPv4

1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254

128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254

192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

- IPv6

::2 to fe7f:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff

fec0:: to feff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the IP address of the local RADIUS authentication device.

When using this device as a RADIUS authentication client, set the local IP address used

for communication with the RADIUS authentication server.

Default

It is assumed that the local IP address used for communication with the remote RADIUS

authentication device is automatically selected.

AAA Information Settings

248

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.13.3.3 aaa radius auth message-authenticator

Function

Set the Message-Authenticator.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

aaa [<group_id>] radius auth message-authenticator <mode>

Options

<group_id>

• Group ID

Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.

<mode>

• off

Disable Message-Authenticator.

• on

Enable Message-Authenticator.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set whether to enable Message-Authenticator for authentication.

For EEE802.1x authentication, enable Message-Authenticator regardless of this setting.

This command is available only for authentication request messages in this device.

Default

Disable Message-Authenticator.

aaa [<group_id>] radius auth message-authenticator off

AAA Information Settings

249

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.13.3.4 aaa radius client server-info auth secret

Function

Set the shared key (RADIUS secret) for the RADIUS authentication server.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

aaa [<group_id>] radius client server-info auth [<number>] secret <secret> [encrypted]

Options

<group_id>

• Group ID

Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.

The default is 0.

• Server definition number

Specify the definition number of the remote device with a decimal value.

The default is 0.

• Shared key (RADIUS secret)

Specify the shared key (RADIUS secret), which has been determined between this

device and the RADIUS authentication server, using up to 64 characters from 0x21,

0x23 to 0x7e ASCII set.

• Encrypted shared-key (RADIUS secret)

Specify the encrypted shared-key (RARIUS secret) together with "encrypted" to be

displayed with the "show" command.

encrypted

• Specify the encrypted shared-key (RADIUS secret)

Specify it when setting the encrypted shared-key (RADIUS secret) in <secret>.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the shared key (RADIUS secret) used between this device and RADIUS

authentication server.

With the "show" command, the encrypted shared-key (RADIUS secret) is displayed

together with "encrypted".

Default

It is assumed that the shared key (RADIUS secret) is not set.

AAA Information Settings

250

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.13.3.5 aaa radius client server-info auth address

Function

Set the IP address of the remote RADIUS authentication server.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

aaa [<group_id>] radius client server-info auth [<number>] address <address>

Options

<group_id>

• Group ID

Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.

• Server definition number

Specify the definition number of the remote device with a decimal value.

The default is 0.

• Remote IP address

Specify the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the remote RADIUS authentication device.

The allowable range is as follows:

- IPv4

1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254

128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254

192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

- IPv6

::2 to fe7f:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff

fec0:: to feff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the IP address of the RADIUS authentication server that communicates with this

device.

Multiple servers cannot be specified.

Default

The IP address of the remote RADIUS authentication device is not set. Be sure to set this

command when using the RADIUS authentication function.

AAA Information Settings

251

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.13.3.6 aaa radius client server-info auth port

Function

Specify UDP port of the authentication server (the old RFC specifications compatible).

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

aaa [<group_id>] radius client server-info auth [<number>] port <port>

Options

<group_id>

• Group ID

Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.

• Server definition number

Specify the definition number of the remote device with a decimal value.

The default is 0.

<port>

• 1812

The UDP port number that has been assigned to the RADIUS authentication server in

the latest RFC specifications.

• 1645

The UDP port number that has been assigned to the RADIUS authentication server in

the old RFC specifications.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the UDP port number of the RADIUS authentication server for which a RADIUS

authentication client requests authentication.

If the RADIUS authentication server for which the authentication is requested is installed

with a UDP port based on the old RFC specifications, set the port number to 1645.

Default

It is assumed that the UDP port number of the RADIUS accounting server is set to 1812.

aaa radius client server-info auth port 1812

AAA Information Settings

252

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.13.3.7 aaa radius client server-info auth deadtime

Function

Set a recovery standby time.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

aaa [<group_id>] radius client server-info auth [<number>] deadtime <deadtime>

Options

<group_id>

• Group ID

Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.

• Server definition number

Specify the definition number of the remote device with a decimal value.

The default is 0.

• Recovery standby time

Specify a time period required to automatically restore the RADIUS server to the alive

state after it was placed into the dead state.

The unit shall be d (day), h (hour), m (minute), or s (second).

The allowable range is as follows:

0 to 86400 (seconds):

Specifying "0s" will not automatically restore the RADIUS server to the alive state.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

If the RADIUS server does not respond after the response wait time set in the "aaa radius

client retry" command lapsed, it will be placed in the dead state and set to the lowest

priority. Once the RADIUS server is placed in the dead state, it will remain disabled as

long as an alive server is active. Set a wait time to automatically recover the server from

the dead state to the alive state according to the priority setting.

To recover from the dead state to the alive state, one of the following conditions must be

satisfied.

• When the set time has elapsed:

• When a response has been returned from the RADIUS server in the dead state, to

which some packets were sent, after all the available servers were placed into the dead

state; or

• When the dead state has been manually recovered with the "radius recovery"

command.

Default

It is assumed that the server is not recovered automatically.

aaa radius client server-info auth deadtime 0s

AAA Information Settings

253

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.13.3.8 aaa radius client server-info auth priority

Function

Set the priority.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

aaa [<group_id>] radius client server-info auth [<number>] priority <priority>

Options

<group_id>

• Group ID

Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.

• Server definition number

Specify the definition number of the remote device with a decimal value.

The default is 0.

• Priority

Specify the priority required to enable the RADIUS server in the same group.

A smaller value has a higher priority, where "0" is assumed to be the highest priority

level and "255" to be the lowest priority level.

0 to 255:

Specifying "255" will always place the RADIUS server into the dead state.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify the priority used to determine the RADIUS server for accounting among multiple

RADIUS servers in the same group. A RADIUS server with the highest priority, which is

not in the dead state, is used in the same group. If there are multiple RADIUS servers

which have the highest priority, the target RADIUS server will be determined randomly.

Default

It is assumed that the highest priority has been specified.

aaa radius client server-info auth priority 0

AAA Information Settings

254

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.13.3.9 aaa radius client server-info auth source

Function

Set the local IP address.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

aaa [<group_id>] radius client server-info auth [<number>] source <address>

Options

<group_id>

• Group ID

Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.

• Server definition number

Specify the definition number of the remote device with a decimal value.

The default is 0.

• Local IP address

Specify the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the local RADIUS authentication server.

The allowable range is as follows:

- IPv4

1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254

128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254

192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

- IPv6

::2 to fe7f:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff

fec0:: to feff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the IP address of the local RADIUS authentication device. The IP address setting of

this definition supersedes that of the local RADIUS authentication device set by "aaa

radius auth source".

Default

It is assumed that the IP address setting of the local RADIUS authentication device set by

"aaa radius auth source" is applied.

AAA Information Settings

255

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.13.3.10 aaa radius client retry

Function

Set a RADIUS packet retry count and a transmission interval.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

aaa [<group_id>] radius client retry <interval> <retry>

Options

<group_id>

• Group ID

Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.

• Transmission interval

Set a packet transmission interval when the RADIUS server returns no response.

The allowable range is as follows:

1 to 10 (seconds)

<retry>

• Retry count value

Set a packet retry count value when the RADIUS server returns no response.

The allowable range is as follows:

1 to 10 (times)

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set a number of times for retransmission and a transmission interval for packet when no

response has been returned from the RADIUS server.

The time period to wait for a response from the server is transmission interval x (number

of transmission + 1) seconds.

Default

Operate assuming that the transmission interval is 5 seconds and the number of times for

retransmission is 2.

In this case, the time period to wait for a response from the server is 15 seconds after the

first packet transmission was completed.

aaa 0 client radius retry 5 2

5.13.3.11 aaa radius client security

Function

Set security Level when RADIUS server doesn’t respond

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

aaa [<group_id>] radius client security <level>

Options

<group_id>

• Group ID

Specify group ID with a decimal value.

<level>

• high

Set security level to high

• normal

Set security level to normal

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set security Level when RADIUS server doesn’t respond

aaa <group_id> client radius security high

AAA Information Settings

256

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.14 Password Information

This section explains about password information.

5.14.1 password format

Function

Sets format for encrypted password strings.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

password format <format>

Options

Format for encrypted password strings

• common

Common password format

Encrypted password strings that can be used by other devices.

• unique

Device-specific password format

Encrypted password strings that can only be used by this device.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

When plain text passwords are set in the configuration they are converted to encrypted

password strings. When the show or save command is executed, encrypted passwords

are displayed or stored with the word "encrypted" appended.

This command configures the format in which encrypted password strings are shown and

stored. This setting applies to all passwords in the configuration.

This command takes effect immediately upon configuration.

If the Common option is set, password strings will be encrypted in the same common

password format for all devices. If a device is replaced due to failure or other

circumstances, a configuration that has been saved using the common password format

can be restored to the new device after replacement. While the common option is in

effect, passwords may be set in plain text or in the common password format. Passwords

may not be set in a device-specific format.

If the unique option is set, encrypted password strings will be in a device-specific

password format, unique to each device. A configuration shown or stored using a device-

specific password format can only be set or restored to that specific device. If the device

is replaced due to failure or other circumstances, the configuration saved in the device-

specific password format cannot be restored, so please be sure to reset the new device

with plain text passwords after replacement. While the unique option is in effect,

passwords may be set in plain text, the common password format, or the device-specific

password format displayed on the device.

If the unique option is set on devices implementing Trusted Platform Module (TPM), the

device-specific password format will use the TPM chip. In addition, when the unique

option is set, a check is run to see if the TPM chip is working properly, and if a hardware

error is detected the message below is output and the option is set to common.

Caution

If set to unique, this setting cannot be re-set to common or canceled. If you wish to reset

this setting to common, run the reset clear command to restore to factory settings, then

re-set the configuration.

When the unique option has been set, all preexisting passwords will be converted to the

device-specific password format, displayed and saved.

Password Information

257

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Default

If unset, the common setting will be the default.

password format common

5.14.2 password admin set

Function

Set an administrator password.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

password admin set [<password> [encrypted]]

Options

• Password

Specify a password using up to 64 characters from, 0x21,0x23 to 0x3e,0x40 to 0x7e

ASCII set.

• Encrypted password

Specify the encrypted password together with "encrypted" to be displayed with the

"show candidate-config", "show running-config", or "show startup-config" command.

Correctly specify the character string displayed in the "show candidate-config", "show

running-config", or "show startup-config" command.

encrypted

• Specify the encrypted password

Specify it when setting the encrypted password in <password>.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set a password for the administrator to login this device. When changing to the

administrator with the "admin" command, the administrator password set in this

command is required.

To make the password secure, it shall be set with eight or more alphanumeric characters

and symbols mixed.

If the <password> option is not set, the password is required interactivery.

This command becomes valid just after it is set.

Entering "admin" for the user name and this password for "password" makes it possible

to login as the admin class and also to use admin-class commands.

Caution

Be sure to set an administrator password. When not setting the administrator password,

you can login without entering any password.

When not setting the administrator password, you can't use AAA user information (see

"aaa user id" command) and user information in RADIUS-server.

When setting a password that consists of seven or fewer characters, only alphabetic

characters, or only numeric characters, and also when deleting a setting, the setting and

the deletion are performed, but a warning message will be displayed notifying that the

password is vulnerable.

With the "show candidate-config", "show running-config", and "show startup-config"

commands, the encrypted password is displayed together with "encrypted".

Message

Password:

The <password> option is not set.

Type the password for administrator interactivery.

Password Information

258

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Retype password:

The <password> option is not set.

Retype the password for administrator interactivery.

<WARNING> weak admin password: set the password

The administrator password is not set.

Set an administrator password.

<WARNING> weak admin password: contain at least 8 characters

The administrator password is seven or fewer characters in length.

Set an administrator password with eight or more characters.

<WARNING> weak admin password: contain a different kind of character

The administrator password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric

characters.

Set an administrator password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.

This message is also displayed at login or execution of the "admin", "load", or "discard"

command.

Default

An administrator password is not set.

Password Information

259

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.14.3 password user set

Function

Set a general user password.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

password user set <password> [encrypted]

Options

• Password

Specify a password using up to 64 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e ASCII set.

• Encrypted password

Specify the encrypted password together with "encrypted" to be displayed with the

"show candidate-config", "show running-config", or "show startup-config" command.

Correctly specify the character string displayed in the "show candidate-config", "show

running-config", or "show running-config" command.

encrypted

• Specify the encrypted password

Specify it when setting the encrypted password in <password>.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set a password for general users to login this device.

To make the password secure, it shall be set with eight or more alphanumeric characters

and symbols mixed.

This command becomes valid just after it is set.

Entering "admin" for the user name and this password for "password" makes it possible

to login as the user class and also to use user-class commands.

Caution

When not setting the user password, you cannot login as the user class. When setting a

password that consists of seven or fewer characters, only alphabetic characters, or only

numeric characters, and also when deleting a setting, the setting and the deletion are

performed, but a warning message will be displayed notifying that the password is

vulnerable.

At ftp connection, a user password cannot be used for login.

If you login with a user password, the contents that were set at logout or execution of the

"admin" command will be discarded without storing the contents that were set with the

"terminal" or "alias" command.

With the "show logging" command, history numbers are discontinuous without displaying

the commands that were executed by the administrator.

With the "show candidate-config", "show running-config", and "show startup-config"

commands, the encrypted password is displayed together with "encrypted".

Message

<WARNING> weak user password: contain at least 8 characters

The user password is seven or fewer characters in length.

Set a user password with eight or more characters.

<WARNING> weak user password: contain a different kind of character

The user password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric characters.

Set a user password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.

This message is also displayed at login or execution of the "admin", "load", or "discard"

command.

Default

A general user password is not set.

Password Information

260

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.14.4 password aaa

Function

Set AAA information of login user

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

password aaa <group_id>

Options

<group_id>

• AAA Group ID

Specify AAA group ID with a decimal value

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify AAA group ID refered when logging in

• When using RADIUS server

Specify Filter-ID attribute registered in RADIUS server

"administrator" is admin class, "user" is user class

• When using local user information

It is diced by class (aaa user user-role) registered in AAA information

Default

N/A

5.14.5 password authtype

Function

Set authentication protocol for login user authentication

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

password authtype <authtype>

Options

• chap_md5

Use MD5-CHAP as authentication protocol

• pap

Use PAP as authentication protocol

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set authentication protocol for login user authentication

It is assumed to use MD5-CHAP as authentication protocol.

password authtype chap_md5

Password Information

261

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15 Device Information Settings

This section explains about device information settings.

5.15.1 SNMP Information

This section explains about the commands related to SNMP information.

5.15.1.1 snmp service

Function

Set the SNMP agent and SNMP trap functions.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp service <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable SNMP agent and SNMP trap functions.

• off

Disable SNMP agent and SNMP trap functions.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether to enable SNMP agent and SNMP trap functions.

It is assumed that the SNMP agent function is stopped.

snmp service off

5.15.1.2 snmp agent contact

Function

Set the administrator name for the SNMP agent function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp agent contact <syscontact>

Options

• Administrator name (sysContact value)

Specify the MIB variable, sysContact, which indicates an administrator name of this

device, with up to 40 characters.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the administrator name for the SNMP agent function.

It is assumed that the administrator name is not set.

Device Information Settings

262

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.1.3 snmp agent sysname

Function

Set the equipment name for the SNMP agent function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp agent sysname <sysname>

Options

• Equipment name (sysName value)

Specify the MIB variable, sysName, which indicates an equipment name of this device,

with up to 32 characters.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the equipment name for the SNMP agent function.

It is assumed that the equipment name is not set.

5.15.1.4 snmp agent location

Function

Set where to install the equipment for the SNMP agent function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp agent location <syslocation>

Options

• Location to install the equipment in (sysLocation value)

Specify the MIB variable, sysLocation, which indicates where to install this device, with

up to 72 characters.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set where to install the equipment for the SNMP agent function.

It is assumed that the location to install the equipment is not set.

Device Information Settings

263

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.1.5 snmp agent address

Function

Set the SNMP agent address.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp agent address <address>

Options

• Agent address

Set the agent address of this device.

Specifying 0.0.0.0 will delete the SNMP agent address.

The allowable range is as follows:

1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254

128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254

192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the SNMP agent address. This setting is also used for the local address at trap

transmission.

Make sure to set it when using the SNMP agent function.

Default

It is assumed that the agent address is not set. The local IP address of trap packet is

undefined.

5.15.1.6 snmp agent engineid

Function

Set a SNMP engine ID name.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp agent engineid <engineID>

Options

• SNMP engine ID

Specify a SNMP engine ID with up to 27 characters.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set a SNMP engine ID under SNMPv3. In this device, the SNMP engine ID is as follows.

• When setting this command;

Octets 1 to 5: 0x800000d304 fixed

Octet 6 and above: Engine ID set in this command

• When not setting this command;

Octets 1 to 5: 0x800000d304 fixed

Octet 6 and above: Random value

Default

A SNMP engine ID is generated automatically.

Device Information Settings

264

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.1.7 snmp manager

Function

Set the SNMP host information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp manager <manager_number> <address> <community> <trap> [<write>]

Options

<manager_number>

• SNMP host definition number

Specify a serial number of SNMP host definition with a decimal value from 0 to 7.

• Access permission/trap sending address

Specify an IP address to permit access and to send a trap to, in the

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX format, where "XXX" indicates a 3-digit decimal value.

Specifying 0.0.0.0 will permit access by all hosts without trap sending.

The allowable range is as follows:

1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254

128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254

192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

Specify the community name.

• Community name

Specify the community name for trap sending with up to 32 characters.

• public

Specify it when communicating with any of the SNMP managers.

<trap>

Specify whether or not to perform trap transmission.

• off

Specify it when not performing trap transmission.

• v1

Specify it when performing SNMPv1 trap transmission.

• v2c

Specify it when performing SNMPv2 trap transmission.

<write>

Specify whether or not to permit writing from the SNMP manager.

• enable

Specify it when enabling writing from the SNMP manager.

• disable

Specify it when disabling writing from the SNMP manager.

The default is "disable".

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Default

Set the SNMP host information.

It is assumed that no SNMP host information is set.

Device Information Settings

265

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.1.8 snmp trap coldstart

Function

Set the coldStart trap.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp trap coldstart <mode>

Options

<mode>

Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.

• enable

Enable trapping.

• disable

Disable trapping.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether to enable or disable the coldStart trap.

It is assumed that the coldStart trap is enabled.

snmp trap coldstart enable

5.15.1.9 snmp trap linkdown

Function

Set the linkDown trap.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp trap linkdown <mode>

Options

<mode>

Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.

• enable

Enable trapping.

• disable

Disable trapping.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether to enable or disable the linkDown trap.

It is assumed that the linkDown trap is enabled.

snmp trap linkdown enable

Device Information Settings

266

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.1.10 snmp trap linkup

Function

Set the linkUp trap.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp trap linkup <mode>

Options

<mode>

Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.

• enable

Enable trapping.

• disable

Disable trapping.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether to enable or disable the linkUp trap.

It is assumed that the linkUp trap is enabled.

snmp trap linkup enable

5.15.1.11 snmp trap authfail

Function

Set the authenticationFailure trap.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp trap authfail <mode>

Options

<mode>

Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.

• enable

Enable trapping.

• disable

Disable trapping.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether to enable or disable the authenticationFailure trap.

It is assumed that the authenticationFailure trap is enabled.

snmp trap authfail enable

Device Information Settings

267

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.1.12 snmp trap newroot

Function

Set the newRoot trap.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp trap newroot <mode>

Options

<mode>

Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.

• enable

Enable trapping.

• disable

Disable trapping.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether to enable or disable the newRoot trap.

It is assumed that the newRoot trap is enabled.

snmp trap newroot enable

5.15.1.13 snmp trap topologychange

Function

Set the topologyChange trap.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp trap topologychange <mode>

Options

<mode>

Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.

• enable

Enable trapping.

• disable

Disable trapping.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether to enable or disable the topologyChange trap.

It is assumed that the topologyChange trap is enabled.

snmp trap topologychange enable

Device Information Settings

268

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.1.14 snmp trap noserror

Function

Set the nosError trap.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp trap noserror <mode>

Options

<mode>

Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.

• enable

Enable trapping.

• disable

Disable trapping.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether to enable or disable the nosError trap.

It is assumed that the nosError trap is enabled.

snmp trap noserror enable

5.15.1.15 snmp trap lldpremtableschange

Function

Set lldpRemTablesChange trap

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp trap lldpremtableschange <mode>

Options

<mode>

Set trap mode

• enable

Enable trap

• disable

Disable trap

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether to enable or not lldpRemTablesChange tra

It is assumed that the lldpRemTablesChange trap is enabled.

snmp trap lldpremtableschange enable

Device Information Settings

269

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.1.16 snmp rmon

Function

Set the RMON function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp rmon <mode>

Options

<mode>

Specify whether to enable or disable the RMON function.

• on

Use the RMON function.

• off

Do not use the RMON function.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set whether to use the RMON function. When not using this function, the RMON-MIB

cannot be obtained.

Default

It is assumed that the RMON function is used.

snmp rmon on

5.15.1.17 snmp user name

Function

Set a SNMP user name.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp user [<number>] name <user_name>

Options

• User definition number

Specify a user definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.

The default is 0.

<user_name>

• SNMP user name

Specify a SNMP user name with up to 32 characters.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set a SNMP user name under SNMPv3. Be sure to set it when using the SNMPv3

function.

Default

It is assumed that a SNMP user name is not set.

Device Information Settings

270

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.1.18 snmp user address

Function

Set a SNMP host address.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp user [<number>] address [<addr_number>] <address>

Options

• User definition number

Specify a user definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.

The default is 0.

<addr_number>

• SNMP host definition number

Specify a SNMP host definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.

The default is 0.

• SNMP host address

Specify an IP address of the host, which permits SNMPv3 access, in the

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX format, where "XXX" indicates a 3-digit decimal value.

The allowable range is as follows:

1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254

128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254

192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set a SNMP host address under SNMPv3. Up to eight addresses can be defined for this

device, including ones set in the "snmp user notification" command.

Default

It is assumed that no SNMP host address is set.

Device Information Settings

271

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.1.19 snmp user notification

Function

Set a trap notification host address.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp user [<number>] notification [<addr_number>] <address>

Options

• User definition number

Specify a user definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.

The default is 0.

<addr_number>

• Trap notification host definition number

Specify a trap notification host definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.

The default is 0.

• Trap notification host address

Specify an IP address of the host, which is subject to trap notification, in the

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX format, where "XXX" indicates a 3-digit decimal value.

The allowable range is as follows:

1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254

128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254

192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set a trap notification host address under SNMPv3. Up to eight addresses can be

defined for this device, including the ones set in the "snmp user address" command.

Default

It is assumed that no trap notification host address is set.

Device Information Settings

272

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.1.20 snmp user auth

Function

Set the authentication protocol

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp user [<number>] auth <protocol> [<password> [encrypted]]

Options

• User definition number

Specify the user definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.

The default is 0

Specify the authentication protocol

• none

Specify it when unusing authentication protocol.

• md5

Specify it when using MD5(HMAC-MD5-96)

• sha

Specify it when using SHA (HMAC-SHA-96)

Set the authentication password

• In the case of specifying unencryption password

Authentication Protocol

Password length

md5

8-16 characters

8-20 characters

sha1

• In the case of specifying encryption password

Specify the encrypted authentication password shown by show command with

"encrypted"

Specify the characters which is shown by show command

encrypted

• Specify encrypted authentication password

Specify it when specifying encrypted authentication password in <password>

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set authentication protocol for SNMPv3

It is assumed that the authentication protocol is not use.

snmp user <number> auth none

Device Information Settings

273

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.1.21 snmp user priv

Function

Set encryption protocol

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp user [<number>] priv <protocol> [<password> [encrypted]]

Options

• User definition number

Specify the user definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.

The default is 0

Specify the encryption protocol

• none

Specify it when unusing encryption protocol.

• des

Specify when using DES (CBC-DES) as encryption protocol

Specify encrypted password

• In the case of specifying unencryption password

Encryption Protocol

Password length

des

8 to 16 characters

• In the case of specifying encryption password

Specify the encrypted encryption password shown by show command with "encrypted"

Specify the characters which is shown by show command

encrypted

• Specify encrypted encryption password

Specify it when specifying encrypted authentication password in <password>

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the encryption protocol for SNMPv3

Specify authentication protocol when using encryption protocol

It is assumed that encryption protocol is not use.

Default

snmp user <number> priv none

Device Information Settings

274

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.1.22 snmp user write

Function

Set the MIB write-enable view.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp user [<number>] write <view_name>

Options

• User definition number

Specify a user definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.

The default is 0.

<view_name>

Specify the view name that indicates whether or not to permit to write in the write enabled

MIB.

• none

Specify it when not permitting all.

• all

Specify it when permitting all.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify the MIB write enabled view name under SNMPv3.

It is assumed that nothing is permitted.

Device Information Settings

275

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.1.23 snmp user read

Function

Sets MIB read permission view.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp user [<number>] read <access> [<view_number>]

Options

• User ID

User ID expressed as a base 10 value from 0 to 7. Default is 0.

Sets MIB read permission view.

• all

Read permission is granted on all supported MIBs.

• none

MIB read permission is not granted.

• view

Use the MIB view information set with the "snmp view subtree" command.

<view_number>

Specifies the "snmp view subtree" command's MIB view ID number, expressed as a base

10 value from 0 to 7. The view ID can only be set when view is specified for the <access>

option.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Sets MIB read permission view in SNMPv3.

If a "snmp view subtree" command definition corresponding to the view ID set does not

exist, MIB read permission is not granted.

Default

If unset, read permission is granted on all supported MIBs.

snmp user <number> read all

Device Information Settings

276

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.1.24 snmp user notify

Function

Sets trap notification permission view.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp user [<number>] notify <access> [<view_number>]

Options

• User ID

User ID expressed as a base 10 value from 0 to 7. Default is 0.

Indicates trap notification permission view.

• all

Permission is granted for all supported trap notifications.

• none

Trap notification permission is not granted.

• view

Use the MIB view information set with the "snmp view subtree" command.

<view_number>

Specifies the "snmp view subtree" command's MIB view ID number, expressed as a base

10 value from 0 to 7. The view ID can only be set when view is specified for the <access>

option.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Sets trap notification permission view in SNMPv3.

If a "snmp view subtree" command definition corresponding to the view ID set does not

exist, trap notification permission is not granted.

Default

If unset, trap notification permission is granted on all supported trap notifications.

snmp user <number> notify all

Device Information Settings

277

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.1.25 snmp view subtree

Function

SNMP MIB view information

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

snmp view [<view_number>] subtree [<subtree_number>] <view_type> <subtree_name>

Options

<view_number>

• View definition number

Specify the view definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7

The default is 0.

<subtree_number>

• Subtree definition number

Specify the subtree definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 15

The default is 0

<view_type>

Specify whether including <subtree_name> in MIB view or not

• include

Include <subtree_name> in MIB view

• exclude

Exclude <subtree_name> from MIB view

<subtree_name>

• Subtree name

Specify subtree name

Subtree

MIB Group name

name Object ID

Remark

iso

internet

mib2

1.3.6.1

1.3.6.1.2.1

system

interfaces

1.3.6.1.2.1.1

1.3.6.1.2.1.2

1.3.6.1.2.1.3

1.3.6.1.2.1.4

1.3.6.1.2.1.5

1.3.6.1.2.1.6

1.3.6.1.2.1.7

1.3.6.1.2.1.10

1.3.6.1.2.1.11

1.3.6.1.2.1.16

1.3.6.1.2.1.17

1.3.6.1.2.1.31

1.3.6.1.2.1.67

1.3.6.1.4.1

icmp

tcp

udp

transmission

snmp

rmon

dot1dBridge

ifMIB

radiusMIB

enterprises

lldpMIB

1.0.8802.1.1.2

Device Information Settings

278

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Subtree

name Object ID

Remark

Trap name

coldstart

linkdown

linkup

1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1

1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3

1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4

1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5

1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1

authfail

newroot

topologychange

noserror

1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.2

1.3.6.1.4.1.211.1.127.1.0.1

1.0.8802.1.1.2.0.0.1

lldpremtableschange

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set MIB view information in SNMPv3

N/A

Device Information Settings

279

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.2 System Log Information

This section explains about the commands related to system log information.

5.15.2.1 syslog server address

Function

Set the server IP address that receives system log information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

syslog server <number> address <address>

Options

• Definition number

Specify the definition number of the server that receives system log information

(message) with a decimal value from 0 to 2.

• IP address

Specify the IP address of the server that receives system log information (message).

The allowable range is as follows:

1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254

128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254

192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the server IP address that receives system log information (message).

The following describes the procedure for outputting system log information.

1) Send information to a server the host with the IP address set in syslog server <address>.

2) Display information with the "show logging syslog" command.

Caution

Default

If STP is used, it takes a long time for transmission to be enabled after device startup.

During this time, some messages are discarded before reaching the server.

When transferring system logs to a Linux server, be sure to enable remote logging by

using the "-syslogd -r" command or editing the syslog init file to include the "-r" qualifier.

It is assumed that the server that receives system log information is not specified.

Device Information Settings

280

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.2.2 syslog server pri

Function

Set the severity level for syslog information sent to the syslog servers.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

syslog server <number> pri <mode>

Options

• Definition number

Specify the definition number of the server that receives system log information

(message) with a decimal value from 0 to 2.

<mode>

• Priority

Specify the severity level for syslog output. When specifying multiple parameters,

separate them with commas (,).

- error

Specifies a severity level of LOG_ERROR events will be output to the syslog servers.

- warn

Specifies a severity level of LOG_WARNING will be output to the syslog servers.

- notice

Specifies a severity level of LOG_NOTICE will be output to the syslog servers.

- info

Specifies a severity of LOG_INFO will be output to the syslog servers.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify severity levels to output to each syslog server from among those specified by

"syslog server address" command.

Default

It is assumed that "error", "warn" and "info" are specified.

Device Information Settings

281

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.2.3 syslog pri

Function

Set the severity level output to the switch syslog.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

syslog pri <mode>

Options

<mode>

• Priority

Specify the priority to output system log information from the following. When

specifying multiple numbers, separate them with commas (,).

- error

Specifies a severity level of LOG_ERROR will be output to the switch syslog.

- warn

Specifies a severity level of LOG_WARNING will be output to the switch syslog.

- notice

Specifies a severity level of LOG_NOTICE will be output to the switch syslog.

- info

Specifies a severity level of LOG_INFO will be output to the switch syslog.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify the severity level output to the switch syslog.

It is assumed that "error", "warn" and "info" are specified.

5.15.2.4 syslog facility

Function

Set a system log information facility.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

syslog facility <num>

Options

<num>

• Facility

Set a system log information facility with a decimal value from 0 to 23.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify a system log information facility.

It is assumed that 0 has been specified.

syslog facility 0

Device Information Settings

282

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.2.5 syslog security

Function

Set the security to output the system log information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

syslog security <securetype>

Options

• Security type

Select one of the followings to output the security log information.

When specifying multiples, separate them with commas (,).

proxydns : Specify it when the Proxy DNS module is subject to output.

none

: Specify it when all modules are out of subject to output.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify the security used to output the system log information.

It is assumed all options have been specified.

syslog security proxydns

5.15.2.6 syslog dupcut

Function

Set the duplicated message output of system log information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

syslog dupcut <cut>

Options

<cut>

• yes

Do not output the previous output message if duplicated.

• no

Output all messages without checking for duplication.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify whether to output a message, which was duplicated with the previously output

message, to the system log.

Default

It is assumed that duplication check is not performed.

syslog dupcut no

Device Information Settings

283

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.2.7 syslog command-logging

Function

Set command execution history output of system log information

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

syslog command-logging <mode>

Options

<mode>

• enable

Output command execution history to system log

• disable

Do not Output command execution history to system log

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Specify whether to output command history to system log

It is assumed that the command execution history is not output to the system log.

syslog command-logging disable

5.15.2.8 syslog header

Function

Set the RFC3164 Header information of the system log information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

syslog header <mode>

Options

<mode>

• enable

ADD the RFC3164 Header to the system log information sent to the syslog servers.

• disable

Do not add the RFC3164 Header to the system log information sent to the syslog

servers.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify whether to add the RFC3164 Header to the system log information sent to the

syslog servers.

Default

It is assumed that the RFC3164 Header is not added.

syslog header disable

Device Information Settings

284

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.2.9 syslog source address

Function

Set the source IP address of the system log information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

syslog source address <address>

Options

Specify the source IPv4 address that is used for sending the system log information.

The allowable range is as follows:

1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254

128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254

192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify the source IPv4 address that is used for sending the system log information.

If the IPv4 address is not set, the IPv4 address of the sending interface is used.

Default

It is assumed that use the IPv4 address of the sending interface in used.

Device Information Settings

285

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.3

Automatic Time Setting Information

This section explains about the commands related to automatic time setting information.

5.15.3.1 time auto server

Function

Specify the IP address, protocol, and priority of server(s) that supply time information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

time auto server <count> address <address> <protocol> [<interface>]

Options

<count>

• Priority

Set the server priority with a decimal value from 0 to 3.

A smaller value has a higher priority.

• IPv4 address

Specify the IPv4 address of the server that supplies time information.

Specifying 0.0.0.0 will delete the set value.

The allowable range is as follows:

1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254

128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254

192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

224.0.0.1 to 239.255.255.254 (Multicast address)

255.255.255.255 (Broadcast address)

• IPv6 address

Specify the IPv6 address of the server that supplies time information.

Specifying 0:0: 0 will delete the set value.

The allowable range is as follows:

::2 to fe7f:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff

fec0:: to feff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff

Specify the desireded protocol.

• time

Specify the TIME protocol (TCP).

• sntp

Specify the simple NTP protocol (UDP).

Specify the target interface.

[Note]

This option can be specified only when the <address> has been specified as an IPv4

multicast address or IPv4 broadcast address and the <protocol> has been specified as

sntp.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify the working parameters for the time information server(s).

The switch clock is automatically synchronized to the time information server(s)

specified.

Default

It is assumed that the time is not set automatically.

Device Information Settings

286

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.3.2 time auto interval

Function

Set an automatic setting interval of time information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

time auto interval <time>

Options

<time>

Specify the interval to set time information.

• start

Specify when setting time information only once at device power-on or restart.

• Interval

Specify the interval to set time information within the range of 0 second up to 10 days.

The unit shall be d (day), h (hour), m (minute), or s (second).

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set an interval to automatically set the time.

It is assumed that time information is set only once at device power-on or restart when

using the time supply server.

time auto interval start

5.15.3.3 time zone

Function

Set the time zone of time information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

time zone <offset>

Options

• Difference

Specify the time zone of this device.

Specify the time differences from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the timezone.

It is assumed that Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) is set for the time zone.

time zone 0

Device Information Settings

287

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.3.4 time summer-time

Function

Sets summer time/daylight saving time.

Use the no form to return to the default setup.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

time summer-time <start_day> <end_day> [<offset>]

Options

<start_day>

• Specifies the day/time to start Daylight Saving Time in any form of "Mm.w.d/hhmm,"

"Jn/hhmm," or "n/hhmm."

- Mm.w.d

Specifies the day to start Daylight Saving Time in m, w, and d.

Specify month for m (1 to 12), week for w (1 to 5), and the day of the week for d (0 to 6).

w = 1 means the first week where d exists, and w = 5 means the last week.

d = 0 means Sunday, d = 6 means Saturday.

- Jn

Specifies the day to start Daylight Saving Time in day-of-year (Julian day).

In leap years, February 29th is not counted.

Specify a number in the range of 1 to 365 for n.

- n

Specifies the day to start Daylight Saving Time in day-of-year.

In leap years, February 29th is counted.

Specify a number in the range of 1 to 366 for n.

- hh

Specifies the hour to start Daylight Saving Time.

- mm

Specifies the minute to start Daylight Saving Time.

Specifies the following values, for the first day of each month in "Jn" specification and "n"

specification.

specification

Month/Day

January 1st

Jn specification

Common year

Leap year

February 1st

March 1st

J32

J60

April 1st

J91

May 1st

J121

J152

J182

J213

J244

J274

J305

J335

121

152

182

213

244

274

305

335

122

153

183

213

245

275

306

336

June 1st

July 1st

August 1st

September 1st

October 1st

November 1st

December 1st

<end_day>

• Specifies the day/time to end Daylight Saving Time.

The description format is the same as <start_day>.

Device Information Settings

288

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

• pecifies the time set forward during Daylight Saving Time in the form of "hhmm."

- hh

Specifies the hour set forward during Daylight Saving Time with a two-digit number.

It can be set in the range of 00 to 23.

- mm

Specifies the minute set forward during Daylight Saving Time with a two-digit

number.

It can be set in the range of 00 to 59.

"0000" can not set as <offset>.

When this parameter is omitted, "0100" (an hour) is specified.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Sets summer time/daylight saving time.

It is assumed that the daylight saving time is not set.

Device Information Settings

289

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.4 ProxyDNS Information

This section explains about the commands related to proxyDNS information.

5.15.4.1 proxydns domain

Function

Set the forward lookup conditions for proxy DNS.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

proxydns domain <count> <qtype> <qname> <address>/<mask> reject

(Discard the request to forward)

proxydns domain <count> <qtype> <qname> <address>/<mask> static <ipaddress>

(Specify the fixed DNS server)

Options

<count>

• Destination definition number

Specify a destination definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 49.

The specified values are sorted and renumbered forward when setting was completed.

If any destination definition with a same number exists, it will be inserted before the

existing one.

<qtype>

• Query type number

Specify a decimal value from 1 to 11 or from 13 to 65535.

The following shows some part of the query types.

Name

Number

Description

Host address

An authoritative name server

Canonical name for an alias

Start of a zone of authority

A domain name pointer

Host information

CNAME

SOA

PTR

HINFO

A mail exchanger

SRV

Service

• any

Specify it for all types, excluding PTR (12).

<qname>

• Host name

Specify a host name used as a condition with up to 80 characters.

For the host name, the following wild cards are usable.

- * (Asterisk)

This is considered to be an arbitrary character string of 0 character or more.

- ? (Question mark)

This is considered to be an arbitrary character.

Device Information Settings

290

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

For the host name, the following wild cards are usable.

An execution example is given below.

Execution example

Matching Character String

This is considered to match all of the following character strings.

www.*.com

•

www.testa.com

www.test1.test.com

*test*

This is considered to match all of the following character strings.

•

www.test.com

test.com

test.co.jp

www.test?.com

This is considered to match all of the following character strings.

•

www.test1.com

www.test2.com

www.testA.com

The host name is checked without case sensitivity.

Specify the target source IPv4 address/number of mask bits.

• Source IPv4 address/number of mask bits (or mask value)

Specify a combination of the target source IPv4 address and the number of mask bits.

For the mask value, specify successive 1s following the most significant bit (MSB).

• any

Specify it when targeting all addresses.

The default is 0.0.0.0/0 (0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0).

• DNS server IP address

Specify the IPv4 address of the DNS server that forwards a request.

The allowable range is as follows:

1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254

128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254

192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set forward lookup conditions for proxy DNS. The explanation for each command is as

follows.

• Discard the requirement for forwarding

proxydns domain <count> <qtype> <qname> <address>/<mask> reject

Set the filter that disables forwarding the specified DNS request.

The host name to be specified in <qname> is available when limiting the access to the

specified host (group) even if it is registered in the DNS database. A host name that

has satisfied filtering conditions will be discarded.

• Specify static DNS server

proxydns domain <count> <qtype> <qname> <address>/<mask> static

Set the IP address to which the specified DNS request is to be forwarded.

Default

It is assumed that no forward lookup conditions for proxy DNS are set.

Device Information Settings

291

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.4.2 proxydns domain move

Function

Change the forward lookup conditions for proxy DNS.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

proxydns domain move <count> <new_count>

Options

<count>

• Destination definition number before changes

Specify a destination definition number to change its order.

<new_count>

• New destination definition number

Specify a new order for <count>.

If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the

existing one.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Change the order of forward lookup conditions for proxy DNS.

If a same definition number which has already existed is specified, it will be inserted

before the specified definition.

Device Information Settings

292

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.4.3 proxydns address

Function

Set the reverse lookup conditions for proxy DNS.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

proxydns address <count> <address>/<mask> reject

(Discard the request to forward)

proxydns address <count> <address>/<mask> static <ipaddress>

(Specify the fixed DNS server)

Options

<count>

• Destination definition number

Specify the destination definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 49.

The specified value is sorted and renumbered forward when setting was completed.

If any destination definition with a same definition number exists, it will be inserted

before the existing one.

Specify the IPv4 address for reverse lookup and the number of mask bits.

• IPv4 address for reverse lookup/number of mask bits (or mask value)

Specify a combination of the IPv4 address for reverse lookup and the number of mask

bits.

For the mask value, specify successive 1s following the most significant bit (MSB).

• any

Specify it when all addresses are subject to reverse lookup.

• DNS server IP address

Specify the IPv4 address of the DNS server that forwards a request.

The allowable range is as follows:

1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254

128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254

192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the reverse lookup conditions for proxy DNS.

The explanation for each command is as follows.

• Discard the requirement for forwarding

proxydns address <count> <address>/<mask> reject

Set the filter that disables forwarding the specified DNS request.

The host name to be specified in <qname> is available when limiting the access to the

specified host (group) even if it is registered in the DNS database. A host name that

has satisfied filtering conditions will be discarded.

• Specify static DNS server

proxydns address <count> <address>/<mask> static <ipaddress>

Specify the IP address to which the specified DNS request is to be forwarded.

The route leading to the destination is determined based on IP routing.

Default

It is assumed that no reverse lookup conditions for proxy DNS are set.

Device Information Settings

293

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.4.4 proxydns address move

Function

Change the reverse lookup conditions for proxy DNS.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

proxydns address move <count> <new_count>

Options

<count>

• Destination definition number before changes

Specify a destination definition number to change its order.

<new_count>

• New destination definition number

Specify a new order for <count>.

If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the

existing one.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Change the order of reverse lookup conditions for proxy DNS.

If a same destination definition number which has already existed is specified, it will be

inserted before the specified definition.

5.15.4.5 proxydns unicode

Function

Set the query packets for proxy DNS.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

proxydns unicode <action>

Options

Specify whether or not to transmit packets.

• pass

Specify it when transmitting the relevant packet.

• reject

Specify it when discarding the relevant packet.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set whether or not to transmit a query packet that contains hidden characters in the

query name (QNAME) of proxy DNS.

Default

It is assumed that the relevant packet is discarded.

proxydns unicode reject

Device Information Settings

294

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.5 Host Database Information

This section explains about the commands related to host database information.

5.15.5.1 host name

Function

Set the host name of the host database information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

host <number> name <name>

Options

• Definition number

Specify the definition number of the host database information with a decimal value

from 0 to 99.

<name>

• Host name

Specify the host name using up to 80 ASCII characters, which consist of alphanumeric

characters, hyphens (-), and periods (.).

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the name of the host connected under this device in the host database.

This command is available from the simple DNS server function.

Default

It is assumed that the host database is not set.

5.15.5.2 host ip address

Function

Set the IP address of the host database information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

host <number> ip address <ip_address>

Options

• Definition number

Specify the definition number of the host database information with a decimal value

from 0 to 99.

<ip_address>

• IP address

Specify the IP address of the host.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the IP address of the host connected under this device in the host database.

This command is available from the simple DNS server function.

Default

It is assumed that the host database is not set.

Device Information Settings

295

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.5.3 host ip6 address

Function

Set the IPv6 address of the host database information

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

host <number> ip6 address <ip6_address>

Options

• definition number

Set the definition number of host database information with a decimal value

<ip6_address>

• IPv6 address

Specify IPv6 address of the host

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the IPv6 address of the host connected under this device in the host database.

This command is available from the simple DNS server function.

Default

N/A

Device Information Settings

296

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.6 Schedule Information

This section explains about the commands related to schedule information.

5.15.6.1 schedule at

Function

Set the command to specify day and time in the system schedule.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

schedule <number> at <day> <time> <command>

Options

Specify a schedule definition.

• Schedule definition number

Specify a schedule definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 19.

• any

Define by using unused schedule definition number.

<day>

• Day

Specify a schedule execution day or starting day with a decimal value from 1 to 31.

• Day of the week

Select a schedule execution day or starting day from the following.

sun : Sunday

mon : Monday

tue

: Tuesday

wed : Wednesday

thu

fri

: Thursday

: Friday

sat

: Saturday

When specifying multiple days, separate them with commas (,).

• any

Specify it when setting the schedule execution day or starting day to be every day.

Specify this option at system power-on or restart.

<time>

• Execution time

Specify an execution time with a 4-digit decimal value from 0 to 9.

(Example: 0635 = 06:35 a.m., 2330 = 11:30 p.m.)

• pwon

Specify it when executing the schedule at device power-on.

• rset

Specify it when executing the schedule at device restart or power-on.

Specify a command character string to be executed.

• reset

Specify when rebooting the device.

• reset config1

Specify it when switching to the configuration 1 at device restart.

• reset config2

Specify it when switching to the configuration 2 at device restart.

Specifying other commands will not assure normal operations.

Device Information Settings

297

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the system schedule.

Explanation

Based on the schedule, the command is executed at the specified time.

Default

It is assumed that no schedule information is set.

5.15.6.2 schedule syslog

Function

Set the system log in the system schedule.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

schedule <number> syslog <syslog>

Options

Specify the schedule definition.

• Schedule definition number

Specify a schedule definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 19.

• any

Define by using unused schedule definition number.

• yes

Specify it when outputting command execution using the system log.

• no

Specify it when outputting command execution without using the system log.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify whether or not to write a message, which was output by the command to be

activated in the schedule, to the system log.

This command is enabled only when the command activated in the schedule is specified.

Default

It is assumed that no data is output to system log at a command execution.

schedule <number> syslog no

Device Information Settings

298

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.7 Filter/QoS Resource Information

This section explains about the commands related to Filter/QoS Resource Information.

5.15.7.1 resource filter distribution

Function

Set the distribution of filter and QoS resources.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448

Syntax

resource filter distribution <function> <protocol>

Options

• all

Filter and QoS resources are distributed over Filter and QoS.

• filter

Filter and QoS resources are distributed to only Filter.

• qos

Filter and QoS resources are distributed to only QoS.

• all

Filter and QoS resources are distributed over IPv4 and IPv6.

• ipv4

Filter and QoS resources are distributed to only IPv4.

• ipv6

Filter and QoS resources are distributed to only IPv6.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the distribution of filter and QoS resources.

Filter and QoS resources are distributed evenly.

resource filter distribution all all

Device Information Settings

299

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8 Other

This section explains about other commands.

5.15.8.1 addact

Function

Set the command execution reservation.

addact <index> <date> <command>

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

Options

<index>

• Registration number

Specify the registration number of the command execution reservation information.

Make sure to specify "0".

<date>

• Execution date and time

Specify a command execution date and time in the yymmddHHMM format.

: Specify the last two digits of the year, up to 2036.

mm : Specify month with a decimal value from 1 to 12.

: Specify date with a decimal value from 1 to 31.

: Specify hour with a decimal value from 0 to 23.

MM : Specify minutes with a decimal value from 0 to 59.

Specify a command character string to be executed.

• reset

Specify it when rebooting the device.

• reset config1

Specify it when switching to the configuration 1 at device restart.

• reset config2

Specify it when switching to the configuration 2 at device restart.

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the command execution reservation.

The following shows the cautions when executing a command using the schedule

function.

• Set the device time correctly.

• Make sure that the device has been turned on before the command is executed.

Execution Example

The following shows a setting example to restart the device at 02:00 a.m. in January 1,

1999 switching to configuration 2.

# addact 0 9901010200 reset config2

# show addact

0 9901010200 reset config2

Default

It is assumed that no reservation is set to execute a command.

Device Information Settings

300

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.2 watchdog service

Function

Sets watchdog reset.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

watchdog service <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Initiates watchdog reset function.

• off

Suspends watchdog reset function.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Initiates or suspends watchdog reset function.

If <mode> is set to on, if the device hangs it will reset within 16 to 48 seconds and restart.

Explanation

Default

If <mode> is set to off, it will not reset even if it hangs.

This setting will be reflected after saving the configuration and resetting or reconnecting

the power of the device.

If unset, the watchdog reset function will be initiated.

watchdog service on

5.15.8.3 consoleinfo

Function

Set the serial console connection service.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

consoleinfo autologout <time>

Options

<time>

• Forced logout time

Specify a time period (from 0 to 86400 seconds (one day)) for the user to be forcibly

logged out if no commands have been executed while logging in on the serial console.

The unit shall be d (day), h (hour), m (minute), or s (second).

Specifying 0 seconds will not perform forced logout.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set to log out forcibly if no command was executed within the time specified in <time>

while login via serial console.

Default

It is assumed that forced logout is not set.

consoleinfo autologout 0s

Device Information Settings

301

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.4 telnetinfo

Function

Set the TELNET connection service.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

telnetinfo autologout <time>

Options

<time>

• Automatic disconnection time

Specify a time period (from 0 to 86400 seconds (one day)) for the user to be

automatically disconnected when no command input/output processing has been

performed by the client while connected through telnet.

The unit shall be d (day), h (hour), m (minute), or s (second).

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set a time period to disconnect the TELNET connection when no data is input and

output.

Default

It is assumed that TELNET connection input/output is not monitored.

telnetinfo autologout 0s

5.15.8.5 mflag

Function

Set the CE maintenance login.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

mflag <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Specify it when enabling login using a CE-dedicated password.

• off

Specify it when disabling login using a CE-dedicated password.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether or not to permit CE maintenance login.

It is assumed that login with a CE-dedicated password is rejected.

mflag off

Device Information Settings

302

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.6 dumpswitch

Function

Allows/disallows dumping of data to external media.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448

Syntax

dumpswitch <mode>

Options

<mode>

• enable

Allows dumping of data to external media via a dump switch.

• disable

Disallows dumping of data to external media via a dump switch.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Allows/disallows dumping of data to external media via a dump switch.

If unset, dumping of data to external media via a dump switch will be allowed.

dumpswitch enable

5.15.8.7 sysname

Function

Set a name of this device.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

sysname <name>

Options

<name>

• Name

Specify a name of this device using up to 32 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e ASCII

set.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set a name of this device.

The name set in this command can be used as the MIB variable, sysName, which is used

for SNMP. In this case, by deleting the sysName value set in the "snmp agent sysname"

command, the host name set in this command can be used as sysName.

This command is not directly associated with the "snmp agent sysname" command

regarding the behavior on the network. However, their names should be identical for

network control purposes.

Caution

Default

When you use LLMNR function, please start "sysname" at alphabetic characters, and

use only alphameric characters, "-" and "_". Some LLMNR client can't use some symbols

and string start at numeric characters.

It is assumed that a name of this device is not set.

Device Information Settings

303

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.8 serverinfo ftp

Function

Set the FTP server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo ftp ip <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable the FTP server function.

• off

Disable the FTP server function.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether or not to enable the FTP server function.

It is assumed that the FTP server function is enabled.

serverinfo ftp ip on

5.15.8.9 serverinfo ftp ip6

Function

Set the IPv6 FTP server function FTP

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo ftp ip6 <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable IPv6 FTP server function

• off

Disable IPv6 FTP server function

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether or not to enable IPv6 FTP server function

It is assumed that the IPv6 FTP server function is enabled.

serverinfo ftp ip6 on

Device Information Settings

304

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.10 serverinfo ftp filter

Function

Set the application filter for the FTP server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo ftp filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>

Options

<count>

• Filtering definition number

Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value

from 0 to 29.

A smaller value has a higher priority.

Specify an operation when filtering conditions are satisfied.

• accept

Transmit the relevant packet.

• reject

Block the relevant packet.

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Set the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.

If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and

ignored.

The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.

• ip

Set only the source IP address and the number of mask bits.

If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the application filter for the FTP server function.

It is assumed that the application filter is not set for the FTP server function.

Device Information Settings

305

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.11 serverinfo ftp filter move

Function

Change the priority of the application filter for the FTP server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo ftp filter move <count> <new_count>

Options

<count>

• Target filtering definition number

Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed.

<new_count>

• Destination filtering definition number

Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.

If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the

existing one.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Change the priority of the application filter for the FTP server function.

5.15.8.12 serverinfo ftp filter default

Function

Set the default operation of the application filter for the FTP server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo ftp filter default <action>

Options

Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the FTP

server function.

• accept

Transmit the relevant packet.

• reject

Block the relevant packet.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the FTP

server function.

Default

A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.

serverinfo ftp filter default accept

Device Information Settings

306

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.13 serverinfo sftp

Function

Set the SSH FTP server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo sftp ip <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable the SSH FTP server function.

• off

Disable the SSH FTP server function.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set whether or not to enable the SSH FTP server function.

Setting this command OFF and the "serverinfo ssh" command Off will reject a connection

request using the IPv4 address from the sftp client.

Setting this command OFF and the "serverinfo ssh" command On will reject a connection

request using the IPv4 address from the sftp client after the password was entered.

Caution

Enabling this command generates an SSH host authentication key at device power-on

and execution of the "reset" command, and it takes several tens of seconds to several

minutes for the processing time.

sftp connection is enabled after the SSH host authentication key generation was

completed.

If this device has been started to enable this function while all the ssh and sftp functions

were Off, it also takes several tens of seconds to several minutes for the processing time

to generate an SSH host authentication key. Note that other processes may be affected;

session monitoring timeout may occur, for example.

Default

It is assumed that the SSH FTP server function is enabled.

serverinfo sftp ip on

Device Information Settings

307

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.14 serverinfo sftp ip6

Function

Set the IPv6 SSH FTP server function

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo sftp ip6 <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable IPv6 SSH FTP server function

• off

Disable IPv6 SSH FTP server function

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set whether or not to enable IPv6 SSH FTP server function

Setting this command OFF and the"serverinfo ssh ip6" command OFF will reject a

connection request using the IPv6 address from the sftp client.

Setting this command OFF and the "serverinfo ssh ip6" command ON will reject a

connection request using the IPv6 address from the sftp client after the password was

entered.

Caution

Default

Enabling this command generates an SSH host authentication key at device power-on or

execution of the "reset" command, and it takes several tens of seconds to several

minutes for the processing time. sftp connection is enabled after the SSH host

authentication key generation was completed.

If this device has been started to enable this function while all the ssh and sftp functions

were Off, it also takes several tens of seconds to several minutes for the processing time

to generate an SSH host authentication key. Note that other processes may be affected;

session monitoring timeout may occur, for example.

It is assumed that the IPv6 SSH FTP server function is enabled.

serverinfo sftp ip6 on

5.15.8.15 serverinfo telnet

Function

Set the TELNET server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo telnet ip <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable the TELNET server function.

• off

Disable the TELNET server function.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether or not to enable the TELNET server function.

It is assumed that the TELNET server function is enabled.

serverinfo telnet ip on

Device Information Settings

308

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.16 serverinfo telnet ip6

Function

Set the IPv6 telnet server function

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo telnet ip6 <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable telnet server function

• off

Disable telnet server function

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the IPv6 telnet server function

It is assumed that the IPv6 TELNET server function is enabled.

serverinfo telnet ip6 on

5.15.8.17 serverinfo telnet filter

Function

Set the application filter for the TELNET server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo telnet filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>

Options

<count>

• Filtering definition number

Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value

from 0 to 29.

A smaller value has a higher priority.

Specify an operation when filtering conditions are satisfied.

• accept

Transmit the relevant packet.

• reject

Block the relevant packet.

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.

If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not specified, the filtering definition will be

disabled and ignored.

The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.

• ip

Set only the source IP address and the number of mask bits.

If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the application filter for the TELNET server function.

It is assumed that the application filter is not set for the TELNET server function.

Device Information Settings

309

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.18 serverinfo telnet filter move

Function

Change the priority of the application filter for the TELNET server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo telnet filter move <count> <new_count>

Options

<count>

• Target filtering definition number

Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed.

<new_count>

• Destination filtering definition number

Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.

If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the

existing one.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Change the priority of the application filter for the TELNET server function.

5.15.8.19 serverinfo telnet filter default

Function

Set the default operation of the application filter for the TELNET server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo telnet filter default <action>

Options

Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the

TELNET server function.

• accept

Transmit the relevant packet.

• reject

Block the relevant packet.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the TELNET

server function.

Default

A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.

serverinfo telnet filter default accept

Device Information Settings

310

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.20 serverinfo ssh

Function

Set the SSH login server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo ssh ip <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable the SSH login server function.

• off

Disable the SSH login server function.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set whether or not to enable the SSH login server function.

Setting this command Off and the "serverinfo sftp" command Off will reject a connection

request using the IPv4 address from the ssh client.

Setting this command Off and the "serverinfo sftp" command On will reject a connection

request using the IPv4 address from the ssh client after the password was entered.

Caution

Enabling this command generates an SSH host authentication key at device power-on

and execution of the "reset" command, and it takes several tens of seconds to several

minutes for the processing time.

ssh connection is enabled after the SSH host authentication key generation was

completed.

If this device has been started to enable this function while all the ssh and sftp functions

were Off, it also takes several tens of seconds to several minutes for the processing time

to generate an SSH host authentication key. Note that other processes may be affected;

session monitoring timeout may occur, for example.

Default

It is assumed that the SSH login server function is enabled.

serverinfo ssh ip on

Device Information Settings

311

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.21 serverinfo ssh ip6

Function

Set the IPv6 SSH login server function

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo ssh ip6 <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable IPv6 SSH login server function

• off

Disable IPv6 SSH login server function

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set whether or not to enable the IPv6 SSH login server function.Setting this command

Off and the "serverinfo sftp ip6" command Off will reject a connection request using the

IPv6 address from the ssh client. Setting this command Off and the "serverinfo sftp ip6"

command On will reject a connection request using the IPv6 address from the ssh client

after the password was entered.

Caution

Default

Enabling this command generates an SSH host authentication key at device power-on

and execution of the "reset" command, and it takes several tens of seconds to several

minutes for the processing time. ssh connection is enabled after the SSH host

authentication key generation was completed.If this device has been started to enable

this function while all the ssh and sftp functions were Off, it also takes several tens of

seconds to several minutes for the processing time to generate an SSH host

authentication key. Note that other processes may be affected; session monitoring

timeout may occur, for example.

It is assumed that the IPv6 SSH login server function is enabled.

serverinfo ssh ip6 on

Device Information Settings

312

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.22 serverinfo ssh filter

Function

Set the application filter for the SSH server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo ssh filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>

Options

<count>

• Filtering definition number

Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value

from 0 to 29.

A smaller value has a higher priority.

Specify an operation when filtering conditions are satisfied.

• accept

Transmit the relevant packet.

• reject

Block the relevant packet.

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.

If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not specified, the filtering definition will be

disabled and ignored.

The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.

• ip

Set only the source IP address and the number of mask bits.

If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the application filter for the SSH server function.

This definition is enabled for both the SSH login and SSH FTP server functions.

Each different filter cannot be set for the SSH login and SSH FTP server functions

separately.

Default

It is assumed that the application filter is not set for the SSH server function.

Device Information Settings

313

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.23 serverinfo ssh filter move

Function

Change the priority of the application filter for the SSH server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo ssh filter move <count> <new_count>

Options

<count>

• Target filtering definition number

Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed.

<new_count>

• Destination filtering definition number

Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.

If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the

existing one.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set the priority of the application filter for the SSH server function.

5.15.8.24 serverinfo ssh filter default

Function

Set the default operation of the application filter for the SSH server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo ssh filter default <action>

Options

Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the SSH

server function.

• accept

Transmit the relevant packet.

• reject

Block the relevant packet.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the SSH

server function.

Default

A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.

serverinfo ssh filter default accept

Device Information Settings

314

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.25 serverinfo http

Function

Set the HTTP server function

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo http ip <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable HTTP server function

• off

Disable HTTP server function

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether or not to enable HTTP server function

It is assumed that the HTTP server function is enabled.

serverinfo http ip on

5.15.8.26 serverinfo http ip6

Function

Set the IPv6 HTTP server function

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo http ip6 <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable IPv6 HTTP server function

• off

Disable IPv6 HTTP server function

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether or not to enable IPv6 HTTP server function

It is assumed that the IPv6 HTTP server function is enabled.

serverinfo http ip6 on

Device Information Settings

315

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.27 serverinfo http filter

Function

Set the application filter for HTTP server function

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo http filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>

Options

<count>

• Filtering definition number

Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value

from 0 to 29.

A smaller value has a higher priority

Specify the action when the packets match the filter.

• accept

Accept the packets

• reject

Reject the packets

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Set the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.

If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and

ignored.

The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.

- ip

Source IP address and the number of mask bits are used for the filter.

If IP value has not been set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.

- ip6

Source IPv6 address and the prefix length are used for the filter.

If IPv6 value has not been set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the application filter for HTTP server function

N/A

Device Information Settings

316

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.28 serverinfo http filter move

Function

Change the priority of the application filter for the HTTP server function

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo http filter move <count> <new_count>

Options

<count>

• Filering definition number

Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed

<new_count>

• Destination filtering definition number

Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.

If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the

existing one.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Change the priority of the application filter for the HTTP server function

5.15.8.29 serverinfo http filter default

Function

Set the default action of the application filter for the HTTP server function

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo http filter default <action>

Options

Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for

the HTTP server function.

• accept

Accept the packets

• reject

Reject the packets

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the HTTP

server function.

Default

A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.

serverinfo http filter default accept

Device Information Settings

317

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.30 serverinfo dns

Function

Set the DNS server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo dns ip <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable the DNS server function.

• off

Disable the DNS server function.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether to enable the DNS server (static) and ProxyDNS functions.

It is assumed that the DNS server function is enabled.

serverinfo dns ip on

5.15.8.31 serverinfo dns ip6

Function

Set the IPv6 DNS server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo dns ip6 <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable the DNS server function.

• off

Disable the DNS server function.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether to enable the IPv6 DNS server (static) and ProxyDNS functions.

It is assumed that the IPv6 DNS server function is enabled.

serverinfo dns ip6 on

Device Information Settings

318

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.32 serverinfo dns filter

Function

Set the application filter for the DNS server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo dns filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>

Options

<count>

• Filtering definition number

Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value

from 0 to 29.

A smaller value has a higher priority.

Specify an operation when filtering conditions are satisfied.

• accept

Transmit the relevant packet.

• reject

Block the relevant packet.

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.

If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not specified, the filtering definition will be

disabled and ignored.

The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.

• ip

Set only the source IP address and the number of mask bits.

If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the application filter for the DNS server function.

It is assumed that the application filter is not set for the DNS server function.

Device Information Settings

319

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.33 serverinfo dns filter move

Function

Change the priority of the application filter for the DNS server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo dns filter move <count> <new_count>

Options

<count>

• Target filtering definition number

Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed.

<new_count>

• Destination filtering definition number

Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.

If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the

existing one.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Change the priority of the application filter for the DNS server function.

5.15.8.34 serverinfo dns filter default

Function

Set the default operation of the application filter for the DNS server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo dns filter default <action>

Options

Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the DNS

server function.

• accept

Transmit the relevant packet.

• reject

Block the relevant packet.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the DNS

server function.

Default

A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.

serverinfo dns filter default accept

Device Information Settings

320

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.35 serverinfo sntp

Function

Set the SNTP server.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo sntp ip <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable the SNTP server function.

• off

Disable the SNTP server function.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether or not to enable the SNTP server function.

It is assumed that the SNTP server function is enabled.

serverinfo sntp ip on

5.15.8.36 serverinfo sntp ip6

Function

Set the IPv6 SNTP Server function

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo sntp ip6 <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable IPv6 SNTP server function

• off

Disable IPv6 SNTP server function

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether or not to enable IPv6 SNTP server function

It is assumed that the IPv6 SNTP server function is enabled.

serverinfo sntp ip6 on

Device Information Settings

321

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.37 serverinfo sntp filter

Function

Set the application filter for the SNTP server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo sntp filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>

Options

<count>

• Filtering definition number

Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value

from 0 to 29.

A smaller value has a higher priority.

Specify an operation when filtering conditions are satisfied.

• accept

Transmit the relevant packet.

• reject

Block the relevant packet.

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.

If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not specified, the filtering definition will be

disabled and ignored.

The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.

• ip

Set only the source IP address and the number of mask bits.

If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the application filter for the SNTP server function.

It is assumed that the application filter is not set for the SNTP server function.

Device Information Settings

322

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.38 serverinfo sntp filter move

Function

Change the priority of the application filter for the SNTP server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo sntp filter move <count> <new_count>

Options

<count>

• Target filtering definition number

Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed.

<new_count>

• Destination filtering definition number

Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.

If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the

existing one.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Change the priority of the application filter for the SNTP server function.

5.15.8.39 serverinfo sntp filter default

Function

Set the default operation of the application filter for the SNTP server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo sntp filter default <action>

Options

Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the SNTP

server function.

• accept

Transmit the relevant packet.

• reject

Block the relevant packet.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the SNTP

server function.

Default

A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.

serverinfo sntp filter default accept

Device Information Settings

323

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.40 serverinfo time ip tcp

Function

Set the TIME server function by TCP.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo time ip tcp <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable the TIME server function by TCP.

• off

Disable the TIME server function by TCP.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether or not to enable the TCP-based TIME server function.

It is assumed that the TCP-based TIME server function is enabled.

serverinfo time ip tcp on

5.15.8.41 serverinfo time ip6 tcp

Function

Set the IPv6 TIME Server function by TCP

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo time ip6 tcp <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable IPv6 TIME server function by TCP

• off

Disable IPv6 TIME server function by TCP

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether or not to enable IPv6 TIME server function by TCP

It is assumed that the TCP-based IPv6 TIME server function is enabled.

serverinfo time ip6 tcp on

Device Information Settings

324

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.42 serverinfo time ip udp

Function

Set the TIME server function by UDP.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo time ip udp <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable the TIME server function by UDP.

• off

Disable the TIME server function by UDP.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether or not to enable the UDP-based TIME server function.

It is assumed that the UDP-based TIME server function is enabled.

serverinfo time ip udp on

5.15.8.43 serverinfo time ip6 udp

Function

Set the IPv6 TIME Server function by UDP

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo time ip6 udp <mode>

Options

<mode>

• on

Enable IPv6 TIME server function by UDP

• off

Disable IPv6 TIME server function by UDP

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set whether or not to enable IPv6 TIME server function by UDP

It is assumed that the UDP-based IPv6 TIME server function is enabled.

serverinfo time ip6 udp on

Device Information Settings

325

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.44 serverinfo time filter

Function

Set the application filter for the TIME server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo time filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>

Options

<count>

• Filtering definition number

Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value

from 0 to 29.

A smaller value has a higher priority.

Specify an operation when filtering conditions are satisfied.

• accept

Transmit the relevant packet.

• reject

Block the relevant packet.

<acl_count>

• ACL definition number

Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.

If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not specified, the filtering definition will be

disabled and ignored.

The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.

• ip

Set only the source IP address and the number of mask bits.

If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Set the application filter for the TIME server function.

It is assumed that the application filter is not set for the TIME server function.

5.15.8.45 serverinfo time filter move

Function

Change the priority of the application filter for the TIME server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo time filter move <count> <new_count>

Options

<count>

• Target filtering definition number

Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed.

<new_count>

• Destination filtering definition number

Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.

If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the

existing one.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Change the priority of the application filter for the TIME server function.

Device Information Settings

326

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.15.8.46 serverinfo time filter default

Function

Set the default operation of the application filter for the TIME server function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

serverinfo time filter default <action>

Options

Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the TIME

server function.

• accept

Transmit the relevant packet.

• reject

Block the relevant packet.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the TIME

server function.

Default

A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.

serverinfo time filter default accept

Device Information Settings

327

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.16 Login banner Settings

This section explains about Login banner settings.

5.16.1 Login banner Information

This section explains about the commands related to Login banner information.

5.16.1.1 login banner telnet

Function

Turn on or off the telnet login banner.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

Options

<mode>

Specify the desired mode.

• on

Specify "on" to enable the login banner.

• off

Specify "off" to disable the login banner.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Enables use of the telnet login banner.

The telnet login banner is disabled.

5.16.1.2 login banner ftp

Function

Turn on or off the ftp login banner.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

Options

<mode>

Specify the desired mode.

• on

Specify "on" to enable the login banner.

• off

Specify "off" to disable the login banner.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Enables use of the ftp login banner.

The ftp login banner is disabled.

328

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.16.1.3 login banner ssh

Function

Turn on or off the ssh login banner.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

Options

<mode>

Specify the desired mode.

• on

Specify "on" to enable the ssh login banner.

• off

Specify "off" to disable the ssh login banner.

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Enables use of the ssh login banner.

The ssh login banner is disabled.

5.16.1.4 login banner description

Function

Define the login banner text.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

Options

<count>

Set the definition number of login banner with a decimal value from 0 to 9.

Define the login banner text with up to 80 ASCII characters. The allowable characters are

0x20,0x21,0x23 to 0x7e.

When using blank spaces, enclose the text string with quotes(").

(Example: "this is private network system").

Use Mode

Explanation

Default

Configuration mode (admin class)

Define the login banner text.

No login banner text is defined.

329

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.17 Mode and Terminal Operation

Commands

This section explains about mode and terminal operation commands.

5.17.1 Mode Operation Commands

This section explains about mode operation commands.

5.17.1.1 admin

Function

Switch to the admin class.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

admin

Options

N/A

Use Mode

Explanation

Operation mode (user class)

Switch from the user class to the admin class.

This command has the same function as the "su" command.

Before switching, enter the administrator password, when asked.

To return from the admin class to the user class, execute the "exit", "end", "quit", or "!"

command.

Caution

The settings of the "terminal" and "alias" commands will not be inherited by the

administrator mode.

Message

Password:

Enter an administrator password.

<ERROR> Authentication failed

Switching to the admin class was failed due to the incorrect administrator password.

Enter the correct administrator password.

<WARNING> weak admin password: set the password

The administrator password is not set.

Set an administrator password.

<WARNING> weak admin password: contain at least 8 characters

The administrator password is seven or fewer characters in length.

Set an administrator password with eight or more characters.

<WARNING> weak admin password: contain a different kind of character

The administrator password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric

characters.

Set an administrator password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

330

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution Example

> admin

Password:

# exit

5.17.1.2 su

Function

Switch to the admin class.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

Options

N/A

Use Mode

Explanation

Operation mode (user class)

Switch from the user class to the admin class.

This command has the same function as the "admin" command.

Before switching, enter the administrator password, when asked.

To return from the admin class to the user class, execute the "exit", "end", "quit", or "!"

command.

Caution

The settings of the "terminal" and "alias" commands will not be inherited by the

administrator mode.

Message

Password:

Enter the administrator password.

<ERROR> Authentication failed

Switching to the admin class was failed due to the incorrect administrator password.

Enter the correct administrator password.

<WARNING> weak admin password: set the password

The administrator password is not set.

Set an administrator password.

<WARNING> weak admin password: contain at least 8 characters

The administrator password is seven or fewer characters in length.

Set an administrator password with eight or more characters.

<WARNING> weak admin password: contain a different kind of character

The administrator password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric

characters.

Set an administrator password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.

Execution Example

> su

Password:

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

331

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.17.1.3 exit

Function

Return to the class, mode or configuration directory, or logout.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

exit

N/A

Options

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

In the operation mode, the Use Mode class returns to the user class if it has been

switched from the user class to the admin class using the "admin" command. Otherwise

logout occurs.

In the configuration mode, the current directory will be moved up to the next higher one

when the configuration directory function is enabled in a directory other than the top

directory. Otherwise, if the configuration has not been changed, the configuration mode

returns to the operation mode, but if the configuration has been changed, the

configuration mode still remains unreturned with an error message.

For the configuration directory function, refer to "5.17.1.4 configure" (pg.333).

Caution

The settings by the "terminal" and "alias" commands will be discarded at logout.

Message

<ERROR> The candidate-config has been changed but not committed.

The configuration is not reflected.

Reflect the configuration. When returning to the operation mode without reflecting the

configuration, use the "end" or "quit" command.

Execution Example

(config)# exit

<ERROR> The candidate-config has been changed but not committed.

(config)# end

<WARNING> The candidate-config has been changed but not committed.

# exit

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

332

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.17.1.4 configure

Function

Switch to the configuration mode.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

configure

Options

N/A

Use Mode

Explanation

Configuration mode (admin class)

Switch from the operation mode to the configuration mode.

Pressing the [Ctrl+O] keys after switching to the configuration mode will enable the

configuration directory function.

When the configuration directory function is enabled, it looks as if moved to another

directory according to the input configuration command, therefore, the configuration

command can be executed simply by entering arguments that follow the configuration

layer. A normal command also can be executed by entering its command name even

while moving between the layers.

The configuration directory is displayed at entry prompt.

To disable the configuration layer function, press the [Ctrl+G] keys.

To return to the operation mode from the configuration mode, execute the "exit", "end",

"quit", or "!" command.

Caution

If the configuration has been changed, it is not possible to return to the operation mode

with the "exit" or "!" command. Using the "end" or "quit" command will makes it possible

to forcibly return to the operation mode.

When the configuration directory function is enabled, if the entry prompt character string

is changed with the "terminal prompt" command without including the configuration

directory, the configuration directory will not be displayed at entry prompt.

Execution Example

# configure

(config)#

(Press the [CTRL+O] keys to enable the configuration directory function.)

<NOTICE> Directory mode is enabled. To disable, type Ctrl+G.

(config)# lan 0 ip

(config-lan-0-ip)# address 192.168.0.1/24 3

(config-lan-0-ip)# show

address 192.168.0.1/24 3

(config-lan-0-ip)# show candidate-config

lan 0 ip address 192.168.0.1/24 3

(config-lan-0-ip)#

(Press the [Ctrl+g] keys to disable the configuration directory function.)

<NOTICE> Directory mode is disabled.

(config)#

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

333

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.17.1.5 end

Function

Return to the operation mode.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

end

Options

N/A

Use Mode

Explanation

Configuration mode (admin class)

Return from the configuration mode to the operation mode.

If the configuration has been changed, the Use Mode returns to the operation mode with

a message.

This command has the same function as the "quit" command.

Default

<WARNING> The candidate-config has been changed but not committed.

The Use Mode has returned to the operation mode without reflecting the configuration.

The changed or added configuration remains unchanged.

Check whether you need to reflect the configuration.

Execution Example

(config)# end

5.17.1.6 quit

Function

Return to the operation mode.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

quit

Options

N/A

Use Mode

Explanation

Configuration mode (admin class)

Return from the configuration mode to the operation mode.

If the configuration has been changed, the Use Mode returns to the operation mode with

a message.

This command has the same function as the "end" command.

Message

<WARNING> The candidate-config has been changed but not committed.

The Use Mode has returned to the operation mode without reflecting the configuration.

The changed or added configuration remains unchanged.

Check whether you need to reflect the configuration.

Execution Example

(config)# quit

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

334

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.17.1.7 top

Function

Switch to the highest configuration directory.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

top

Options

N/A

Use Mode

Explanation

Configuration mode (admin class)

If the configuration directory function is enabled in the configuration mode, move up to

the top directory.

Staying already in the top directory still remains unmoved.

If the configuration directory function is disabled, nothing occurs.

For the configuration directory function, refer to the "5.17.1.4 configure" (pg.333).

Execution Example

(config-lan-0-ip)# top

(config)#

(Execute in the "lan 0 ip" directory)

5.17.1.8 up

Function

Switch to the next upper configuration directory.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

Options

N/A

Use Mode

Explanation

Configuration mode (admin class)

If the configuration directory function is enabled in the configuration mode, move up to

the next configuration directory. Staying already in the top directory still remains

unmoved.

If the configuration directory function is disabled, nothing occurs.

For the configuration directory function, refer to the "5.17.1.4 configure" (pg.333).

Execution Example

(config-lan-0-ip)# up

(config-lan-0)#

(Execute in the "lan 0 ip" directory)

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

335

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.17.1.9 !

Function

Return to the previous class, mode or configuration directory.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

Options

Use Mode

N/A

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

In the operation mode, the Use Mode class returns to the user class if it has been

switched from the user class to the admin class using the "admin" command. Otherwise

the operation mode still remains unchanged without logout.

In the configuration mode, the current directory will be moved up to the next higher one

when the configuration directory function is enabled in a directory other than the top

directory. Otherwise, if the configuration has not been changed, the configuration mode

returns to the operation mode, but if the configuration has been changed, the

configuration mode still remains unreturned with an error message.

For the configuration directory function, refer to the "5.17.1.4 configure" (pg.333).

This command is almost the same as for the "exit" command except that logout does not

occur in the operation mode.

Execution Example

# configure

(config)# !

# !

(Switch to the configuration mode)

(Return to the operation mode)

(Still remain without logout)

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

336

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.17.2 Terminal Operation Commands

This section explains about terminal operation commands.

5.17.2.1 terminal pager

Function

Set the pager functions.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

terminal pager {enable|disable}

Options

enable

Use the pager functions.

disable

Do not use the pager functions.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify whether or not to use the pager function.

When using the pager function, the device is placed in the key-in wait state if one screen

becomes full of output from the executed command. Pressing any keys makes it possible

to display the continued data or redisplay the previous data. If one screen does not

become full of command output, the command will exit without being placed in the key-in

wait state.

Some commands have too much output data and cannot be redisplayed back or will be

displayed up to the end without being placed in the key-in wait state.

The pager function is enabled only for command execution, but not for command

completion output (to display an argument list, argument description, and command

format).

The default screen size of the terminal is 24 lines x 80 columns. For other screen sizes,

set the number of lines and columns with the "terminal window" command. Omitting the

screen size will result in a picture distortion. When you log in with the telnet or ssh, the

number of lines and columns will be set automatically. If a picture distortion occurs, use

the "terminal window" command to adjust the number of lines and columns.

The following prompt will appear in the key-in wait state.

MORE (xx%): (xx indicates the ratio of the number of displayed bytes to the total number

of bytes.)

MORE: (when data cannot be redisplayed backward)

The following lists the keys and operations in the key-in wait state. ^x means pressing the

[x] key while holding down the [CTRL] key; M-x means pressing the [x] key after pressing

the [ESC] key.

Key inputs

Operations

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Number of lines, Line number, Number of times

(Specify it before entering the following keys)

Show up to the end

f ^F ^V

b ^B M-v

SPACE

Skip one screen forward or specified number of lines forward (omit all

of the skipped lines)

Skip one screen backward or specified number of lines backward (omit

all of the skipped lines) *1

Skip one screen forward after specifying the number of lines for one

screen

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

337

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Key inputs

Operations

Skip one screen backward after specifying the number of lines for one

screen *1

j ^J e ^E ^N ↓ RETURN

Skip one screen forward or specified number of lines forward (show all

of the skipped lines)

k ^K y ^Y ^P ↑

Skip one screen backward or specified number of lines backward

(show all of the skipped lines) *1

d ^D

u ^U

g <

Skip half screen forward after specifying the number of lines for half

screen

Skip half screen backward after specifying the number of lines for half

screen *1

Show the first screen or all of the lines that follow the specified line

number *1

G >

Show the last screen or all of the lines that follow the specified line

number

/search pattern

Search forward (specified number of times) *1

Search backward (specified number of times) *1

Search forward again *1

?search pattern

Search backward again *1

M-x

r ^R ^L

Execute x (any command) without exit after showing to the end

Show screen again *1

Show information (number of lines, number of bytes, ratio)

Show help (list for key bind)

h H

q Q ^C

Exit

*1: Display that cannot be retraced is invalid.

When specifying a line number, specify the line number on the screen. If a one-line

command output exceeds the specified number of columns on the screen, it is handled

as multiple lines on the screen. The line number begins with 1.

The search prompt is expressed by a slash (/) or question mark (?), which makes it

possible to enter a search pattern. The allowable search pattern is 76 or fewer characters

in length. When the allowable number of screen columns is less than 80, a search pattern

input with 80 or over 80 columns results in a picture distortion. In this case, redisplay the

screen.

The following lists the special characters available for search pattern. For other

characters, the characters themselves are subject to searching.

Special characters

Search target

An arbitrary character

Head of line (Use with a combination of other characters)

End of line (Use with a combination of other characters)

Start word (Use with a combination of other characters)

Quit word (Use with a combination of other characters)

x (x shall be any character except < >)

If the target character string is found in the search process, it is highlighted.

If not found, the following prompt will appear. Press the [RETURN] key. Pressing

[CTRL+C] will halt the display of command output.

MORE: pattern not found (press RETURN)

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

338

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

If information is displayed, the following prompt will appear.

MORE(line 1-22/515 lines, 1428/33473 bytes, 4%):

- -- ---

a b c

---- -----

If it cannot be displayed backward, the following prompt will appear.

MORE(line 1-22 lines):

- --

a b

Description:

a: Top line number on screen

b: Bottom line number on screen

c: Total number of lines

d: Number of displayed bytes

e: Total number of bytes

f: Ratio of total number of bytes to number of displayed bytes (d / e x 100)

When a help is displayed, the prompt below will appear following the help. Press the

[RETURN] key. Pressing [CTRL+C] will halt the display of command output.

MORE: help (press RETURN)

Caution

Default

When the allowable number of screen lines is less than 3, pager function will not work. In

addition, when the allowable number of screen columns is less than character string

prompt results in a picture distortion.

This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin

class can be saved as the configuration by executing the "save" command. This

command setting can be deleted using the "delete" command in the configuration mode.

The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"

command, and they cannot be saved.

It is assumed that the pager function is not used.

terminal pager disable

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

339

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.17.2.2 terminal window

Function

Set the terminal screen size.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

terminal window [column <column>] [line <line>]

Options

column <column>

Specify the number of digits of the terminal screen with a decimal value.

line <line>

Specify the number of lines of the terminal screen with a decimal value.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify the screen size of the terminal.

For telnet or ssh connection, the screen size of the terminal reported from a telnet or ssh

client is used at connection or changing the screen size.

If the screen size is changed after reported, this setting value will be used.

Caution

Default

This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin

class can be saved as the configuration by executing the "save" command. This

command setting can be deleted using the "delete" command in the configuration mode.

The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"

command, and they cannot be saved.

Specifying incorrect screen size may cause a display distortion when a command is input

or executed.

It is assumed that the screen size of the terminal is set to 80 columns x 24 lines.

terminal window column 80 line 24

5.17.2.3 terminal charset

Function

Set the Japanese Kanji character codes.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

terminal charset {EUC|SJIS}

Options

EUC

Use the EUC Japanese Kanji character codes on the terminal.

SJIS

Use the Shift-JIS Japanese Kanji character codes on the terminal.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Caution

Specify the Japanese Kanji character codes to be used on the terminal.

This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin

class can be saved as the configuration by executing the "save" command. This

command setting can be deleted using the "delete" command in the configuration mode.

The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"

command, and they cannot be saved.

Default

It is assumed that the EUC Japanese Kanji character codes are used on the terminal.

terminal charset EUC

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

340

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.17.2.4 terminal prompt

Function

Set the input prompt.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

terminal prompt login "<prompt>"

terminal prompt user "<prompt>"

terminal prompt admin "<prompt>"

Options

Set the input prompt during login.

user

Set the input command prompt to be used during login with the user class.

admin

Set the input command prompt to be used during login with the admin class.

Specify a character string of the input prompt. Up to 80 characters are allowed.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class) (user option)

Operation mode (admin class) (login or admin option)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify a character string for login prompt or command input prompt.

If a space is included in a character string, enclose it in double quotation marks (").

If the prompt character string contains a special character beginning with a back slash as

shown below, it will be replaced with an expanded character string.

Special character

Expanded character string

"config2" only if the configuration file name is config2

Number of file name for the configuration file (1 or 2)

Date (month/date format)

Host name or Model name (character string before ".")

Host name or Model name (all character string)

Model name

Prompt character string according to the class (including space)

Time (hour:minute:second format, 24 hour time system)

Time (hour:minute:second format, 12 hour time system)

Time (hour:minute NN format, 12 hour time system, NN:am or pm)

Firmware version

Configuration directory

History number

A single backslash character

If this device is running with bank0 configuration, "\c" displays no information, including a

space before or after "\c".

If the device is running with bank1 configuration, "\c" displays "bank1".

"\h" or "\H" displays the host name which is set with the "sysname" command.

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

341

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

If the host name is not set, the model name will be displayed instead.

The following shows the standard prompts of "\p" and "\$".

State

Before login

Standard prompt

When user login

When administrator

Caution

Default

This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin

class can be saved as the configuration by executing the "save" command. This

command setting can be deleted using the "delete" command in the configuration mode.

The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"

command, and they cannot be saved.

It is assumed that the following is set.

terminal prompt login "Login: "

terminal prompt user "\h \c\w\p"

terminal prompt admin "\h \c\w\p"

Execution Example

# terminal prompt login "Welcome: "

# terminal prompt user "[\!]\h\w\p"

# terminal prompt admin "\h bank/\C\w\p"

5.17.2.5 terminal timestamp

Function

Set the command execution date and time display function.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

terminal timestamp {enable|disable}

Options

enable

Display the date and time when command is executed.

disable

Do not display the date and time when command is executed.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Caution

Specify whether or not to display the date and time on which execute the command.

This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin

class can be saved as the configuration by executing the "save" command. This

command setting can be deleted using the "delete" command in the configuration mode.

The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"

command, and they cannot be saved.

Default

It is assumed that the date and time is not displayed when the command is executed.

terminal timestamp disable

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

342

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.17.2.6 terminal bell

Function

Set the bell function to sound in the case of an operation error.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

terminal bell {enable|disable}

Options

enable

Sound a terminal bell in the case of an operation error.

disable

Do not sound a terminal bell in the case of an operation error.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Set whether or not to sound the terminal bell when:

• an attempt has been made to enter characters over the maximum number (1022

characters);

• data has been pasted over the maximum number of characters (1022 characters); or

• no implementation candidate has been found.

Caution

Default

This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin

class can be saved as the configuration by executing the "save" command. This

command setting can be deleted using the "delete" command in the configuration mode.

The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"

command, and they cannot be saved.

It is assumed that the terminal bell is sounded.

terminal bell enable

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

343

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.17.2.7 terminal logging

Function

Set the command execution history log.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

terminal logging line <line>

Options

line <line>

Specify a number for the lines of the command execution history to be logged with a

decimal value from 0 to 100.

No command history is logged if zero (0) is specified.

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Specify the number of command execution history lines.

If the number of lines is changed, the history number and history contents are inherited;

however, if the number of lines has been increased from 0, the history number will begin

with 1.

Caution

Default

This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin

class can be saved as the configuration by executing the "save" command. This

command setting can be deleted using the "delete" command in the configuration mode.

The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"

command, and they cannot be saved.

It is assumed that the number of command execution history lines is set to 24.

terminal logging line 24

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

344

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.17.2.8 show terminal

Function

Display the terminal information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show terminal

N/A

Options

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Caution

Display the terminal information.

This command is an operation command; however, it can be displayed as the

configuration, where "candidate-config" and "running-config" are displayed with the same

values.

If this command is displayed as the configuration, only the set values other than the

defaults are displayed without being digit-aligned.

Execution Example

# show terminal

pager

enable

window

charset

prompt

column 80 line 24

EUC

user "\u@\h \c\p"

admin "\u@\h \c\w\p"

timestamp disable

bell

logging

enable

line 24

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

345

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.17.3 Command Execution History

This section explains about command execution history.

5.17.3.1 show logging command

Function

Display the command execution history.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show logging command [brief] [all]

Options

N/A

Display detailed the command execution history on the current login line.

brief

Display a brief command execution history.

all

Display the command execution history on the all login line.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the command execution history.

The operation mode displays the history of the commands that have been executed in

the operation mode.

The configuration mode displays the history of the commands that have been executed in

the configuration mode.

The user class displays only the history of the commands that have been executed in the

user class, with history numbers in a discontinuous manner.

The admin class displays the history of the commands that have been executed in the

user and admin classes.

On a line where the command is not yet executed because the history was being edited,

an asterisk (*) is displayed following the history number.

If "*" is displayed, it can be deleted by:

• pressing the [Ctrl+P] or [Up] key to display the line and pressing the [RETURN] key to

execute the command;

• pressing the [Ctrl+P] or [Up] key to display the line and pressing the [Ctrl+C] key to

discard the entry contents; or

• pressing the [Ctrl+P] or [Up] key to display the line, pressing the [Ctrl+U] key to blank

the line, and moving to another history.

"show logging command all" command displays asterisk (*) before the current login line.

Caution

If the history number exceeds 32767, it returns to an appropriate lower history number.

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

346

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution Example

# show logging command

01/24 08:48:54 * console 0 admin

01/24 08:49:02 * console 0 admin

01/24 08:49:11 * console 0 admin

show system information

1 show system information

2 show date

3 show logging commandDec 01 15:58:55 1

# show logging command brief

1 show date

2 show logging command

3 show logging command brief

# show logging command all

01/24 08:42:21 * console 0 admin

01/24 08:42:24 * console 0 admin

01/24 08:42:32 * console 0 admin

01/24 08:42:34 * console 0 admin

01/24 08:42:47 * console 0 admin

1 show logging

1 show logging command

3 exit

4 exit

5 show logging command

82 show logging command

83 show

84 show users

85 exit

01/24 08:42:59

01/24 08:43:02

01/24 08:43:10

01/24 08:43:12

01/24 08:43:22

vty 1

admin

86 show logging command

6 show logging command all

01/24 08:51:00 * console 0 admin

# show logging command all

XG2600# show logging command brief all

86 show logging command

87 show logging command

88 !

89 show logging command

90 show system information

91 show date

92 show logging command

93 show logging command brief

94 show logging command all

95 show logging command brief all

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

347

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.17.3.2 clear logging command

Function

Clear the command execution history.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

clear logging command [all]

Options

N/A

Clear the command execution history on the current login login.

all

Clear the command execution history on the all login login.

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Erase the command execution history in the operation and configuration modes.

The command execution history number returns to 1.

Execution Example

# clear logging command

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

348

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.17.4 Command Alias

This section explains about commands related to command alias.

5.17.4.1 alias

Function

Set the command alias information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

alias <alias> "<command>"

Options

<alias>

Specify a command alias name to be assigned, with up to 80 characters.

This name must begin with an alphabetical character, and it can be followed by

alphanumeric characters and hyphens (-).

Specify a command name and command options, to be replaced during execution of

command alias, using a pair of double quotation marks.

If no name or option is enclosed by a pair of double quotation marks (""), the definition is

deleted.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Combine the command name and some command options, and set them as a new

command. Up to 30 commands can be set.

Specifying the set command alias will delete the previously registered command and the

specified one is set.

The set command alias is reflected immediately, and it can be used promptly.

The set command alias, if executed, will be replaced with the set command name and

command options to execute the command.

When executing the command, the options that were input following the command alias

are assumed to be input succeeding the command name and command options that

were replaced with the command alias.

An input line remains in the command execution history without being replaced with a

command alias.

Caution

The following command alias names cannot be registered.

• "exit", "end", "quit", "up", "top", "delete", "show", "clear", "commit", "discard", "save",

"load", "reset", "moff"

Other normal command names can be registered as command aliases; however, note

that the operations of the registered normal commands are changed.

This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin

class can be saved as the configuration by executing the "save" command. This

command setting can be deleted using the "delete" command in the configuration mode.

The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"

command, and they cannot be saved.

Default

It is assumed that no data is registered.

Execution Example

# alias history "show logging command brief"

# history

1 alias history "show logging command brief"

2 history

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

349

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.17.4.2 show alias

Function

Display the command alias information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show alias [<name>]

Options

N/A

Display all command alias information.

<name>

Display the information about the specified command alias name.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Caution

Display command alias information.

This command is an operation command; however, it can be displayed as the

configuration, where "candidate-config" and "running-config" are displayed with the same

values.

Default

# show alias

history "show logging command brief"

dsplog "show logging syslog"

# show alias history

"show logging command brief"

5.17.4.3 clear alias

Function

Clear the command alias information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

clear alias [<name>]

Options

N/A

Delete all command alias information.

<name>

Delete the information of the specified command alias name.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Caution

Delete command alias information.

This command is an operation command, but it can be deleted with the "delete"

command in the configuration mode.

Execution Example

# clear alias history

# clear alias

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

350

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.17.5 Command Output

This section explains about commands related to command output operations.

5.17.5.1 more

Function

Display the command output one screen at a time on a display screen.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

<command> | more

Options

Specify a command to execute.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the command output result on each screen.

This command acts in the same way as when the "terminal pager enable" command has

been specified.

For details on the description, key operations, and cautions, refer to the "5.17.2.1

terminal pager" (pg.337).

Execution Example

# show running-config | more

(snip)

telnetinfo autologout 5m

MORE(86%):

(Enter "q" to quit display)

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

351

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.17.5.2 tail

Function

Display the last part of command output.

<command> | tail [<lines>]

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

Options

Specify a command to execute.

<lines>

Specify the number of lines to be displayed with a decimal number from 1 to 1000.

The default is 10 lines.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Execute the specified command, and display the last output of the command by the

specified number of lines.

If the output of the specified command does not reach the specified number of lines, all

output will be displayed.

If the pager "5.17.2.1 terminal pager" (pg.337) is enabled, the pager will act for the output

(the last output part of the specified command) of this command.

Caution

Enter a space character before and after a command pipe character ("|"). A command

pipe character can be specified only once, and the "tail" command can be specified only

once.

A sentence up to a new-line character is assumed to be one line. A statement that is too

long is divided into multiple lines on the screen, and the number of lines specified in the

argument may not match that of lines on the screen.

Specifying a command that requires a long time to execute, may result in a long wait time

until the command output.

This command acts for a "display" command such as the "show" command.

It displays all the command output for a control command such as the "telnet" command.

Execution Example

# show logging syslog | tail 3

Dec 08 15:19:27 192.168.1.1 XG2600: mstpd: Topology Change detected

Dec 08 15:19:47 192.168.1.1 XG2600: sshd: generated public/private host key pair.

Dec 08 15:19:52 192.168.1.1 XG2600: logon: login admin on console

Mode and Terminal Operation Commands

352

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.18 System Operations and Display

Commands

This sectionexplains about system operations and display commands.

5.18.1 System Operations and Display Commands

This section explains about system operations and display commands.

5.18.1.1 show system information

Function

Display the system information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show system information

Options

N/A

Display the system information.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the system status and information of the device.

Execution Example

# show system information

Current time : Fri Jan 14 14:00:45 2011

Startup time : Fri Jan 14 08:40:05 2011

System : XG2600

Serial No. : 00000123

ROM Ver. : 1.3

---(1)

---(2)

---(3)

---(4)

---(5)

---(6)

---(7)

---(8)

---(9)

---(10)

---(11)

ASIC Firm Ver. : 090203PL1

Firm Ver. : V01.00 NY0001 Tue Nov 14 17:52:15 JST 2006

Startup-config : Sat Jan 01 13:08:04 2011 config1

Running-config : Sat Jan 01 13:08:04 2011

MAC : 000b5d89011

Memory : 256MB

1) Current time

Displays the current date and time.

2) Startup time

Displays the date and time when the device started up.

3) System

Displays the device name.

4) Serial No.

Displays the device serial number.

5) ROM Ver.

Displays the ROM version number in the xx.yy format. xx.yy is indicated by a

decimal value.

System Operations and Display Commands

353

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

6) ASIC Firm Ver. (XG2600 Only)

Displays the ASIC firmware version number in the yymmddPLn format.

yymmdd is indicated by date (year-month-day).

PLn shows patch level and n is indicated by digit decimal value.

7) Firm Ver.

Displays the firmware version number in the Vxx.yy format.

"xx.yy is indicated by a two-digit decimal value.

8) Startup-config

Displays the date and time when you have saved the configuration to be read

during device startup, as well as the file name.

9) Running-config

Displays the date and time, when you applied the configuration that is currently

active.

10) MAC

Displays the MAC address with a 12-digit hexadecimal value.

11) Memory

Displays the memory size installed in the device.

5.18.1.2 show system status

Function

Display the system status.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show system status

Options

N/A

Display the system status.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the dynamic system information of the device.

Execution Example

XG0224

When no Expansion Card is installed.

# show system status

Current-time

Startup-time

restart_cause

machine_state

power0_state

fan0_state

: Wed Dec 10 06:07:43 2008

: Wed Dec 10 06:05:05 2008

: power on

: RUNNING

: NORMAL

---(1)

---(2)

---(3)

---(4)

---(5)

---(6)

---(7)

inspiration_state

phy_state

: NORMAL

slot1_state

inspiration_temp

phy_temp

slot1_temp

Slot Information

slot1

: UNKNOWN

: 26 C

: 40 C

: -- C

---(8)

---(9)

: NO_PRESENT

System Operations and Display Commands

354

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

When a CX4 Card is installed.

# show system status

Current-time

Startup-time

restart_cause

machine_state

power0_state

fan0_state

: Wed Dec 10 05:55:40 2008

---(1)

---(2)

---(3)

---(4)

---(5)

---(6)

---(7)

: Wed Dec 10 05:52:11 2008

: power on

: RUNNING

: NORMAL

inspiration_state

phy_state

: NORMAL

slot1_state

inspiration_temp

phy_temp

slot1_temp

Slot Information

slot1

: UNKNOWN

: 25 C

: 40 C

---(8)

---(9)

: -- C

: SJ10GCX4Z

When a SFP+ Card is installed.

# show system status

Current-time

Startup-time

restart_cause

machine_state

power0_state

fan0_state

: Wed Dec 10 06:03:04 2008

: Wed Dec 10 06:02:19 2008

: reset

: RUNNING

: NORMAL

---(1)

---(2)

---(3)

---(4)

---(5)

---(6)

---(7)

inspiration_state

phy_state

: NORMAL

slot1_state

inspiration_temp

phy_temp

slot1_temp

Slot Information

slot1

: NORMAL

: 25 C

: 39 C

---(8)

---(9)

: SJ10GSFPZ

1) Current time

Present date and time.

2) Startup time

Date and time when the system started up.

3) restart_cause

Cause for the system startup.

The following system startup causes are displayed:

power on

reset

: The power has been turned on.

: The reset command has been issued.

reset switch

system down

: The [RESET] switch has been pressed.

: System-down has occurred.

4) machine_state

State of the device

RUNNING

: The device is active.

5) power0_state

State of the power unit.

NORMAL

: The power unit works normally.

NO_PRESENT : The power unit is not installed.

FAIL

: The power unit has been turned off.

: The power unit is invalid state.

UNKNOWN

6) fan0_state

State of the fan 0.

NORMAL

: The fan works normally.

: The fan has been abnormal.

: The fan is invalid state.

ABNORMAL

UNKNOWN

System Operations and Display Commands

355

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

7) inspiration_state

State of environment temperature monitor.

phy_state

State of temperature monitor around PHY.

slot1_state

State of Expansion Card temperature monitor (SLOT1).

NORMAL : The temperature is normal.

HIGHWARNING : The device changes to a high temperature state.

HIGHALARM

UNKNOWN

: Thermal alarm occurs in the device.

: There are three following states.

The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4).

The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.

The Expantion Card is not installed.

8) inspiration_temp

Environment temperature.

phy_temp

temperature around PHY.

slot1_temp

temperature around Expansion Card (SLOT1).

At the time of three following states, "--" is displayed.

The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4)

The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.

The Expantion Card is not installed.

9) Slot Information

The type of Expansion Card.

SJ10GCX4Z

SJ10GSFPZ

: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GCX4Z. (CX4)

: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GSFPZ. (SFP+)

NO_PRESENT : The Expantion Card is not installed.

UNKNOWN : Installed Expansion Card is Invalid Card.

XG0448

When a CX4 Card is installed in Slot 1 and a SFP+ Card is installed in Slot 2.

# show system status

Current-time

Startup-time

restart_cause

machine_state

power0_state

power_consumption

fan0_state

: Tue Dec 9 20:43:01 2008

: Tue Dec 9 20:42:48 2008

: power on

: RUNNING

: NORMAL

---(1)

---(2)

---(3)

---(4)

---(5)

---(10)

---(6)

: 79 W

: NORMAL

fan1_state

: NORMAL

fan2_state

: NORMAL

inspiration_state

phy_state

slot1_state

slot2_state

inspiration_temp

phy_temp

: NORMAL

: UNKNOWN

: NORMAL

: 31 C

---(7)

---(8)

: 38 C

slot1_temp

: -- C

slot2_temp

: 29 C

Slot Information

slot1

slot2

: SJ10GCX4Z

: SJ10GSFPZ

---(9)

1) Current time

Present date and time.

2) Startup time

Date and time when the system started up.

System Operations and Display Commands

356

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

3) restart_cause

Cause for the system startup.

The following system startup causes are displayed:

power on

reset

: The power has been turned on.

: The reset command has been issued.

reset switch : The [RESET] switch has been pressed.

system down : System-down has occurred.

4) machine_state

State of the device

RUNNING: The device is active.

5) power0_state

State of the power unit.

NORMAL

: The power unit works normally.

NO_PRESENT : The power unit is not installed.

FAIL

: The power unit has been turned off.

: The power unit is invalid state.

UNKNOWN

6) fan0_state

State of the fan 0.

fan1_state

State of the fan 1.

fan2_state

State of the fan 2.

NORMAL

: The fan works normally.

: The fan has been abnormal.

: The fan is invalid state.

ABNORMAL

UNKNOWN

7) inspiration_state

State of environment temperature monitor.

phy_state

State of temperature monitor around PHY.

slot1_state

State of Expansion Card temperature monitor (SLOT1).

slot2_state

State of Expansion Card temperature monitor (SLOT2).

NORMAL : The temperature is normal.

HIGHWARNING : The device changes to a high temperature state.

HIGHALARM

UNKNOWN

: Thermal alarm occurs in the device.

: There are three following states.

The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4).

The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.

The Expantion Card is not installed.

System Operations and Display Commands

357

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

8) inspiration_temp

Environment temperature.

phy_temp

temperature around PHY.

slot1_temp

temperature around Expansion Card (SLOT1).

At the time of three following states, "--" is displayed.

The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4)

The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.

The Expantion Card is not installed.

slot2_temp

temperature around Expansion Card (SLOT2).

At the time of three following states, "--" is displayed.

The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4)

The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.

The Expantion Card is not installed.

9) Slot Information

The type of Expansion Card.

SJ10GCX4Z

SJ10GSFPZ

: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GCX4A. (CX4)

: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GSFPA. (SFP+)

NO_PRESENT : The Expantion Card is not installed.

UNKNOWN

: Installed Expansion Card is Invalid Card.

10) power_consumption

Power consumption of the device.

XG2600

# show system status

Current-time

Startup-time

restart_cause

machine_state

access_direction

power_redundancy

PSU1 state

: Thu Dec 21 16:04:50 2008

: Thu Dec 21 16:04:36 2008

---(1)

---(2)

---(3)

---(4)

---(5)

---(6)

---(7)

: power on

: RUNNING

: front access

: redundant

: NORMAL

PSU2 state

: NORMAL

PSU1 type

: AC

---(8)

PSU2 type

: AC

power_consumption

FAN1 state

: 75 W

: NORMAL

---(9)

---(10)

FAN2 state

: NORMAL

inspiration_state

inspiration_temp

warning time

recover time

internal_state

inspiration_temp

internal_temp

: NORMAL

: NORMA

: Fri Dec 26 14:00:45 2008

: Fri Dec 26 14:12:30 2008

: NORMAL

---(11)

---(12)

: 35 C

: 32 C

---(13)

1) Current time

Present date and time.

2) Startup time

Date and time when the system started up.

System Operations and Display Commands

358

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

3) restart_cause

Cause for the system startup.

The following system startup causes are displayed:

power on

reset

: The power has been turned on.

: The reset command has been issued.

reset switch : The [RESET] switch has been pressed.

system down : System-down has occurred.

4) machine_state

State of the device

RUNNING

FALLBACK

: The device is active.

: The device is into fallback state.

5) access_direction

Direction where a device is installed in.

front access

rear access

: The device should be installed forward.

: The device should be installed backward.

6) power_redundancy

State of the redundant power unit.

single

: The device has no redundant power unit.

: The device has a redundant power unit.

redundant

7) PSU1 state

State of the power unit (PSU1).

PSU2 state

Type of the power unit (PSU2).

NORMAL

: The power unit works normally.

NO PRESENT : The power unit is not installed.

NO POWER

FAIL

: The power unit has been turned off.

: The power unit has been abnormal.

: The power unit is invalid type.

UNKNOWN

WARNING

: The power unit has been incorrectly mounted.

8) PSU1 type

Type of the power unit (PSU1).

PSU2 type

Type of the power unit (PSU2).

: The power unit is AC.

: The power unit is not installed or invalid type.

9) power_consumption

Power consumption of the device.

10) FAN1 state

State of the fan module 1.

FAN2 state

State of the fan module 2.

NORMAL

FAIL

: The fan module works normally.

: The fan module has been abnormal.

NO PRESENT : The fan module is not installed.

UNKNOWN

WARNING

: The fan module is invalid direction.

: The fan module has been incorrectly mounted.

System Operations and Display Commands

359

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

11) inspiration_state

State of environment temperature monitor.

internal_state

State of device inside temperature monitor.

NORMAL

WARNING

ALARM

: The temperature is normal.

: The device changes to a high temperature state.

: Thermal alarm occurs in the device.

12) State of changing thermal state

warning time

recover time

: The time when a device changed in a high temperature state.

: The time when a device returned to a normal state.

13) inspiration_temp

Environment temperature.

internal_temp

Device inside temperature.

System Operations and Display Commands

360

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.18.1.3 show tech-support

Function

Display all the analysis information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show tech-support [detail] [save]

Options

N/A

Display the result of the analysis.

detail

Display or save detail report.

save

Save the result of the analysis to the external media.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

The analysis information such as settings and statuses of this device is collectively

displayed.

Use the output capture function of the terminal software to save the output contents of

this command, or save the result of the analysis to the external media.

Caution

The output of this command is displayed constantly even when the pager function

"5.17.2.1 terminal pager" (pg.337) is enabled.

5.18.1.4 show logging error

Function

Display the error log.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show logging error

N/A

Options

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Caution

Display the error log information about system down and hardware diagnosis errors due

to ROM or input/output driver.

"Logging time:" indicates GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) if the timezone (time zone

<offset>) is not specified in the configuration.

System Operations and Display Commands

361

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution Example

# show logging error

Error Logs on FLASH:

[0] Error Log:

flag=80,mode=00,unit=10,regsp=00000000

Firm information:

XG2600 V01.00 PTF:NY0010

Error information:

error code [85020000]

Logging time:

2011/01/01(Sat) 11:51:17

Hardware diagnostic error information:

Detail [00142224 00142228 00000080 0000341f]

[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]

Extended Error Logs:

[1] Error Log:

flag=80,mode=00,unit=10,regsp=00000000

Firm information:

XG2600 V01.00 PTF:NY0010

Error information:

error code [85020000]

Logging time:

2011/01/01(Sat) 11:59:37

Hardware diagnostic error information:

Detail [00142224 00142228 00000080 00003520]

[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]

Error Logs on DRAM:

[0] Error Log:

flag=80,mode=00,unit=80,regsp=04ae9e60

Firm information:

XG2600 V01.00 PTF:NY0010

System down information:

down code [00000080:00000002]

Logging time:

2011/01/01(Sat) 13:05:23

srr0

[0086dab4] srr1

[0002d000] csrr0

[00000000] csrr1

[00000000] mcsr

[00000000] tsr

[00000000]

[01124844]

[a2c9bdbc]

[00000000]

[04aea174]

mcsrr0 [00000000] mcsrr1 [00000000] mcar

[00886d74] dear

[00000000] gpr01

[0087a01c] gpr05

[c1bcb0a1] gpr09

[aca5a4a5] gpr13

[00000000] gpr17

[00000000] gpr21

[04aea1e0] gpr25

[00000000] gpr29

[0087a01c] esr

gpr00

gpr04

gpr08

gpr12

gpr16

gpr20

gpr24

gpr28

[04ae9f60] gpr02

[00000005] gpr06

[00000005] gpr10

[00000000] gpr14

[00000000] gpr18

[00000000] gpr22

[04aea1f0] gpr26

[ffffffff] gpr30

[00000005] gpr03

[010cf924] gpr07

[d8c4eab7] gpr11

[00000000] gpr15

[00000000] gpr19

[00000000] gpr23

[0121ff74] gpr27

[0121ff7c] gpr31

Peripheral Register:

err_det [00000000] l2errdet[00000000] eedr

[00000000] ltesr

[00000000]

(To be continued)

System Operations and Display Commands

362

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

(Continued)

User Stack:

+0 +4 +8 +C

04ae9f60 04aea1d0 00886d58 04ae9fb8 04ae9fa0

04ae9f70 00c6fcbb fea4cebb d8c4eab7 c1bcb0a1

04ae9f80 a2c9bdbc a8b7c1bc b0a4f2a5 aca5a4a5

04ae9f90 c9a5e9a5 a4a5f3a4 cba4a2a4 efa4bba4

04ae9fa0 eba1a30a 00000000 00000000 00000000

04ae9fb0 04aea1c0 00000000 00000000 00000000

04ae9fc0 85004100 04aea0b0 0000000a 00000000

04ae9fd0 04ae9ff0 04ae9fb0 04ae9fb0 00000100

04ae9fe0 00000000 85004100 00000100 04aea068

04ae9ff0 04aea020 00000000 00000000 00000000

04aea000 00000000 04aea0f0 00000007 00000000

04aea010 00000001 04ae9ff0 04aea000 2066696c

04aea020 73666572 000002bf 5472616e 01e89be0

04aea030 42000082 00000000 00000000 00000000

04aea040 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

04aea050 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

04aea060 010b0000 04b22114 0000005d 00000000

04aea070 04aea148 0124269c ffffffff ffffffff

04aea080 00405cfc 0002d000 ffffffff ffffffff

04aea090 0087b9dc 00000000 00000000 42002088

04aea0a0 00000001 00000000 00000000 42002088

04aea0b0 00000001 0002d000 00000100 00000001

04aea0c0 0087b6d4 00000000 00000000 42000084

04aea0d0 00000001 00000100 00000002 035fc300

04aea0e0 04aea110 01260af0 00004e43 00000020

04aea0f0 04aea100 01260af0 00004e43 00000020

04aea100 04aea130 0087b810 01261d28 035fcdc0

04aea110 04aea140 01260af0 00004e43 42000082

04aea120 04aea140 00000022 00000000 035fcdc0

04aea130 04aea140 0087b8c0 00000000 035fcdc0

04aea140 04aea170 0087a23c 00000022 01230168

04aea150 04aea1d0 04b11152 00769eec 01230168

04aea160 00000000 00000022 04b22114 0000005d

04aea170 00000000 0087a01c 00000000 00000200

04aea180 04b71ee0 04b22114 01230168 00000022

04aea190 04aea1a0 00869238 00000000 00000000

04aea1a0 04aea1c0 00867cd8 00000000 00000000

04aea1b0 010b0000 04b11152 00769eec 01230168

04aea1c0 04b71ee0 01240000 010ed184 01230168

04aea1d0 04aea210 00768d20 00000000 00000000

04aea1e0 04b71ee0 04aea220 01230168 0121fd30

04aea1f0 04aea210 007697d4 00769eec 01230168

04aea200 04b71ee0 01240000 01230168 01240000

04aea210 04aea330 007685d4 04aea200 fffffffb

04aea220 4649524d 57415245 2d494e46 4f000000

04aea230 53522d53 37313643 32000000 00000000

04aea240 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

04aea250 4e593030 31302056 30322e30 30000000

04aea260 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

04aea270 4d6f6e20 46656220 20372031 343a3239

04aea280 3a353920 4a535420 32303035 00000000

......mX........

................

..A.............

................

......A........h

... ............

................

............ fil

sfer....Tran....

B...............

................

......!....]....

...H.$&.........

.@\.............

............B. .

................

............B...

............._..

.....&....NC...

...0.....&.(._..

...@.&....NCB...

...@..."....._..

...@........._..

...p...<...".#.h

.......R.v...#.h

......."..!....]

................

......!..#.h..."

.......8........

......|.........

.......R.v...#.h

.....$.......#.h

.....v. ........

....... .#.h.!.0

.....v...v...#.h

.....$...#.h.$..

...0.v..........

FIRMWARE-INFO...

XG2600............

................

NY0010 V01.00...

................

Thu Jan 1 14:29

:59 JST 2011....

(To be continued)

System Operations and Display Commands

363

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

(Continued)

04aea290 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

................

04aea2a0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

04aea2b0 00000000 00000000 00000000 000001d4

04aea2c0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

04aea2d0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

04aea2e0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

04aea2f0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

04aea300 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

04aea310 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

04aea320 011395e0 00000004 01240000 01240000

04aea330 04aea360 00769fe4 00000000 035fcdc0

04aea340 04aea360 0087a23c 7ffffff0 01230168

04aea350 00000004 04aea370 01240000 04b71ee0

................

.........$...$..

...`.v......._..

...`...<.....#.h

.......p.$......

Interrupt Stack:

+0 +4 +8 +C

04ae9e60 00000000 04aea1f0 0121ff74 00000000

04ae9e70 00000000 04ae9f60 00000005 01124844

04ae9e80 0087a01c 00000005 010cf924 a2c9bdbc

04ae9e90 c1bcb0a1 00000005 d8c4eab7 00000000

04ae9ea0 aca5a4a5 00000000 00000000 00000000

04ae9eb0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

04ae9ec0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

04ae9ed0 04aea1e0 04aea1f0 0121ff74 00000000

04ae9ee0 00000000 ffffffff 0121ff7c 04aea174

04ae9ef0 0086dab4 0002d000 00000000 00000000

04ae9f00 00886d74 00000005 00000000 42000082

04ae9f10 00000001 0087a01c 00000000 00000000

04ae9f20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

04ae9f30 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

04ae9f40 00000000 00000000 00000000 04aea170

04ae9f50 04ae9f60 01260af0 00004e43 00000008

# exit

.........!.t....

.......`......HD

...........$....

................

.........!.t....

.........!.|...t

................

..mt........B...

................

...............p

...`.&....NC....

System Operations and Display Commands

364

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.18.1.5 clear logging error

Function

Clear the error log.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

clear logging error

N/A

Options

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Clear all the error logs.

Execution Example

# clear logging error

5.18.1.6 show logging syslog

Function

Display the system log information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show logging syslog

N/A

Options

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Caution

Display system log information. This command can display &syslognum; pieces or more

of information in the chronological order, most recent first.

Turning the device power Off or executing the clear logging syslog command will clear

system log information.

System log information is not cleared by executing the "reset" command or pressing the

[RESET] switch to reset this device; however, by way of exception, if the system is reset

after firmware was updated, system log information will be cleared.

Execution Example

# show logging syslog

Dec 13 15:52:31 192.168.1.1 XG2600: init: system startup now.

Dec 13 15:52:31 192.168.1.1 XG2600: sshd: generating public/private host key pair.

Dec 13 15:52:40 192.168.1.1 XG2600: protocol: ether 1 link up

Dec 13 15:52:40 192.168.1.1 XG2600: protocol: lan 0 link up

System Operations and Display Commands

365

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.18.1.7 clear logging syslog

Function

Clear the system log information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

clear logging syslog

N/A

Options

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Clear all the system log information.

Execution Example

# clear logging syslog

5.18.1.8 clear statistics

Function

Clear all the statistics.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

clear statistics

N/A

Options

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Clear all the statistics.

Execution Example

# clear statistics

System Operations and Display Commands

366

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.18.1.9 show date

Function

Display the current date and time of the device.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show date

N/A

Options

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the current device date and time of the device.

Execution Example

# show date

Sat Jan 01 14:26:00 2011 ---(1)

1) Displays the current date and time.

5.18.1.10date

Function

Display and set the current date and time of the device.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

date [YYYY/MM/DD.hh:mm:ss]

Options

N/A

Display the current device date and time of the device.

YYYY/MM/DD.hh:mm:ss

Set the specified date and time. (Effective for admin class only)

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display and set the current date and time of the device.

Execution Example

To display the date and time

# date

Sat Jan 01 14:26:00 2011

To set the date and time

# date 2011/01/01.14:26:00

System Operations and Display Commands

367

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.18.1.11rdate

Function

Set the date and time of the remote host into this device.

rdate

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

Options

N/A

Set the date and time of the remote host in this device.

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Obtain the date and time of the remote host (time server) specified in the time auto

server, and set them as the date and time of this device.

Execution Example

# rdate

Sat Jan 01 14:26:00 2011

5.18.1.12reset

Function

Restart the device.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

reset [<filename>]

reset clear

Options

N/A

Restart the device.

Specify the "startup-config" file to be read during startup.

• config1

Read configuration 1.

• config2

Read configuration 2.

clear

Initialize the settings and restart the device.

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Restart the device in about 6 seconds.

Execution Example

# reset

System Operations and Display Commands

368

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.19 Configuration Display, Delete and

Operation Commands

This section explains about commands related to configuration definition information.

5.19.1 Configuration Display Commands

This section explains about commands related to configuration display.

5.19.1.1 show candidate-config

Function

Display the configuration being edited.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show candidate-config [all] [<config>]

Options

all

Display all configuration including default values.

If omitted, only the modified configuration is displayed.

Display the configuration beginning with <config>.

The <config> section is NOT included in the configuration to be displayed.

If omitted, all configurations are displayed.

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the currently edited configuration.

Execution Example

# show candidate-config lan 0

ip address 192.168.0.1/24 3

ip rip use v1 v1 0 off

Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands

369

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.19.1.2 show running-config

Function

Display the configuration during operation.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show running-config [all] [<config>]

Options

all

Display all configuration including default values.

If omitted, only the modified configuration is displayed.

Display the configuration beginning with <config>.

The <config> section is NOT included in the configuration to be displayed.

If omitted, all configurations are displayed.

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the currently running configuration.

Execution Example

# show running-config lan 1

ip address 192.168.1.1/24 3

ip rip use v1 v1 0 off

5.19.1.3 show startup-config

Function

Display the configuration to be used for device startup.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show startup-config [<config>]

Options

Display the configuration beginning with <config>.

The character string, containing all options, characters and digits, without changing,

displayed by the "show running-config" or "show candidate-config" command must be

specified in the <config> option.

The <config> section is not included in the configuration to be displayed.

If omitted, all configurations are displayed.

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the configuration that was used at startup or the saved startup configuration.

Execution Example

# show startup-config

lan 0 ip address 192.168.0.1/24 3

lan 0 vlan 1

syslog pri error,warn,info

syslog facility 23

telnetinfo autologout 5m

time zone 0900

Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands

370

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.19.1.4 diff

Function

Display the configuration difference.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

diff <src_filename> <dst_filename>

Options

<src_filename>

Specify the name of the compare source file.

<dst_filename>

Specify the name of the compare target file.

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display only the differences between the specified files. The information only in

<src_filename> begins with "<" and one only in <filename2> begins with ">".

The following file names can be specified.

candidate-config : Currently edited configuration file

running-config

startup-config

config1

: Running configuration file

: Startup configuration file

: Configuration 1 file

config2

: Configuration 2 file

Execution Example

# diff candidate-config running-config

===

> vlan 1 name rmt1

===

< vlan 3 name rmt3

< vlan 4 name rmt4

< vlan 5 name rmt5

< vlan 6 name rmt6

---

> vlan 3 name inter3

===

< vlan 8 name rmt8

< vlan 9 name rmt9

< vlan 10 name rmt10

< syslog server 192.168.33.63

Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands

371

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.19.2 Configuration Delete Commands

This section explains about commands related to configuration delete.

5.19.2.1 delete

Function

Delete the configuration being edited.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

delete <config>

Options

• Configuration command

Specify the name and arguments of the configuration command to be deleted.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Delete the specified configuration to return to the default state.

All the commands that begin with the command name and arguments specified in

<config> are subject to deletion.

Specifying only the command name deletes all the configuration beginning with the

specified command name. The number of arguments that can be specified in the config

command varies depending on commands; in most cases, it is possible to specify up to

the argument that precedes a variable value.

Caution

below.

delete password set

delete password user set

Execution Example

The following shows an execution example when deleting all IPv4 address information of

lan 0.

(config)# delete lan 0 ip address

Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands

372

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.19.3 Configuration Operation Commands

This section explains about commands related to configuration definition information operations.

5.19.3.1 load

Function

Read (or load) the configuration.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

load <filename>

Options

Specify the name of the file to be read (or loaded).

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Read the specified configuration.

All the data being set will be invalid.

The following file names can be specified.

running-config : Running configuration file

startup-config : Startup configuration file

config1

config2

: Configuration 1 file

: Configuration 2 file

Message

load failed: config read error

Since the device has a high communication load, it failed in reading the configuration.

Stop the communication load, and execute the command again.

<WARNING> weak admin password: set the password

The administrator password is not set.

Set an administrator password.

<WARNING> weak admin password: contain at least 8 characters

The administrator password is seven or fewer characters in length.

Set an administrator password with eight or more characters.

<WARNING> weak admin password: contain a different kind of character

The administrator password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric

characters.

Set an administrator password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.

<WARNING> weak user password: contain at least 8 characters

The user password is seven or fewer characters in length.

Set a user password with eight or more characters.

<WARNING> weak user password: contain a different kind of character

The user password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric characters.

Set a user password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.

Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands

373

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution Example

# load config1

5.19.3.2 save

Function

Save the configuration.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

save [<filename>]

Options

N/A

Overwrite the existing "startup-config" file with the "candidate-config" file contents.

Overwrite the file specified with the "candidate-config" file contents.

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Overwrite the file specified with the "candidate-config" file contents.

Omitting options will overwrite the contents on the current startup-config file.

The following file names can be specified.

startup-config : Startup configuration file

config1

config2

: Configuration 1 file

: Configuration 2 file

Execution Example

# save

Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands

374

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.19.3.3 commit

Function

Commit (or dynamically activate) the configuration.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

commit

Options

N/A

Use Mode

Explanation

Configuration mode (admin class)

Apply the configuration that was set or changed with the configuration command, without

device restart.

Caution

Changing the configuration may cause the communication interface to come down once

in order to apply address information in the device, resulting in a communication

interrupt.

"5.48 Effect by "commit" Command Execution" (pg.543)

Reference

Message

<ERROR> Need to do reset after execute the save command.

Since unallowable configuration was added or changed, it cannot be applied.

Execute the "reset" command after the "save" command, and restart the device.

<WARNING> The candidate-config is not changed.

No configuration is added or changed.

It is not necessary to execute the commit command.

Execution Example

# commit

Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands

375

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.19.3.4 commit try time

Function

Try to commit (dynamically activate) the candidate config, or re-commit the startup-config

if the try time period expires.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

commit try time <time>

Options

<time>

Specify a time period (from 1m to 24h) until retrieving the startup-config.

The unit shall be d (day), h (hour), or m (minute).

Use Mode

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Apply the configuration that was set or changed with the configuration command, without

device restart, and retrieve the startup-config in the specified time.

Caution

During commit try time period the following cannot be executed:

• "commit"

• commit try time

• "save"

If you want to execute these commands, please cancel retrieving the startup-config,

using "commit try cancel" command.

When the configuration is retrieved, complete the cancellation with this command

sequence:

load startup-config

commit

If the startup-config (config0 or config1) is not same the configuration before editing for

try, Old configuration would be lost.

"5.48 Effect by "commit" Command Execution" (pg.543)

Reference

Message

<ERROR> Need to do reset after execute the save command.

Since "commit try time" command already working, it cannot be applied.

Execute after canceling retrieving the startup-config by the "commit try cancel" command.

<ERROR> Waiting switch-back to old configuration

An unallowable configuration was created and cannot be applied.

Execute the "reset" command after the "save" command to restart the device.

<WARNING> The candidate-config is not changed.

No configuration is added or changed.

It is not necessary to execute the commit command.

Execution Example

# commit try time 10m commit

Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands

376

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.19.3.5 commit try cancel

Function

Cancel retrieving the startup-config after using the "commit try time" command.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

commit try cancel

Options

N/A

Use Mode

Explanation

Message

Configuration mode (admin class)

Cancel retrieving the startup-config after using the "commit try time" command.

<ERROR> Not waiting switch-back

The command is not applicable. A "commit try time" command was not previously

invoked.

Execution Example

# commit try cancel

Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands

377

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.19.3.6 discard

Function

Discard the changes of configuration.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

discard

Options

N/A

Use Mode

Explanation

Configuration mode (admin class)

Discard changes of candidate-config, and return to the same contents as for running-

config.

Message

<WARNING> weak admin password: set the password

The administrator password is not set.

Set an administrator password.

<WARNING> weak admin password: contain at least 8 characters

The administrator password is seven or fewer characters in length.

Set an administrator password with eight or more characters.

<WARNING> weak admin password: contain a different kind of character

The administrator password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric

characters.

Set an administrator password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.

<WARNING> weak user password: contain at least 8 characters

The user password is seven or fewer characters in length.

Set a user password with eight or more characters.

<WARNING> weak user password: contain a different kind of character

The user password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric characters.

Set a user password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.

Execution Example

# discard

Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands

378

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.19.4 File Operation Commands

This section explains about commands related to File Operation Commands.

5.19.4.1 dir

Function

Displays a list of files.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

dir [<filename>]

Options

Specifies the name of the file or directory to be displayed. The dir command will only

display files or directories that match this parameter. If a directory is specified, the files

inside that directory will be displayed. Wildcards may be used with this option. Valid

wildcards are listed below.

• *

matches all character strings, regardless of length.

• ?

matches any single character.

• [<char>]

matches a target including any of the characters in <char>.

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Displays a list of files on external media.

Execution Example

# dir

Directory of /cf0

---(1)

(4) (5)

(2)

(3)

2011/01/15 11:55

2011/01/17 03:16

2011/01/17 01:58

1445 CONFIG2.TXT

1445 CONFIG3.TXT

1445 CONFIG4.TXT

1445 CONFIG11.TXT

1445 CONFIG1.TXT

2337531 FIRM

<DIR>

TEST

total file 6

total directory 1

# dir test/*.*

Directory of /cf0/test

2011/01/16 10:23

2011/01/17 01:58

3142 CONFIG2.TXT

<DIR> BKUP

total file 1

total directory 1

1) If CompactFlash /cf0, if USB memory /um0

2) Displays file last modified date.

3) Displays <DIR> if directory.

4) If a regular file, displays file size in bytes.

5) Displays file or directory name.

Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands

379

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.19.4.2 copy

Function

Copies a file.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

copy <src_filename> <dst_filename>

Options

<src_filename>

The source file to be copied.

<dst_filename>

The target file name.

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Copies a file.

Filenames can be any of the below.

Filenames that can be used for <src_filename>:

candidate-config : candidate configuration file

running-config

startup-config

config1

: Running configuration file

: Startup configuration file

: Configuration 1 file

: Configuration 2 file

: Firmware

config2

firmware

/cf0/anyfilename : A file on CompactFlash media

/um0/anyfilename : A file on USB memory

Filenames that can be used for <dst_filename>:

startup-config

config1

: Startup configuration file

: Configuration 1 file

: Configuration 2 file

: Firmware

config2

firmware

/cf0/anyfilename : A file on CompactFlash media

/um0/anyfilename : A file on USB memory

Execution Example

# copy conifg1 startup-config

Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands

380

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.19.4.3 remove

Function

Deletes a file.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

remove <filename>

Options

Name of file to be deleted.

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Displays a list of files on external media.

Execution Example

# remove config1_cf

5.19.4.4 rename

Function

Renames a file.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

rename <old_filename> <new_filename>

Options

<old_filename>

The name of the file to be renamed.

<new_filename>

The new file name.

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Renames a file on external media.

Execution Example

# rename config1_cf config1_cf_old

Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands

381

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.19.4.5 format

Function

Formats.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

format

N/A

Options

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Formats external media, restoring to factory state.

Execution Example

# format

Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands

382

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.20 Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and

Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

This section explains commands related to Ethernet.

5.20.1 Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display

Commands

This section explains the commands related to Ethernet counter, log, statistics, and status display commands.

5.20.1.1 show ether

Function

Display the Ethernet physical port information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show ether [line <line>]

Options

N/A

Display all information.

line <line>

• Display the specified port information.

No information is displayed if the specified port number is invalid.

Range

Model

1 to 26

1 to 52

XG0224

XG0448

XG02600

1 to 26,m1

When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When specifying sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Examples: "1-8")

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the specified Ethernet port information.

If the "line" option is specified, the information of the target port is displayed.

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

383

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution Example

B9F# show ether line 1-7

[ETHER PORT-1]

status

: down

---(1)

flow control

type

since

config

linkcontrol

: -

: Normal

---(2)

---(3)

---(4)

---(5)

---(6)

: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970

: -

: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)

[ETHER PORT-2]

status

: down

flow control

type

: -

: Normal

since

config

: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970

: -

linkcontrol

: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)

[ETHER PORT-3]

status

: down

flow control

type

: -

: Normal

since

config

: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970

: -

linkcontrol

: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)

[ETHER PORT-4]

status

: down

flow control

type

: -

: Normal

since

config

: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970

: -

linkcontrol

: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)

[ETHER PORT-5]

status

: down

flow control

type

: -

: Normal

since

config

: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970

: -

linkcontrol

: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)

[ETHER PORT-6]

status

: down

flow control

type

: -

: Normal

since

config

: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970

: -

linkcontrol

: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)

[ETHER PORT-7]

status

: down

flow control

type

: -

: Normal

since

config

: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970

: -

linkcontrol

: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)

XG2600#

1) Port state

Displays the speed and state when the connection has been completed.

disable: Indicates that the port is not used based on the definition.

offline : Indicates that the port is in the offline state.

Offline also indicates the following states depending on the cause:

offline (loopdetect): Port offline by loop detection function

offline (storm): Port offline by storm control function

offline (startup): Port offline by startup-time block function

offline (recovery):

Port offline by automatic recovery stop function

offline (downrelay): Port offline by linkdown relay function

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

384

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

offline (backup): Port offline by backup port function

offline (icmpwatch):

Port offline by ether L3 monitoring function

down : Indicates that the port is in the linkdown state.

auto : Indicates that automatic negotiation is enabled.

10M/100M/1000M/10G:

Indicates the baud rate (10Mbps, 100Mbps, 1000Mbps or 10Gbps) of

the currently linked Ethernet port.

Full/Half:

Indicates the full duplex or half duplex mode of the currently linked port.

MDI/MDI-X:

Indicates the type of the currently linked MDI.

2) Flow control state

Displays in the sending or receiving order of the flow control.

off

: Indicates that the flow control is enabled.

: Indicates that the flow control is disabled.

: Indicates that the port is undefined because it is not in the linkup state.

3) Port type

Indicates the port type.

Normal: Indicates that the port is used as a normal port.

Mirror : Indicates that the port is used as a target port for mirroring.

LinkAggregation:

Indicates that the port is used as a link aggregation port.

This parameter also indicates the number of the link aggregation group

that the port belongs to.

"*LinkAggregation" is displayed when the link aggregation port is not

linked up as a multiplexed link in the linkup state.

Backup:

Indicates that the port is used as a backup port.

This parameter also indicates the number of the backup group that the

port belongs to as well as the master or backup type.

"Standby" is displayed to a standby port.

Backup LA:

Indicates that the port is used as a backup link aggregation port.

This parameter also indicates the number of the link aggregation group

that the port belongs to.

It further indicates the number of the backup group that the port belongs

to as well as the master or backup type.

"Standby" is displayed to a standby port.

"*standby" is displayed when the port is not established (not switched)

as a link aggregation standby port in the linkup state.

"*LA" is displayed when the link aggregation port is not linked up as a

multiplexed link in the linkup state.

–

: Indicate indetermination by unused port or definition contradiction.

4) State transition time

Displays the time when the port has changed to the current state.

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

385

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5) Configuration

Indicates setting value of "ether mode" command and "ether mdi" command.

mode (setting value):

Indicates the setting value of "ether mode" as mode (auto).

mdi (setting value):

Indicates the setting value of "ether mdi" as mdi (auto).

: For the server port "-" will be displayed because it only supports 1000M

fixed operation.

6) Link control information

Indicates link control information.

online : Indicates that the port runs in the online state during device startup or

during dynamic definition reflection.

offline : Indicates that the port runs in the offline state during device startup or

during dynamic definition reflection.

recovery (Upper limit: Current value):

Indicates the upper limit of the linkdown count specified in "ether

recovery limit" as well as the current linkdown count.

If the upper limit of the linkdown count is not set, the upper limit and

current value are indicated by hyphens (-) respectively.

downrelay (Link port list):

Displays link port list information when using the linkdown relay

function.

The linkdown relay function, if not used, is indicated by a hyphen (-).

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

386

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.20.1.2 show ether brief

Function

Display the information about Ethernet physical ports briefly.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show ether brief

Options

N/A

Display all information.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the Ethernet port information briefly.

Execution Example

# show ether brief

port status

type

media mdi

speed duplex flow

----- -------- ------------------ ------ ----- ------ ------- -----

(1)

(2)

(3)

normal

linkaggregation1

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

TxRx

metal MDIX 1000M full

metal MDI

metal -

1000M full

offline normal

up backup1

standby backup1

metal MDIX 1000M full

down

normal

linkaggregation4

metal MDIX 1000M full

metal -

disable normal

down

mirror

normal

1000M full

1) Port number

2) Port state

: Indicates that the port is in the linkup state.

: Indicates that the port is in the linkdown state.

down

standby : Indicates that the port is in the standby state. (backup port only)

"*standby" is displayed when the port is not established (not

switched) as a standby port in the linkup state.

offline

: Indicates that the port is in the offline state.

disable : Indicates that the port is not used based on the definition.

3) Port type

normal

mirror

: Indicates that the port is used as a normal port.

: Indicates that the port is used as a target port for mirroring.

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

387

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

linkaggregation:

Indicates that the port is used as a link aggregation port.

This parameter also indicates the number of the link aggregation

group that the port belongs to.

"*linkaggregation" is displayed when the link aggregation port is

not linked up as a multiplexed link in the linkup state.

backup

: Indicates that the port is used as a backup port.

It further indicates the number of the backup group that the port

belongs to.

backup LA : Indicates that the port is used as a backup link aggregation port.

This parameter also indicates the number of the link aggregation

group that the port belongs to.

It further indicates the number of the backup group that the port

belongs to.

"*LA" is displayed when the link aggregation port is not linked up

as a multiplexed link in the linkup state.

4) Media type of the Ethernet port

Indicates that the 10/100/1000BASE-T port or 10/100BASE-TX is used.

-: Indicates that the port is undefined because it is not in the linkup state.

5) MDI state of the Ethernet port

MDI/MDIX:

Indicates the type of the currently linked MDI. (When the media type is metal)

-: Indicates that the port is undefined because it is not in the linkup state.

[Note]

For the server port, even it is in the linkup state the state stays in

"-".

6) Link speed of the Ethernet port

10M/100M/1000M/10G:

Indicates the baud rate (10Mbps, 100Mbps, 1000Mbps or 10Gbps) of the

currently linked Ethernet port.

-: Indicates that the port is undefined because it is not in the linkup state.

7) Duplex state of the Ethernet port

full/half:

Indicates the full duplex or half duplex mode of the currently linked port.

-: Indicates that the port is undefined because it is not in the linkup state, or that

the port is a Fiber port.

8) Flow control state of the Ethernet port

Tx: Indicates that the flow control sending function is enabled.

Rx: Indicates that the flow control receiving function is enabled.

-: Indicates that the port is undefined because it is not in the linkup state, and

that the flow control function is disabled.

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

388

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.20.1.3 show ether statistics

Function

Display the statistics of Ethernet physical ports.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show ether statistics [line <line>] [detail]

Options

N/A

Display all the statistics.

line <line>

• Display the statistics of the specified port.

No statistics are displayed if the specified port number is invalid.

The management port is specified by "m1".

The port for an internal connection that ties each switch device is specified by "C1".

Range

Model

1 to 26

XG0224

XG0448

XG02600

1 to 52, c1 to c4

1 to 26,m1

When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

The specification of the port simultaneously other than m1 and m1 are also possible.

The specification of the port simultaneously other than c1 to c4 and c1 to c4 are also

possible.

When specifying sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

detail

Display the statistics of the Ethernet ports together with related detailed information.

Even if detail is specified, the content of the display is not added for the m1 port.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the statistics of the Ethernet physical port.

Specifying only the "line" option will display the statistics of the target port.

The relation between the port number and the switch device of XG0448 is shown.

Range

1 to 24,51,52

25 to 50

switch device

switch device 0

switch device 1

Connected port between switch devices is called an "internal connection port".

The relation between the internal connected port number and the switch device is shown.

Range

switch device

c1,c2

c3,c4

switch device 0

switch device 1

C1 is connected with C3. C2 is connected with c4.

The statistics are cleared if this device is restarted.

Caution

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

389

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution Example

Example of executing XG0224

#show ether statistics line 1

[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]

[Input Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

frames/sec

Multicast

frames/sec

Broadcast

frames/sec

Pause frames

: 0

---(1)

---(2)

---(3)

---(4)

---(5)

---(6)

---(7)

---(8)

---(9)

---(10)

---(11)

Discards

All DiscardsPkts

Errors

: 0

---(12)

Undersize

FCSErrors

: 0

---(13)

---(14)

---(15)

---(16)

---(17)

---(18)

---(19)

AlignmentErrors

FragmentErrors

Jabbers

SymbolErrors

UnknownOpcodes

[Output Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

Multicast

frames/sec

Broadcast

frames/sec

Pause frames

: 0

---(20)

---(21)

---(22)

---(23)

---(24)

---(25)

---(26)

---(27)

---(28)

---(29)

Discards

DelayExceededDiscards

Queue Full Discards

Errors

: 0

---(30)

---(31)

FCSErrors

: 0

---(32)

---(33)

---(34)

---(35)

---(36)

FragmentErrors

CarrierSenseErrors

ExcessiveCollisions

LateCollisions

SingleCollisionFrames

MultipleCollisionFrames

DeferredTransmissions

: 0

---(37)

---(38)

---(39)

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

390

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution example when detail of XG0224 (Giga port) is specified

# show ether statistics line 1 detail

[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]

[Input Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

frames/sec

Multicast

frames/sec

Broadcast

frames/sec

Pause frames

Mac Control frames

: 0

---(42)

Discards

All DiscardsPkts

Resource Full

Discards by Filter

Port In Discards

Policy Discards

VLAN dropped

Input Discards

Errors

: 0

---(43)

---(44)

---(45)

---(46)

---(47)

---(48)

Undersize

FCSErrors

: 0

AlignmentErrors

FragmentErrors

Jabbers

SymbolErrors

UnknownOpcodes

[Output Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

Multicast

frames/sec

Broadcast

frames/sec

Pause frames

Mac Control frames

Jabbers

: 0

---(49)

---(50)

Discards

DelayExceededDiscards

Internal Discards

Queue Full Discards

Errors

: 0

---(51)

FCSErrors

: 0

FragmentErrors

CarrierSenseErrors

ExcessiveCollisions

LateCollisions

InternalCellErrors

SingleCollisionFrames

MultipleCollisionFrames

DeferredTransmissions

: 0

(To be continued)

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

391

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

(Continued)

[Input Detail Statistics]

Frame size

frames

: 0

frames/sec

---(52)

---(53)

---(54)

---(55)

---(56)

---(57)

---(58)

---(59)

---(60)

65-127

128-255

256-511

: 0

512-1023

1024-1518

1519-2047

2048-4095

4096-9216

[Output Detail Statistics]

Frame size

frames

frames/sec

: 0

---(61)

---(62)

---(63)

---(64)

---(65)

---(66)

---(67)

---(68)

---(69)

65-127

128-255

256-511

512-1023

1024-1518

1519-2047

2048-4095

4096-9216

Execution example when detail of XG0224 (10Giga port) is specified

# show ether statistics line 26 detail

[ETHER PORT-26 STATISTICS]

[Input Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

frames/sec

Multicast

frames/sec

Broadcast

frames/sec

Pause frames

Mac Control frames

: 0

Discards

All DiscardsPkts

Resource Full

Discards by Filter

Port In Discards

Policy Discards

VLAN dropped

Input Discards

Errors

: 0

Undersize

FCSErrors

: 0

AlignmentErrors

FragmentErrors

Jabbers

SymbolErrors

UnknownOpcodes

(To be continued)

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

392

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

(Continued)

[Output Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

Multicast

frames/sec

Broadcast

frames/sec

Pause frames

Mac Control frames

: 0

Discards

DelayExceededDiscards

Internal Discards

Queue Full Discards

Errors

: 0

FCSErrors

: 0

FragmentErrors

CarrierSenseErrors

ExcessiveCollisions

LateCollisions

InternalCellErrors

SingleCollisionFrames

: 0

MultipleCollisionFrames : 0

DeferredTransmissions

: 0

[Input Detail Statistics]

Frame size

frames

frames/sec

: 0

65-127

128-255

256-511

512-1023

1024-1518

1519-2047

2048-4095

4096-9216

9217-16383

[Output Detail Statistics]

Frame size

---(70)

frames

frames/sec

: 0

65-127

128-255

256-511

512-1023

1024-1518

1519-2047

2048-4095

4096-9216

9217-16383

---(71)

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

393

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution Example (XG0448)

XG0448(config)# show ether statistics line 1

[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]

[Input Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

frames/sec

Multicast

frames/sec

Broadcast

frames/sec

Pause frames

: 0

---(1)

---(2)

---(3)

---(4)

---(5)

---(6)

---(7)

---(8)

---(9)

---(10)

---(11)

Discards

All DiscardsPkts

Errors

: 0

---(12)

Undersize

FCSErrors

: 0

---(13)

---(14)

---(15)

---(16)

---(17)

---(18)

---(19)

AlignmentErrors

FragmentErrors

Jabbers

SymbolErrors

UnknownOpcodes

[Output Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

Multicast

frames/sec

Broadcast

frames/sec

Pause frames

: 0

---(20)

---(21)

---(22)

---(23)

---(24)

---(25)

---(26)

---(27)

---(28)

---(29)

Discards

DelayExceededDiscards

Queue Full Discards

Errors

: 0

---(30)

---(31)

FCSErrors

: 0

---(32)

---(33)

---(34)

---(35)

---(36)

FragmentErrors

CarrierSenseErrors

ExcessiveCollisions

LateCollisions

SingleCollisionFrames

MultipleCollisionFrames

DeferredTransmissions

: 0

---(37)

---(38)

---(39)

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

394

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Example of executing internal connection port of XG0448

XG0448(config)# show ether statistics line 1c1

[INTERNAL CONNECTION PORT-1 STATISTICS]

Packets from

Connected to

: line 1 to 24

: line 51 to 52

: C3

---(40)

---(41)

[Input Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

frames/sec

Multicast

frames/sec

Broadcast

frames/sec

Pause frames

: 0

Discards

All DiscardsPkts

Errors

: 0

Undersize

FCSErrors

: 0

AlignmentErrors

FragmentErrors

Jabbers

SymbolErrors

UnknownOpcodes

[Output Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

Multicast

frames/sec

Broadcast

frames/sec

Pause frames

: 0

Discards

DelayExceededDiscards

Queue Full Discards

Errors

: 0

FCSErrors

: 0

FragmentErrors

CarrierSenseErrors

ExcessiveCollisions

LateCollisions

SingleCollisionFrames

MultipleCollisionFrames

DeferredTransmissions

: 0

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

395

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution example when detail of XG0448 (Giga port) is specified

# show ether statistics line 1 detail

[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]

[Input Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

frames/sec

Multicast

frames/sec

Broadcast

frames/sec

Pause frames

Mac Control frames

: 0

Discards

All DiscardsPkts

Resource Full

Discards by Filter

Policy Discards

Port In Discards

Input Discards

Errors

: 0

Undersize

FCSErrors

: 0

AlignmentErrors

FragmentErrors

Jabbers

SymbolErrors

UnknownOpcodes

[Output Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

Multicast

frames/sec

Broadcast

frames/sec

Pause frames

Mac Control frames

Jabbers

: 0

Discards

DelayExceededDiscards

Internal Discards

Queue Full Discards

Errors

: 0

FCSErrors

: 0

FragmentErrors

CarrierSenseErrors

ExcessiveCollisions

LateCollisions

InternalCellErrors

SingleCollisionFrames

MultipleCollisionFrames

DeferredTransmissions

: 0

(To be continued)

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

396

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

(Continued)

[Input Detail Statistics]

Frame size

frames

: 0

frames/sec

65-127

128-255

256-511

: 0

512-1023

1024-1518

1519-2047

2048-4095

4096-9216

[Output Detail Statistics]

Frame size

frames

frames/sec

: 0

65-127

128-255

256-511

512-1023

1024-1518

1519-2047

2048-4095

4096-9216

Execution example when detail of XG0448 (10Giga port) is specified

# show ether statistics line 50 detail

[ETHER PORT-50 STATISTICS]

[Input Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

frames/sec

Multicast

frames/sec

Broadcast

frames/sec

Pause frames

Mac Control frames

: 0

Discards

All DiscardsPkts

Resource Full

Discards by Filter

Policy Discards

Port In Discards

Input Discards

Errors

: 0

Undersize

FCSErrors

: 0

AlignmentErrors

FragmentErrors

Jabbers

SymbolErrors

UnknownOpcodes

(To be continued)

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

397

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

(Continued)

[Output Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

Multicast

frames/sec

Broadcast

frames/sec

Pause frames

Mac Control frames

: 0

Discards

DelayExceededDiscards

Internal Discards

Queue Full Discards

Errors

: 0

FCSErrors

: 0

FragmentErrors

CarrierSenseErrors

ExcessiveCollisions

LateCollisions

InternalCellErrors

SingleCollisionFrames

MultipleCollisionFrames

DeferredTransmissions

: 0

[Input Detail Statistics]

Frame size

frames

: 0

frames/sec

65-127

128-255

256-511

512-1023

: 0

1024-1518

1519-2047

2048-4095

4096-9216

9217-16383

[Output Detail Statistics]

Frame size

frames

frames/sec

: 0

65-127

128-255

256-511

512-1023

1024-1518

1519-2047

2048-4095

4096-9216

9217-16383

1) Number of octets of received data

2) Number of bits received per second (Bits/sec.)

3) Total number of received frames

4) Number of frames received per second (Frames/sec.)

5) Number of received unicast frames

6) Number of unicast frames received per second (Frames/sec.)

7) Number of received multicast frames

8) Number of multicast frames received per second (Frames/sec.)

9) Number of received broadcast frames

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

398

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

10) Number of broadcast frames received per second (Frames/sec.)

11) Number of received PAUSE frames (MAC control frames)

12) Number of discarded frames out of all the received frames

13) Number of received shortsized frames (less than 64 bytes)

14) Number of frames in which FCS error is detected in 64 data size bytes or more

15) Number of received frames in which an alignment error was detected

16) Number of shortsized frames (less than 64 bytes) in which an FCS or alignment

error was detected

17) Number of oversized frames (1519 bytes or more without tag, 1523 bytes or more

with tag) in which an FCS or FCS alignment error was detected

18) Number of detected symbol errors

19) Number of unsupported MAC control frames that were received

20) Total number of sent octets

21) Number of bits sent per second (Bits/sec.)

22) Number of sent frames

23) Number of frames sent per second (Frames/sec.)

24) Number of sent unicast frames

25) Number of sent multicast frames

26) Number of multicast frames sent per second (Frames/sec.)

27) Number of sent broadcast frames

28) Number of broadcast frames sent per second (Frames/sec.)

29) Number of sent pause frames (MAC control frames)

30) Number of frames that were discarded due to an excessive delay

31) Number of frames that entered full state of cue and were abandoned

32) Number of FCS error frame transmissions of 64 data size bytes or more

33) Number of sent frames in which an FCS or FCS alignment error was detected in

the shortsized frames

34) Career undetection error generation frequency

35) Number of frames in which transmission fails by frequent occurrence of collision

36) Number of occurrences of late collisions

37) Number of frames that could be sent after a single collision occurred

38) Number of frames that could be sent after multiple collisions occurred

39) Number of frames that got into a transmission deferment because the

transmissionpath was busy

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

399

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

The following information is displayed only for an internal connected port of XG0448

40) External port in which it belongs to internal, connected port

41) Opposed internal, connected port.

The counter of an internal, connected port becomes a frame that has been

forwarded from the Giga/10Giga port with the value to which the header for an

internal control in 12 bytes is added.

42) Number of received MAC control frames

43) Number of reception frames abandoned by resource shortage or Back Pressure

44) Number of reception frames abandoned by filtering

45) Number of reception frames abandoned by be not of STP in state of forwarding.

The number of reception frames abandoned because it doesn't belong to set VLAN

is contained for XG0448.

46) Number of reception frames annulled by reception annulment setting

47) Number of reception frames abandoned because it doesn't belong to set VLAN.

48) Number of reception frames abandoned by other reasons

- When the MAC header or the IP header is the following values

All ..TTL.. ..Destination IP address 0, Source.. 0 etc. abnormal checksum and

abnormal length

- For a not corresponding frame to the entry of the IP multicast table

- For the internal control frame not forwarded to an external port in case of an internal,

connected port

- When it is annulled without being output among frames that the flooding is done

without being recognized an abnormal frame in the input port

49) Number of sent MAC control frames

50) Number of frames in which FCS error or FCS alignment error is detected with over

size (1519 bytes or more) frame

51) Number of frames abandoned in chip

52) Number of frames (with 64 byte data size) received and number of frame (with

64byte data size) received per second (Frames/sec.)

53) Number of frames (with data size of 65 to 127 bytes) sent and number of frame

(with data size of 65 to 127 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)

54) Number of frames (with data size of 128 to 255 bytes) received and number of

frame (with data size of 128 to 255 bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)

55) Number of frames (with data size of 256 to 511 bytes) received and number of

frame (with data size of 256 to 511 bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)

56) Number of frames (with data size of 512 to 1023 bytes) received and number of

frame (with data size of 512 to 1023 bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)

57) Number of frames (with data size of 1024 to 1518 bytes) received and number of

frame (with data size of 1024 to 1518bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)

58) Number of frames (with data size of 1519 to 2047 bytes) received and number of

frame (with data size of 1519 to 1522bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)

59) Number of frames (with data size of 2048 to 4095 bytes) received and number of

frame (with data size of 2048 to 4095 bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

400

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

60) Number of frames (with data size of 4096 to 9216 bytes) received and number of

frame (with data size of 4096 to 9216 bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)

61) Number of frames (with 64 byte data size) sent and number of frame (with 64 byte

data size) sent per second (Frames/sec.)

62) Number of frames (with data size of 65 to 127 bytes) sent and number of frame

(with data size of 65 to 127 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)

63) Number of frames (with data size of 128 to 255 bytes) sent and number of frame

(with data size of 128 to 255 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)

64) Number of frames (with data size of 256 to 511 bytes) sent and number of frame

(with data size of 256 to 511 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)

65) Number of frames (with data size of 512 to 1023 bytes) sent and number of frame

(with data size of 512 to 1023 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)

66) Number of frames (with data size of 1024 to 1518 bytes) sent and number of frame

(with data size of 1024 to 1518bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)

67) Number of frames (with data size of 1519 to 2047 bytes) sent and number of frame

(with data size of 1519 to 1522bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)

68) Number of frames (with data size of 2048 to 4095 bytes) sent and number of frame

(with data size of 2048 to 4095 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)

69) Number of frames (with data size of 4096 to 9216 bytes) sent and number of frame

(with data size of 4096 to 9216 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)

70) Number of frame receptions of 9217-16383 data size bytes. And, it is numerical of

the frame reception of 9217-16383 size of data a second bytes (frames/sec).

However, the frame forwarding more than 9217 byte length is a unsupport.

71)

Number of frame transmissions of 9217-16383 data size bytes. And, Number of

frame transmissions of 9217-16383 size of data a second bytes (frames/sec).

However, the frame forwarding more than 9217 byte length is a unsupport.

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

401

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Example of executing 10Giga port of XG2600

# show ether statistics line 1

[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]

[Input Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

frames/sec

Multicast

frames/sec

Broadcast

frames/sec

Pause frames

: 1493377360

: 0

: 6706618

: 0

: 6704279

: 0

: 15

: 0

---(1)

---(2)

---(3)

---(4)

---(5)

---(6)

---(7)

---(8)

---(9)

---(10)

---(11)

Discards

All DiscardsPkts

Errors

: 94732

---(12)

Undersize

FCSErrors

: 0

: 2324

: 0

---(13)

---(14)

---(15)

---(16)

---(17)

---(18)

---(19)

AlignmentErrors

FragmentErrors

Jabbers

SymbolErrors

UnknownOpcodes

: 0

[Output Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

Multicast

frames/sec

Broadcast

frames/sec

Pause frames

: 804468332

: 0

: 5109155

: 0

: 5109152

: 0

: 3

: 0

---(20)

---(21)

---(22)

---(23)

---(24)

---(25)

---(26)

---(27)

---(28)

---(29)

Discards

DelayExceededDiscards

Errors

: 0

---(30)

Undersize

FCSErrors

FragmentErrors

: 0

---(31)

---(32)

---(33)

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

402

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Example of executing m1 port of XG2600 (management port)

# show ether statistics line m1

[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]

[Input Statistics]

Octets

: 148231

bits/sec

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

frames/sec

Multicast

frames/sec

: 511

: 897

: 0

: 45

: 0

: 852

: 0

---(34)

---(35)

Discards

DiscardsPkts

Errors

: 0

---(36)

Oversize

FCSErrors

AlignmentErrors

: 0

[Output Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

: 4317

: 0

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

Multicast

frames/sec

: 32

: 0

: 30

: 2

---(37)

---(38)

: 0

Discards

DiscardsPkts

: 0

---(39)

Errors

CarrierSenseErrors

ExcessiveCollisions

LateCollisions

SingleCollisionFrames

MultipleCollisionFrames : 0

DeferredTransmissions : 0

: 0

---(40)

---(41)

---(42)

---(43)

---(44)

---(45)

1) Number of octets of received data

2) Number of bits received per second (Bits/sec.)

3) Total number of received frames

4) Number of frames received per second (Frames/sec.)

5) Number of received unicast frames

It doesn't contain the error frame.

6) Number of unicast frames received per second (Frames/sec.)

It doesn't contain the error frame.

7) Number of received multicast frames

It doesn't contain the error frame.

8) Number of multicast frames received per second (Frames/sec.)

It doesn't contain the error frame.

9) Number of received broadcast frames

It doesn't contain the error frame.

10) Number of broadcast frames received per second (Frames/sec.)

It doesn't contain the error frame.

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

403

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

11) Number of received PAUSE frames (MAC control frames)

12) Number of discarded frames out of all the received frames

13) Number of received shortsized frames (less than 64 bytes)

14) Number of frames in which FCS error is detected in 64 data size bytes or more

15) Number of received frames in which an alignment error was detected

16) Number of shortsized frames (less than 64 bytes) in which an FCS or alignment

error was detected

17) Number of oversized frames (1519 bytes or more without tag, 1523 bytes or more

with tag) in which an FCS or FCS alignment error was detected

18) Number of detected symbol errors

19) Number of unsupported MAC control frames that were received

20) Total number of sent octets

21) Number of bits sent per second (Bits/sec.)

The number of transmission bits of error frames is not counted at the "cut-

through mode".

22) Number of sent frames

The number of frames in which the transmission discontinuance is done

because the error detection was done in the reception port after it begins to

transmit is contained at the "cut-through" mode.

It doesn't contain the error frame.

23) Number of frames sent per second (Frames/sec.)

The number of frames in which the transmission discontinuance is done

because the error detection was done in the reception port after it begins to

transmit is contained at the "cut-through" mode.

It doesn't contain the error frame.

24) Number of sent unicast frames

It doesn't contain the error frame.

25) Number of sent multicast frames

It doesn't contain the error frame.

26) Number of multicast frames sent per second (Frames/sec.)

It doesn't contain the error frame.

27) Number of sent broadcast frames

It doesn't contain the error frame.

28) Number of broadcast frames sent per second (Frames/sec.)

It doesn't contain the error frame.

29) Number of sent pause frames (MAC control frames)

30) Number of frames that were discarded due to an excessive delay

31) Number of short size (less than 64 bytes) frame transmissions

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

404

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

32) Number of FCS error frame transmissions of 64 data size bytes or more

The number of frames in which the error detection is done to the "cut-through"

mode in the reception port after it begins to transmit and the transmission

discontinuance is done is contained.

33) Number of sent frames in which an FCS or FCS alignment error was detected in

the shortsized frames (less than 64 bytes)

34) Received multicast and number of broadcast frames

35) Received multicast and number of broadcast frames a second (frames/sec)

36) Number of discarded frames out of all the received frames

37) Number of sent multicast frames or broadcast frames

38) Transmitted multicast and number of broadcast frames a second (frames/sec)

39) Number of frames abandoned when transmitting

40) Career undetection error generation frequency

41) Number of frames in which transmission fails by frequent occurrence of collision

42) Number of occurrences of late collisions

43) Number of frames that could be sent after a single collision occurred

44) Number of frames that could be sent after multiple collisions occurred

45) Number of frames that got into a transmission deferment because the transmission

path was busy

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

405

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution example when detail of XG2600 (10Giga port) is specified

# show ether statistics line 1 detail

[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]

[Input Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

: 1493377360

: 0

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

frames/sec

Multicast

frames/sec

Broadcast

frames/sec

Pause frames

Mac Control frames

: 6706618

: 0

: 6704279

: 0

: 15

: 0

---(46)

Discards

All DiscardsPkts

Errors

: 94732

Undersize

: 0

FCSErrors

: 0

AlignmentErrors

FragmentErrors

Jabbers

: 0

: 2324

: 0

SymbolErrors

UnknownOpcodes

: 0

[Output Statistics]

Octets

bits/sec

: 804468332

: 0

Frames

frames/sec

Unicast

: 5109155

: 0

: 5109152

: 0

Multicast

frames/sec

Broadcast

: 0

: 3

frames/sec

Pause frames

Mac Control frames

: 0

---(47)

---(48)

Discards

DiscardsPkts

DelayExceededDiscards

Errors

: 0

Undersize

FCSErrors

FragmentErrors

: 0

[Detail Statistics]

Frame size

frames

: 0

frames/sec

---(49)

65-127

128-255

256-511

512-1023

1024-1518

1519-16128

: 0

---(50)

---(51)

---(52)

---(53)

---(54)

---(55)

The following information is also displayed when "detail" is specified.

46) Number of received MAC control frames

47) Number of sent MAC control frames

48) Number of frames abandoned when transmitting

49) Number of frame sending and receiving of 64 data size bytes.

And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 65 to

127 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

406

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

50) Number of frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 65 to 127 bytes) data

size bytes. And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with data

size of 65 to 127 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)

51)

Number of frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 128 to 255 bytes)

data size bytes. And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with

data size of 128 to 255 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)

52) Number of frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 256 to 511 bytes) data

size bytes. And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with data

size of 256 to 511 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)

53) Number of frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 512 to 1023 bytes)

data size bytes. And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with

data size of 512 to 1023 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)

54)

Number of frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 1024 to 1518 bytes)

data size bytes. And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with

data size of 1024 to 1518 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)

55)

Number of frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 1519 to 16128 bytes)

data size bytes. And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with

data size of 1519 to 16128 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

407

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.20.1.4 show ether media-info

Function

Display Media information of Ethernet physical port

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show ether media-info [line <line>]

Options

N/A

Display the information of all SFP+,CX4 ports and SFP ports

line <line>

Display the information of the specified port.

Range

Model

21 to 26

45 to 52

1 to 26

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When specifying sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Examples: "1-8")

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display Media information

Execution Example

Execution Example (XG0224)

# show ether media-info

Port media type Vendor PN

---- ---------- ----------------

(1) (2)

(3)

SFP(SX)

HFBR-5710L

SFP(ZX)

SFP(LX)

SFP(FX)

SFP+(LR)

SFP+(SR)

SCP6P94-F7-BMH

SCP6P44-F7-BMH

HFBR-57E0P

FTLX1471D3BCL

TRS2000EN-S002

Execution Example (XG0448)

# show ether media-info

Port media type Vendor PN

---- ---------- ----------------

(1) (2)

(3)

NONE

SFP(LX)

NONE

SFP+(LR)

SFP+(SR)

NONE

SCP6P44-F7-BMH

FTLX1471D3BCL

TRS2000EN-S002

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

408

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution Example (XG2600)

# show ether media-info

Port media type Vendor PN

---- ---------- ----------------

(1) (2)

(3)

SFP+(SR)

FTLX8571D3BCL

SFP+(SR)

NONE

1) Port number

2) Media information

The type of the installed module is displayed

SFP(SX)

SFP(LX)

SFP(FX)

SFP (1000BASE-SX) module is installed

SFP (1000BASE-LX) module is installed

SFP (1000BASE-FX) module is installed

SFP(BX-D) SFP (1000BASE-BX-D) module is installed

SFP(BX-U) SFP (1000BASE-BX-U) module is installed

SFP(ZX)

CX4

SFP (1000BASE-ZX) module is installed

The CX4 expansion card is mounted. (Only for XG0448/XG0224. )

SFP+(10GBASE-SR) module is installed

SFP+(SR)

SFP+(LR)

SFP+(10GBASE-LR) module is installed

UNKNOWN Type of the installed module is unknown

NONE SFP+ module is not installed or the module of the unsupport is

mounted.

3) Vendor Part Number

Vendor part number of the installed module is displayed.

The information is displayed even if the type of the module is unknown.

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

409

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.20.1.5 show ether utilization

Function

Display the usage ratio (or utilization) information of Ethernet physical ports.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show ether utilization

Options

N/A

Display the utilization information of all Ethernet ports.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Caution

Display the usage ratio of the Ethernet physical port.

The usage ratio is cleared if this device is restarted.

Execution Example

Execution Example (XG0224)

# show ether utilization

Port

------ ---------- -------

(1) (2) (3)

TX/sec

Util

RX/sec

---------- -------

(4) (5)

Util

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

410

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution Example (XG0448)

# show ether utilization

Port

------ ---------- -------

(1) (2) (3)

TX/sec

Util

RX/sec

---------- -------

(4)

Util

(5)

Execution Example (XG2600)

# show ether utilization

Port

------ ---------- -------

(1) (2) (3)

TX/sec

Util

RX/sec

---------- -------

(4) (5)

Util

710227

100

1420457

1420454

1) Port

: Ethernet physical port number

The management port is displayed with M1. (Only XG2600)

An "internal connected port" is displayed with C1-C4. (Only XG0448)

2) TX/sec : Number of frames that were sent in 1 second (pps)

3) Util

4) RX/sec : Number of frames that were received in 1 second (pps)

5) Util : Receiving usage ratio (%) of physical port

: Sending usage ratio (%) of physical port

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

411

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.20.1.6 show ether queue

Function

Display the number of packets placed in the COS queue of Ethernet physical ports.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show ether queue [line <line>]

Options

N/A

Display the number of packets placed in the COS queue of all ports.

line <line>

Display the number of packets placed in the COS queue of the specified port.

No information is displayed if the specified port number is invalid.

Range

Model

1 to 26

XG0224

XG0448

XG2600

1 to 52, c1 to c4

1 to 26

When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When specifying sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Display the number of packets remaining in the COS queue of Ethernet physical ports.

If the "line" option is specified, the information of the target port is displayed.

The number of packets remaining in the COS queue is cleared if this device is restarted.

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

412

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution Example

Execution Example (XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600)

# show ether queue

[ETHER PORT-1]

CoS Queue 0

CoS Queue 1

CoS Queue 2

CoS Queue 3

CoS Queue 4

CoS Queue 5

CoS Queue 6

CoS Queue 7

: 0

: 238

: 0

---(1)

[ETHER PORT-2]

CoS Queue 0

CoS Queue 1

CoS Queue 2

CoS Queue 3

CoS Queue 4

CoS Queue 5

CoS Queue 6

CoS Queue 7

: 0

1) CoS Queue 0

Number of packets remaining in the hardware COS queue 0

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

413

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.20.2 Ethernet Counter, Log, and Statistics Clear Commands

This section explains the commands related to Ethernet counter, log, statistics,

and statistics clear commands.

5.20.2.1 clear ether statistics

Function

Clear the statistics of Ethernet physical ports.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

clear ether statistics [line <line>]

Options

N/A

Clear all the statistics.

line <line>

Clear the statistics of the specified port.

No statistics are not cleared if the specified port number is invalid.

The management port is specified by "m1".

Range

Model

1 to 26

XG0224

XG0448

XG02600

1 to 52, c1 to c4

1 to 26, m1

When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

The specification of the port simultaneously other than m1 and m1 are also possible.

The specification of the port simultaneously other than c1-4 and c1-4 are also possible.

When specifying sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")

Use Mode

Explanation

Caution

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Clear the statistics of the Ethernet physical port.

Specifying only the "line" option will clear the statistics of the target port.

XG0224 / XG0448

It might be considered that it restores it from the state of the roughhouse once when

broadcast/multicast roughhouse control information is set, and the statistical information

of "clear ether statistics" pertinent port is cleared with the reception rate exceeds the

threshold.

Execution Example

# clear ether statistics

Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

414

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.21 USB connection Counter, Log,

Statistics, and Status Display and

Clear Operation Commands

This section explains about USB connection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands.

5.21.1 USB connection Counter, Log, and Statistics Clear

Commands

This section explains commands related to USB connection Counter, Log, and Statistics Clear Commands.

5.21.1.1 show usb hcd status

Function

Displays USB port blocking status.

Available Model XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show usb hcd status

N/A

Options

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Default

Displays blocking status of USB ports.

# show usb hcd status

[USB HCD STATUS]

status

: enable

--- (1)

1) Blocking state

Displays USB port blocking status

disable: blocked

enable: unblocked

USB connection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear

Operation Commands

415

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.21.1.2 show usb storage status

Function

Displays USB mass storage controller status.

Available Model XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show usb storage status

N/A

Options

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class /admin class/CE class)

Configuration mode (admin class/CE class)

Explanation

Default

Displays current status for USB mass storage controller.

# show usb storage status

[Thread]

Status

: Active

---(1)

[Device #1]

Status

Speed

Geometry probing

Test unit ready

Inquiry

Mode sense

Read capacity

: Idle

: Full

---(2)

---(3)

---(4)

---(5)

: Success

Read format capacities : ----

Hold data

: Not exist

---(6)

Error status

Error reason

Error event

Request sense code

[Storage specs]

Vendor

: Get device specs [5/5] (Read format capacities) ---(7)

: Transfer URB failure

: 0x3200000d

: (02, 10, 00)

---(8)

---(9)

---(10)

: FUJITSU

: USB PortableDrive

: 3.96

: 500400

: 695

---(11)

---(12)

---(13)

---(14)

---(15)

---(16)

---(17)

Product

Product Rev.

Total sectors

Cylinders

Heads

: 15

: 48

Sectors per track

[USB specs]

Speed

: Full

: 3

---(18)

---(19)

Max LUN

[USB configuration]

Device address

Interface

Sub class

LUN

: 1

: 0

: 6

: 0

: 0x82

: 0x02

---(20)

---(21)

---(22)

---(23)

---(24)

---(25)

BulkInEP

BulkOutEP

1) USB mass storage controller thread status

Status is displayed via the following messages:

Uninit: not initialized

Waiting for USBD active

Waiting for entry class completed

Active

The information below is displayed only when a connected USB device has

been detected.

USB connection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear

416

Operation Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

2) USB device controller status

Status is displayed via the following messages:

Uninit: not initialized

Initializing [1/2] (Set configuration)

Initializing [2/2] (Get max lun)

Get device specs [1/5] (Test unit ready)

Get device specs [2/5] (Inquiry)

Get device specs [3/5] (Mode sense)

Get device specs [4/5] (Read capacity)

Get device specs [5/5] (Read format capacities)

Idle: waiting for transfer request

Transferring

Waiting for unplugging: failure detection

Unplugging

3) Speed

Status is displayed via the following messages.

Warning : The speed displayed is the transfer rate of the USB device, and is not

the transfer throughput.

High

Full

: high speed mode (480Mbps)

: full speed mode (12Mbps)

: low speed mode (1.5Mbps)

Low

4) Geometry probing status

Geometry refers to the total number of sectors, cylinders, heads, and the

number of sectors per track on the mass storage device.

Status is displayed via the following messages:

Success : Success (partly guessed)

Failed

: Not yet detection has not yet occurred

5) Detailed display of geometry probing status

Geometry is detected via SCSI commands (TEST_UNIT_READY, INQUIRY,

MODE SENSE(6), READ CAPACITY, READ FORMAT CAPACITIES).

The execution status of each command is displayed via the following messages.

Success

Failed (no data)

Failed (retry out)

Failed

----: not executed

6) Hold data

Displays the presence or absence of transfer requests received from the file

system.

Status is displayed via the following messages:

Exists

Not exists

Items 7), 8), 9), and 10) below are displayed only when an error occurs in which

transfer processing cannot continue.

7) Error status

When an error occurs the USB device controller status, (2) above, is displayed.

8) Error reason

The reason transfer cannot continue is displayed.

9) Error event

Internal information is displayed.

USB connection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear

417

Operation Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

10) Request sense code

When an error is detected by the USB device the error data established on the

USB device is displayed.

11) Vendor

Vendor information for the USB device is displayed.

12) Product

Product information for the USB device is displayed.

13) Product Rev.

Product revision information for the USB device is displayed.

14) Total sectors

The total number of sectors held on the USB device is displayed.

15) Cylinders

The number of cylinders on the USB device is displayed.

16) Heads

The number of heads on the USB device is displayed.

17) Sectors per track

The number of sectors per track (per head, per cylinder) on the USB device is

displayed.

18) Speed

The USB protocol speed is displayed. Same as (3) above.

19) Max LUN

The maximum LUN value for the USB device. This switch does not support

devices that do not have LUN=0.

20) Device address

The device number allocated by USBD in order to uniquely identify devices on

the USB bus is displayed.

21) Interface

The interface number selected by the USB mass storage controller thread is

displayed.

22) Sub class

The subclass for the USB device is displayed. Class information is 0(=mass

storage class).

23) LUN

The LUN number selected by the USB mass storage controller thread is

displayed.

24) BulkInEP

The bulk-in endpoint number selected by the USB mass storage controller

thread is displayed.

25) BulkOutEP

The bulk-out endpoint number selected by the USB mass storage controller

thread is displayed.

USB connection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear

418

Operation Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.22 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and

Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

This section explains the commands related to LACP.

5.22.1 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display

Commands

This section explains the commands related to LACP counter, log, statistics, and status display commands.

5.22.1.1 show lacp

Function

Display LACP information briefly.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show lacp

Options

N/A

Display all information.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the LACP information in a simple format.

The information is sorted by port numbers, and separated for each group.

Execution Example

# show lacp

[group 2]

(1) (2)

port

(3)

mode

(4)

state

(5)

LAG-ID

(6)

port-parameter

----

------- ------- --------------------------- ----------

Actor : passive ASCD 8000,00-0b-5d-89-02-ba,0002 8000,2

Partner: active

ASCD

8000,00-0b-5d-89-01-22,0001 8000,3

Actor : passive ASCD

8000,00-0b-5d-89-02-ba,0002 8000,3

8000,00-0b-5d-89-01-22,0001 8000,2

Partner: active

ASCD

[group 1]

port

mode

state

LAG-ID

port-parameter

----

------- ------- --------------------------- ----------

Actor : passive ASCD 8000,00-0b-5d-89-02-ba,0001 8000,4

Partner: active

ASCD

8000,00-0b-5d-89-01-22,0002 8000,4

Actor : passive ASCD

Partner: active ASCD

8000,00-0b-5d-89-02-ba,0001 8000,5

8000,00-0b-5d-89-01-22,0002 8000,5

LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

419

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

1) Port number

2) Indicates that the information display at the right side is for this device (Actor) or

the remote device (Partner).

3) Indicates that the LACP mode is active or passive.

The passive is displayed if the valid LACP remote system information has not

been obtained.

4) Indicates the LACP state as follows.

T (LACP_Timeout):

The LACPDU's receive timeout has been set to Short Timeout (3

seconds).

If not shown, the Long Timeout (90 seconds) has been set.

A (Aggregation):

The links can be aggregated. If not shown, they are separate links.

S (Synchronization):

The link has been synchronized with the aggregator.

C (Collecting):

A frame is ready to receive.

D (Distributing):

A frame is ready to send.

d (defaulted):

The default parameters have been applied to the LACP remote system

(Partner) information being held by this device.

E (Expired):

The receiver of LACP remote system has expired.

5) Indicates the link aggregation ID.

All 0's indicates that the valid LACP remote system information has not been

obtained.

(a) (b)

8000,00-0b-5d-89-02-ba,0002 8000,2

a) System priority

b) System ID (MAC address)

c) Aggregation key

d) Port priority

e) Port number

6) A value at left shows the port priority, and a value at right shows the port number.

These values are equivalent to port priority (d) and port number (e) of Item (5).

LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

420

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.22.1.2 show lacp statistics

Function

Display the LACP statistics.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show lacp statistics

Options

N/A

Display all statistics.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Caution

Display the LACP statistics.

The statistics are cleared if the device is restarted or the valid LACP definition is not

found in the device.

The item is not displayed if its counter is zero (0). If the LACP is not operating on a port,

the item is displayed when its counter is not zero.

Execution Example

# show lacp statistics

LACP statistics information:

[ETHER PORT-1]

45 transmitted lacpdu

--- (1)

--- (2)

--- (3)

--- (4)

--- (5)

--- (6)

--- (7)

--- (8)

--- (9)

--- (10)

--- (11)

46 received lacpdu

12 start collecting/distributing

13 stop collecting/distributing

5 receive timeout lacpdu

1 transmitted marker pdu

1 received marker pdu

21 received lacpdu no link

1 transmission error

1 received error

[ETHER PORT-3]

53 transmitted lacpdu

52 received lacpdu

4 start collecting/distributing

3 stop collecting/distributing

1) Port number

2) Number of sent lacpdu packets

3) Number of received lacpdu packets

4) Number of times the aggregation link is disabled, changing from the enabled state,

to send or receive packets

5) Number of times the aggregation link is disabled to send or receive packets

6) Number of times the lacpdu packet reception was timed out

7) Number of times the marker pdu packet was sent

8) Number of times the marker pdu packet was received

9) Number of lacpdu or marker pdu packets received when the LACP was disabled

10) Number of times the packet sending has failed

11) Number of times the packet reception has failed

LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

421

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.22.2 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear

Commands

This section explains the commands related to LACP counter, log, statistics, and status clear commands.

5.22.2.1 clear lacp statistics

Function

Clear the LACP statistics.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

clear lacp statistics

N/A

Options

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Clear the LACP statistics.

Execution Example

# clear lacp statistics

LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

422

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.23 M1 port Status Display command

This section explains the commands related to oob.

5.23.1 M1 port Status Display command

This section explains the commands related to M1 port Status Display command.

5.23.1.1 show oob

Function

Display of M1 port information

Available Model XG2600

Syntax

show oob

N/A

Options

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

M1 port information is displayed.

Execution Example

#show oob

IP Address

Subnet Mask

IPv6 Address

MAC Address

: 192.168.3.1

: 255.255.255.0

: fe80::217:42ff:fed1:a80/64 ---(3)

: 00:17:42:d1:0a:80 ---(4)

---(1)

---(2)

1) The IPv4 address in the M1 port is displayed.

2) The subnet mask in the IPv4 address in the M1 port is displayed.

3) The IPv6 address in the M1 port is displayed. When IPv6 is not used, it is not

displayed.

4) The MAC address in the M1 port is displayed.

M1 port Status Display command

423

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.24 Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and

Status Display Commands

This section explains the commands related to the interface.

5.24.1 Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display

Commands

This section explains the commands related to interface counter, log, statistics, and status display commands.

5.24.1.1 show interface

Function

Display the interface information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show interface [interface <interface_name>]

Options

N/A

Display the status and type of all interfaces.

interface <interface_name>

Display the status and type of the specified interface.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the interface information.

Execution Example

# show interface

lan0

-(1)-

MTU 1500

-(2)-

<UP,BROADCAST,RUNNING,SIMPLEX,MULTICAST>

------------------(3)-------------------

Type: port vlan

VLAN ID is 20

MAC address: 00:00:0e:f1:41:dc

Status: up since Jan 1 19:23:45 2011

IP address/masklen:

(4)

192.168.1.1/24

MTU 1500

Broadcast 192.168.1.255

<UP,BROADCAST,RUNNING,SIMPLEX,MULTICAST>

lan1

Type: protocol vlan

VLAN ID is 30

MAC address: 00:00:0e:f1:41:dc

Status: up since Jan 1 19:23:45 2011

IP address/masklen:

(4)

192.168.3.1/24

Broadcast 192.168.3.255

lo0

MTU 16384

<UP,LOOPBACK,RUNNING,MULTICAST>

Type: loopback

(4)

Status: up since Jan 1 19:23:45 2011

IP address/masklen:

127.0.0.1/32

192.168.1.1/32

Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands

424

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

1) Interface name

2) MTU size

3) Interface flag

4) Type

The interface type is displayed by any of the following character strings.

port vlan : Port VLAN

protocol vlan : Protocol VLAN

loopback : Loopback interface

VLAN ID: The VLAN ID is displayed.

MAC address:The MAC address used for the interface is displayed.

Status

:The interface status and the clock time when the interface

entered in this status are displayed.

: Available

down

: Unavailable

IP address/masklen:

The IPv4 address of the interface is displayed.

Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands

425

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.24.1.2 show interface brief

Function

Display the interface information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

Display interface information briefly.

Options

N/A

Display all interfaces briefly.

interface <interface_name>

Display the specified interface briefly.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the interface information in a simple format.

Execution Example

# show interface brief

Interface

-------------

Status

--------

(2)

Type

-----------------

(3)

port vlan

protocol vlan

loopback

(1)

lan0

lan1

lo0

1) Interface

The interface name is displayed.

2) Status

The interface status is displayed.

: Available

down

: Unavailable

3) Type

The interface type is displayed.

port vlan : Port VLAN

protocol vlan : Protocol VLAN

loopback

: Loopback interface

Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands

426

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.24.1.3 show interface summary

Function

Display the number of interface entries (the interface summary).

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show interface summary

N/A

Options

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the number of interface entries.

Execution Example

# show interface summary

There are 4 interfaces (up status 4 interfaces)

Loopback interface

Port VLAN interface

Protocol VLAN interface :

1 (up status

2 (up status

1 (up status

1 interfaces) ---(1)

2 interfaces) ---(2)

1 interfaces) ---(3)

1) Loopback interface

2) Port VLAN

3) Protocol VLAN

Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands

427

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.25 ARP Entry Display and Clear Operation

Commands

This section explains the commands related to ARP entry.

5.25.1 ARP Entry Display Commands

This section explains the commands related to ARP entry.

5.25.1.1 show arp

Function

Display the ARP entries.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show arp [<ip_address>]

show arp summary

Options

N/A

Display the details of all ARP entries.

<ip_address>

Display the ARP entries of the specified IP address only.

summary

Display the number of ARP entries.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the ARP table entries.

Execution Example

# show arp

IP Address

MAC Address

F Rest Interface Port

--------------- ----------------- -- ----- --------- ----

(1)

(2)

(3) (4)

01146 lan0

lan0

(5)

(6)

20.0.0.1

20.0.0.2

20.0.0.255

Entry:3

00:00:e2:08:57:89

(incomplete)

00:00:02:01:14:00 P perm lan0

---(7)

# show arp summary

Entry:3

# show arp 20.0.0.1

IP Address

--------------- ----------------- -- ----- --------- ----

20.0.0.1 00:00:e2:08:57:89 01146 lan0 12

Entry:1

MAC Address

F Rest Interface Port

1) IP Address

The IP address of ARP entry is displayed.

2) MAC Address

The MAC address of ARP entry is displayed.

If not resolved, "incomplete" is displayed.

ARP Entry Display and Clear Operation Commands

428

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

An entry type is displayed. The details are as follows.

P: A permanent entry

4) Rest

The time to live of the ARP entry is indicated in seconds. For the permanent

entry, "perm" is shown.

5) Interface

The ARP entry interface is displayed.

6) Port

The Ethernet port number used for transmission is displayed.

7) Entry

The number of ARP entries is displayed.

ARP Entry Display and Clear Operation Commands

429

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.25.2 ARP Entry Clear Commands

This section explains the commands related to ARP entry clear.

5.25.2.1 clear arp

Function

Clear the ARP entries.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

clear arp [<ip_address>]

Options

N/A

Clear all ARP entries.

<ip_address>

Clear the ARP entries of the specified IP address.

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Clear the entries from the ARP table.

Execution Example

# clear arp

ARP Entry Display and Clear Operation Commands

430

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.26 Routing Table Entry Display Commands

This section explains the commands related to routing table.

5.26.1 IPv4 Routing Table Entry Display Commands

This section explains the commands related to the IPv4 routing table counter, log, statistics, and status display commands.

5.26.1.1 show ip route

Function

Display the routing table information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show ip route [all]

show ip route connected [all]

show ip route static [all]

show ip route destination <ip_address>/<mask> [all]

show ip route destination <ip_address>/<mask> longer-prefixes [all]

Options

N/A

Display the route information that has been registered on the routing table.

all

Display all route information including route information not registered on the routing

table.

connected

Display interface route information only.

static

Display static route information only.

destination <ip_address>/<mask>

Display only the route information whose address and mask match the specified ones.

<mask> must be a number of mask bits or a mask value. For the mask value, specify

successive 1s following the most significant bit (MSB).

destination <ip_address>/<mask> longer-prefixes

Display all route information included in the specified route information.

<mask> must be a number of mask bits or a mask value. For the mask value, specify

successive 1s following the most significant bit (MSB).

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the routing table information that routing manager registered.

Routing Table Entry Display Commands

431

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution Example

Display of the entire route information

# show ip route all

FP Destination/Mask

--- ---------------

(1) (2)

*C 192.168.10.0/24

*O 192.168.11.0/24

Gateway

Distance UpTime

Interface

-------------- -------- -------- ---------

(3)

192.168.10.50

192.168.10.20

(4)

(5)

0 00:00:01 lan0

110 00:00:01 lan0

(6)

1) FP

The kernel flag and the protocol type are displayed.

The following shows the kernel flags that may be displayed.

: Indicates the route registered in the IP kernel.

Blank:

Indicates the route not registered in the IP kernel.

: Indicates the route that cannot be registered in the IP kernel.

(The route count limit has been exceeded.)

The following shows the protocol types that may be displayed.

S : Indicates static route information.

C : Indicates the interface route information.

2) Destination/Mask

The destination address or mask length is displayed.

3) Gateway

The gateway address is displayed.

4) Distance

The routing priority is displayed.

5) UpTime

The elapsed time after the last update of route information is displayed.

01:23:45

1 hour, 23 minutes and 45 seconds have passed (if the elapsed time is within 24

hours).

6d23h45m

6 days, 23 hours and 45 minutes have passed (if the elapsed time is within 7

days).

3w6d23h

3 weeks, 6 days and 23 hours have passed.

6) Interface

The interface name through which the gateway can be reached is displayed. If

status of the interface is invalid, its name is followed by (inactive).

Routing Table Entry Display Commands

432

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.26.1.2 show ip route summary

Function

Display the number of routing table information entries.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show ip route summary [all]

Options

N/A

Display the number of route information sets that have been registered on the routing

table.

all

Display the number of all route information sets including route information not registered

on the routing table.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the number of routing table information entries that routing manager registered.

Execution Example

Display of the number of route

# show ip route summary

Route Source

------------

(1)

Networks

--------

(2)

Static

Connected

Total

1) Route Source

The routing protocol type is displayed.

Static

: Indicates the static route information.

Connected : Indicates the interface route information.

2) Networks

The number of route is displayed.

Routing Table Entry Display Commands

433

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.26.1.3 show ip route kernel

Function

Display the routing table of the IP kernel.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show ip route kernel

show ip route kernel longest-match <ip_address>

show ip route kernel summary

Options

N/A

Display the current entries on the routing table of the IP kernel.

longest-match <ip_address>

Display the entries that match the specified address on the routing table of IP kernel by

longest match.

summary

Display the number of entries (the summary) on the routing table of the IP kernel.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the current status of IP kernel's routing table.

Execution Example

# show ip route kernel

Routing Tables for Internet

Destination/Masklen Gateway

Flag

Interface

---(1)

------------------- ----------------- ------ ---------

10.0.0.0/8

127.0.0.1

192.168.1.5

127.0.0.1

link#1

00:a0:c9:d8:90:4e UH

127.0.0.1 UG

UGS

lan0

lo0

lan0

lo0

192.168.1.0/24

192.168.1.5

192.168.1.11

224.0.0.0/4

Entry:6

---(2)

# show ip route kernel longest-match 10.0.0.1

Routing Tables for Internet

Destination/Masklen Gateway

Flag

Interface

------------------- ----------------- ------ ---------

10.0.0.0/8

Entry:1

192.168.1.5

UGS

lan0

# show ip route kernel longest-match 20.0.0.1

Routing Tables for Internet

Destination/Masklen Gateway

Flag

Interface

------------------- ----------------- ------ ---------

Entry:0

# show ip route kernel summary

Entry:6

1) Destination/Masklen

The destination network address and the mask value are displayed.

If routed via the host, no mask value is displayed.

Gateway : The gateway address is displayed.

The direct route indicates the MAC address of the gateway. If the

gateway address is not resolved, link#x is shown (where, x is an

interface index number that the system automatically assigns to

each interface).

Routing Table Entry Display Commands

434

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Flag

: The entry type is displayed. The details are as follows.

U (Up): Indicates that the route is enabled.

G (Gateway): Indicates the route which requires an intermediate

routing such as gateway.

H (Host): Indicates the host entry.

S (Static): Indicates the static route.

R (Reject): Indicates the discarded route (with ICMP unreach

transmission).

B (Blackhole): Indicates the discarded route (without ICMP unreach

transmission).

Interface : The destination interface is shown.

2) Entry

The number of entries, excluding the route entries used inside the device, is

displayed.

Routing Table Entry Display Commands

435

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.26.2 IPv6 Routing Table Entry Display Commands

This section explains the commands related to IPv6 routing table.

5.26.2.1 show ipv6 route

Function

Display IPv6 routing table information

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show ipv6 route [all]

show ipv6 route connected [all]

show ipv6 route static [all]

show ipv6 route ra [all]

show ipv6 route destination <prefix>/<prefixlen> [all]

show ipv6 route destination <prefix>/<prefixlen> longer-prefixes [all]

Options

N/A

Display route IPv6 kernel routing table

all

Display all route information

connected

Display interface route information

static

Display static route information

Display only RA receive route information

destination <prefix>/<prefixlen>

Display route which matched specified prefix /prefix length

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display IPv6 routing table information

Execution Example

# show ipv6 route all

Destination/Prefixlen

UpTime

(4)

Distance

(5)

(1) (2)

Gateway

(3)

Interface

(6)

-- ------------------------------------------- --------- ------------------

*RA ::/0

00:00:01

00:00:08

fe80::2

lan0

oob0

*C 2001:db8:ffff:1000::/64

2001:db8:ffff:1000::1

*C 11:11::/64

11:11::22

Routing Table Entry Display Commands

436

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

1) FP

The kernel flag and the protocol type are displayed.

The following shows the kernel flags that may be displayed.

: Indicates the route registered in the IPv6 kernel.

Blank : Indicates the route not registered in the IPv6 kernel.

The following shows the protocol types that may be displayed.

: Indicates default route by receiving Router Advertisement (RA).

: Indicates static route information.

: Indicates the interface route information.

2) Destination/Prefixlen

The destination IPv6 network address and the Prefix length are displayed.

IPv6 link-local addresses are not displayed.

3) Gateway

The gateway address is displayed.

If the default route by receiving Router Advertisement (RA) is not registered in

the IPv6 kernel, the gateway address is not displayed.

4) UpTime

The elapsed time after the last update of route information is displayed.

01:23:45

6d23h45m

3w6d23h

: 1 hour, 23 minutes and 45 seconds have passed (if the elapsed

time is within 24 hours).

: 6 days, 23 hours and 45 minutes have passed (if the elapsed

time is within 7 days).

: 3 weeks, 6 days and 23 hours have passed.

5) Distance

The routing priority is displayed.

6) Interface

The interface name through which the gateway can be reached is displayed.

If status of the interface is invalid, its name is followed by (inactive).

If the default route by receiving Router Advertisement (RA) is not registered in

the IPv6 kernel, the interface name is not displayed.

Routing Table Entry Display Commands

437

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.26.2.2 show ipv6 route summary

Function

Display number of routes registered in IPv6 routing table

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show ipv6 route summary [all]

Options

N/A

Display number of routes registered in IPv6 routing table

all

Display all IPv6 route information

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display number of routes registered in IPv6 routing table

Execution Example

# show ipv6 route summary

Route Source

(1)

Networks

(2)

------------

Static 3

Connected

Total

--------

1) Route Source

The routing protocol type is displayed.

Static

: Indicates the static route information.

: Indicates the default route by receiving Router Advertisement (RA).

Connected : Indicates the interface route information.

Total

: Indicates the total number.

2) Networks

The number of route is displayed.

Routing Table Entry Display Commands

438

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.26.2.3 show ipv6 route kernel

Function

Display routing table of IPv6 kernel

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show ipv6 route kernel

show ipv6 route kernel summary

Options

N/A

Display the current entry of IPv6 kernel routing table

longest-match <ipv6_address>

Display longestmatch IPv6 entry

summary

Display number of IPv6 kernel routing table entry

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display IPv6 kernel routing table information

Execution Example

# show ipv6 route kernel

Routing Tables for Internet6

Destination/Masklen

Flag

Interface

---(1)

Gateway

------------------------------------------- ------ ---------

::1

UGS

lo0

::1

2001:db8:ffff:1000::/48

fe80::2a0:c9ff:fed8:904e%lan0

2001:db8:ffff:2000::/64

link#1

fe80::2a0:c9ff:fed8:904e%lan0

00:a0:c9:d8:90:4e

fe80::%lo0/64

fe80::1%lo0

lan0

lo0

ff01::/32

lo0

::1

ff02::%lan0/32

link#1

ff02::%lo0/32

fe80::1%lo0

lan0

lo0

Entry:8

---(2)

# show ipv6 route kernel longest-match 2001:db8:ffff:1000::1

Routing Tables for Internet6

Destination/Masklen

Gateway

Flag

Interface

------------------------------------------- ------ ---------

2001:db8:ffff:1000::/48

fe80::2a0:c9ff:fed8:904e%lan0

Entry:1

UGS

lan0

# show ipv6 route kernel longest-match 2001:db8:ffff:3000::1

Routing Tables for Internet6

Destination/Masklen

Gateway

Flag

Interface

------------------------------------------- ------ ---------

Entry:0

# show ipv6 route kernel summary

Entry:8

Routing Table Entry Display Commands

439

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

1) Destination/Masklen

The destination network address and the mask value are displayed.

If routed via the host, no mask value is displayed.

Gateway: The gateway address is displayed.

The direct route indicates the MAC address of the gateway. If the

gateway address is not resolved, link#x is shown (where, x is an

interface index number that the system automatically assigns to each

interface).

Flag

: The entry type is displayed. The details are as follows.

U (Up) : Indicates that the route is enabled.

G (Gateway) : Indicates the route which requires an

intermediaterouting such as gateway.

H (Host)

S (Static)

R (Reject)

: Indicates the host entry.

: Indicates the static route.

: Indicates the discarded route (with ICMP unreach

transmission).

B (Blackhole) : Indicates the discarded route (without ICMP unreach

transmission).

Interface: The destination interface is shown.

2) Entry

The number of entries, excluding the route entries used inside the device, is

displayed.

Routing Table Entry Display Commands

440

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.26.2.4 show ipv6 ra default-router-list

Function

Display default router list

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show ipv6 ra default-router-list

Options

N/A

Display default router list

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display default router list

Execution Example

# show ipv6 ra default-router-list

lan0:

Advertise Router

(1)

Lifetime

(2)

Time

(3)

fe80::1

1800

300

The number of entries : 1

---(4)

1) Advertise Router

Indicates the source address which sending Router Advertisement (RA).

2) Lifetime

Indicates the Router Lifetime (sec) in the Router Advertisement (RA).

3) Time

Indicates the remaining time (sec) before expiry of the Router Lifetime.

4) The number of entries

Indicates the number of default router entries.

Routing Table Entry Display Commands

441

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.26.2.5 show ipv6 ra prefix-list

Function

Display prefix list

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show ipv6 ra prefix-list

Options

N/A

Display prefix list

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display prefix list

Execution Example

# show ipv6 ra prefix-list

Prefix/Prefixlen

(1)

Flag

(2)

Preferred Lifetime

(3)

Valid Lifetime

(4)

Advertise Router

(5)

Interface

(6)

1000::/64

fe80::1

2000::/64

fe80::2

2000:2000:2000:2000::/64

fe80::1000:1000:1000:1001

2001::/64

-A

602800(604800)

lan0

0(604800)

lan0

4800(604800)

2590000(2592000)

3599(2592000)

1992000(2592000)

lan0

infinity

fe80::10

oob0

The number of entries : 4

---(7)

1) Prefix/Prefixlen

The IPv6 network prefix and the length in the Router Advertisement (RA).

2) Flag

The status of On-link flag and Auto Config flag in the Router Advertisement (RA).

: On-link flag is 1

: Auto Config flag is 1

: flag is 0

3) Preferred Lifetime

The remaining time (sec) before expiry of the Preferred Lifetime.

The Preferred Lifetime (sec) in parentheses.

4) Valid Lifetime

The remaining time (sec) before expiry of the Valid Lifetime.

The Valid Lifetime (sec) in parentheses.

If the Valid Lifetime expire, the enrty is deleted.

5) Advertise Router

The IPv6 address of the router sending the Router Advertisement (RA).

6) Interface

The interface name through which the Router Advertisement (RA) was received.

7) The number of entries

Indicates the number of prefix entries.

Routing Table Entry Display Commands

442

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.27 Packet Statistics Display and Clear

Operation Commands

This section explains the commands related to packet statistics information.

5.27.1 IPv4 Packet Statistics Display Commands

This section explains the commands related to IPv4 packet statistics display.

5.27.1.1 show ip traffic

Function

Display the IP-related statistics.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show ip traffic

show ip traffic { tcp | udp | ip | icmp | igmp | pim }

Options

N/A

Display all IP statistics.

tcp

Display the TCP packet statistics.

udp

Display the UDP packet statistics.

Display the IP packet statistics.

icmp

Display the ICMP packet statistics.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the IP statistics.

Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands

443

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution Example

# show ip traffic

tcp:

170 packets sent

145 data packets (29694 bytes)

1 data packet (18 bytes) retransmitted

0 resends initiated by MTU discovery

19 ack-only packets (10 delayed)

0 URG only packets

0 window probe packets

0 window update packets

5 control packets

217 packets received

145 acks (for 29706 bytes)

1 duplicate ack

0 acks for unsent data

121 packets (14492 bytes) received in-sequence

0 completely duplicate packets (0 bytes)

0 old duplicate packets

0 packets with some dup. data (0 bytes duped)

3 out-of-order packets (42 bytes)

0 packets (0 bytes) of data after window

0 window probes

0 window update packets

0 packets received after close

0 discarded for bad checksums

0 discarded for bad header offset fields

0 discarded because packet too short

3 connection requests

4 connection accepts

0 bad connection attempts

0 listen queue overflows

6 connections established (including accepts)

2 connections closed (including 1 drop)

1 connection updated cached RTT on close

1 connection updated cached RTT variance on close

0 connections updated cached ssthresh on close

1 embryonic connection dropped

145 segments updated rtt (of 145 attempts)

1 retransmit timeout

0 connections dropped by rexmit timeout

0 persist timeouts

0 connections dropped by persist timeout

22 keepalive timeouts

0 keepalive probes sent

0 connections dropped by keepalive

22 correct ACK header predictions

64 correct data packet header predictions

udp:

250 datagrams received

0 with incomplete header

0 with bad data length field

0 with bad checksum

0 dropped due to no socket

224 broadcast/multicast datagrams dropped due to no socket

0 dropped due to full socket buffers

0 not for hashed pcb

26 delivered

0 tunneling packets that can't find gif

(to be continued)

Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands

444

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

(continued)

26 datagrams output

ip:

467 total packets received

0 bad header checksums

0 with size smaller than minimum

0 with data size < data length

0 with ip length > max ip packet size

0 with header length < data size

0 with data length < header length

0 with bad options

0 with incorrect version number

0 fragments received

0 fragments dropped (dup or out of space)

0 fragments dropped after timeout

0 packets reassembled ok

467 packets for this host

0 packets for unknown/unsupported protocol

0 packets forwarded

0 packets not forwardable

0 redirects sent

197 packets sent from this host

0 packets sent with fabricated ip header

0 output packets dropped due to no bufs, etc.

0 output packets discarded due to no route

0 output datagrams fragmented

0 fragments created

0 datagrams that can't be fragmented

0 tunneling packets that can't find gif

icmp:

0 calls to icmp_error

0 errors not generated because old message was icmp

0 messages with bad code fields

0 messages < minimum length

0 bad checksums

0 messages with bad length

0 message responses generated

Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands

445

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.27.2 IPv4 Packet Statistics Clear Commands

This section explains the commands related to IPv4 packet statistics clearing.

5.27.2.1 clear ip traffic

Function

Clear the IP-related statistics.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

clear ip traffic

Options

N/A

Clear the IP-related statistics.

However, the IP packet statistics are not cleared.

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Clear the IP-related statistics.

However, the IP packet statistics are not cleared.

Execution Example

# clear ip traffic

Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands

446

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.27.3 IPv6 Packet Statistics Display Commands

This section explains the commands related to IPv6 packet statistics display.

5.27.3.1 show ipv6 traffic

Function

Display IPv6 packets statistics information

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show ipv6 traffic

show ipv6 traffic { tcp | udp | ip | icmp }

Options

N/A

Display all the IPv6 statistics information

tcp

Display TCP packets statistics information

udp

Display UDP packets statistics information

Display IPv6 packets statistics information

icmp

Display ICMP packets statistics information

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display IPv6 packets statistics information

Execution Example

# show ipv6 traffic

tcp6:

0 packets sent

0 data packets (0 bytes)

0 data packets (0 bytes) retransmitted

0 ack-only packets (0 delayed)

0 URG only packets

0 window probe packets

0 window update packets

0 control packets

0 packets received

0 acks (for 0 bytes)

0 duplicate acks

0 acks for unsent data

0 packets (0 bytes) received in-sequence

0 completely duplicate packets (0 bytes)

0 old duplicate packets

0 packets with some dup. data (0 bytes duped)

0 out-of-order packets (0 bytes)

0 packets (0 bytes) of data after window

0 window probes

0 window update packets

0 packets received after close

0 discarded for bad checksums

0 discarded for bad header offset fields

0 discarded because packet too short

(To be continued)

Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands

447

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

(Continued)

0 connection requests

0 connection accepts

0 bad connection attempts

0 connections established (including accepts)

0 connections closed (including 0 drops)

0 embryonic connections dropped

0 segments updated rtt (of 0 attempts)

0 retransmit timeouts

0 connections dropped by rexmit timeout

0 persist timeouts

0 connections timed out in persist

0 keepalive timeouts

0 keepalive probes sent

0 connections dropped by keepalive

0 correct ACK header predictions

0 correct data packet header predictions

0 PCB cache misses

udp6:

0 datagrams received

0 with incomplete header

0 with bad data length field

0 with bad checksum

0 with no checksum

0 dropped due to no socket

0 multicast datagrams dropped due to no socket

0 dropped due to full socket buffers

0 delivered

0 datagrams output

ip6:

24 total packets received

0 with size smaller than minimum

0 with data size < data length

0 with bad options

0 with incorrect version number

0 fragments received

0 fragments dropped (dup or out of space)

0 fragments dropped after timeout

0 fragments that exceeded limit

0 packets reassembled ok

24 packets for this host

0 packets forwarded

0 packets not forwardable

0 redirects sent

17 packets sent from this host

0 packets sent with fabricated ip header

0 output packets dropped due to no bufs, etc.

0 output packets discarded due to no route

0 output datagrams fragmented

0 fragments created

0 datagrams that can't be fragmented

0 packets that violated scope rules

0 multicast packets which we don't join

Input histogram:

ICMP6: 24

Mbuf statistics:

0 one mbuf

24 one ext mbuf

0 two or more ext mbuf

0 packets whose headers are not continuous

0 tunneling packets that can't find gif

0 packets discarded due to too many headers

0 failures of source address selection

source addresses on an outgoing I/F

11 link-locals

source addresses of same scope

11 link-locals

11 forward cache hit

0 forward cache miss

(To be continued)

Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands

448

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

(Continued)

icmp6:

0 calls to icmp6_error

0 errors not generated because old message was icmp6 error or so

0 errors not generated because rate limitation

Output histogram:

echo: 5

echo reply: 5

multicast listener report: 1

neighbor solicitation: 4

neighbor advertisement: 2

0 messages with bad code fields

0 messages < minimum length

0 bad checksums

0 messages with bad length

Input histogram:

echo: 5

echo reply: 15

neighbor solicitation: 2

neighbor advertisement: 2

Histogram of error messages to be generated:

0 no route

0 administratively prohibited

0 beyond scope

0 address unreachable

0 port unreachable

0 packet too big

0 time exceed transit

0 time exceed reassembly

0 erroneous header field

0 unrecognized next header

0 unrecognized option

0 redirect

0 unknown

5 message responses generated

0 messages with too many ND options

Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands

449

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.27.4 IPv6 Packet Statistics Clear Commands

This section explains the commands related to IPv6 packet statistics clearing.

5.27.4.1 clear ipv6 traffic

Function

Clear IPv6 packet statistics information

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

clear ipv6 traffic

Options

N/A

Clear all IPv6 statistics information

Use Mode

Operation mode (user or admin class

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Clear IPv6 packet statistics information

Execution Example

# clear ipv6 traffic

Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands

450

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.28 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and

Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

This section explains the commands related to bridge.

5.28.1 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display

Commands

This section explains the commands related to bridge counter, log, statistics, and status display.

5.28.1.1 show bridge

Function

Display the learning table status and statistics.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show bridge

show bridge summary

Options

N/A

Display the contents of the learning table.

summary

Display the assignment status of the learning table.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the bridge status and statistics.

Execution Example

Display of learning table contents

# show bridge

Codes: D - Dynamic entry, S - Static entry

Address

VLAN Interface

Status

------------------ ----- ------------------ ------

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

00:00:0e:58:a5:dc 100

00:0b:5d:89:00:77 10

00:0b:5d:89:00:77 100

00:e0:00:ad:a9:76 100

08:00:46:6f:19:3b 10

08:00:46:70:84:e4 10

linkaggregation8

self

linkaggregation1

ether7

ether8

1) MAC address registered on the learning table

2) VLAN ID

3) Name of the interface where the entry terminal exists

ether: Ethernet port

linkaggregation: Link aggregation port

self

: Device address

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

451

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

4) Status of learning table

One of the following is displayed.

: Dynamic learning table

: Static learning table

Display of learning table assignment

#show bridge summary

Registered station blocks :

--- (1)

--- (2)

--- (3)

--- (4)

--- (5)

Dynamic entry

Static entry

System entry

Free station blocks

: 16378

1) Number of learning tables currently used

2) Number of dynamically learned tables

3) Number of statically learned tables

4) Number of learned tables used inside the device

5) Number of unused learning tables

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

452

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.28.2 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear

Commands

This section explains the commands related to bridge counter, log, statistics,

and status clearing.

5.28.2.1 clear bridge

Function

Initialize the dynamically learned MAC address from the learning table.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

clear bridge

clear bridge port <portlist>

clear bridge mac <macaddr> <vid>

Options

N/A

Delete all dynamically learned MAC addresses from the learning table.

• port

Specify to delete port by port.

• mac

Specify to delete MAC address by MAC address.

• port list

Specify a list of physical port numbers to initialize learning table.

When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8").

• MAC address

Specify the MAC address to be deleted from the learning table.

(It must be in the xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format, where "xx" is a 2-digit hexadecimal value.)

<vid>

• VLAN ID

Specify a decimal VLAN ID from 1 to 4094.

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Caution

Delete dynamically learned MAC address from the learning table.

• The address statically learned by the "vlan forward" command definition is not

initialized.

• If a member port of link aggregation is specified, all learning addresses of the link

aggregation are deleted.

Execution Example

# clear bridge

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

453

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.28.3 Spanning Tree Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status

Display Commands

This section explains the commands related to spanning tree counter, log, statistics, and status display.

5.28.3.1 show spanning-tree

Function

Display the spanning tree information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show spanning-tree

show spanning-tree root

show spanning-tree bridge

show spanning-tree active

show spanning-tree interface <interface_name>

show spanning-tree detail

Options

N/A

Display all spanning tree information briefly.

root

Display the spanning tree information of the root bridge only.

bridge

Display the spanning tree bridge information of the device only.

active

Display the spanning tree information of the active interface only.

interface <interface_name>

Display the spanning tree information of the specified interface only.

detail

Display all spanning tree information in detail.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the status of the spanning tree function.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

454

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution Example

Display of all spanning tree information in a simple format

# show spanning-tree

Spanning tree enabled protocol IEEE

Root ID

Priority

Address

Cost

32768

00:00:e2:08:57:89

200000

---(1)

---(2)

---(3)

---(4)

Port

1 (eth1)

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

---------------- -------------- --------------------

(5)

(6)

(7)

Bridge ID Priority

Address

32768

00:0b:5d:89:00:aa

---(8)

---(9)

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

---------------- -------------- --------------------

(10)

BPDU Mode off

-------------

(13)

(11)

(12)

STP Mode stp

------------

(14)

Interface

Port ID Cost

Status(Role)

Designated Bridge ID

Sent

Received

--------------- -------- ----------- ----------------------- ----------

eth1

----

(15)

128.1

-----

(16)

128.1

-----

(20)

128.2

-----

(16)

128.2

-----

(20)

200000* Forwarding(Root)

------- -----------------

---

(19)

---

(23)

---

(19)

---

(23)

(17)

(18)

0 32768 00:00:e2:08:57:89

---- -----------------------

(21)

(22)

eth2

----

(15)

200000* Forwarding(Designated)

------- ----------------------

(17)

(18)

200000 32768 00:0b:5d:89:00:aa

------- -----------------------

(21)

(22)

1) Priority of root bridge

The priority of the bridge identified by the root bridge ID is displayed.

2) MAC address of the root bridge

The MAC address identified by the root bridge ID is displayed.

3) Root path cost

The path cost to the root bridge is displayed.

4) Port number and interface name

The port number and the interface name are displayed.

If this device operates as the root bridge, the following is displayed.

Port

0 (This bridge is the root)

5) Configuration BPDU send interval

The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.

6) Maximum wait time

The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.

7) Maximum forwarding delay time

The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.

8) Bridge priority of local device

The bridge priority used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.

9) MAC address of local device

The MAC address used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

455

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

10) Configuration BPDU send interval

The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.

11) Maximum wait time

The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.

12) Maximum forwarding delay time

The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.

13) BPDU forwarding function

The BPDU forwarding function (on or off) defined on this device is displayed.

14) STP operation mode

The STP operation mode (disable/stp/rstp/mstp) of this device is displayed.

15) Interface name

The interface name is displayed.

16) Port ID

The Port ID is displayed.

17) Port path cost

The path cost of the port is displayed (the cost value is followed by an asterisk

(*) if calculated automatically).

18) Port status and roles

One of the following is displayed for the port status.

Disabled

: The STP is disabled.

Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when

RSTP or MSTP is active).

Blocking

Listening

Learning

: The port is in the blocking state.

: The port is in the listening state.

: The port is in the learning state.

Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.

One of the following is displayed for the port role.

Disabled

Root

: The STP is disabled.

: Root port

Designated Designated port

Blocking

Alternate

: Blocking port

: Alternate port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is

active.)

Backup

: Backup port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)

19) Number of BPDU send times

The number of BPDU send times (the total value of all BPDU types) is

displayed.

20) Port ID of designated bridge

The port ID of the designated bridge is displayed.

21) Designated path cost of configuration BPDU

The designated path cost of the configuration BPDU is displayed.

22) Designated bridge ID

The designated bridge ID (the priority and MAC address) is displayed.

23) Number of BPDU receive times

The number of BPDU receive times (the total value of all BPDU types) is

displayed.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

456

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Display of spanning tree information of the root bridge

# show spanning-tree root

Root ID

Priority

Address

Cost

32768

00:00:e2:08:57:89

200000

---(1)

---(2)

---(3)

---(4)

Port

1 (eth1)

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

---------------- -------------- --------------------

(5)

(6)

(7)

1) Bridge priority

The priority of the root bridge is displayed.

2) MAC address

The MAC address of the root bridge is displayed.

3) Root path cost

The path cost to the root bridge is displayed.

4) Root port

The interface name of the root port is displayed.

If this device operates as the root bridge, the following is displayed.

Port

0 (This bridge is the root)

5) Configuration BPDU send interval

The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.

6) Maximum wait time (in seconds)

The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.

7) Maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds)

The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.

Display of spanning tree bridge information of this device

# show spanning-tree bridge

Bridge ID Priority

Address

32768

00:0b:5d:89:00:aa

---(1)

---(2)

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

---------------- -------------- --------------------

(3)

BPDU Mode off

-------------

(6)

(4)

(5)

STP Mode stp

------------

(7)

1) Bridge priority

The bridge priority used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.

2) MAC address

The MAC address used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.

3) Configuration BPDU send interval

The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.

4) Maximum wait time

The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.

5) Maximum forwarding delay time

The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

457

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

6) BPDU forwarding function

The BPDU forwarding function (on or off) defined on this device is displayed.

7) STP operation mode

The STP operation mode (disable/stp/rstp/mstp) of this device is displayed.

Display of only spanning tree information of the active interface

# show spanning-tree interface active

eth1 is Forwarding Port Version 0(STP)

------------------ -------------------

(1)

(2)

Port path cost 200000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.1

--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------

(3)

Port role is Root

-----------------

(6)

(4)

(5)

Designated root has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89

---------------------------------- -------------------------

(7)

(8)

Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89

------------------------------------ -------------------------

(9)

(10)

Designated port id is 128.1, Designated path cost 0

--------------------------- -----------------------

(11)

(12)

BPDU statistics:

Config BPDU: sent 3, sent error 0

------ ------------

(13)

(14)

received 112, discarded 0

------------- -----------

(15)

(16)

TCN BPDU:

sent 2, sent error 0

------ ------------

(17)

(18)

received 0, discarded 0

---------- -----------

(19)

(20)

Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0

-------------- -------------

(21)

(22)

bad BPDU type 0

---------------

(23)

eth2 is Forwarding Port Version 0(STP)

------------------ -------------------

(1)

(2)

Port path cost 200000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.2

--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------

(3)

(4)

(5)

Port role is Designated

-----------------------

(6)

Designated root has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89

---------------------------------- -------------------------

(7)

(8)

Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:aa

------------------------------------ -------------------------

(9)

(10)

Designated port id is 128.2, Designated path cost 200000

--------------------------- ---------------------------

(11)

(12)

(To be continued)

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

458

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

(Continued)

BPDU statistics:

Config BPDU: sent 292, sent error 0

--------- ------------

(13)

(14)

received 0, discarded 0

----------- -----------

(15)

(16)

TCN BPDU:

sent 0, sent error 0

------ ------------

(17)

(18)

received 0, discarded 0

---------- -----------

(19)

(20)

Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0

-------------- -------------

(21)

(22)

bad BPDU type 0

---------------

(23)

1) Interface name and port status

One of the following is displayed for the port status.

Disabled : The STP is disabled.

Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when

RSTP or MSTP is active).

Blocking

Listening

Learning

: The port is in the blocking state.

: The port is in the listening state.

: The port is in the learning state.

Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.

2) STP version of port

One of the following is displayed for the STP version.

- (OFF)

: STP unused port

: 802.1d STP

0 (STP)

2 (RSTP)

3 (MSTP)

: 802.1w RSTP

: 802.1s MSTP

3) Port path cost

The path cost of the relevant port is displayed.

4) Port priority

The priority of the relevant port is displayed.

5) Port ID

The port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.

6) Port role

One of the following is displayed for the port role.

Disabled

Root

: The STP is disabled.

: Root port

Designated : Designated port

Blocking

Alternate

Backup

: Blocking port

: Alternate port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)

: Backup port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)

7) Priority of root bridge

The priority of the root bridge is displayed.

8) MAC address of root bridge

The MAC address of the root bridge is displayed.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

459

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

9) Designated bridge priority

The priority of the designated bridge is displayed.

10) MAC address of designated bridge

The MAC address of the designated bridge is displayed.

11) Designated port ID

The designated port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.

12) Designated port path cost

The path cost of the designated port is displayed.

13) Number of configuration BPDU send times

The number of configuration BPDU send times is displayed.

14) Number of configuration BPDU send error times

The number of configuration BPDU send error times is displayed.

15) Number of configuration BPDU receive times

The number of configuration BPDU receive times is displayed.

16) Number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times

The number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.

17) Number of TCN BPDU send times

The number of TCN BPDU send times is displayed.

18) Number of TCN BPDU send error times

The number of TCN BPDU send error times is displayed.

19) Number of TCN BPDU receive times

The number of TCN BPDU receive times is displayed.

20) Number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times

The number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.

21) Number of protocol version error times

The number of discarding times due to protocol version error is displayed.

22) Number of version error times

The number of discarding times due to version error is displayed.

23) Number of BPDU type error times

The number of discarding times due to BPDU type error is displayed.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

460

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Display of spanning tree information of the specified interface

# show spanning-tree interface 1

eth1 is Forwarding Port Version 0(STP)

------------------ -------------------

(1)

(2)

Port path cost 200000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.1

--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------

(3)

Port role is Root

-----------------

(6)

(4)

(5)

Designated root has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89

---------------------------------- -------------------------

(7)

(8)

Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89

------------------------------------ -------------------------

(9)

(10)

Designated port id is 128.1, Designated path cost 0

--------------------------- -----------------------

(11)

(12)

BPDU statistics:

Config BPDU: sent 3, sent error 0

------ ------------

(13)

(14)

received 112, discarded 0

------------- -----------

(15)

(16)

TCN BPDU:

sent 2, sent error 0

------ ------------

(17)

(18)

received 0, discarded 0

---------- -----------

(19)

(20)

Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0

-------------- -------------

(21)

(22)

bad BPDU type 0

---------------

(23)

1) Interface name and port status

One of the following is displayed for the port status.

Disabled : The STP is disabled.

Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when

RSTP or MSTP is active).

Blocking

Listening

Learning

: The port is in the blocking state.

: The port is in the listening state.

: The port is in the learning state.

Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.

2) STP version of port

One of the following is displayed for the STP version.

- (OFF)

: STP unused port

: 802.1d STP

0 (STP)

2 (RSTP)

3 (MSTP)

: 802.1w RSTP

: 802.1s MSTP

3) Port path cost

The path cost of the relevant port is displayed.

4) Port priority

The priority of the relevant port is displayed.

5) Port ID

The port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

461

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

6) Port role

One of the following is displayed for the port role.

Disabled

Root

: The STP is disabled.

: Root port

Designated : Designated port

Blocking

Alternate

Backup

: Blocking port

: Alternate port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)

: Backup port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)

7) Priority of root bridge

The priority of the root bridge is displayed.

8) MAC address of root bridge

The MAC address of the root bridge is displayed.

9) Designated bridge priority

The priority of the designated bridge is displayed.

10) MAC address of designated bridge

The MAC address of the designated bridge is displayed.

11) Designated port ID

The designated port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.

12) Designated port path cost

The path cost of the designated port is displayed.

13) Number of configuration BPDU send times

The number of configuration BPDU send times is displayed.

14) Number of configuration BPDU send error times

The number of configuration BPDU send error times is displayed.

15) Number of configuration BPDU receive times

The number of configuration BPDU receive times is displayed.

16) Number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times

The number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.

17) Number of TCN BPDU send times

The number of TCN BPDU send times is displayed.

18) Number of TCN BPDU send error times

The number of TCN BPDU send error times is displayed.

19) Number of TCN BPDU receive times

The number of TCN BPDU receive times is displayed.

20) Number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times

The number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.

21) Number of protocol version error times

The number of discarding times due to protocol version error is displayed.

22) Number of version error times

The number of discarding times due to version error is displayed.

23) Number of BPDU type error times

The number of discarding times due to BPDU type error is displayed.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

462

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

To display all spanning tree information in detail

# show spanning-tree detail

IEEE compatible spanning tree protocol is being executed.

Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:aa

------------------------------------ -------------------------

(1)

(2)

Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15

----------------------- ---------- ----------------

(3)

(4)

(5)

Current root has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89

------------------------------- -------------------------

(6)

(7)

Root port is eth1, cost of root path is 200000

----------------- ---------------------------

(8)

(9)

STP Mode stp, BPDU Mode off

------------ -------------

(38)

(39)

Topology changes 2 Detected date 2011/01/01(Sat) 05:30:28

------------------ --------------------------------------

(33)

(34)

(time since 05:30:28)

-------------------

(35)

eth1 is Forwarding Port Version 0(STP) STP-Compatible(-)

------------------ ------------------- -----------------

(10)

(11)

(36)

Port path cost 200000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.1

--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------

(12)

Port role is Root

-----------------

(15)

(13)

(14)

Designated root has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89

---------------------------------- -------------------------

(16)

(17)

Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89

------------------------------------ -------------------------

(18)

(19)

Designated port id is 128.1, Designated path cost 0

--------------------------- -----------------------

(20)

(21)

BPDU statistics:

Config BPDU: sent 3, sent error 0

------ ------------

(22)

(23)

received 901, discarded 0

------------- -----------

(24)

(25)

TCN BPDU:

sent 0, sent error 0

------ ------------

(26)

(27)

received 0, discarded 0

---------- -----------

(28)

(29)

Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0

-------------- -------------

(30)

(31)

bad BPDU type 0

---------------

(32)

(To be continued)

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

463

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

(Continued)

Other statistics:

changed to forwarding state 1

---

(37)

eth2 is Forwarding Port Version 0(STP) STP-Compatible(-)

------------------ ------------------- -----------------

(10)

(11)

(36)

Port path cost 200000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.2

--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------

(12)

(13)

(14)

Port role is Designated

-----------------------

(15)

Designated root has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89

---------------------------------- -------------------------

(16)

(17)

Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:aa

------------------------------------ -------------------------

(18)

(19)

Designated port id is 128.2, Designated path cost 20000

--------------------------- --------------------------

(20)

(21)

BPDU statistics:

Config BPDU: sent 902, sent error 0

--------- ------------

(22)

(23)

received 0, discarded 0

------------- -----------

(24)

(25)

TCN BPDU:

sent 0, sent error 0

------ ------------

(26)

(27)

received 0, discarded 0

---------- -----------

(28)

(29)

Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0

-------------- -------------

(30)

(31)

bad BPDU type 0

---------------

(32)

Other statistics:

Changed to forwarding state 1

---

(37)

1) Bridge priority

The bridge priority used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.

2) MAC address

The MAC address used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.

3) Configuration BPDU send interval

The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.

4) Maximum wait time

The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.

5) Maximum forwarding delay time

The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.

6) Priority of root bridge

The priority of the root bridge is displayed.

7) MAC address of root bridge

The MAC address of the root bridge is displayed.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

464

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

8) Root port

The interface name of the root port is displayed.

If this device operates as the root bridge, the root port (Item (8)) and root path

cost (Item (9)) are not displayed. Only the following message is displayed.

This bridge is the root

9) Root path cost

The path cost to the root bridge is displayed.

10) Interface name and port status

One of the following is displayed for the port status.

Disabled

: The STP is disabled.

Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when

RSTP or MSTP is active).

Blocking

Listening

Learning

: The port is in the blocking state.

: The port is in the listening state.

: The port is in the learning state.

Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.

11) STP version of port

One of the following is displayed for the STP version.

- (OFF)

: STP unused port

: 802.1d STP

0 (STP)

2 (RSTP)

3 (MSTP)

: 802.1w RSTP

: 802.1s MSTP

12) Port path cost

The path cost of the relevant port is displayed.

13) Port priority

The priority of the relevant port is displayed.

14) Port ID

The port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.

15) Port role

One of the following is displayed for the port role.

Disabled

Root

: The STP is disabled.

: Root port

Designated : Designated port

Blocking

Alternate

Backup

: Blocking port

: Alternate port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)

: Backup port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)

16) Priority of root bridge

The priority of the root bridge is displayed.

17) MAC address of root bridge

The MAC address of the root bridge is displayed.

18) Designated bridge priority

The priority of the designated bridge is displayed.

19) MAC address of designated bridge

The MAC address of the designated bridge is displayed.

20) Designated port ID

The designated port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

465

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

21) Designated port path cost

The path cost of the designated port is displayed.

22) Number of configuration BPDU send times

The number of configuration BPDU send times is displayed.

23) Number of configuration BPDU send error times

The number of configuration BPDU send error times is displayed.

24) Number of configuration BPDU receive times

The number of configuration BPDU receive times is displayed.

25) Number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times

The number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.

26) Number of TCN BPDU send times

The number of TCN BPDU send times is displayed.

27) Number of TCN BPDU send error times

The number of TCN BPDU send error times is displayed.

28) Number of TCN BPDU receive times

The number of TCN BPDU receive times is displayed.

29) Number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times

The number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.

30) Number of protocol version error times

The number of discarding times due to protocol version error is displayed.

31) Number of version error times

The number of discarding times due to version error is displayed.

32) Number of BPDU type error times

The number of discarding times due to BPDU type error is displayed.

33) Number of topology change detection times

The number of topology change detection times is displayed.

34) Topology change detection time

The clock time when the topology change was lastly detected.

35) Elapsed time after topology change detection

The elapsed time after the topology change was lastly detected.

36) STP (IEEE802.1D) compatibility mode

One of the following is displayed for the STP (IEEE802.1D) compatible mode

operation of the port.

STP : The port is active in the STP compatible mode when the port version is

RSTP or MSTP.

: The port is not active in the compatible mode (but operating in the port's

operation version).

37) Number of forwarding status transition times

The number of times when the port was changed to the forwarding state is

displayed.

38) STP operation mode

The STP operation mode (disable/stp/rstp/mstp) of this device is displayed.

39) BPDU forwarding function

The BPDU forwarding function (on or off) defined on this device is displayed.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

466

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.28.3.2 show spanning-tree instance

Function

Display the spanning tree information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show spanning-tree instance <instance_id> [detail]

Options

<instance_id>

Display the spanning tree information of the specified instance only.

detail

Display the spanning tree information of the specified instance in detail.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the status of the MSTP spanning tree function.

Execution Example

Display of spanning tree information of instance 0

# show spanning-tree instance 0

MSTP Configuration Information

Region Name : region1 Revision Level : 0

--------------------- ------------------

(1)

Instance ID 0

-------------

(3)

(2)

Vlans 20-30

------------------------

(4)

Root ID

Priority

Address

Cost

32768

00:00:e2:08:57:89

200000

---(5)

---(6)

---(7)

---(8)

Port

1 (eth1)

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

---------------- -------------- --------------------

(9)

(10)

(11)

Remaining Hops 20

-----------------

(12)

Bridge ID

Priority

Address

32768

00:0b:5d:89:00:aa

---(13)

---(14)

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

---------------- -------------- --------------------

(15)

Hop count 20

-------------

(18)

(16)

(17)

BPDU Mode off

-------------

(19)

STP Mode mstp

-------------

(20)

(To be continued)

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

467

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

(Continued)

Interface

Port ID Cost

Status(Role)

Sent

Designated Bridge ID

Received

--------------- -------- ----------- ----------------------- ----------

eth1

----

(21)

128.1

-----

(22)

128.1

-----

(26)

128.2

128.3

0.0

128.4

128.5

128.4

128.6

0.0

128.7

0.0

128.8

0.0

128.9

0.0

128.10

0.0

128.11

0.0

128.12

0.0

128.13

128.2

128.14

0.0

128.15

0.0

20000* Forwarding(Root)

------- -----------------

137

---

(25)

137

---

(29)

137

135

(23)

(24)

0 0 00:00:e2:08:57:89

---- -----------------------

(27)

(28)

eth2

20000* Forwarding(Designated)

0 0 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb

0 Discarding(Disabled)

0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00

20000* Forwarding(Designated)

0 0 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb

20000* Discarding(Backup)

0 0 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb

0 Discarding(Disabled)

0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00

0 Discarding(Disabled)

0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00

0 Discarding(Disabled)

0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00

0 Discarding(Disabled)

0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00

0 Discarding(Disabled)

0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00

0 Discarding(Disabled)

0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00

0 Discarding(Disabled)

0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00

20000* Discarding(Backup)

0 0 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb

0 Discarding(Disabled)

0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00

0 Discarding(Disabled)

0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00

0 Discarding(Disabled)

0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00

eth3

eth4

137

136

eth5

eth6

eth7

eth8

eth9

eth10

eth11

eth12

eth13

eth14

eth15

eth16

138

137

128.16

0.0

1) Region Name

The region name is displayed.

2) Revision Level

The revision level is displayed.

3) Instance ID

The instance ID is displayed.

4) Vlans

The VLAN ID belonging to the instance is displayed.

5) Bridge priority

The priority of MSTI root bridge is displayed.

6) MAC address

The MAC address of MSTI root bridge is displayed.

7) Root path cost

The path cost to the MSTI root bridge is displayed.

8) Root port

The interface name of the root port is displayed.

9) Configuration BPDU send interval

The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

468

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

10) Maximum wait time (in seconds)

The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.

11) Maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds)

The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.

12) Remaining hop count from root bridge

The remaining hop count from the root bridge is displayed.

13) Bridge priority

The bridge priority used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.

14) MAC address

The MAC address used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.

15) Configuration BPDU send interval

The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.

16) Maximum wait time

The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.

17) Maximum forwarding delay time

The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.

18) Hop count of maximum forwarding delay

The maximum forwarding delay time is displayed by hop counting.

19) BPDU forwarding function

The BPDU forwarding function (on or off) defined on this device is displayed.

20) STP operation mode

The STP operation mode (disable/stp/rstp/mstp) of this device is displayed.

21) Interface name

The interface name is displayed.

22) Port ID

The Port ID is displayed.

23) Port path cost

The path cost of the port is displayed (the cost value is followed by an asterisk

(*) if calculated automatically).

24) Port status and roles

One of the following is displayed for the port status.

Disabled

: The STP is disabled.

Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when

RSTP or MSTP is active).

Blocking

Listening

Learning

: The port is in the blocking state.

: The port is in the listening state.

: The port is in the learning state.

Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.

One of the following is displayed for the port role.

: The STP is disabled.

: Root port

Disabled

Root

Designated : Designated port

Blocking

Alternate

Backup

: Blocking port

: Backup port

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

469

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

25) Number of BPDU send times

The number of BPDU send times (the total value of all BPDU types) is

displayed.

26) Port ID of designated bridge

The port ID of the designated bridge is displayed.

27) Designated path cost of configuration BPDU

The designated path cost of the configuration BPDU is displayed.

28) Designated bridge ID

The designated bridge ID (the priority and MAC address) is displayed.

29) Number of BPDU receive times

The number of BPDU receive times (the total value of all BPDU types) is

displayed.

Display of spanning tree information of the specified instance other than

instance 0

# show spanning-tree instance 1

MSTP Configuration Information

Region Name : region1 Revision Level : 0

Instance ID 1

Vlans 120-130

Root ID

Priority

Address

Cost

32768

00:00:e2:08:57:89

200000

Port

1 (eth1)

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

Remaining Hops 20

Bridge ID

Priority

Address

32768

00:0b:5d:89:00:aa

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

Hop count 20

BPDU Mode off

STP Mode mstp

Interface

Port ID Cost

Status(Role)

Enable

Designated Bridge ID

--------------- -------- ----------- ----------------------- ----------

eth1

----

(1)

128.1

-----

(2)

20000* Forwarding(Root)

------- -----------------

---

(5)

(3)

(4)

128.1

-----

(6)

0 0 00:00:e2:08:57:89

---- -----------------------

(7) (8)

eth2

eth4

eth5

eth8

eth13

128.2

128.4

128.5

128.4

128.8

0.0

20000* Forwarding(Designated)

0 32769 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb

20000* Forwarding(Designated)

0 32769 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb

20000* Discarding(Backup)

0 32769 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb

0 Discarding(Disabled)

0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00

20000* Discarding(Backup)

0 32769 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb

128.13

128.2

1) Interface name

Only the active instances are displayed.

2) Port ID of each instance

The port ID of the specified instance is displayed.

3) Port path cost of each instance

The path cost of the port of the specified instance is displayed (the cost value is

followed by an asterisk (*) if calculated automatically).

4) Port status and role of the specified instance

One of the following is displayed for the port status.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

470

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Disabled

: The STP is disabled.

Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when

RSTP or MSTP is active).

Blocking

Listening

Learning

: The port is in the blocking state.

: The port is in the listening state.

: The port is in the learning state.

Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.

One of the following is displayed for the port role.

: The STP is disabled.

: Root port

Disabled

Root

Designated : Designated port

Blocking

Alternate

Backup

: Blocking port

: Master port

: Backup port

5) Port operation status

The operation status of the port is displayed (an asterisk (*) is displayed when

enabled).

6) Port ID of designated bridge

The port ID of the designated bridge of the specified instance is displayed.

7) Designated path cost of BPDU

The designated path cost of BPDU of the specified instance is displayed.

8) Designated bridge ID

The designated bridge ID of the specified instance (the priority and MAC

address) is displayed.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

471

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Display of detailed spanning tree information of instance 0

# show spanning-tree instance 0 detail

MSTP Configuration Information

Region Name : region1 Revision Level : 0

Instance ID 1

Vlans 20-30

Root ID

Priority

Address

Cost

32768

00:00:e2:08:57:89

200000

Port

1 (eth1)

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

Remaining Hops 20

Bridge ID

Priority

Address

32768

00:0b:5d:89:00:aa

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

Hop count 20

BPDU Mode off

STP Mode mstp

Topology changes 2 Detected date 2011/01/01(Sat) 05:30:28

------------------ --------------------------------------

(27)

(28)

(time since 05:30:28)

--------------------

(29)

eth1 is Forwarding Port Version 3(MSTP) STP-Compatible(-) Boundary(*)

------------------ -------------------- ----------------- ----------

(1)

(2)

(30)

(31)

Port path cost 20000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.2

--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------

(3)

(4)

(5)

Port role is Designated

-----------------------

(6)

Designated root has priority 0, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb

------------------------------ -------------------------

(7)

(8)

Designated bridge has priority 0, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb

-------------------------------- -------------------------

(9)

(10)

Designated port is 128.2, Designated path cost 0

------------------------- ------------------------

(11)

(12)

Port info type is Mine

---- (13)

Remaining Hops 20

--- (14)

This port is external region

--------------- (15)

(To be continued)

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

472

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

(Continued)

BPDU statistics:

Config BPDU: sent 141, sent error 0

-------- ------------

(16)

(17)

received 138, discarded 1

------------ -----------

(18)

(19)

TCN BPDU:

sent 0, sent error 0

------ ------------

(20)

(21)

received 0, discarded 0

---------- -----------

(22)

(23)

Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0

-------------- -------------

(24)

(25)

bad BPDU type 0

---------------

(26)

Other statistics:

changed to forwarding state 1

---

(32)

eth2 is Forwarding Port Version 3(MSTP) STP-Compatible(-) Boundary(-)

Port path cost 20000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.2

Port role is Designated

Designated root has priority 0, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb

Designated bridge has priority 0, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb

Designated port is 128.2, Designated path cost 0

Port info type is Mine

Remaining Hops 20

This port is internal region

BPDU statistics:

Config BPDU: sent 141, sent error 0

received 138, discarded 1

TCN BPDU:

sent 0, sent error 0

received 0, discarded 0

Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0

bad BPDU type 0

Other statistics:

Changed to forwarding state 1

1) Interface name and port status

One of the following is displayed for the port status.

Disabled

: The STP is disabled.

Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when

RSTP or MSTP is active).

Blocking

Listening

Learning

: The port is in the blocking state.

: The port is in the listening state.

: The port is in the learning state.

Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.

2) STP version of port

One of the following is displayed for the STP version.

- (OFF)

: STP unused port

: 802.1d STP

0 (STP)

2 (RSTP)

3 (MSTP)

: 802.1w RSTP

: 802.1s MSTP

3) Port path cost

The path cost of the relevant port is displayed.

4) Port priority

The priority of the relevant port is displayed.

5) Port ID

The port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

473

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

6) Port role

One of the following is displayed for the port role.

Disabled

Root

: The STP is disabled.

: Root port

Designated : Designated port

Blocking

Alternate

Backup

: Blocking port

: Master port

: Backup port

7) Priority of root bridge

The priority of the root bridge is displayed.

8) MAC address of root bridge

The MAC address of the root bridge is displayed.

9) Designated bridge priority

The priority of the designated bridge is displayed.

10) MAC address of designated bridge

The MAC address of the designated bridge is displayed.

11) Designated port ID

The designated port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.

12) Designated port path cost

The path cost of the designated port is displayed.

13) Port processing type

One of the following is displayed for the port processing type to be set by the

sent or received BPDU.

Disabled: Disabled port

Aged

Mine

: The MSTP BPDU receive timeout detection port

: MSTP BPDU packets sending port considered having

high port priority

Received

Unknown

: MSTP BPDU packets receiving port considered having

low port priority

: The port in the processing state other than above

14) Remaining hop count from root bridge

The remaining hop count from the root bridge is displayed.

15) MST region status

If the port is in a state other than "disabled", the connection status of MST region

is displayed.

internal region : Indicates the connection between the same region.

external region : Indicates the connection between different regions.

16) Number of configuration BPDU send times

The number of configuration BPDU send times is displayed.

17) Number of configuration BPDU send error times

The number of configuration BPDU send error times is displayed.

18) Number of configuration BPDU receive times

The number of configuration BPDU receive times is displayed.

19) Number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times

The number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

474

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

20) Number of TCN BPDU send times

The number of TCN BPDU send times is displayed.

21) Number of TCN BPDU send error times

The number of TCN BPDU send error times is displayed.

22) Number of TCN BPDU receive times

The number of TCN BPDU receive times is displayed.

23) Number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times

The number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.

24) Number of protocol version error times

The number of discarding times due to protocol version error is displayed.

25) Number of version error times

The number of discarding times due to version error is displayed.

26) Number of BPDU type error times

The number of discarding times due to BPDU type error is displayed.

27) Number of topology change detection times

The number of topology change detection times is displayed.

28) Topology change detection time

The clock time when the topology change was lastly detected.

29) Elapsed time after topology change detection

The elapsed time after the topology change was lastly detected.

30) STP (IEEE802.1D) compatibility mode

One of the following is displayed for the STP (IEEE802.1D) compatible mode

operation of the port.

STP : The port is active in the STP compatible mode when the port version is

RSTP or MSTP.

: The port is not active in the compatible mode (but operating in the port's

operation version).

31) Boundary port status

The boundary port status of the region is displayed as follows.

However, if the port role at the opposite device is an alternate or backup, that

port may never receive the "BPDU". In such cases, the boundary port status is

not displayed.

: Indicates that the port is active as the boundary port.

: Indicates that the port is NOT active as the boundary port.

32) Number of forwarding status transition times

The number of times when the port was changed to the forwarding state is

displayed.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

475

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Display of detailed spanning tree information of the specified instance

other than instance 0

# show spanning-tree instance 1 detail

MSTP Configuration Information

Region Name : region1 Revision Level : 0

Instance ID 1

Vlans 120-130

Root ID

Priority

Address

Cost

32768

00:00:e2:08:57:89

200000

Port

1 (eth1)

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

Remaining Hops 20

Bridge ID

Priority

Address

32768

00:0b:5d:89:00:aa

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

Hop count 20

BPDU Mode off

STP Mode mstp

Topology changes 2 Detected date 2011/01/01(Sat) 05:30:28

------------------ --------------------------------------

(15)

(16)

(time since 05:30:28)

--------------------

(17)

eth2 is Forwarding Port Version 3(MSTP)

------------------ --------------------

(1)

(2)

Port path cost 20000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.2

--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------

(3)

(4)

(5)

Port role is Designated

-----------------------

(6)

Designated root has priority 40961, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb

---------------------------------- -------------------------

(7)

(8)

Designated bridge has priority 40961, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb

------------------------------------ -------------------------

(9)

(10)

Designated port is 128.2, Designated path cost 0

------------------------- ------------------------

(11)

(12)

Port info type is Mine

-----

(13)

Remaining Hops 20

(14)

Other statistics:

changed to forwarding state 1

---

(18)

eth8 is Forwarding Port Version 3(MSTP)

Port path cost 20000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.8

Port role is Designated

Designated root has priority 40961, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb

Designated bridge has priority 40961, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb

Designated port is 128.8, Designated path cost 0

Port info type is Mine

Remaining Hops 20

Other statistics:

changed to forwarding state 1

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

476

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

1) Interface name and port status of the specified instance

One of the following is displayed for the port status of the specified instance.

Disabled : The STP is disabled.

Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when

RSTP or MSTP is active).

Blocking

Listening

Learning

: The port is in the blocking state.

: The port is in the listening state.

: The port is in the learning state.

Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.

2) STP version of port

One of the following is displayed for the STP version.

- (OFF)

: STP unused port

: 802.1d STP

0 (STP)

2 (RSTP)

3 (MSTP)

: 802.1w RSTP

: 802.1s MSTP

3) Port path cost

The path cost of the relevant port of the specified instance is displayed.

4) Port priority

The priority of the relevant port of the specified instance is displayed.

5) Port ID

The port ID of the specified instance (the port priority and port number) is

displayed.

6) Port role

One of the following is displayed for the port role of the specified instance.

Disabled

Root

: The STP is disabled.

: Root port

Designated : Designated port

Blocking

Alternate

Backup

Master

: Blocking port

: Master port

: Backup port

: Master port

7) Priority of root bridge

The priority of root bridge of the specified instance is displayed.

8) MAC address of root bridge

The MAC address of root bridge of the specified instance is displayed.

9) Designated bridge priority

The priority of the designated bridge of the specified instance is displayed.

10) MAC address of designated bridge

The MAC address of the designated bridge of the specified instance is

displayed.

11) Designated port ID

The designated port ID of the specified instance (the port priority and port

number) is displayed.

12) Designated port path cost

The path cost of the designated port of the specified instance is displayed.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

477

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

13) Port processing type of the specified instance

One of the following is displayed for the port processing type to be set by the

sent or received BPDU.

Disabled

Aged

: Disabled port

: The MSTP BPDU receive timeout detection port

: MSTP BPDU packets sending port considered having high port

priority

Mine

Received

Unknown

: MSTP BPDU packets receiving port considered having low port

priority

: The port in the processing state other than above

14) Remaining hop count from root bridge

The remaining hop count from the root bridge of the specified instance is

displayed.

15) Number of topology change detection times

The number of topology change detection times is displayed.

16) Topology change detection time

The clock time when the topology change was lastly detected.

17) Elapsed time after topology change detection

The elapsed time after the topology change was lastly detected.

18) Number of forwarding status transition times

The number of times when the port was changed to the forwarding state is

displayed.

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

478

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.28.4 Spanning Tree Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear

Commands

This section explains the commands related to spanning tree counter, log, statistics, and status clearing.

5.28.4.1 clear spanning-tree statistics

Function

Clear the statistics relating to the spanning tree.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

clear spanning-tree statistics

N/A

Options

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Clear the spanning tree related statistics.

Execution Example

# clear spanning-tree statistics

Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

479

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.29 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and

Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

This section explains about commands related to LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands.

5.29.1 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display

Commands

This section explains about commands related to LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands.

5.29.1.1 show lldp

Function

Display LLDP Information

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show lldp [port <portlist>] [detail]

Options

N/A

Disokay all LLDP information of the ports which LLDP function is enabled on

port <portlist>

• Port list

Specify the port list to display LLDP information

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-).

(Example: "1-8")

detail

Display detailed LLDP information

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display LLDP information

LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

480

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution Example

# show lldp

Send Interval Time

Send Hold Count

Send Delay

Reinit Delay

Notification Interval Time

: 30 seconds

: 4 times

: 2 seconds

: 5 seconds

---(1)

---(2)

---(3)

---(4)

---(5)

Port Mode

---- ------- ----

Size

Info P N D C A

--------------

(9)

P p N I

-------

(10)

M P L F

-------

(11)

(6)

(7)

enable 274

receive 0

(8)

(12)

P N D C A

P p N I

M P L F

send

179

P - D C A

P p N -

M - - -

Entry:3 ---(30)

# show lldp port 1,8 detail

Send Interval Time

Send Hold Count

Send Delay

Reinit Delay

: 30 seconds

: 4 times

: 2 seconds

: 5 seconds

---(1)

---(2)

---(3)

---(4)

---(5)

Notification Interval Time

[PORT 1]

---(6)

---(7)

---(8)

---(13)

---(14)

---(15)

---(16)

---(17)

Configuration Mode

Send LLDPDU size

Chassis ID

: enable

: 274 octets

: subtype=4(MAC) info=00:0b:5d:fd:05:b2

: subtype=5(ifName) info="1"

: 120 seconds

Port ID

Time To Live(TTL)

Port Description

System Name

: info="EthernetPort(ether1)"

: info=""

System Description

JST

: info="'SBAX2' '1.2 V01.00' 'Wed Feb 13 15:23:07

2008'"

---(18)

---(19)

System Capabilities

enabled=Bridge

Management Address

: info=Bridge,Router

: address subtype=1(IPv4) info=192.168.2.1 ---(20)

interface number subtype=2(ifIndex) info=3

oid=""

Management Address

: address subtype=6(MAC) info=00:0b:5d:fd:05:b3

interface number subtype=2(ifIndex) info=7001

oid=""

IEEE802.1

Port VLAN ID

Port And Protocol VLAN ID

: PVID=10

: flags=supported,enabled

PPVID=20

---(21)

---(22)

Port And Protocol VLAN ID : flags=supported,enabled

PPVID=21

VLAN Name

IEEE802.3

: VID=10

name="portvlan10"

: VID=20

name="protocolvlan20"

: VID=21

name="protocolvlan21"

: VID=30

name="taggedvlan30"

---(23)

MAC/PHY Configuration/Status : support/status=supported,enabled ---(25)

capability=1(10BASE-T half duplex mode),

2(10BASE-T full duplex mode),

4(100BASE-TX half duplex mode),

5(100BASE-TX full duplex mode),

8(PAUSE for full-duplex links),

11(Asymmetric and Symmetric PAUSE

for full-duplex links),

15(1000BASE-T full duplex mode)

type=16(100BASE-TX full duplex mode)

Power Via MDI

Link Aggregation

Maximum Frame Size

SNMP Notification Trap Send

: support=PSE,not supported

: status=capable,not in aggregation

: size=9216

---(26)

---(27)

---(28)

---(29)

: disable

(To be continued)

LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

481

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

(Continued)

[PORT 8]

Configuration Mode

: send

Send LLDPDU size

Chassis ID

Port ID

: 179 octets

: subtype=4(MAC) info=00:0b:5d:fd:05:b2Ñ†

: subtype=5(ifName) info="8"

Time To Live(TTL)

Port Description

System Description

2008'"

: 120 seconds

: info="EthernetPort(ether8)"

: info="'SBAX2' '1.2 V01.00' 'Wed Feb 13 15:23:07 JST

System Capabilities

: info=Bridge,Router

enabled=Bridge

Management Address

: address subtype=1(IPv4) info=192.168.1.1

interface number subtype=2(ifIndex) info=1

oid=""

Management Address

: address subtype=6(MAC) info=00:0b:5d:fd:05:ba

interface number subtype=2(ifIndex) info=7008

oid=""

IEEE802.1

Port VLAN ID

: PVID=1

Port And Protocol VLAN ID

PPVID=0

: flags=supported,disabled

VLAN Name

: VID=1

name="default"

IEEE802.3

MAC/PHY Configuration/Status

: support/status=supported,enabled

capability=1(10BASE-T half duplex mode),

2(10BASE-T full duplex mode),

4(100BASE-TX half duplex mode),

5(100BASE-TX full duplex mode),

8(PAUSE for full-duplex links),

11(Asymmetric and Symmetric PAUSE

for full-duplex links),

15(1000BASE-T full duplex mode)

type=16(100BASE-TX full duplex mode)

SNMP Notification Trap Send : disable

Entry:2

---(30)

1) LLDPDU send interval time(s)

Setting value by lldp send interval command

2) LLDP hold count (times)

Setting value by lldp send hold command

3) LLDP Send delay time(s)

Setting value by lldp send interval command

4) LLDP Reinit delay time(s)

Seting value by lldp reinit delay command

5) LLDP SNMP Notification Trap interval time (s)

Setting value by lldp notification interval command

6) Physical port number

Ether port number

7) Mode

Setting value by lldp mode command

enable

send

: send and recive

: send only

receive : recive only

When mode is receive, information from (8) to (28) is not displayed.

8) LLDPDU (LLDP Protocol Data Unit) Size

LLDPDU size (octets)

LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

482

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

9) LLDP send information

Setting value by lldp info command

: Send Port Description TLV

: Send System Name TLV

: Send System Description TLV

: Send System Capabilities TLV

: Send Management Address TLV

: disable

10) IEEE802.1 LLDP send information

: Port VLAN ID

: Port And Protocol VLAN ID

: VLAN Name

: Protocol Identity

: disable

11) IEEE802.3 LLDP send information

: MAC/PHY Configuration/Status

: Power Via MDI

: Link Aggregation

: Maximum Frame Size

: disable

12) SNMP Trap notification

: SNMP Notification Trap

: disable

13) Chassis ID information

Value which is sent with Chassis ID TLV

subtype= : subtype value (4 is MAC address)

info= : representative MAC address

14) Port ID information

Value which is sent with Port ID TLV

15) LLDP TTL information (s) information

Value which is sent with Time To Live (TTL) TLV

16) Port description information

Value which is sent with Port Description TLV

When port-description is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not

displayed.

17) System name informationiweowqerwuwqurwqrqwr

Value which is sent with System Name TLV

When system-name is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not

displayed.

18) System description information

Value which is sent with System Description TLV

When system-description is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not

displayed.

LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

483

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

19) System Capabilities information

Value which is sent with System Capabilities TLV

info=

: Available function

enabled= : Enabled function

Bridge

Router

: Bridge functon

: Router function

When system-description is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not

displayed.

20) Management address information

Value which is sent with Management Address TLV

When SNMP agent address is set, IPv4 address and MAC address are

displayed.

When management-address is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not

displayed.

21) Port VLAN ID information

Value which is sen with ID TLV

When port-vlan-id is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not displayed.

22) Protocol information

Value which is sent with ocol VLAN ID TLV

When port-and-protocol-vlan-id is disabled by lldp info command, this value is

not displayed.

23) VLAN name information

Value which is sent with IEEE802.1 VLAN Name TLV

When vlan-name is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not displayed.

24) Protocol ID information

Value which is sent with IEEE802.1 Protocol Identity TLV

This value is not displayed.

25) MAC/PHY Configuration/Status information

Value which is sent with IEEE802.3 MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV.

When mac-phy-configuration-status is disabled by lldp info command, this value

is not displayed.

26) Power via MDI information

Value which is sent with IEEE802.3 Power Via MDI TLV

support=

PSE

: Function Information

: Power supply function

: Power demand function

: No function

not supported

supported

disabled

enabled

: Supported

: Disable function

: Enable function

When power-via-mdi is disabled by lldp info command,

this value is not displayed.

27) Linkaggregation information

Value which is sent with linkaggregation TLV

When link-aggregation is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not

displayed.

LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

484

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

28) Maximum Frame length Size

Value which is sent with IEEE802.3 Maximum Frame Size TLV

When maximum-frame-size is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not

displayed.

29) SNMP Notification Trap

SNMP Notification Trap setting

30) Number of ports which LLDP function is enabled in

When port option is not specified, Number of port which LLDP function is

enabled

in is displayed.

LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

485

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.29.1.2 show lldp summary

Function

Display LLDP summary information

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show lldp summary

N/A

Options

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the number of ports which is LLDP function is enabled in

Execution Example

# show lldp summary

Send Entry : 2

Receive Entry : 2

---(1)

---(2)

1) Number of ports which LLDP send is enabled in

2) Number of ports which LLDP receive is enabled in

5.29.1.3 show lldp neighbors

Function

Display neighbor LLDP device information

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show lldp neighbors [port <portlist>] [detail]

Options

N/A

Display all neighbor LLDP device information

port <portlist>

• port list

Specify the port list to display neignbor LLDP device information.

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-).

(Example: "1-8")

detail

Display the detailed neighbor LLDP device information

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display neighbor LLDP device information

LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

486

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution Example

# show lldp neighbors

Port Neighbor Counts

---- ---------------

(1) (2)

# show lldp neighbors port 1-2 detail

[PORT 1]

Neighbor Counts : 1

Neighbor 1

---(1)

---(2)

---(3)

Chassis ID

Port ID

Time To Live(TTL)

Port Description

System Name

: subtype=4(MAC) info=02:00:0e:d1:47:80

: subtype=5(ifName) info="MB/0"

: 120 seconds

: info="EthernetPort(MB/line0)"

: info=""

---(4)

---(5)

---(6)

---(7)

---(8)

System Description

ST 2008'"

: info="'Si-R180B' '128.0 V34.00' 'Wed Feb 13 13:11:14 J

System Capabilities

: info=Router

enabled=Router

: address subtype=1(IPv4) info=192.168.1.181

interface number subtype=2(ifIndex) info=10000

---(10)

---(11)

Management Address

oid=""

: address subtype=6(MAC) info=02:00:0e:d1:47:80

interface number subtype=2(ifIndex) info=1

oid=""

IEEE802.1

Port VLAN ID

: PVID=0

---(12)

Port And Protocol VLAN ID

: flags=not supported,disabled

---(13)

PPVID=0

: VID=30

VLAN Name

---(14)

name="lan9"

IEEE802.3

MAC/PHY Configuration/Status

: support/status=supported,enabled

---(16)

capability=1(10BASE-T half duplex mode),

2(10BASE-T full duplex mode),

4(100BASE-TX half duplex mode),

5(100BASE-TX full duplex mode)

type=16(100BASE-TX full duplex mode)

Power Via MDI

Link Aggregation

Maximum Frame Size

: support=PSE,not supported

: status=not capable

: size=1500

---(17)

---(18)

---(19)

[PORT 2]

Neighbor Counts : 0

1) Physical port number

Ether port number

2) Number of neighbor devices

Number of neighbor devices information which is received

3) Neighbor ID

Neighbor ID

4) Chassis ID

Value which is received with Chassis ID TLV

subtype= : subtype value (4 is MAC address)

info= : representative MAC address

5) Port ID information

Value which is recived with Port ID TLV

6) LLDP TTL information (s) information

Value which is received with Time To Live (TTL) TLV

LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

487

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

7) Port description information

Value which is sent with Port Description TLV

8) System name informationiweowqerwuwqurwqrqwr

Value which is received with System Name TLV

9) System description information

Value which is received with System Description TLV

10) System Capabilities information

Value which is received with System Capabilities TLV

info=

: Available function

enabled= : Enabled function

Bridge

Router

: Bridge functon

: Router function

11) Management address information

Value which is received with Management Address TLV

12) Port VLAN ID information

Value which is received with ID TLV

13) Protocol information

Value which is received with ocol VLAN ID TLV

14) VLAN name information

Value which is received with IEEE802.1 VLAN Name TLV

15) Protocol ID information

Value which is received with IEEE802.1 Protocol Identity TLV

16) MAC/PHY Configuration/Status information

Value which is received with IEEE802.3 MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV.

17) Power via MDI information

Value which is received with IEEE802.3 Power Via MDI TLV

18) Linkaggregation information

Value which is received with linkaggregation TLV

19) Maximum Frame length Size

Value which is received with IEEE802.3 Maximum Frame Size TLV

LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

488

Commands

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.29.1.4 show lldp statistics

Function

Display LLDP statistics information

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show lldp statistics [port <portlist>] [detail]

Options

N/A

Display LLDP statistics information of all ports which LLDP function is enabled in

port <portlist>

• port list

Specify the port to display LLDP statistics information

When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).

When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-).

(Example: "1-8")

detail

Display the detailed LLDP informatuion

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display LLDP statistics information

Execution Example

# show lldp statistics

Port Sent packets Received packets

---- ------------ ----------------

(1)

(2)

(3)

1) physical port number

2) Number of times of send

3) Number of times of receive

LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

489

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

# show lldp statistics detail

[Neighbor tables statistics]

Last changed time

Tables inserts

Tables deletes

Tables drops

: Wed Feb 13 16:09:01 2008

---(1)

---(2)

---(3)

---(4)

---(5)

Tables ageouts

[PORT 1] ---(6)

Sent packets

---(7)

---(8)

---(9)

---(10)

---(11)

---(12)

---(13)

Received packets

Packets discarded total

Packets errors

TLVs discarded total

TLVs unrecognized total

Ageouts total

[PORT 2]

Sent packets

----(6)

----(7)

----(8)

----(9)

---(10)

---(11)

---(12)

---(13)

Received packets

Packets discarded total

Packets errors

TLVs discarded total

TLVs unrecognized total

Ageouts total

[PORT 8]

Sent packets

Received packets

----(6)

----(7)

----(8)

1) Time which neighbor information is changed at

lldpStatsRemTablesLastChangeTime

2) Number of times which neighbor information is registered

lldpStatsRemTablesInserts

3) Number of times which neighbor device information is deleted

lldpStatsRemTablesDeletes

4) Number of times which neighbor device information is discarded

lldpStatsRemTablesDrops

5) Number of times which neighbor device information is aged out

lldpStatsRemTablesAgeouts

6) Physical port number

lldpStatsTxPortNum, lldpStatsRxPortNum

7) Number of LLDP frames which are sent

lldpStatsTxPortFramesTotal

8) Number of LLDP frames which are received

lldpStatsRxPortFramesTotal

9) Number of LLDP frames are discarded after receive

lldpStatsRxPortFramesDiscardedTotal

10) Number of Error LLDP frames

lldpStatsRxPortFramesErrors

11) Nymber of TLVs are discarded after receive

lldpStatsRxPortTLVsDiscardedTotal

12) Number of unknown TLVs

lldpStatsRxPortTLVsUnrecognizedTotal

13) Number of neighbor device information is aged out

lldpStatsRxPortAgeoutsTotal

LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

490

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.29.2 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear

Commands

This section explains about commands related to LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands.

5.29.2.1 clear lldp neighbors

Function

Clear LLDP neighbor information

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

clear lldp neighbors

N/A

Options

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Clear LLDP neighbor information

Execution Example

# clear lldp neighbors

5.29.2.2 clear lldp statistics

Function

Clear LLDP statistics information

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

clear lldp statistics

N/A

Options

Use Mode

Operation mode (admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Clear LLDP statistics information

Execution Example

# clear lldp statistics

LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation

Commands

491

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

5.30 VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and

Status Display Commands

This section explains the commands related to VLAN.

5.30.1 VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display

Commands

This section explains the commands related to VLAN counter, log, statistics, and status display.

5.30.1.1 show vlan

Function

Display the VLAN setting Information.

Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600

Syntax

show vlan

show vlan summary

show vlan interface

show vlan vid <vlan_id>

Options

N/A

Display all VLAN information and the number of VLANs of the registered VLAN

configuration.

summary

Display only the number of VLANs of the registered VLAN configuration.

interface

Display all VLAN information about the registered VLAN configuration.

vid

Display VLAN configuration specified by the VLAN ID option.

<vlan_id>

VLAN ID: Specify it with a decimal number from 1 to 4094.

Use Mode

Operation mode (user class/admin class)

Configuration mode (admin class)

Explanation

Display the VLAN setting information.

VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands

492

XG Series User's Guide

Chapter 5 Command Reference

Execution Example

# show vlan

VID Interface

Tag

Type

Description

---- ---------------- ------------ -------- -----------------------

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

ether5

ether6

untagged

port

default

ether7

linkaggregation1

dot1q-tagged port

dot1q-tagged

v10

100 ether8

200 ether13

ether14

300 ether15

ether16

1000 linkaggregation8

4000 ether11

ether12

untagged

port

protocol v200

v100

ipv4

port

v300

v1000

v4000

dot1q-tagged port

untagged